The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Monitor d'Activitat
@@ -67,7 +68,7 @@
Preferències:
~/config/settings/ActivityMonitor settings
-
El Monitor d'Activitat permet fer un seguiment dels recursos del sistema i altres punts interessants.
+
You can track system resources by launching the ActivityMonitor and activating different items of interest.
Podeu mostrar i amagar tota mena de recursos del sistema, clicant amb el botó dret a la finestra: Memòria usada/Cau, Espai d'Intercanvi, Ús de la CPU, Dades rebudes/Enviades, Falles de Pàgina, Semàfors, Ports, Fils, Equips, Aplicacions en execució, Mida del Text/Raw del Portapapers, Nodes dels Media.
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
+
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has its own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
These commands are described in topic Index.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"
hey
-
hey is a littler helper tool that sends BMessages to applications and prints out their answer. It can be used for application scripting, i.e. "remote controlling" a program from a script or the command line. It's usage is a bit complex... Humdinger's blog post serves as a good introduction, and thanks to Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, there is a much more comprehensive hey tutorial by Chris Herborth.
+
hey is a littler helper tool that sends BMessages to applications and prints out their answer. It can be used for application scripting, i.e. "remote controlling" a program from a script or the command line. Its usage is a bit complex... Humdinger's blog post serves as a good introduction, and thanks to Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, there is a much more comprehensive hey tutorial by Chris Herborth.
notify
notify shows a notification panel with a message. There are various parameters that are described when you call notify --help. A notification can also be used to show the progress of some action. When doing that, it's important to set a messageID and always use it when you update the progress (a float between 0.0 and 1.0 that's printed as percent). Otherwise you'll see several notification panels if you update quicker then the set timeout.
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ mountvolume RAMimage
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
DriveSetup
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there a
Formatting a partition
Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of Partition | Format. The Be File System (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
-
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
+
Here you set the name for the partition and its blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck Enable query support to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.
Formatting will destroy all data on the partition!
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
The second tab shows All packages, the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
@@ -103,14 +103,13 @@
Active: The package is currently installed and ready to be used.
Available: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
Pending / %: Pending is shown for a package that is queued for download/installation. While a package is downloaded, the progress is shown as percentage.
-
Update available: There's a newer version than your installed one available.
You can grab the dotted line between the packages list and the info area to vertically resize the packages list.
At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
-To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install, Uninstall or Update it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install or Uninstall it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
Below are four tabs: About, Ratings, Changelog and Contents.
About
@@ -155,7 +154,7 @@ The second item is to Manage repositories.... It opens
Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
After you click Send the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the Tools menu to Refresh repositories before you can see your changes.
-
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox Other users can see this rating.
+
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating a checkbox This rating is visible to other users, that appears in this window once you've rated a package.
The Input preferences combine the formerly separate panels for keyboard, mouse and touchpad, plus any other input device recognized by the system. The devices are listed to the left, while the panel to the right changes according to the available settings for the selected device.
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Xarxa
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember its IP address, but can simply enter:
ftp NAS
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Repositories
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the +/- buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
To be able to remove a repository completely with the "-" button, it has to be disabled.
-You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel
To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
It goes without saying that adding a repository and downloading and installing software from it is a matter of trust. Don't carelessly just add any URL you happen upon on the internets.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Screen
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
There's a key combination that always works, not only when the Screen preferences are open: SHIFTCTRLALTESC sets a fall-back video safe mode. Handy if your monitor doesn't report its capabilities correctly and your settings result in a distorted or black screen. Here too, an alert pops up and if you do nothing for 12 seconds or press ESC you'll revert back.
-
On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
+
On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and its resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
While Haiku's VESA mode performs very well, you may experience some limitations. You may not be able to drive your widescreen display in its native resolution, resulting in a somewhat blurred picture. There may also be limitations with regard to available color depths and refresh rates.
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
La traducció d'aquesta pàgina encara no està acabada. Fins que ho sigui, algunes part correspondrà a la versió anglesa.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
MemòriaVirtual
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping m
diff --git a/userguide/de/preferences/appearance.html b/userguide/de/preferences/appearance.html
index 57e1c2b1..2e0739e3 100644
--- a/userguide/de/preferences/appearance.html
+++ b/userguide/de/preferences/appearance.html
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
Die Einstellungen für Eingabegeräte kombinieren die zuvor einzelnen Panels für Tastatur, Maus und Touchpad, sowie alle sonstigen vom System erkannten Eingabegeräte. Dabei werden links die Geräte aufgelistet, rechts erscheinen die für das gewählte Gerät vorhandenen Einstellungsmöglichkeiten.
Hier kann die Wiederholrate für einen Tastendruck und die Verzögerung eingestellt werden, die das System wartet, bis eine gedrückte Taste wiederholt wird. Die Einstellungen können in dem Textfeld getestet werden.
+
+
Standardwerte
Setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
Stellt die Einstellungen wieder her, die aktiv waren als Keyboard gestartet wurde.
Im Auswahlmenü links kann die Art der Maus, respektive deren Tastenzahl, ausgewählt werden. Insbesondere für 1-Tasten Mäuse interessant: der Rechtsklick kann mit STRG-Linksklick und ein Klick auf die mittlere Taste mit STRGALT-Linksklick erzeugt werden.
+
Die Tastenbelegung kann über das Markieren der entsprechenden Taste und dem dazugehörigen Auswahlmenü geändert werden.
+
Über die Schieberegler rechts kann die Doppelklick-Geschwindigkeit, die Geschwindigkeit des Mauszeigers und seine Beschleunigung eingestellt werden. Im Testfeld unter der Mausgrafik kann die Doppelklick-Geschwindigkeit getestet werden: Wird ein Wort durch Doppelklick nicht markiert, ist die entsprechende Geschwindigkeit zu hoch eingestellt (oder man muss halt lernen schneller zu klicken...).
+
Im Auswahlmenü Modus wird bestimmt, wie Programmfenster auf Klicks reagieren. Hierfür gibt es drei Möglichkeiten:
+
+
Klicken aktiviert und bringt nach vorn
Das Fenster wird durch Klicken aktiviert und ganz nach vorn geholt. Dies ist die Standardeinstellung.
+
Klicken aktiviert Fenster
Beim Klicken auf ein Fenster wird dieses nur aktiviert, aber nicht automatisch in den Vordergrund geholt. Dies gelingt entweder durch Klicken auf den Fensterreiter beziehungsweise -rahmen oder durch Klicken irgendwo im Fenster, während die Fenstermanagement-TastenSTRGALT gehalten werden.
+
Ohne Klicken aktivieren
Das Fenster unter dem Mauszeiger wird automatisch aktiviert. Um es in den Vordergrund zu holen, geht man vor wie bei Klicken aktiviert Fenster beschrieben.
+
+
Die Option Auf ersten Klick reagieren vermeidet, ein Fenster erst aktivieren zu müssen, bevor eine Schaltfläche gedrückt oder ein Menü geöffnet werden kann. Allerdings besteht dann Gefahr, aus Versehen beispielsweise statt des Fensterreiters den "Schließen"-Button zu treffen und ein Programm ungewollt zu beenden. Andererseits kann damit der Arbeitsfluss deutlich beschleunigt werden.
+
Alle Einstellungen werden sofort im System übernommen.
+
+
Standardwerte
Setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
Die Einstellungen, die aktiv waren, als das Programmfenster geöffnet wurde, werden wieder hergestellt.
Mit den vertikalen und horizontalen roten Linien der Touchpad Darstellung lässt sich ein Scroll-Bereich definieren (rötlich gefärbt gegenüber der grauen normalen Navigationsfläche). Streicht man mit dem Finger über diesen Teil des Touchpads, bewegen sich die Scrollbalken eines Fensters entsprechend.
+
Mit den Schiebereglern rechts daneben lässt sich die allgemeine Scroll-Beschleunigung und die vertikalen und horizontalen Scroll-Geschwindigkeiten einstellen.
+Je größer die Beschleunigung, desto schneller scrollt eine Liste wenn man den Finger ganz schnell über den Scroll-Bereich bewegt. Die Scroll-Geschwindigkeit bestimmt das Verhalten beim "normal-schnellen" Überstreichen des Bereichs.
+
Unter der Touchpad Grafik lässt sich "Zwei-Finger-Scrollen" für horizontales und vertikales Scrollen aktivieren. Bewegt man zwei Finger parallel in der Vertikalen oder Horizontalen, bewegen sich die Scrollbalken eines Fensters entsprechend. Zumindest bei mir funktioniert das am besten mit jeweils einem Finger der linken und der rechten Hand.
+Wer mit diesem Feature zurecht kommt, der kann auf Scroll-Bereiche verzichten und das gesamte Touchpad zum normalen Navigieren nutzen
+
Ganz unten ist noch ein Regler zum einstellen der Berührungsempfindlichkeit. Werden Klicks per Antippen immer wieder ignoriert, sollte man die Empfindlichkeit erhöhen. Werden im Gegenteil immer irgendwelche Klicks registriert, obwohl eigentlich nur der Mauszeiger bewegt werden soll, sollte sie verringert werden.
+
+
Standardwerte
Setzt alle Einstellungen auf die Standardwerte zurück.
+
Anfangswerte
Setzt wieder die Werte, die aktiv waren als das Touchpad Panel gestartet wurde.
+
+
Folgender Tip bezieht sich nicht so sehr auf dieses Einstellungs Panel, sondern auf die Nutzung von Touchpads allgemein:
+Wusstest Du, dass man ein Drag & Drop nur per Touchpad ausführen kann, also ohne die Tasten zu benutzen? Dazu macht einfach einen Doppelklick, ohne jedoch den Finger nach dem zweiten Klick anzuheben. Das so aufgenommene Icon hängt nun am Mauszeiger und kann mit dem Finger auf dem Touchpad umher bewegt werden. Hebt man den Finger, wird das Icon fallen gelassen.
+
Angenommen der Finger erreicht beim Ziehen eines Icons den Rand des Touchpads, der Mauszeiger ist aber noch nicht am Bildschirmrand angekommen. Sobald man den Finger hebt, wird ja das Icon fallen gelassen. Wie also lässt sich das Icon weiterziehen?
+Je nach verbauter Hardware gibt es da ein nettes Feature: man lässt den Finger einfach am Rand des Touchpads, aber ohne den Finger zu heben. Der Mauszeiger fliegt dann einfach weiter wie auf Auto-Pilot.
The Input preferences combine the formerly separate panels for keyboard, mouse and touchpad, plus any other input device recognized by the system. The devices are listed to the left, while the panel to the right changes according to the available settings for the selected device.
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember its IP address, but can simply enter:
ftp NAS
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the +/- buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
To be able to remove a repository completely with the "-" button, it has to be disabled.
-You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel
To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
It goes without saying that adding a repository and downloading and installing software from it is a matter of trust. Don't carelessly just add any URL you happen upon on the internets.
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
There's a key combination that always works, not only when the Screen preferences are open: SHIFTCTRLALTESC sets a fall-back video safe mode. Handy if your monitor doesn't report its capabilities correctly and your settings result in a distorted or black screen. Here too, an alert pops up and if you do nothing for 12 seconds or press ESC you'll revert back.
-
On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
+
On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and its resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
While Haiku's VESA mode performs very well, you may experience some limitations. You may not be able to drive your widescreen display in its native resolution, resulting in a somewhat blurred picture. There may also be limitations with regard to available color depths and refresh rates.
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
- « Touchpad
+ « Tracker
:: Preferences
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ If you often run into disk thrashing due to the virtual memory system swapping m
diff --git a/userguide/es/preferences/input.html b/userguide/es/preferences/input.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8637f06f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/userguide/es/preferences/input.html
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Input
+
+
+
+
+
+
The Input preferences combine the formerly separate panels for keyboard, mouse and touchpad, plus any other input device recognized by the system. The devices are listed to the left, while the panel to the right changes according to the available settings for the selected device.
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
Tämän sivun kotoistaminen ei ole vielä täydellinen. Siihen asti keskeneräiset osat käyttävät englanninkielistä alkuperäistekstiä.
Käynnistyslataaja
@@ -78,35 +77,35 @@
Valitse turvatilavalitsimet
Laitteistopulmien tapahtuessa voit kokeilla useita valitsimia tai jos järjestelmä tulee epästabiiliksi tai sitä ei pysty käynnistämään huonosti käyttäytyvän lisäosan vuoksi. Kun valintapalkin siirtää valitsimelle, niin näytön alalaitaan ilmaantuu lyhyt selite.
-
Safe mode
- Puts the system into safe mode. This can be enabled independently from the other options.
-
Disable user add-ons
- Prevents all user installed add-ons from being loaded. Only the add-ons in the system directory will be used. See Troubleshooting below.
-
Disable IDE DMA
- Disables IDE DMA, increasing IDE compatibility at the expense of performance.
-
Ignore memory beyond 4 GiB
- Ignores all memory beyond the 4 GiB address limit, overriding the setting in the kernel settings file.
+
Turvatila
+ Laittaa järjestelmän turvatilaan. Tämä voidaan ottaa käyttöön riippumatta muista valitsimista.
+
Ota pois käytöstä käyttäjälisäosat
+ Estää kaikkien käyttäjän asentamien lisäosien latauksen. Vain järjestelmähakemistossa sijaitsevia lisäosia käytetään. Katso alla Vianjäljitys.
+
Ota pois käytöstä IDE DMA
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä IDE DMA:an, lisää IDE-yhteensopivuutta suorituskyvyn kustannuksella.
+
Ohita muisti 4:n gibitavun takana
+ Ohittaa kaiken muistin 4:n gibitavun rajan takana, korvaa asetukset käyttöjärjestelmäytimen asetustiedostossa.
-
Use fail-safe graphics driver
- The system will use VESA mode and won't try to use any video graphics drivers.
-
Disable IO-APIC
- Disables using the IO APIC for interrupt routing, forcing the use of the legacy PIC instead.
-
Disable local APIC
- Disables using the local APIC, also disables SMP.
-
Disable X2APIC
- Disables second generation APIC.
-
Disable SMEP and SMAP
- Disables SMEP/SMAP security features of the CPU.
-
Disable SMP
- Disables all but one CPU core.
-
Don't call the BIOS
- Stops the system from calling BIOS functions.
-
Disable APM
- Disables Advanced Power Management hardware support, overriding the APM setting in the kernel settings file.
-
Disable ACPI
- Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface hardware support, overriding the ACPI setting in the kernel settings file.
-
Blacklist entries
- Allows to select system files that shall be ignored. Useful e.g. to disable drivers temporarily. See Troubleshooting below.
+
Käytä vikasietoista videoajuria
+ Järjestelmä käyttää VESA-tilaa ja ei yritä käyttää videografiikka-ajureita.
+
Ota pois käytöstä IO-APIC
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä IO APIC-keskeytysreitityksen, pakotetaan sen sijaan perinne-PIC-keskeytysreititykseen.
+
Ota pois käytöstä paikallinen APIC
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä paikallisen APIC:in, ottaa pois käytöstä myös SMP:n.
+
Ota pois käytöstä X2APIC
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä toisen sukupolven APIC:n
+
Ota pois käytöstä SMEP ja SMAP
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä prosessorin SMEP/SMAP-turvaominaisuudet.
+
Ota pois käytöstä SMP
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä kaiken muun paitsi yhden prosessoriytimen.
+
Älä kutsu BIOS:ia
+ Estää järjestelmää kutsumasta BIOS-funktioita.
+
Ota pois käytöstä APM
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä Advanced Power Management -laitetuen, korvaa APM-asetukset käyttöjärjestelmäytimen asetustiedostossa.
+
Ota pois käytöstä ACPI
+ Ottaa pois käytöstä Advanced Configuration ja Power Interface -laitetuen, korvaa ACPI-asetukset käyttöjärjestelmäytimen asetustiedostossa.
+
Merkitse kohde mustalle listalle
+ Sallii valita järjestelmätiedostoja, jotka ohitetaan. Hyödyllinen esim. otettaessa tilapäisesti ajureita pois käytöstä. Katso alla Vianjäljitys.
Valitse vianjäljitysvalitsimet
Tästä löydät useita valitsimia, jotka opastavat vianjäljityksessä tai lisätietojen hakemisessa vikailmoitukseen. Taas näytön alalaidassa näytetään lyhyt selite.
@@ -169,8 +168,8 @@ Joten jos kohtaat käynnistyspulmia jonkun pakkauksen asentamisen jälkeen, käy
Syöteasetukset yhdistävät aiemmat erilliset näppäimistö-, hiiri- ja levyhiiripaneelit sekä kaikki muut syötelaitteet, jotka järjestelmä tunnistaa. Laitteet on lueteltu vasemmalla samalla kun paneeli oikealla vaihtuu valitun laitteen saatavilla olevien asetusten mukaiseksi.
Asettaa näppäintoistotaajuuden ja viipeen, joka kuluu pidettäessä näppäintä alhaalla aina siihen saakka kun toisto alkaa. Voit testata asetuksiasi kirjoitustestausalueella alhaalla.
+
+
Oletukset
nollaa kaikki oletusarvoihin.
+
Palauta
tuo takaisin asetukset, jotka olivat voimassa Näppäimistöasetukset-sovellusta käynnistettäessä.
Aseta ensimmäiseksi hiirityyppi: 1-, 2-, tai 3-painikkeinen hiiri. Voit simuloida toista (oikeaa) hiiren painiketta pitämällä alhaalla CTRL-näppäintä, kun napsautat vasemmalla hiiren painikkeella. Kolmatta (=keskimmäinen) hiiren painiketta voidaan simuloida pitämällä alhaalla CTRL- ALT-näppäimiä ja napsauttamalla hiiren vasemmalla painikkeella.
+
Voit järjestää hiiren painikkeet napsauttamalla niitä ja valitsemalla niiden uuden merkityksen ponnahdusvalikosta.
+
Oikealla olevilla liukukytkimillävalitset kaksoisnapsautusnopeuden, hiiren nopeuden ja hiiren kohdistimen kiihtyvyyden. Kaksoisnapsautuksen testausalueella voidaan tarkistaa, että vastaako kaksoisnapsautuksen nopeus omaa mieltymystäsi: jos sanan kaksoisnapsautus ei valtse sitä, nopeus on liian suuri (tai sinun on totuttava napsauttelemaan nopeammin...).
+
Käytössä on kolme Kohdistustilaa, jotka määrittelevät, kuinka ikkuna reagoi napsautukseen:
+
+
Kohdista ja nosta napsauttamalla
Tämä on oletusasetus: napsautat ikkunaa ja saat siihen kohdistuksen ja se nousee päällimmäiseksi.
+
Kohdista napsauttamalla
Ikkunan napsauttaminen antaa sille kohdistuksen, mutta ei nosta sitä automaattisesti päällimmäiseksi. Jotta näin tapahtuisi, on napsautettava joko otsikkopalkkia tai ikkunarajaa tai napsauttaa minne tahansa pitämällä samanaikaisesti ikkunanhallintanäppäimiäCTRLALT painettuna.
+
Kohdistus seuraa hiirtä
Ikkuna hiiren kohdistimen alla saa kohdistuksen automaattisesti. Itse asiassa se nostaa sen päällimmäiseksi, kuten kuvaillaan Kohdista napsauttamalla-tilassa.
+
+
Hyväksy ensimmäinen napsautus-aktivoiminen auttaa sinua niin että ei tarvitse ensin kohdistaa hiiren kohdistinta ei-aktiiviseen ikkunaan tarkoituksena napsauttaa käyttöliittymäkomponenttia kuten painiketta tai valikkoa. Tämä valinta sisältää riskin esimerkiksi sulkea ikkuna napsauttamalla vahingossa Sulje-painiketta kun tarkoitus oli napsauttaa ikkunaotsaketta. Toisaalta se nopeuttaa työnkulkuasi merkittävästi.
+
Kaikki asetukset toteutetaan välittömästi.
+
+
Oletukset
nollaa kaikki oletusarvoihin.
+
Palauta
tuo takaisin asetukset, jotka olivat voimassa Hiiriasetukset-sovellusta käynnistettäessä.
Raahaamalla levyhiiriesittelyn punaisia pystysuoria tai vaakasuoria linjoja asetat vieritysalueen (lievästi punoittava harmaata yleistä kosketusaluetta vasten). Siirtämällä sormeasi tuolla levyhiiren alueella siirrät ikkunan vierityspalkkeja vastaavasti.
+
Oikealla on liukukytkimet yleistä kiihtyvyyttä ja pystysuoran ja vaakasuoran vierityksen kiihtyvyyttä varten.
+Kiihtyvyysasetukset määräävät, kuinka paljon nopeammin vierityspalkit liikkuvat, jos vaihdat vieritysalueelta hyvin nopeasti. Vieritysnopeus ohjaa yleistä nopeutta kun vieritysaluetta käytetään "normaalilla" tavalla.
+
Levyhiirigrafiikan alla on tarkistusruudu, joilla otetaan käyttöön "Kaksisormivieritys" pystysuorana ja vaakasuorana vierityksenä. Siirrä kaksi sormea rinnakkain pystysuoraan tai vaakasuoraan ikkunan vierityspalkkien siirtämiseksi. Ainakin minulla se toimii parhaiten yhdellä sormella vasemmassa ja yhdellä sormella oikeassa kädessä.
+Jos tämän ominaisuuden käyttäminen tuntuu mukavalta, voit korvata sillä vieritysalueiden asetukset ja käyttää sen sijaan koko levyhiirialuetta normaaliin navigointiin.
+
Alimmaisen on liukukytkin naputusnapsauksen herkkyyden asettamiseksi. Jos naputuksiasi ei huomioida, kasvata erottelukykyä. Jos järjestelmä rekisteröi naputuksia koko ajan vaikka haluat vain siirtää hiiren osoitinta, yritä pienentää erottelukykyä.
+
+
Oletukset
nollaa kaikki oletusarvoihin.
+
Palauta
tuo takaisin asetukset, jotka olivat voimassa Levyhiiriasetukset-sovellusta käynnistettäessä.
+
+
Ja vielä vihje, joka ei liity Levyhiiriasetuksiin vaan sopii yleisesti aiheeseen:
+Tiesitkö, että voit raahata ja pudottaa vain käyttämällä levyhiirtä, toisin sanoen käyttämättä hiiren painikkeita? Tee vain kaksoisnapsautus nostamatta sormea sekunnin napsautuksen jälkeen. Poimittu ylös-kuvake liimautuu hiiren kohdistimeen ja voit raahata sitä ympäriinsä siirtämällä sormeasi. Sormen nostaminen pudottaa kuvakkeen.
+
Jos sormesi tavoittaa levyhiiren reunan kuvaketta raahatessa, mutta hiiren kohdistin ei ole vielä ehtinyt näytön reunaan, kuinka jatkan kuvakkeen raahaamista? Heti kun nostan sormeni, kuvake putoaa.
+Laitteistostasi riippuen on olemassa näppärä ominaisuus: jätä vain sormesi nostamatta levyhiiren reunalla. Hiiren kohdistin jatkaa liikkumista autopilotilla.
Tämän sivun kotoistaminen ei ole vielä täydellinen. Siihen asti keskeneräiset osat käyttävät englanninkielistä alkuperäistekstiä.
Näppäimistöasetukset
@@ -81,17 +80,18 @@ Siten Näppäimistöasetukset-sovellus ei ole tarkoitettu vain paikallisen näpp
Vaihda pikanäppäimet...
pikanäppäinten käyttämiseksi Windows-/Linux-tilassa, esimerkiksi. CONTROL (normaalisti CTRL) tai Haiku-tilassa, esimerkiksi COMMAND (normaalisti ALT).
Vasemmalla näkyvät luettelot tarjoavat järjestelmän esiasetetut näppäimistöasetukset ja alla on, jos niitä on saatavilla, käyttäjän määrittelemät kuvaukset. Voit vaihtaa näppäimistöasetusta näppäimistöesittelyssä: raahaa&pudota yksi näppäin toisen päälle ja ne vaihtavat paikkaa.
-
You can also create an individual mapping by drag & dropping a character from another app onto the key. For example, you could extend your regular keymap with often used currency symbols. Just click on the CONTROL key and drag & drop the pound symbol from CharacterMap onto the 'P' key to get a ₤ when you press CTRLP.
+
Voit luoda myös henkilökohtaisia kuvauksia raahaamalla & pudottamalla merkin toisesta sovelluksesta näppäimeen. Esimerkiksi, voit laajentaa normaalia näppäimistöäsi usein käytetyllä valuuttasymbolilla. Napsauta vain CONTROL-näppäintä ja raahaa & pudota punnan symboli Merkkiesittelystä 'P'-näppäimelle, jolloin saat £-symbolin painamalla CTRLP-näppäimiä.
-By right-clicking a normal key, the context menu offers to Remove its mapping. Modifier keys can have alternative mappings, like using CAPS LOCK as CTRL key:
+Napsauttamalla hiiren kakkospainikkeella tavallista näppäintä asiayhteysvalikko tarjoaa
+Poista-valikon sen esittelyn. Muunninnäppäimillä voi olla vaihtoehtoisia esittelyjä, kuten CAPS LOCK-näppäimen käyttö CTRL-näppäimenä:
-
Alternatively to this or drag & dropping of keys, there's the menu File | Set modifier keys... that opens this window:
+
Vaihtoehtona tälle näppäinten raahaamiselle & pudottamiselle on valikko Tiedosto | Aseta muunninnäppäimet..., joka avaa tämän ikkunan:
Tässä voit liittää näppäimet niiden vastaaviin rooleihin tai jopa ottaa avaimen rooli kokonaan pois käytöstä. Voit jopa liittää samalle näppäimelle eri rooleja, vaikka se ei useimmiten ole hyvä ajatus ja sinua varoitetaan pienellä huutomerkillä ponnahdusvalikon sivussa, jos teet sen.
-Painamalla Aseta muokkausnäppäimet toteutetaan muutoksesi ja suljetaan ikkuna.
+Painamalla Aseta muunninnäppäimet toteutetaan muutoksesi ja ikkuna suljetaan.
Valmistumisen jälkeen voit tallentaa tuloksen valikossa Tiedosto | Tallenna.... Muokattu kuvauksesi esiintyy vain käyttäjän määrittelemässä luettelossa, jos se on tallennettu tiedostoon ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Muussa tapauksessa sinun on ladattava se manuaalisesti kohdasta Tiedosto | Avaa....
Jotta näppäimistöasetus täsmäisi paremmin fyysiseen näppäimistöösi, käytettävissä on useita erilaisia asetuksia Ulkoasu-valikossa.
-
Käytetyn näppäimistöesityksen kirjasimet asetetaan valikosta Kirjasin. Huomaa, määritellyssä kirjasimessa ei aina välttämättä ole tietyn näppäimistöasetuksen kaikkia merkkejä.
+
Käytetyn näppäimistöesittelyn kirjasimet asetetaan valikosta Kirjasin. Huomaa, että määritellyssä esittelyssä ei aina välttämättä ole tietyn näppäimistöasetuksen kaikkia merkkejä.
Lopuksi käytettävissä on Palauta-painike, joka palauttaa asetukset sellaisiksi, kuin ne olivat Näppäimistöasetukset-sovelluksen käynnistyessä.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Painamalla Aseta muokkausnäppäimet toteutetaan muu
Voit vedostaa nykyisen näppäimistöasetuksesi komennolla Pääteikkunassa:
keymap -d > MyKeymap
Tuotettu tekstitiedosto voidaan sitten avata tekstieditorilla. Varmista, että käytät tasavälisiä kirjasimia tuossa editorissa tai et saa tuota tiedostoa koskaan oikein...
-Tuon tiedoston alusta löydät tyylitellyn näppäimistön selitteen, jossa jokaista näppäintä vastaa heksadesimaaliarvo. Sen alla on jokaisen jokaisen arvon todelliset liittämiset. Voit tehdä kaikki räätälöinnit, jotka ovat myös saatavilla Näppäimistöasetukset-paneelissa, ja vielä jotain muuta. Jos näppäimistössä sattuu olemaan joitain erikoisnäppäimiä, voit ehkä kokeilla niiden aktivoimista. Se tarkoittaa, että voit käyttää niitä tavallisina näppäiminä tai muuntonäppäiminä, kuten Alt- tai Ctrl-näppäimiä. Et kykene esimerkiksi käyttämään multimedianäppäimiä pienentämään tai suurentamaan äänen voimakkuutta tai käynnistämään jonkun sovelluksen. Tätä varten voit käyttää esimerkiksi Pikanäppäimet-asetusta.
+Tuon tiedoston alusta löydät tyylitellyn näppäimistön selitteen, jossa jokaista näppäintä vastaa heksadesimaaliarvo. Sen alla on jokaisen jokaisen arvon todelliset liittämiset. Voit tehdä kaikki räätälöinnit, jotka ovat myös saatavilla Näppäimistöasetukset-paneelissa, ja vielä jotain muuta. Jos näppäimistössä sattuu olemaan joitain erikoisnäppäimiä, voit ehkä kokeilla niiden aktivoimista. Se tarkoittaa, että voit käyttää niitä tavallisina näppäiminä tai muunninnäppäiminä, kuten Alt- tai Ctrl-näppäimiä. Et kykene esimerkiksi käyttämään multimedianäppäimiä pienentämään tai suurentamaan äänen voimakkuutta tai käynnistämään jonkun sovelluksen. Tätä varten voit käyttää esimerkiksi Pikanäppäimet-asetusta.
Kun olet valmis, tallenna tiedosto ja järjestelmä lataa muokatun näppäimistöasetuksen tällä komennolla:
keymap -s < MyKeymap
Jos haluat viedä tämän näppäimistöasetuksen Näppäimistöasetukset-paneeliin, se on ensin käännettävä binaarimuotoon:
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Jos usein törmäät levyn roskaantumiseen siksi, että virtuaalimuistijärjeste
diff --git a/userguide/fi/workshop-email.html b/userguide/fi/workshop-email.html
index 99291534..f2070755 100644
--- a/userguide/fi/workshop-email.html
+++ b/userguide/fi/workshop-email.html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
-
Käyttäjäopas
+
User guide
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Tämä löytää kaikki sähköpostiviestit Haiku commit listalta viimeisen 12 t
Kaksoisnapsauta kuvakelähdettä avataksesi Kuvakemaatti-sovelluksen tiedostotyyppisi kuvakkeen suunnittelemiseksi. Voit myös raahata ja pudottaa kuvakkeen toisentyyppisestä kuvakelähteestä, ehkä alkuna muokatulle versiolle.
+
Kaksoisnapsauta kuvakelähdettä avataksesi Kuvakemaatti-sovelluksen tiedostotyyppisi kuvakkeen suunnittelemiseksi. Voit myös raahata & pudottaa kuvakkeen toisentyyppisestä kuvakelähteestä, ehkä alkuna muokatulle versiolle.
@@ -161,18 +161,18 @@
-
Visible - This checkbox determines if the attribute is visible in a Tracker window at all. Since the Tracker will be the interface to our DVD database, we check it and define its appearance with:
+
Näkyvä - Tämä valintaruutu määrittää, onko attribuutti ollenkaan näkyvä Seuraajan ikkunassa. Koska Seuraaja on käyttöliittymä DVD-tietokantaamme, merkitsemme sen ja määritämme sen ulkoasun valikoilla:
-
Display as - Leave on "Default" if the values are to be displayed according to the attribute's "Type" (e.g. string/integer/float etc.). The other options are:
-
-
Checkbox - Can be used to show either one of two symbols, see Special below.
-
Duration - Shows an integer as 1/60, e.g. "90" becomes "1:30".
-
Rating - Shows a rating between 0 and 10 as star symbols.
+
Näytä kohteena - Jätä arvoon "Oletus", jos arvot näytetään attribuutin "Tyypin"-kaltaisena (esim.: string/integer/float jne.). Muut valitsimet ovat:
+
+
Valintaruutu - Voidaan käyttää näyttämään toinen kahdesta symbolista, katso Erikoinen alla.
+
Kesto - Näyttää kokonaisluvun kuten 1/60, esim.: "90" tulee "1:30".
+
Arvosana - Näyttää arvosanan väliltä 0 ... 10 tähtisymboleina.
-
Editable - Determines if the attribute shall be editable in Tracker.
-
Special - Defines the two symbols used for a checkbox display. For example, "xo" will show a "x" for all values >0 and "o" for 0.
-
Width - The default width of that attributes column in a Tracker window.
-
Alignment - The attribute can be displayed left, center, or right aligned.
+
Muokattava - Määrittää, onko attribuutti muokattavissa Seuraajassa.
+
Erikoinen - Määrittää kaksi valintaruutunäytössä käytettyä symbolia. Esimerkiksi, "xo" näyttää "x" kaikille arvoille >0 ja "o" arvolle 0.
+
Leveys - Attribuuttisarakkeen oletusleveys Seuraajassa.
+
Tasaus - Attribuutti voidaan näyttää vasemmalle, keskelle tai oikealle tasattuna.
Lisää nyt kaikki tietomme attribuutteihimme:
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Avaa DVDdb-tiedostosi sisältävä kansio ja järjestä attribuutit niin kuin ha
Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
DriveSetup
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there a
Formatting a partition
Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of Partition | Format. The Be File System (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
-
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
-If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck Enable query support to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.
+
Ici, vous définissez le nom de la partition et sa granularité. Une taille de 2048 octets par bloc est recommandée, mais vous pouvez choisir des tailles plus grandes ou plus petites si vous avez des besoins très spécifiques.
+L'initialisation détruira toutes les données sur cette partition !
Formatting will destroy all data on the partition!
Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Index
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@
~/config/cache/HaikuDepot/ -mise en cache des icônes, des captures d'écrans, des descriptions, etc.
-
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
The second tab shows All packages, the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
@@ -108,14 +108,13 @@
Active: le paquet est déjà installé et prêt à être utilisé.
Available: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
Pending / %: Pending is shown for a package that is queued for download/installation. While a package is downloaded, the progress is shown as percentage.
-
Update available: une version plus récente que celle déjà installée est disponible.
Vous pouvez attraper la ligne en pointillé entre la liste des paquets et la zone d’information pour redimensionner verticalement la liste des paquets.
At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
-To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install, Uninstall or Update it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install or Uninstall it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
Au dessous il y a les 4 onglets
À propos, Évaluations, et Journal des modifications et Contenu.
@@ -161,7 +160,7 @@ The second item is to Manage repositories.... It opens
Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
After you click Send the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the Tools menu to Refresh repositories before you can see your changes.
-
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox Other users can see this rating.
+
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating a checkbox This rating is visible to other users, that appears in this window once you've rated a package.
diff --git a/userguide/fr/applications/list-cli-apps.html b/userguide/fr/applications/list-cli-apps.html
index d05a0a70..7d298c8c 100644
--- a/userguide/fr/applications/list-cli-apps.html
+++ b/userguide/fr/applications/list-cli-apps.html
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
- Sommaire
-:: Structure du système de fichiers »
+ Contents
+:: Filesystem layout »
-
Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Chargeur de démarrage
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@
Pour accéder aux options du chargeur de démarrage, vous devez garder la touche Maj appuyé jusqu'à l'amorce du processus de démarrage d'Haiku.
Si un gestionnaire d'amorce est installé, vous pouvez commencer à presser la touche Maj avant d'invoquer le démarrage d'Haiku.
Si Haiku est le seul système d'exploitation de votre machine, Vous pouvez commencer à presser la touche même si le BIOS n'a pas fini d'afficher ses messages de démarrage.
-
On computers that use UEFI for booting instead of the classic BIOS, you need to use the SPACEBAR instead.
+
Sur les ordinateurs qui utilisent l'UEFI pour démarrer au lieu du BIOS classique, vous devez utiliser la Barre d'espace à la place.
The Input preferences combine the formerly separate panels for keyboard, mouse and touchpad, plus any other input device recognized by the system. The devices are listed to the left, while the panel to the right changes according to the available settings for the selected device.
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Network
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember its IP address, but can simply enter:
ftp NAS
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
Cette page n'est pas encore entièrement traduite. Les parties non encore traduites seront en anglais.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Repositories
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the +/- buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
To be able to remove a repository completely with the "-" button, it has to be disabled.
-You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel
To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
It goes without saying that adding a repository and downloading and installing software from it is a matter of trust. Don't carelessly just add any URL you happen upon on the internets.
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
-Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Al contrari di BeOS, Haiku al dopre iconis vetoriâls al puest des iconis bitmap. Al è stât svilupât un speciâl Formât di Icone Vetoriâl par Haiku (HVIF) che al è une vore otimizât pes piçulis dimensions di file e pe visualizazion rapide. Chest al è il motîf parcè che lis nestris iconis a son pe plui part une vore plui piçulis di un bitmap o dal plui doprât formât SVG. In diplui, a diference des iconis bitmap di BeOS, Haiku nol è limitât a une palete di colôrs a 8bit (256 colôrs).
+Cjape come esempli cheste icone dal Terminâl:
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
-
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
-
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
+
Fâs câs che BeOS al doprave dôs versions di une stesse icone, une di 16x16 e chê altre di 32x32, par rivâ a vê un biele visuâl tes modalitâts di visualizazion a liste e a iconis.
+
Chest truc nol covente cu lis iconis vetoriâls. E in diplui al ocupâ dome cualchi centenâr di byte tun file, lis iconis vetoriâls a scalin ancje une vore miôr che i bitmap. (Note: BeOS al ufrive dome visualizazions a 16x16 e a 32x32.)
16x16
32x32
64x64
128x128
Bitmap
@@ -104,7 +105,7 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
-
Vector
+
Vetoriâl
@@ -114,40 +115,40 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType add-on on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
-
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Lis iconis a vegnin archiviadis tant che un atribût adun cui lôr file. Dut câs, chest nol significhe che ogni file al vedi di vê chest atribût par mostrâsi cuntune icone jenfri un barcon di Tracker: i file di dâts a ereditin la lôr icone dal lôr gjenar di file. Par cambiâ in mût globâl la icone di un gjenar di file si dopre lis preferencis di Gjenars di file. Se tu desideris dome zontâ une singule icone a un unic file, dopre invezit il Component adizionâl FileType su di lui. Viôt l'argoment Gjenars di file par vê plui informazions.
+
Jessint un atribût, al vûl dî che dome i filesystem che a supuartin i metadâts a puedin conservâ une singule icone di file. Duncje, se tu spostis i file fûr dal to volum BFS, considere di comprimiju cussì di no pierdi lis iconis o altris atribûts.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
-
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
-For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
Icon-O-Matic al è l'editôr di iconis di Haiku che al pues salvâ i tiei lavôrs come HVIF, SVG o PNG. Si pues tacâ ancje in maniere direte la icone tant che atribût a un file esistent o espuartâ come risorse o file sorzint doprât dai disvilupadôrs. Viodût che la aplicazion e je stade creade tor ator dal formât otimizât HVIF, la maniere di doprâle e riflet il funzionament interni di chest formât.
+
A diference di un software di grafiche vetoriâl normâl, no tu âs di vê a ce fâ cun ogjets separâts che ognun al inclût dutis lis sôs specifichis proprietâts come il percors, largjece de tresse, tresse, colôr par jemplâ e vie indenant. Invezit, tu assemblis i tiei ogjets ("sagomis") dai percors condividûts, i colôrs ("stîi") e tu stabilissis ciertis proprietâts. Chest tornâ a doprâ i elements al è un dai segrets de eficience di HVIF. Ancje se chest al impon cualchi oblic al dissegnadôr de icone, a'nd è ancje cualchi vantaç.
+Par esempli, tornant a doprâ un percors, tancj ogjets a puedin jessi modificâts insiemi manipolant dome chest percors. Pense a un ogjet e lis sôs ombrenis. Modificant il lôr percors condividût al cambiarà l'ogjet stes e in automatic lis sôs ombrenis (forsit un tic stuarzudis/spostadis).
-
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
Chi e je une svelte voglade panoramiche dal barcon di Icon-O-Matic:
-
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
+
Par creâ cualsisei ogjet visibil su la tele, ti covente une sagome cuntun percors e un stîl. Se ti va miôr, tu puedis creâ'nt un, doi o ducj e trê adun dal menù Sagome. Ogni gjenar di ogjet (percors, sagomis, trasformadôrs e stîi) al à un menù parsore de sô liste di elements, che al ufrìs varis comants. Ogni element al à ciertis opzions che a vegnin stabilidis inte viodude Proprietâts.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
Un percors al consist di diviers ponts che a son conetûts cun liniis o curvis di Bezier. Par zontâ o cambiâ i ponts, siguriti che il percors al sedi selezionât te liste dai percors.
-
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
Fasint un sempliç clic inte tele al stabilirà il prin pont. Tal moment che tu stabilissis un pont, tu decidis se la linie finâl e varà di jessi drete o curve: fâ un semplic clic e molâ il boton al produsarà une linie drete, tignint fracât il boton dal mouse e movintlu al strissinarà lis mantiis che a gjestissin une curve di Bezier. Di sigûr al sarà pussibil fâ modifichis intun secont timp.
-
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click & drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
-Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
Par lâ di "A" a "B", si à di trasformâ cualchi pont di ponts-angul a ponts-curve. Chel al ven fat tignint fracât ALT intant che si fâs clic suntun pont e si strissine lis mantiis. Chest al prodûs un Bezier simetric: la seconde mantie e va daûr dal moviment di chê altre. Se tu âs bisugne di spostâ lis mantiis in maniere indipendente, di gnûf fâs clic e strissine suntune mantie di Bezier intant che tu frachis ALT.
+Al contrari, par lâ di Bezier a un pont-angul, ten fracât ALT e fâs clic suntun pont.
-
To move a point, simply click & drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
-To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
-Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
Par spostâ un pont, fâs un sempliç clic e strissinilu. Par selezionâ plui di un pont, ten fracât MAIUSC e dissegne un retangul di selezion. I ponts selezionâts a vegnin segnâts cuntun ôr ros invezit che il solit colôr neri.
+Par inserî un pont jenfri di un percors fâs clic su la linie di conession tra doi ponts.
+I ponts selezionâts a vegnin eliminâts fracant CANC o fasint clic su cualsisei pont intant che si ten fracât CTRL.
-
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
Il pontadôr dal mouse al indiche la modalitât atuâl:
@@ -158,46 +159,46 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move point(s)
-
Insert point
-
Add point
-
Delete point CTRL
-
Corner↔Bezier ALT
-
Select points SHIFT
+
Sposte pont(s)
+
Inserìs pont
+
Zonte pont
+
Elimine pont CTRL
+
Angul↔Bezier ALT
+
Selezione ponts MAIUSC
-
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
Tu puedis invocâ un menù contestuâl fasint clic diestri suntun pont o su une selezion di ponts:
-
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
-
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
-
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
-
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
-
Remove
DEL
Deletes selected points.
+
Selezione dut
ALTA
Al selezione ducj i ponts dal percors atuâl.
+
Trasforme
T
Met ducj i ponts selezionâts intune scjatule di trasformazion, cussì che tu puedis spostâju, ridimensionâju e zirâju adun. Al funzione come cu lis sagomis, che o vin descrit un tic plui in jù te pagjine.
+
Divît
Al divît i ponts selezionâts in doi, un al starà parsore di chel altri.
+
Ribalte
Al zire i ponts selezionâts di 180°. Al funzione dome sui ponts di Bezier.
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add rectangle and Add circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
Il menù Percors al ufrìs cualchi vôs ovie par Zonte retangul e Zonte cercli o par fâ Dupliche o Gjave suntun percors. Chi a 'nd è cualchidune che invezit e à bisugne di un pocje di spiegazion:
-
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
-
Clean up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
-
Rotate indices right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
-
Rotate indices left
ALTSHIFTR
Does the same in the other direction.
+
Invertìs
Se il to percors nol è "sierât" (viôt chi sot Proprietâts dal percors), un clic inte tele al cree simpri un gnûf pont, colegantlu cun almancul un. "Invertìs" al invertirà chest ordin e il to gnûf pont si conetarà invezit al ponti di inizi origjinâl.
+
Nete
Une vore utile cui SVG impuartâts, cheste funzion e gjavarà i ponts ridondants.
+
Volte i indiçs a diestre
ALTR
In pratiche, chest al zire la viertidure di un percors. Si viôt miôr cuant che si dopre un percors cence che al sedi stâts sierât, cuntun stîl e une sagome cuntun trasformadôr di tresse. Cumò, se il to percors al semee come une ⊂ si voltarà cussì: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
Propripetâts, in bas a çampe tal barcon, al ufrìs dutis lis impostazions disponibilis dal ogjet che in chel moment al è selezionât. Un percors a 'nd à dome dôs: un Non e se al è Sierât o mancul.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
-
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
Une sagome e met adun un o plui percors cuntun stîl. In pratiche, al è l'ogjet che tu viodarâs te tele. L'intropament al ven fat cu lis caselis di selezion in face dai percors e dai stîi: al baste selezionâ la tô sagome e meti un segn al/ai percors e al stîl.
+
Une sagome e definìs ce mût che un percors e un stîl a vegnin aplicâts, p.e. Se l'ogjet al è plen o nome dissegnât (che al ven fat doprant i trasformadôrs su la sagome, ma i rivarin plui indenant su chel). In diplui, une sagome e pues jessi spostade, zirade o ridimensionade cence tocjâ il percors doprât. In cheste maniere, tu puedis tornâ a doprâ un percors singul e otignî une sagome diferente, ma imparentade.
-
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
Cuant che une sagome e ven selezionade de liste, i ven dissegnât tor ator un retangul. In base a dulà che tu lu cjapis, la sagome e ven spostade, ridimensionade o zirade ator di un pont tal so centri, e ancje chel al pues jessi spostât. Tignint fracât MAIUSC si blocarà la direzion dal moviment, limitarà la rotazion a 45° e vincolâ il rapuart di aspiet intant che si ridimensione. Ancje chi, il pontadôr dal mouse di gnûf al indiche la modalitât atuâl:
@@ -206,32 +207,32 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move
-
Resize
-
Rotate
-
Move rotation point
+
Sposte
+
Ridimensione
+
Zire
+
Sposte pont di rotazion
-
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.
+
Lis sagomis a son poiadis une parsore di chê altre, ognune e sta suntun sô strât, se tu lu desideris. Par tornâ a metiju in ordin tu âs di strissinâ e molâ la lôr vôs suntune posizion diferente inte liste.
Il menù sagome al ufrìs lis pussibilitâts, nomenadis prime, par fâ Zonte vueit, cun percors/stîl/percors e stîl e par fâ suntune sagome Dupliche opûr Gjave. Dopo, si à:
-
Reset transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
-
Freeze transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
-If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
+
Azere trasformazion
Al torne indaûr di dutis lis trasformazions di spostaments, ridimensionaments e rotazion fatis ae sagome, ripristinantle.
+
Inglace trasformazion
Cuant che tu trasformis une sagome, i siei percors assegnâts a stan te lôr posizion origjinâl. Chest al pues jessi intindût cussì; forsit plui di une sagome e sta doprant chel percors, forsit tu âs doprât cun intenzion Opzions | Vincule ae gridele par stabilî i ponts su precîs ôrs di pixel.
+Se no je cussì, "Inglace trasformazion" al aplicarà la trasformazion de sagome atuâl al/ai percors assegnât(s). Un futûr "Azere trasformazion", in chê volte, al tornarà a puartâ a chest gnûf stât.
@@ -239,95 +240,95 @@ If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to t
-
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
-With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
-
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
-
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
-
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
-For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
+
Viodistu che nol è nissun numar te version a 16px de icone di BeVexed? Chest al ven fat cu la impostazion "Nivel dal detai" des lôr sagomis.
+Cul LOD tu controlis la visibilitât di une sagome in base ae sô dimension. Cussì tu puedis lassâ fûr detais di une icone che di grande e pâr bon, ma no masse cuant che e je te sô version plui piçule.
+
Cussì al è ce mût che al funzione: un LOD di 1.0 al è definît come une dimension di icone di 64px. Par otignî il LOD di une dimension di icone particolâr al baste dividile par 64, p.e. une icone di 16px e à un LOD di 16/64 = 0.25. Une sagome no sarà visibile sot dal so LOD minim e parsore dal so LOD massim.
+
Duncje, se tu stabilissis il LOD minim di une sagome a 0.0 e il LOD massim a 0.5, chest al significhe che la sagome e sarà visibile dome pes iconis di dimension plui piçule o avuâl a 32px. Se tu vuelis escludi la dimension di 32px, tu varâs di stâ sot dai 0.5, ven a stâi 0.49.
+
Il LOD nol è dome par lassâ fûr lis sagomis is not only for sagomis detaiadis, ma ancje, par esempli, par cambiâ la largjece de tresse cuant che si à dimensions diferentis, se tu sintis la necessitât. Al baste dopleâ une sagome, fâ lis modifichis e stabilî a ducj i doi lis lôr impostazions LOD, cussì di mostrâ o un o chel altri. Chi e sta la uniche e potenziâl cause di confusion, cuant che cence volê tu soreponis i LOD des sagomis, e no tu capissis parcè che in cualchi dimension dutis dôs a son visibilis...
+Par esempli, Se Sagome 1 e veve di jessi visibile sot dai 48px e Sagome 2 di 48px in sù (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
-Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
Un stîl al pues jessi o dut dal stes colôr opûr cualchi gjenar di gradient.
+In plui dai colôrs predefinîts, sot dai Campions, tu puedis miscliçâ i tiei, fasint clic sul colôr atuâl. Fâs ancje câs al cursôr sot dal spetri dai colôrs, chel al stabilìs il canâl alpha (trasparence).
-
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag & dropping it into the list of styles.
-
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag & drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
-Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
-
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
+
Tu creis subite un gnûf stîl miscliçant il to colôr e fasint un semlpiç strissine e mole di chel colôr te liste dai stîi.
+
Se tu decidis di doprâ un gradient, tu stabilissis il gjenar (Lineâr, Radiâl, Diamant, Conic) e dopo tu definissis i colôrs di inizi e di fin. Chest al ven fat cuntun strissine e mole de podine dai colôrs al indicadôr di colôr corispetîf sot dal gradient.
+Di sigûr tu puedis spostâ chescj indicadôr par cambiâ il gradient secont che ti plâs. Tu puedis ancje inserî plui indicadôr par zontâ plui colôrs fasint dopli clic intal gradient. Fracant CANC si gjavarà l'indicadôr selezionât.
+
Tu puedis spostâ, ridimensionâ e zirâ la scjatule rapresentative di un gradient su pe tele fin cuant che ti va ben. Chest al funzione come lis sagomis.
Une sagome e pues vê dai Trasformadôrs che a cambiin il so aspiet. I efiets, dut câs, a son plui fins di un camion che al devente un robot di combatiment...
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
-
File | Save as... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
Lì e je la solite sbare dai menù, parosre, File, Modifiche, Opzions. L'ûs al è in pratiche auto-esplicatîf, duncje o larin a viodi dome ce mût salvâ il to lavôr.
+
File | Salve come... al salvarà intun formât speciâl di Icon-O-Matic che al tignarà lis informazions adizionâls, come i nons dai percors, lis sagomis e i stîi. Chestis a vignaran gjavadis vie de icone finâl une volte che si le espuarte, cussì di salvâ spazi. No je mal pensade la idee di fâ une copie di backup dal to lavôr in cheste maniere, par vie che cun ogjets anonims dut al ven clamât cussì: "<path>/<shape>/<style>" che al rint fastidiose ogni modifiche specifiche.
-
File | Export as... opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
File | Espuarte come... al vierç un panel di salvament familiâr, cuntun menù a tende pai formâts di file in bas, che al ufrìs chestis sieltis:
-
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
-
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
-
HVIF source code
Saves as source code used by programmers
-
SVG
Saves as SVG
-
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
-
PNG set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
-
BEOS:ICON attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
-
META:ICON attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
+
HVIF
Formât di icone vetoriâl di Haiku
+
HVIF RDef
Al salve come risorse dopradi dai programadôrs
+
Codiç sorzint HVIF
Al salve come codiç sorzint doprât dai programadôrs
+
SVG
Al salve come SVG
+
PNG
Al salve come un PNG di 64px di dimension
+
Complès di PNG
Al salve come PNG di 16, 32 e 64px di dimension
+
Atribût BEOS:ICON
Sielç un file e stabilìs in mût diret il sô atribût di icone
+
Atribût META:ICON
Sielç un file e zontii la icone tant che sempliç metadât
Tu âs di tignî iniments un pocjis di robis cuant che tu lavoris cun Icon-O-Matic e cualchi consei gjenerâl par doprâlu:
-
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, shadows and the Haiku color palette.
-
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
-
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
-
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
-
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag & drop or copy & paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
-
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
-
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click & drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click & drag while holding SPACE.
Tu âs simpri di cirî di doprâ al minim i percors, par ce che a son chei che a costin di plui te dimension dal file. Invezit, torne dopre i percors il plui pussibil e lavore cu lis sagomis manipoladis e i lôr trasformadôrs. Anje il doprâ in maniere inteligjente i gradients al salve spazi.
+
Ogni volte che al è pussibil, tu âs di ativâ Vincole-ae-gridele dal menù Opzions cuant che si modifiche i percors. I ponts dal percors che si inlinein cu la gridele di 64x64 pixel a doprin mancul spazi di archiviazion. Tu otegnarâs ancje un aspiet plui ferbint se i ponts a vegnin metûts sui ôrs dai pixel esats. Par esempli, al è impuartant inlineâ lis liniis esternis plui prominentis cu la gridele di 16x16.
+
Controle la anteprime par viodi se la tô icone e pâr bon in 16x16. Tu podaressis volê doprâ la impostazion Nivel dal detai (LOD) descrite inte sezion Sagomis.
+
E je une facile maniere maniere par produsi letaris, ancje se Icon-O-Matic nol da chel strument. Al baste inserî il test intun editôr di tescj come StyledEdit, justâ il gjenar di caratar e il stîl e podopo strissinâ e molâ, opûr copiâ e tacâ, il test selezionât in Icon-O-Matic. Chest al crearà i percors e lis sagomis rispetivis.
+
Se tu assegnis plui di un percors a une sagome, lis lôr areis che si soreponin si scancelaran l'une cun chê altre. Cuant che un percors al è dal dut dentri di un altri, in pratiche al cree une buse inte sagome finâl.
+
Tu puedis aumentâ o diminuî l'ingrandiment de tele cu la rudiele dal mouse. Par spostâsi te panoramiche ingrandide de tele tu puedi fâ clic e strissinâ cul boton centrâl dal mouse opûr cul normâl clic di çampe e strissinâ intant che si ten fracât il SPAZI.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Magnify
@@ -67,29 +68,29 @@
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs
-
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
Magnify al mostre une version slargjade de aree tor ator dal pontadôr dal mouse.
-
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "64 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 64x32 pixel rectangle around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
-
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
-You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
-They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
-
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with ALT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
Clicking on the pop-up menu or right-clicking into the pixel grid gives you a number of options:
+
In alt tu cjatarâs la dimension e il nivel di ingrandiment de aree. "64 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" al significhe che tu viodis un retangul di 64x32 pixel tor ator dal pontadôr dal mouse e che ogni pixel al ven ingrandît di 8 voltis.
+
Sot di chel si à il coôr dal pixel che al ven segnât cuntun contor ros. Il so colôr al ven presentât come RGB e valôrs esadecimâi.
+Tu puedis spostâ il ricuadri ros cun ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Par misurâ lis distancis e inlineâ i ogjets, tu puedis zontâ fin a dôs smiris cun ALTH. In bas a vegnin mostradis lis lôr coordenadis X/Y partint dal angul in alt a çampe e, se dutis dôs a son stadis zontadis, la distance X/Y tra une smire e chê altre.
+A puedin ancje jessi spostadis cun ← / → / ↑ / ↓. La smire ative e ven segnade cuntune "x".
+
Tu puedis spostâ il pondadôr dal mouse pixel par pixel cun ALT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Fasint clic sul menù a tende o fasint clic diestri su la gridele dai pixel ti darà diviersis opzions:
-
Save image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a PNG image.
-
Copy image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
-
Show info
ALTT
Shows additional information.
-
Add a crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
-
Remove a crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
-
Show grid
ALTG
Shows a grid overlay.
-
Freeze image
ALTF
Stops updating the magnification area.
-
Stick coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but doesn't follow the mouse pointer any more.
-
Make square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
-
Decrease window size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Increase window size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Decrease pixel size
ALT,
Lowers magnification.
-
Increase pixel size
ALT.
Increases magnification.
+
Salve imagjin
ALTS
Al salve la visualizazion atuâl come imagjin PNG.
+
Copie imagjin
ALTC
Al copie la visualizazion atuâl intes notis.
+
Mostre informazions
ALTT
Al mostre lis informazions adizionâls.
+
Zonte une smire
ALTH
Al zonte une crôs di smire che tu puedis strissinâ ator.
+
Gjave une smire
ALTMAIUSCH
Al gjave la ultime crôs di smire zontade.
+
Mostre gridele
ALTG
Al mostre une gridele in soreimpression.
+
Bloche imagjin
ALTF
Al ferme di inzornâ la aree di ingrandiment.
+
Ten chestis coordenadis
ALTI
Al continue a inzornâ la aree di ingrandiment, ma nol va plui daûr dal pontadôr dal mouse.
+
Rint cuadrât il barcon
ALT/
Dopo che si à ridimensionât il barcon, al torne a fâ deventâ cuadrade la visualizazion.
+
Diminuìs la dimension dal barcon
ALT-
Al strenç la aree di ingrandiment ator dal pontadôr dal mouse.
+
Aumente la dimension dal barcon
ALT+
Al slargje la aree di ingrandiment ator dal pontadôr dal mouse.
~/config/settings/Mail/
-~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu
-~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Location to store signatures
-~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Location to store custom statuses
+~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - I ogjets metûts achì a vegnin fûr tal menù contestuâl de casele de pueste
+~/config/settings/Mail/signatures/ - Posizion par archiviâ lis firmis
+~/config/settings/Mail/status/ - Posizion par archiviâ i stâts personalizâts
-
Mail is Haiku's default viewer and editor of emails. It has nothing to do with the actual fetching and sending of mails, which is done by the mail_daemon and can be configured via the E-mail preferences.
-
This page is a general overview of the application Mail. For more information how email in Haiku works, refer to the Workshop on managing email.
+
Mail al è il visualizadôr e editôr predefinît di Haiku pes e-mail. Nol à nuie a ce fâ cul efetîf recupar e spedizion de pueste, che a vegnin fats dal mail_daemon e a puedin jessi configurâts gracie aes preferencis di E-mail.
+
Cheste pagjine e je une panoramiche gjenerâl de aplicazion Mail. Par vê plui informazions su ce mût che e funzione la pueste in Haiku, fâs riferiment a Laboratori su la gjestion de pueste.
Dopli clic suntune e-mail le vierç in Mail. La interface e je vonde semplice:
-
A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the Decoding from the pop-up menu.
-
If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to Save attachment... or Open attachment. You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
-
Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
+
Un menù e une opzionâl sbare dai struments parsore, cuntune aree dai atribûts interessants di une mail (a, di, ogjet, date) sot di chê e dopo il cuarp efetîf de mail. Se la mail e ven fûr cun caratars stranis o vueide, prove a cambiâ la Codifiche tal menù Messaç.
+
Se si à file zontâts a une e-mail, chei a vegnin listâts ae fin dal messaç. Un clic diestrie suntun al vierç un menù contestuâl par fâ Salve zonte... o Vierç zonte. Tu puedis ancje strissinâle e molâle sul Scritori o suntun altri barcon di Tracker.
+
La plui part dai elements de sbare dai strument o dal menù si spieghin di bessôi, duncje si concentrarìn dome su lis robis impuartantis.
File
-
When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the Close and... submenu. There you'll also find the option Set to... to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+
Cuant che tu sieris il barcon di une mail, il so stât al ven di norme cambiât di "New" a "Read". Ma tu puedis stabilî ancje altris stâts, sielzintju dal sot-menù Siere e . Lì tu puedis ancje cjatâ la opzion Met a... par creâ i tiei stâts personalizâts, che a vegnin salvâts sot di ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
-Edit
-
Here you'll find an item to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to manage your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
+Modifiche
+
Achì tu cjatarâs un element par vierzi lis Preferencis... di Mail (viôt sot) e une scurte par gjestî i tiei Account..., che e vierzarà il panel des preferencis E-mail.
-View
-
You'll only seldomly need these two items, if at all:
+Visualize
+
Dome di râr ti coventaran chescj doi elements, se no mai:
-
Show header
ALTH
Shows the complete header of a mail, in case you need to track down the path of your mail, for example.
-
Show raw message
Displays a mail in its raw state, i.e. with all its control characters and without Mail's coloring of quotes or URLs, for example..
+
Mostre intestazion
ALTH
Al mostre la intestazion complete di une mail, intal câs che ti coventi discuvierzi il percors de tô mail, par esempli.
+
Mostre messaç grês
Al mostre une mail tal sô stât grês, vâl a dî cun ducj i siei caratars di control e cence la colorazion di Mail des citazions/URL, par esempli...
-Message
-
The different options to reply to a mail may need a bit of explanation.
+Messaç
+
Lis diferentis opzions par rispuindi a une mail a podaressin vê bisugne di un tic di spiegazion.
-
Reply
ALTR
The standard reply to the server that has sent the mail to you. NOTE: In case of a mailing list post, this normally replies back to the mailing list, not just the person that wrote the post!
-
Reply to sender
OPTALTR
This on the other hand, sends directly and only to the person listed in the "From" attribute.
-
Reply to all
SHIFTALTR
Replies to the original sender plus all other (cc'ed) recipients of the original mail.
+
Rispuint
ALTR
La rispueste standard al servidôr che ti à inviât la mail. NOTE: tal câs di publicazions su mailing list, chest di norme al rispuint ae mailing list, no dome ae persone che e à scrit il messaç!
+
Rispuint al mitent
OPZALTR
Chest di chê altre bande, al invie dret ae persone listade intal atribût “Di” e dome a chê.
+
Rispuint a ducj
MAIUSCALTR
Al rispuint al mitent origjinâl e a ducj i destinataris (CC) de mail origjinâl.
-
If you mark a passage in the email before replying to it, only the marked text will be quoted in your answering mail. A nice way to cut down on excessive quoting, which is frowned upon by pretty much everybody...
-
The items to Forward, Resend and Copy to new are again pretty self-explaining.
-
When you've opened an email from a Tracker or query result window, Previous message and Next message will move to the previous/next email in the list.
-
Save address collects all email addresses from the header and the actual email body in a submenu. Choosing an address will open the People application in order to complete and save the contact information.
+
Se tu evidenziis un passaç de mail prime di rispuindi, te mail di rispueste al vignarà citât dome il test evidenziât. Une maniere ninine par taiâ vie une citazion masse grande, che e da fastidi a cuasi ducj...
+
Lis vôs Mande indenant, Torne invie e Copie su gnûf ancje chês si spieghin di bessolis.
+
Cuant che tu vierzis une e-mail di un barcon di Tracker o dai risultâts di interogazion, Messaç precedent e Messaç successîf ti puartaran ae e-mail precedente/sucessive de liste.
+
Salve direzion al tire sù, suntun sot-menù, dutis lis direzions e-mail de intestazion e dal efetîf cuarp de email. Sielzint une direzion si vierzarà la aplicazion People in mût di podê completâ e salvâ lis informazions dal contat.
-Queries
-
This menu holds queries that show all mails related to the currently open mail. Selecting Same recipient, Same sender or Same subject opens a query that lists all corresponding mails:
+Interogazions
+
Chest menù al ten dentri lis interogazions che a mostrin dutis lis e-mail coreladis ae mail cumò vierte. Selezionant Stes destinatari, Stes mitent o Stes ogjet si vierç une interogazion che e liste dutis lis mail corispondentis:
A new email is created by invoking the New mail message menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose Create new message... from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
E ven creade une gnove e-mail invocant Gnûf messaç di pueste dal menù File o cu la icone corispondente de sbare dai struments di une e-mail vierte. Opûr al baste fâ partî la aplicazion Mail o sielzi Cree gnûf messaç... dal menù contestuâl de icone de buchete intal Deskbar.
-
The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
-
Cc is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
-Bcc means "blind carbon copy" which does practically the same as "Cc", but hides the recipients from each other.
-
You can enter several recipients by separating their addresses with a comma.
-To, CC, and BCC are pop-up menus. They contain all email addresses on your system found by a query for People files. Their "Group" attribute will sort them in corresponding submenus.
-
Again, we'll focus on the more interesting features in the menus.
+
Il barcon al è simil a chel des mail di lei. Il menù e la sbare dai struments a son un pôc diviers e, logjic, si scugne jemplâ i ricuadris di test cu lis direzions e-mail dai destinataris, l'ogjet e vie indenant.
+
Cc e je la scurtadure pal tiermin anacronistic "copie cjarbon" e al corispuint a vê copiis de tô mail inviadis aes personis listadis. La diference rispieta a listâ un grum di direzions tal cjamp "A" e je che no tu ti indrecis aes personis metudis in Cc, duncje segnalant che no tu ti spietis une lôr rispueste.
+Ccp al significhe "Copie cjarbon platade" che al fâs la stesse robe di "Cc", ma al plate a ducj i altris destinataris di Ccp.
+
Tu puedis inserî plui destinataris separant lis lôr direzions cuntune virgule.
+A, Cc e Ccp a son menù a tende. A contegnin dutis lis direzions e-mail cajtadis sul to sisteme gracie a une interogazion ai file di People. Il lôr atribût "Group" ju ordenarà tai sot-menù corispondents.
+
Di gnûf, si concentrarìn su lis funzionalitâts tal menù plui interessantis.
File
With Save as draft you can store your work so far and come back to it later. To load it again, choose it from the Open draft submenu that will list the result of a query for all mails with the status "Draft".
-Edit
+Modifiche
Increase and Decrease quote level or their respective shortcuts ALT / - are used to add/remove a level of quoting by adjusting the number of ">" symbols in front of quoted lines. Just select some text in all the lines you want un/quoted and invoke the menu item.
@@ -141,7 +143,7 @@
Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to Add it to the accepted vocabulary.
Then, there are again the items to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to managing your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
-Message
+Messaç
With Add signature you can add predefined texts to the end of your mail. From its submenu you can choose a specific or Random one.
@@ -154,16 +156,16 @@ Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct
File attachments are listed below the header section. You can remove a file by invoking a context menu or by selecting it and pressing DEL.
-Queries
+Interogazions
This doesn't work yet, but is intended to hold queries that would show all mail related to the currently open mail, like all to the same recipient or same subject/thread.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
MediaPlayer
@@ -68,64 +69,66 @@
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/MediaPlayer
-
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
MediaPlayer al è il riprodutôr multimediâl predefinît par ducj i file audio e video. In graciis dal backend ffmpeg, a son supuartâts une sdrume di formâts di chei plui doprâts. La sô interface semplice e à ducj i controi che un si spiete:
-
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
-Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
+
Il cursôr de sbare di avanzament ti permet di lâ daurman intune posizion, lassant il mouse parsore de sbare ti mostrarà il timp atuâl e trop che al reste dal videoclip o de musiche. Fasint clic sul timp ae sô diestre, chest timp al cambie tra lungjece, timp atuâl e timp che al reste.
+Sot di chel tu cjatis i solits controi par saltâ al toc precedent, riproduzion/pause, ferme e salte al prossim toc. Dopo al rive un control dal volum (fasint clic sul simbul de casse sonore al comunte il cidinâ) e un misuradôr di VU (Unitât di Volum).
-
Audio and video playback
-
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
Riproduzion audio e video
+
Viodût che no je nissune funzionalitât specifiche pe riproduzion audio, o larin drets aes funzionalitâts video o gjenerâls.
-
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
-
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
-Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
-
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
+
Al è disponibil par dutis lis sorzints multimediâls Informazions sul file... (ALTI). Chest al mostre informazions sul file che al è cumò cjariât, come par esempli la durade o i detais de linie audio/video e il so codec.
+
La plui part dai comants doprâts tai menù a son ancje disponibii cul menù contestuâl dal clic-diestri inte aree dai videos. Util cuant che si è in modalitât plen visôr.
+Sot di Video tu cjatarâs lis opzions par ingrandî il barcon a varis nivei o sfuarçâ lis proporzions a caulchi valôr standard. Lassant lis proporzions al valôr predefinît Impostazions dal flus al varès di funzionâ in maniere otimâl pai file codificâts in maniere juste.
+
MediaPlayer al supuarte i sottituis in formât SRT. Par viodiju sot de vôs Sottitui, il lôr non di file al à di jessi compagn di chel dal file video, cuntun sufìs cul non de lenghe e ".srt" al puest de estension dal video. Par esempli:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
-
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
+MyMovie.Français.srt
+MyMovie.Furlan.srt
+
Dal sot-menù Linie audio a puedin jessi disponibilis plui liniis audio, dispès dopradis par vê plui lenghis intun file video sôl. Il sot-menù Video | Linie al da lis stessi pussibilitâts cuant che si à disponibii plui flus video.
+
Tu puedis comutâ la modalitât Plen visôr (ALTINVIE o F o un dopli clic di çampe), platâ i ôrs dal barcon di MediaPlayer e i controi cun Plate interface (ALTH o un dopli clic di dieste) o have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
-
Playlists
-
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
Lis listis di riproduzion
+
MediaPlayer | Liste di riproduzion... (ALTP) al vierç un barcon cui file che a son cumò in code pe riproduzion. Fasint dopli clic suntune vôs MediaPlayer al tacarà a riprodusile.
-
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
-
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+
Tu puedis zontâ plui file molantju inte liste e justant la lôr posizion cul strissine-e-mole. Dal menù Modifiche tu puedis fâ Rangje a câs o Gjave (DEL) suntune vôs de liste o eliminâ il file atuâl cun Sposte file te Scovacere (ALTT).
+
Logjic, tu puedis fâ Salve suntune playlist e plui indenant fâ Vierç par tornâle a vierzi, opûr fâle partî fasint un sepliç dopli clic sul file de liste di riproduzion.
-
Settings
-
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
Impostazions
+
A son diviersis impostazins par regolâ cun precision il compuartament di MediaPlayer:
-
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
-
Next are different View options.
-You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
-You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode.
-Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
-Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
-
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
+
Il prin lot, Modalitât di riproduzion, si spieghe di bessôl. Scomençâ la riproduzion in automatic, sierâ i barcons cuant che si finìs o riprodusi i file multimediâi in mût ciclic.
+Dal menù a tende tu sielzis ce mût che al à di compuartâsi MediaPlayer cuant che si invie. Se al à di ripiâ di dulà che si jere fermât la ultime volte met simpri, opûr par fâ in mût che al domandi: domande ogni volte.
+
Dopo si à diferentis Opzions di visualizazion.
+Tu puedis sielzi se ativâ Dopre soreposizions video in hardware, se disponibilis, che al sbasse la utilizazion de CPU, ma al funzione dome par un sôl barcon video e al à bisugne di un driver di schede video supuartade.
+Tu puedis ativâ Scjale i filmâts in mût fluit (cuant che no si è in modalitât soreposizion) che al dopre un filtri une vore svelt par smussâ i pixel che se no a semein blocs cuant che si aumente l'ingrandiment o si viôt a plen visôr.
+Ridimensione controi in modalitât plen visôr se tu preferissis controi un pêl plui grancj, magari parcè che tu viodis il schermi di un pêl plui lontan cuant che tu sês in modalitât plen visôr.
+Dopo si à lis impostazions pe Dimension dai sottitui e Plaçament dai sottitui. I sottitui a puedin jessi mostrât te Part inferiôr dal video, che ju varà simpri soreponûts ae imagjin. O Part inferiôr dal visôr, che invezit ti permet di ridimensionâ il barcon in verticâl e vê visibii i sottitui te striche nere in bas.
+
Lis ultimis impostazions a determinin il volum des riproduzions di chei barcons che no son atîfs in chel moment. Tu puedis vêlis che a inçontenedin al Volum massim, che a fasedin mancul confusion cun Volum bas o che e stedin cuietis cun Cidinât.
-
Keyboard controls
-
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
Controi di tastiere
+
MediaPlayer al ufrìs cumbinazions di tascj utilis par controlâ la riproduzion cence doprâ il mouse.
-
Z
Skip to previous track
-
X
Play
-
C
Pause
-
V
Stop
-
B
Skip to next track
+
Z
Salte al toc precedent
+
X
Riprodûs
+
C
Met in pause
+
V
Ferme
+
B
Salte al prossim toc
-
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
Chescj tascj a vegnin assegnâts aes funzions dai botons di control. A son simpri i tascj des letaris in bas a çampe de tastiere, cioè a son indipendents de mapadure di tastiere che si dopre. I tascj chi parsore a corispuindin ae mape de tastiere amerecane dai Stâts Unîts.
-
← / →
Seek backwards/forwards
-
SHIFT← / →
Jump backwards/forwards 10 seconds
-
ALT← / →
Jump backwards/forwards 30 seconds
+
← / →
Cîr indaûr/indenant
+
MAIUSC← / →
Salte indaûr/indenant di 10 seconts
+
ALT← / →
Salte indaûr/indenant di 30 seconts
-
↓ / ↑
Decrease/Increase volume
+
↓ / ↑
Sbasse/Alce volum
-
ALT↓ / ↑
Skip to next/previous Track
+
ALT↓ / ↑
Va al prossim/precedent toc/linie
-
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
-
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area or pressing F or TAB)
-
ALTSHIFT0 / 1 / 2 / 3
Changes aspect ratio to Stream settings (how the video was encoded), No aspect correction (maps the pixels of the video 1:1 to the screen), 4:3, 16:9
+
Sbare di spazi
Comute riproduzion/pause
+
ALTINVIE
Comute modalitât plen visôr (fat ancje cun dopli clic di çampe inte aree dal video o fracant F o TAB)
+
ALTMAIUSC0 / 1 / 2 / 3
Al cambie lis proporzions a Impostazions dal flus (ce mût che al è stât codificât il video), Nissune corezion dal aspiet (al mape i pixel dal video in rapuart 1:1 cul schermi), 4:3, 16:9
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
LegacyPackageInstaller
+
InstaladôrPachetsVecjos
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
Nissune vôs, di norme inviât fasint dopli-clic suntun file supuartât.
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/LegacyPackageInstaller
Impostazions:
nissune
-
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
LegacyPackageInstaller is an installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
-
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
Cheste pagjine e je dome un prin stampon. Par plasê torne controle plui indenant par vê une version plui rifinide.
+
InstaladôrPachetsVecjos al è un instaladôr par pachets di BeOS che a son tal formât PKG. Al da une interface grafiche facile-di-doprâ, che, in Haiku, e jude a vê une rapide instalazion dai pachets.
+
Al ven eseguît in automatic cuant che tu ciris di vierzi i file cun estension .pkg.
-
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
Il barcon principâl al da acès a dôs configurazions:
-
type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option).
-
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
gjenar di instalazion (a seconde che il disvilupadôr al vedi metût plui di une (standard) opzion di instalazion).
+
ubicazion de instalazion (instale su) (si puedin sielzi dome discs fis/partizions interiis, no percors personalizâts)
-
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
Dopo vê fat clic su Scomence il procès di estrazion e di instalazion a scomençaran.
-
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
-
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
+
A chest pont a puedin vignî fûr erôrs e avertiments, che a puedin dî che a mancjin librariis e dipendencis par podê eseguî il program. Al podarès jessi necessari instalâ chei pachets prime di cirî di instalâ il program desiderât.
+
Cuant che la instalazion e je finide, il package al varès di vignî fûr tal menù des aplicazions di Deskbar.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
People
@@ -69,17 +68,17 @@
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/People_data
-
People is a simple contact database using the attributes of Haiku's filesystem to store addresses and other contact information. Every contact is saved as one Person file with its data in separate attributes. All are indexed and therefore searchable with a query.
+
People e je une semplice base di dâts di contats che al dopre i atribûts dal filesystem di Haiku par archiviâ i recapits e altris informazions sul contat. Ogni contat al ven salvât tant che un file Person (Persone) cui siei dâts metûts tai atribûts separâts. Ducj a vegnin intabelâts e duncje si puedin cirî cuntune interogazion.
-
The Group attribute at the bottom allows assigning a person to one or more groups. Useful for "mass mailing" a number of people who, for example, work on a specific project. The pop-up menu offers all currently existing groups. If a person belongs to more than one group, the group names are delimited with a ",".
+
L'atribût Grup in bas al permet di assgenâ une persone a un o plui grups. Util pes spedizions di e-mail “in bloc” a un numar di personis che, par esempli, a lavorin suntun specific progjet. Il menù a tende al ufrìs ducj i grups esistents in chel moment. Se une persone e fâs part di plui di un grup, i nons dai grups a vegnin delimitâts cuntune “,” (virgule).
-
These Person files are usually all saved in /boot/home/people/. To get a list of all your contacts, just open your people folder and display all attributes of interest. If you choose to organize your Person files in different folders, just use a query to display them all in one window.
+
Chescj file Person di solit a vegnin ducj salvâts in /boot/home/people/. Par otignî une liste di ducj i tiei contats al baste vierzi la tô cartele people e visualizâ ducj i atribûts che ti interessin. Se tu sielzis di organizâ i tiei file Person in altris cartelis, al baste doprâ une interogazion par visualizâju ducj intun barcon.
-
You can treat these files like any other: You can sort according to attributes (even a second sorting order by holding SHIFT while clicking) and of course delete, duplicate or rename Person files. Even the contact information can be edited directly: Clicking on an attribute (or ALTE) to edit works just like renaming a file. Once you're in edit mode, TAB and SHIFTTAB will jump from column to column.
+
Tu puedis doprâ chescj file tant che ogni altri file: tu puedis metiju in ordin daûr dai atribûts (ancje un ordin secondari se, intant che tu fasis clic, tu frachis MAIUSC) e, logjic, eliminâju, duplicâju o cambiâ il non dai file Person. Si pues modificâ in mût diret ancje lis informazions dal contat: fasint clic suntun atribût (o ALTE) si pues modificâ te stesse maniere che si cambie il non dal file. Un volte che si è in modalitât modifiche, TAB e MAIUSCTAB al fasarà saltâ di une colone in chê altre.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
PoorMan
+
Puar Om
Deskbar:
Applications
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/PoorMan
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/PoorMan Settings
-
PoorMan is a nice little webserver that's extremely easy to set up. Naturally it doesn't offer any advanced features like other heavy duty server software, it's after all only a poor man's webserver.
-
Upon its first launch, PoorMan asks for the folder that is about to be served to the web. If you go with the Default, a new folder /boot/home/public_html is created for you. As a start page a HTML file named by default index.html has to be present there.
-
PoorMan presents itself with a simple console that logs its activity. Then, there's status information if the server is running, which folder is being served, and a hit counter. Settings are changed with Edit | Settings...:
+
Puar Om al è un piçul e ninin servidôr web che al è une vore facil di configurâ. Logjic che nol vedi funzionalitâts avanzadis come chei altris software par servidôrs robuscj, dal rest al è dome un puar om di servidôr web.
+
Ae sô prime esecuzion, Puar Om al domande cuale cartele e à di jessi servide al web. Se tu decidis chê Predefinide, e ven creade une gnove cartele: /boot/home/public_html. Come pagjine iniziâl, lì al à di jessi presint un file HTML clamât in maniere predefinide index.html.
+
Puar Om si presente cuntune console semplice che e regjistre lis sôs ativitâts. Dopo, e je une informazion sul stât, par savê se il servidôr al è in esecuzion, ce cartele che e ven servide e une conte pal numar di richiestis. Lis impostazions si cambiin cun Modifiche | Impostazions...:
-
The settings panel is divided into three tabs:
-
In Site you can select another folder to serve, enter another start page and have the option to send a file listing if the start page isn't present.
-Logging lets you de/activate logging to the console or optionally to a separate logfile.
-The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum simultaneous connections.
-
The menu items of the console window are all self-explanatory. With them you can e.g. save (parts) of the console output, clear the console or logging file and start/stop the server or clear the hit counter.
+
Il panel des impostazions si divît in trê schedis:
+
In Sît tu puedis selezionâ une altre cartele di servî, inserî une altre pagjine iniziâl e vê la opzion par inviâ la liste dai file se la pagjine iniziâl no je presinte.
+Regjistri ti permet di dis/ativâ la regjistrazion te console o, come opzion, suntun file di regjistri separât.
+La schede Avanzadis e ten lis impostazions pal numar massim di conessions simultaniis.
+
I elements dal menù tal barcon de console si spieghin ducj di bessôi. Cun chei tu puedis par esempli salvâ (parts) dal output de console, netâ la console o il file di regjistri e fâ partî/fermâ il servidôr o azerâ la conte des richiestis.
-
If you want to try out if PoorMan's working, choose /boot/system/apps/BePDF/docs/docs-build/ as folder and index.html as start page. Then point your browser to the URL 127.0.0.1, which is your local host.
+
Se tu desideris provâ ce mût che al lavore Puar Om, sielç /boot/system/apps/BePDF/docs/docs-build/ come cartele e index.html come pagjine iniziâl. Dopo, ponte il to navigadôr web al URL 127.0.0.1, che al è il to host locâl (il to computer).
@@ -87,7 +88,7 @@ The Advanced tab holds the setting for the maximum sim
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Screenshot
+
Cature di schermi
Deskbar:
Applications
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/Screenshot
@@ -68,21 +69,21 @@
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/screenshot
-
Screenshots are taken by either starting the Screenshot application or by pressing the PRINT key,
+
Lis videadis a vegnin fatis o inviant la aplicazion “Cature di schermi” o fracant il tast STAMP.
-
In the Screenshot panel you can toggle between taking the whole screen or just the active window and decide if the window border and mouse pointer should be included. You can also enter a delay before a screenshot is taken.
-
Below that you set the name, format and location for the screenshot that will be used when you click Save. Instead of saving the file to disk you can also decide to Copy to clipboard to be able to paste the shot directly into another application, or take a New screenshot.
-
All settings are remembered the next time you take a screenshot, enabling these convenient keyboard shortcuts:
+
Intal panel di “Cature di schermi” tu puedis comutâ tra cjapâ dut il schermi o dome il barcon atîf e decidi se cjapâ dentri l'ôr dal barcon e il pontadôr dal mouse. Tu puedis ancje inserî un ritart prime che e vegni caturade la videade.
+
Sot di che tu stabilissis il non, il formât e la posizion pe videade caturade che a vignaran doprâts cuant che tu fasarâs clic su Salve. Al puest di salvâ il file sul disc tu puedis decidi ancje di fâ Copie intes notis cussì di podê tacâ la schermade daurman intune aplicazion, opûr cjapâ une Gnove cature di schermi.
+
Dutis lis impostazions a vegnin tignudis iniments pe prossime volte che tu fasarâs une cature, abilitant chestis scurtis di tastiere utilis:
-
PRINT
Takes a screenshot with zero delay and launches the Screenshot panel.
-
SHIFTPRINT
Takes a screenshot silently (without opening the panel), while still respecting the last used settings.
-
CTRLPRINT
Also takes a screenshot silently with the saved settings, but instead of saving it as a file, it's just copied to the clipboard.
+
STAMP
Al cjape une videade cun zero ritart e al invie il panel di Cature di schermi.
+
MAIUSCSTAMP
Al cjape une videade cence dî nuie (cence vierzi il panel), ma simpri rispietant lis ultimis impostazions dopradis.
+
CTRLSTAMP
Al cjape ancje lui une videade cu lis impostazions salvadis, ma invezit di salvâle come un file, e ven dome copiade intes notis.
-Taking a screenshot from Terminal
-
There's a special screenshot application to be used from Terminal or a script.
-screenshot --help shows the familiar options as parameters:
+Cjapâ une cature di schermi dal Terminâl
+
E esist une aplicazion screenshot(cature di schermi par inglês) speciâl par cjapâ videadis dal Terminal o di un script.
+screenshot --help al mostre lis opzions di prime consideradis tant che parametris:
~> screenshot --help
@@ -113,7 +114,7 @@ Note: OPTION -b, --border takes only effect when used with -w, --window
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
ShowImage
+
MostreImagjin
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
Nissune vôs, di norme inviât fasint dopli-clic suntun file supuartât.
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
-
ShowImage allows you to view images in all formats that are supported through DataTranslators. New formats are automatically recognized when their translator is added to the system. This has been done for Haiku's vector icon files, WonderBrush images or when WebP images became available, for example.
-ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and to save them in another format.
-
Viewing
+
MostreImagjin ti permet di viodi i imagjins in ducj i formâts che a son supuartâts midiant Traduzion dâts. I gnûfs formâts a vegnin ricognossûts in automatic cuant che il lôr tradutôr al ven zontât al sisteme. Chest al è stât fat, par esempli, pai file des iconis vetoriâls di Haiku, lis imagjins di WonderBrush o cuant che lis imagjins WebP a son deventadis disponibilis.
+MostreImagjin al furnìs funzions minimis di modifiche par taiâ fûr, voltâ e ribaltâ lis imagjins e par salvâlis intun altri formât.
+
Visualizâ
-
The View menu offers to start a Slide show of all images in a folder (or query result window) and set a Slide delay from 2 to 20 seconds.
-
Other commands apply to the currently displayed image (without changing the size of the window):
-Original size shows the image with a 100% zoom factor.
-Fit to window shrinks the image back into the window frame, e.g. after having zoomed into it or after resizing the window.
-Zoom in and Zoom out move into and out of the image in 10% steps. Zooming is also done with the mouse wheel; to pan an image bigger than the window, simply left-click and drag your mouse around.
-
Two settings don't just apply to the currently displayed image and are remembered when browsing from one image to the next:
-High quality zooming applies a very fast filter when zooming to reduce jagged lines and produce a smoother result.
-Stretch to window will stretch smaller images to fill the current window frame.
-
Then there's a Full screen mode with an option to Show caption in full screen mode which overlays the file name at the bottom of the image.
-
Lastly, Show tool bar will show/hide the graphical controls:
+
Il menù Visualize al da la pussibilitât di fâ partî une Proiezion diapositivis di dutis lis imagjins che a stan intune cartele (o di un barcon che al à i risultâts di une interogazion) e stabilî un Ritart diapositive di 2 a 20 seconts.
+
Altris comants si aplichin ae imagjin cumò visualizade (cence cambiâ la dimension dal barcon):
+Dimension origjinâl al mostre la imagjin cuntun fatôr di ingrandiment dal 100%.
+Adate al barcon al torne a limitâ la imagjin tal ricuadri dal barcon, p.e. dopo vêle ingrandide o vê ridimensionât il barcon.
+Cun Ingrandìs e Impiçulìs si spostisi dentri e si tirisi fûr cuntun increment dal 10%. L'ingrandiment al ven fat ancje cu la rudielute dal mouse; par scori ator intune imagjin plui grande dal barcon al baste tignî fracât il clic di çampe e strissinâ il mouse ator.
+
Dôs impostazions no si aplichin ae imagjin al moment visualizade e a vegnin tignudis iniments cuant che si navighe di une imagjin a chê dopo:
+Ingrandiment alte-cualitât al apliche un filtri une vore svelt cuant che si ingrandìs par ridusi lis liniis cretosis e produsi une risultât plui morbit.
+Slungje al barcon al slungjarà lis imagjins plui piçulis par jemplâ il ricuadri atuâl dal barcon.
+
Dopo si à une modalitât Plen visôr cuntune opzio par fâ Mostre didascalie in modalitât plen visôr che e sorepon il non dal file in bas te imagjin.
+
Par ultin, Mostre sbare dai struments al mostrarà/platarà i controi grafics:
-
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file, see below).
-
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
-
Browsing
+
De çampe ae diestre: Imagjin precedente, imagjin sucessive, proiezion diapositivis (in modalitât plen visôr), modalitât selezion, dimension origjinâl, adate al barcon, ingrandìs, impiçulìs, pagjine precedente e sucessive (cuant che si à un formât imagjin come TIFF che al permet plui pagjinis intun sôl file, viôt chi sot).
+
La plui part dai comants doprâts plui dispès a son disponibii ancje dal menù contestuâl che si à cul clic diestri su pe imagjin. Util cuant che si è in modalitât plen visôr.
+
Sgarfâ
-
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
-
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
-
Looking at the Browse menu, shows another type of browsing: Some image formats, like TIFF, can contain several pages in one file. Commands like First page and Next page let you navigate those pages.
-
Editing
+
Dopo vê viert une imagjin tu puedis esplorâ daurman dutis lis altris imagjins inte sô cartele (o tal barcon dai risultâts di une interogazion) fracant ↑/↓ o ←/→. Tu puedis viodi la selezion che e cambie, tal barcon di Tracker.
+
E esist une maniere rapide par vierzi la cartele de imagjin che si sta viodint e ancje navigâ su chês superiôrs e tes sot-cartelis. Al funzione come cu la navigazion a sgarfâ in Tracker fasint clic inte aree des informazions inte sbare di stât che e mostre la dimension e il formât de imagjin atuâl.
+
Cjalant il menù Sgarfe , si viôt un altri gjenar di navigazion: Cualchi formât di imagjin, come il TIFF, a puedin tignî dentri plui pagjinis intun file sôl. I comants come Prime pagjine and Prossime pagjine ti permetin di navigâ tra chês pagjinis.
+
Modificâ
-
The Image menu offers the few image manipulations necessary for an image viewer: rotating and flipping the image. Note however, that the actual image data won't be changed. Only an attribute is added to the file so it'll be shown rotated or flipped the next time you open it.
-
Use as backgroud... will open the Backgrounds preferences to set the current picture as image for your workspaces.
-
Cropping is another feature that's needed sometimes. To define the frame to cut to, you can switch to Selection mode from the Edit menu and drag out a box with your left mouse button. If you don't want to change modes first, you can create this box in "normal mode" by simply holding CTRL while left-click-dragging, which otherwise would just pan the image around.
-Clear selection or ESC will remove the selection box.
-
The following chapter shows how to actually save the cropped area.
-
Saving and converting
-
To save or convert an image into any available format, you can invoke the normal Save as... item from the File menu, select the format and choose a file name.
-Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is already open, is using drag & drop.
+
Il menù Imagjin al ufrìs cualchi manipolazion di imagjin necessarie pai visualizadôrs di imagjins: la rotazion e il ribaltament de imagjin. Fâs câs dut câs, che i dâts de imagjin visualizade no vignaran modificâts. Al ven zontât al file dome un atribût, cussì che tu le viodarâs voltade o ribaltade ancje lis prossimis voltis che tu le vierzarâs.
+
Dopre come fonts... al vierzarà lis preferencis pal Fonts, par stabilî la figure atuâl tant che imagjin pai tiei spazis di lavôr.
+
Ritaiâ e je une altre funzione che cualchi volte e covente. Par definî il ricuadri di taiâ, tu puedis passâ ae Modalitât selezion dal menù Modifiche e meti jù un ricuadri cul boton di çampe dal mouse. Se no tu desideris che prime si cambi modalitât, tu puedis creâ il ricuadi in "modalitât normâl" fasint un sempliç CTRL intant che tu strissinis cul clic di çampe, che tal câs che tu sbalis alc al massim ti fâs scori ator pe imagjin.
+Nete selezion o ESC al gjavarà il ricuadri de selezion.
+
Il cjapitul chi sot al mostre ce mût salvâ la aree ritaiade.
+
Salvâ e convertî
+
Par salvâ o convertî une imagjin intun dai formâts disponibii, tu puedis clamâ la normâl vôs Salve come... dal menù File, po dopo selezione il formât e sielç il non dal file.
+Dispès plui svelt, soredut cuant che al è za viert il barcon di Tracker cu la cartele di destinazion, al è il doprâ il strissine e mole.
-
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
-
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
-
Keyboard shortcuts
-
Here's a list of the most useful shortcuts:
+
Cheste e je ancje la finalitât dal parsore menzonât ritaiâ, che si selezioni un ricuadri, come descrit parsore, o che si sielzi Modifiche | Selezione dut par vê dute la imagjin. Po dopo, strissinâ e molâ la selezion sul scritori o su cualsisei barcon di Tracker al crearà une gnove imagjin (dal ritai) tal stes formât de imagjin origjinâl.
+
Par salvâ intun altri formât, eseguìs il strissinament cul mouse ma cul boton di diestre e sielç un formât dal menù contestuâl che si vierzarà cuant che tu molarâs la imagjin.
+
Scurtis di tastiere
+
Chi e je une liste des scurtis plui utilis:
-
← / ↑
Previous image
-
→ / ↓
Next image
-
DEL
Move to Trash
-
+
Zoom in
-
-
Zoom out
-
0
Original size (100% zoom)
-
1
Fit to window
-
ALTENTER
Toggle full screen mode (also via double-click)
-
CTRL
While holding CTRL you can create a selection frame without explicitly switching to selection mode.
+
← / ↑
Imagjin precedente
+
→ / ↓
Prossime imagjin
+
CANC
Môf te scovacere
+
+
Ingrandìs
+
-
Impiçulìs
+
0
Dimension origjinâl (ingrandiment al 100%)
+
1
Adate al barcon
+
ALTINVIE
Comute modalitât plen visôr (ancje cun dopli-clic)
+
CTRL
Intat che si ten fracât CTRL tu creis un ricuadri di selezion cence passâ in maniere esplicite ae modalitât selezion.
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
SoftwareUpdater
@@ -67,17 +68,17 @@
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/SoftwareUpdater_settings
-
SoftwareUpdater checks all active repositories (see the Repositories preferences) for updates to the installed packages, including system updates to Haiku itself. It downloads and installs the available updates in one go.
+
SoftwareUpdater al controle in ducj i dipuesits atîfs (viôt preferencis dai Dipuesits) inzornaments pai pachets instalâts, includûts i inzornaments dal sisteme Haiku. Al discjarie e al instale i inzornaments disponibii intun colp sôl.
-
After launching, SoftwareUpdater checks for updates to packages and displays them in a list with their new version and a short description. You can opt to Show more details to include the name of the repository for each package and show both the old and new package versions.
-
Update now will start the download of all the packages and their subsequent installation.
-
Depending on the packages that were updated, you may have to reboot Haiku to actually complete the update process. Updated applications usually only need to be restarted, while changes to Haiku itself may require a reboot of the system to take effect.
+
Dopo che si lu à inviât, SoftwareUpdater al controle se a esistin inzornaments pai pachets e ju mostre intune cu lis lôr gnovis versions e une curte descrizion. Tu puedis dîsi: Mostre plui detais par includi il non dal dipuesit par ogni pachet e mostrâ dutis dôs lis versions dai pachets, chê vecje e chê gnove.
+
Inzorne cumò al tacarà a discjariâ ducj i pachets e la lôr consecuente instalazion.
+
In base ai pachets che a son stâts inzornâts, si varà di tornâ a inviâ Haiku par fâ in mût che si completi il procès di inzornament. Par ce che al rivuarde lis aplicazions, al baste dome tornâ a inviâlis, invezit lis modifichis a Haiku stes par deventâ efetivis, a podaressin vê bisugne che il sisteme si torni a inviâ.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
StyledEdit
@@ -67,9 +68,9 @@
Impostazions:
nissune
-
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
StyledEdit al è l'editôr di test sempliç di Haiku. Aben che al salve i file intun formât di test sempliç, a vengin scrits atribûts adizionâi in mût di podê vê capacitâts di formatazion limitadis cuant che si viôt cun StyledEdit.
-
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
Se ti interesse, cussì al è ce mût che a parin chei atribûts adizionâi, cuant che si ju esamine tal Terminâl cun listattr:
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
Type Size Name
@@ -81,10 +82,10 @@ MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
Raw Data 1048 "styles"
1071 bytes total in attributes.
-
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
-
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
-
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
-
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
+
Di ce che tu puedis viodi, dutis lis opzions di formatazion dal menù di StyledEdit a son presintis: line wrapping (on/off) e alignment (left/center/right), ognidun un atribût. I stîi (caratar, dimension, colôr) di ogni letare a vegnin trasformâts intun altri atribût.
+
Par vie che chescj atribûts a son une funzionalitât dal filesystem di BFS, chest al significhe che no dome chês altris plateformis a viodaran dome un file di test sempliç, ma al ven fûr che la formatazion e larà pierdude cuant che un file al ven archiviât suntune partizion che no je BFS. I atribûts parsore a vegnin dome tirâts vie e ce che al reste al è l'ordenari file di test sempliç.
+
Dut câs, e je une biele idee chê di vê la pussibilitât di butà jù test colorât in caratars e dimensions diviersis pûr restant un normâl file di test. Duncje un ReadMe.txt, par esempli, si pues lei intune shell su cualsisei plateforme e vê ancjemò un tic di stîl cuant che si lu viôt in Haiku cuntun dopli-clic.
+
Però doprâ StyledEdit al è cetant sempliç, o saltarìn di spiegâ ogni element banâl dal menù. Al baste scrivi jù il to test, selezionâ lis peraulis che tu desideris formatâ e aplicâ il caratar, dimension e colôr dal menù Caratar. Rie gnove automatiche e l'inlineâ dal menù Document a funzionin dome su dut il file.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Terminal
+
Terminâl
Deskbar:
Applications
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/Terminal
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/config/settings/profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/profile
-~/config/settings/inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc
+~/config/settings/profile - al zonte/sorescrîf i predefinîts in /boot/system/settings/etc/profile
+~/config/settings/inputrc - al zonte/sorescrîf i predefinîts in /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc
-
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
-
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at Haiku's commandline applications. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
+
Il Terminâl al è la interface bash di Haiku, la Bourne Again Shell.
+
Par plasê fâs riferiment al argoment Scripting par cualchi colegament e lezion in rêt su ce mût che si lavore te shell e bute ancje un voli su Aplicazions a rie di comant di Haiku. Achì si concentrarìn te aplicazion Terminâl.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALTT.
Tu puedis vierzi tancj Terminâi che ti servin. Tu puedis fâ che ognun al vedi il so barcon, inviant in maniere semplice plui Terminâi o fracant ALTN suntun Terminâl za viert. Opûr tu puedis doprâ la viodude a schedis dal Terminâl e vierzi plui schedis cun ALTT.
-
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
-By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
-
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
-
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
-
All the settings you change directly through the Settings menu, like Window title, Window size, Text encoding or Font size are only kept for the current session. If you want to make permanent changes, you have to apply them in the Settings... panel.
+
Fasint dopli clic inte part vueide de sbare des schedis, al vierzarà une gnove schede; dopli clic suntune schede al vierzarà un dialic par cambiâ non al so titul. Si à diviersis variabilis designadis cun % che a vegnin spiegadis cuntun sugjeriment cuant che cul mouse tu passis parsore dal cjamp di test.
+In maniere predefinide, %1d: %p, une schede e mostre la cartele atuâl e, separade di un :, il non dal procès che in chel moment al è in esecuzion (o -- se al sta zirant dome bash, magari inatîf). La videade parsore e mostre la prime schede cuntune session FTP inte cartele Desktop e une seconde schede inative su home.
+Cun Impostazions | Titul barcon... inte stesse maniere si pues modificâ il titul dal barcon dal Terminal.
+
Fasint clic diestri suntune schede al ven mostrâ un menù contestuâl che ti permet di fâ Siere schede, Siere altris schedis o, come cul dopli clic, Modifiche titul schede....
+
Un barcon di Terminâl al pues jessi ridimensionât tant che cualsisei altri barcon opûr tu puedis doprâ i valôrs prestabilîts dal menù Impostazions | Dimensions dal barcon. ALTINVIE al comute la modalitât plen visôr.
+
Dutis lis impostazions che tu cambiis in maniere direte midiant il menù Impostazions, come il Titul barcon, Dimension dal barcon, Codifiche dal test o Dimension caratar a vegnin tignudis dome pe session atuâl. Se tu desideris rindi permanentis lis modifichis, tu âs di aplicâlis intal panel Impostazions....
Impostazions | Impostazions... al vierç un panel par configurâ lis impostazions standard di un Terminâl.
-
Most of the offered settings speak for themselves. Not entirely obvious though, the font size is set in the submenu of the Font popup menu.
-Hover your mouse over the "formulas" for naming tab and window titles to get tooltips for the available variables.
-You can choose pre-defined color schema like Midnight or Retro or create a Custom one by selecting which color you want to change (Text, Background, Cursor etc.) and then use the color picker below.
-
A few more options follow: you can have a Blinking cursor and choose to Allow bold text.
-Use left Option as Meta key if you work with certain UNIX software that relies on accessing an extended portion of the ASCII character set, like e.g. GNU Emacs and the GNU readline library.
-Activate the checkbox to Confirm exit if active programs exist and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
+
La plui part des impostazions ufiertis no àn bisugne di spiegazions. No dal dut clare invezit e je la dimension dal caratar che e ven stabilide intal sot-menù dal menù a tende Caratar.
+Se tu passis parsore cul mouse aes "formulis" par dâ un non ai titui des schedis e dai barcons al vignarà fûr un sugjeriment cu lis variabilis disponibilis.
+Tu puedis sielzi il scheme di colôrs predefinît come Miezegnot o Professionâl o creâ'nt un Personalizât selezionant il colôr che tu desideris cambiâ (Test, Fonts, Cursôr e vie indenant.) e duncje doprant il seletôr di colôr sot.
+
Pocjis altri opzions a vegnin dopo: tu puedis vê un Cursôr che al cimie (par fâ in mût che al lampi) e sielzi Permet test in neret.
+Dopre Opzion a çampe come tast Meta se tu lavoris cun determinâts software UNIX che si base sul acès a une porzion estese dal complès di caratars ASCII, come p.e. GNU Emacs e la librarie GNU readline.
+Ativâ la casele di selezion Domande conferme pe jessude se a esistin programs atîfs ti visarà cuant che si cîr di sierâ un barcon di Terminâl intant che une aplicazion e je ancjemò in esecuzion.
-
Save to file...
let's you save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
-
Torne indaûr
brings back the settings that were active when you opened the settings panel.
-
Predefinîts
al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Salve su file...
ti permet di salvâ lis impostazions diferentis come profîi separâts, che cuntun dopli-clic a vierzaran un Terminâl configurât in chê maniere.
+
Torne indaûr
al puarte indaûr lis impostazions a chês che a jerin ativis cuant che si à viert il panel des impostazions.
Another nice feature that is more a key & mouse combination: When holding ALT a path or URL under the mouse pointer gets highlighted. A left-click opens the file/folder or website. A right-click opens a context menu to either Copy path or Copy absolute path. Imagine you're in /MyData/source/haiku/ and have the path generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit under the mouse pointer, the latter menu item will result in the combined, absolute path <deep breath>: /MyData/source/haiku/generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit.
-
If you hold down ALTSHIFT, only the path from beginning to where your mouse pointer sits will be highlighted.
-
By the way, right-clicking into the Terminal window will insert the clipboard. In combination with copying parts of highlighted paths, this can be used for speedy navigation of deep folder hierarchies.
Une altre funzionalitât ninine che e je plui une cumbinazion di tascj e mouse: Cuant che si ten fracât ALT un percors o un URL che al sta sot dal pontadôr dal mouse al devente evidenziât. Un clic di çampe al vierç il file/cartele/sît web. Un clic di diestre al vierç un menù contestuâl che ti permet di fâ o Copie percors o Copie percors assolût. Fâs fente di jessi in /MyData/source/haiku/ e vê il percors generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit sot dal pontadôr dal mouse, l'ultin element dal menù al darà come risultât il percors cumbinât cun chel assolût <fâs un biel respîr>: /MyData/source/haiku/generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit.
+
Se tu tegnis fracât ALTMAIUSC, al vignarà evidenziât dome il toc di percors che, partint dal inizi, al rive fin dulà che si cjate il pontadôr dal mouse.
+
A proposit, fasint clic diestri intal barcon dal Terminâl si inserirà ce che si à intes notis. Cumbinant lis parts pe copie e evidenziazion dai percors, si pues sveltî la navigazion di jerarchiis di cartelis profondis.
Coming from Unix, there are countless possibilities to customize the bash itself. There are two files that are especially important to the user: profile and inputrc
-Both files can be created in the /boot/home/config/settings/ folder and add or override the system defaults that are defined in /boot/system/settings/etc/.
Rivant di Unix, si à tantis pussibilitâts di personalizâ bash che nissun sa. A son doi file che a son impuartants soredut pal utent: profile e inputrc
+Si puedin creâ ducj i doi i file inte cartele/boot/home/config/settings/ e zontâ o sorescrivi i predefinîts di sisteme che a son definîts in /boot/system/settings/etc/.
profile
-
The profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
-
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
+
Il profile al ven cjariât ogni volte che si vierç un gnûf Terminâl. Al stabilìs ducj i gjenars di alias e lis variabilis che a influenzaran il compuartament e l'aspiet di bash. Tu cjatarâs in rêt tantis risorsis che ti spiegaran tai detais lis pussibilitâts.
+
Tu puedis tacâ cjalant tal Haiku/BeOS Tip Server che al à cualchi consei, par esempli:
The inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
+
Il inputrc al à a ce fâ cu lis associazions di tascj. Stant che Haiku al furnìs za associazions predefinidis utilis, al è probabil che no tu vedis di pastielâ cun chestis impostazions plui complicadis. Se tu âs cualchi bisugne particolâr achì, consulte une des tants risorsis in rêt, p.e. La librarie GNU Readline.
Dragging a file or folder from a Tracker window into the Terminal will insert its path at the location of the cursor. Dragging with the right mouse button offers additional actions in a context menu:
Strissinant un file o une cartele di un barcon di Tracker sul Terminâl al inserirà il so percors aeposizion dal cursôr. Strissinant cul boton diestri dal mouse al da azions in plui intun menù contestuâl:
-
Insert path
Inserts the location of the file, same as drag & dropping with the left mouse button.
-
Change directory
Changes to the folder of the dragged file.
-
Create link here
Creates a link to the dragged file in the current working directory of the Terminal.
-
Move here
Moves the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
-
Copy here
Copies the dragged file into the current working directory of the Terminal.
+
Inserìs percors
Al inserìs la posizion dal file come che al sucêt strissinant e molant cul boton di çampe dal mouse.
+
Va ae cartele
Al va ae cartele dal file strissinât.
+
Cree colegament achì
Al cree un colegament al file strissinât inte cartele di lavôr atuâl dal Terminâl.
+
Sposte achì
Al sposte il file strissinât inte cartele di lavôr atuâl dal Terminâl.
+
Copie achì
Al copie il file strissinât inte cartele di lavôr atuâl dal Terminâl.
-
You can open any file with its preferred application with the command open [filename]. This also works with the representation of the current (".") and parent ("..") folder which then open in a Tracker window. So, to open the current working directory, you type:
+
Tu puedis viezi cualsisei file cu la sô aplicazion preferide midiant il comant open [non_file]. Chest al funzione ancje cu la rapresentazion des cartelis “atuâl” (".") e “superiôr” ("..") che si vierzaran intun barcon di Tracker. Cussì, par vierzi la cartele di lavôr atuâl, tu scrivis:
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
TextSearch
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on
+
Deskbar:
Nissune vôs, di solit inviât vie component adizionâl di Tracker
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/TextSearch
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/TextSearch
-
TextSearch looks for a string in text files. Typically it is invoked from Tracker's Add-on context menu on the selection of files or folders you want to search.
+
TextSearch al cîr une stringhe tai file di test. Di solit al ven invocât dal menù contestuâl dai components adizionâi di Tracker su la selezion dai file o des cartelis dulà che tu desideris cirî.
-
You enter a search string in the text box on top and hit RETURN or click Search to start. If Show lines is checked, the hits are automatically expanded to show the lines of the file containing the search string.
+
Tu inserissis une stringhe di ricercje inte casele di test parsore e tu frachis INVIE o tu fasis clic su Cîr par scomençâ. Se Mostre riis al è segnât, i risultâts a vegnin slargjâts in automatic par mostrâ lis riis dal file che a contegnin la stringhe di ricercje.
-
Only a few words on some of the otherwise self-explaining menu items:
+
Dome cualchi peraule su cualchi element dal menù che se no si spieghe di bessôl:
-
File menu
-
New window
ALTN
Opens a new window where you can enter another string and search through the same files/folders.
+
Menù File
+
Gnûf barcon
ALTN
Al vierç un gnûf barcon dulà che tu puedis cirî intal stes file/cartele une altre stringhe.
-
Set target...
ALTF
Lets you choose a new set of files and folders to search through. Alternatively you can drag and drop files/folders into the window.
-
Action menu
-
Trim selection
ALTT
Removes all entries from the list that are not currently selected.
-
Open selection
ALTO
Opens the currently selected files with their preferred application (same as a double-click). If it's a text editor supporting it (like Pe), you can jump to the exact line the search string was found.
-
Show files in Tracker
ALTK
Opens the location of the currently selected files in Tracker.
-
Copy text to clipboard
ALTB
Copies the current selection to the clipboard.
-
Settings menu
-
Skip folders starting with a dot
This is useful when working in a "unixy" environment, where often administrative files are hidden inside ".folders/". Source versioning systems like SVN and CVS are examples of applications using this and are also widely used in Haiku.
-
Regular expression
TextSearch uses the command line tool grep. For it, special characters like '"*\$?! and spaces have to be escaped with a \. Activating this setting means you have to do this yourself, but in exchange grants you the power of regular expressions.
-
Text files only
TextSearch is currently only useful for finding strings in plain text files. Deactivating this setting will have it look through any kind of file anyway.
-
Open files in code editor
Forces files to be opened in the preferred code editor (that handles text/x-source-code). Otherwise a file will be opened in whatever app is set for its filetype. Useful, for example, when editing HTML files that normally would open in your browser.
-
History menu
-
Contains recently used search strings.
-
Encoding menu
-
Lets you choose different character encodings if needed.
+
Stabilìs destinazion...
ALTF
Ti permet di sielzi un gnûf grup di file e cartelis dulà lâ a cirî. In alternative tu puedis strissinâ e molâ i file/cartelis intal barcon.
+
Menù Azions
+
Ridûs ae selezion
ALTT
Al gjave de liste dutis lis vôs che no son in chel moment selezionadis.
+
Vierç selezion
ALTO
Al vierç i file che in chel moment a son selezionâts, cu la lôr aplicazion preferide (tant che un dopli-clic). Se si trate di un editôr di test che lu supuarte (come Pe), tu puedis saltâ daurman ae rie esate dulà che e je stade cjatade la stringhe di ricercje.
+
Mostre i file tal Tracker
ALTK
Al vierç in Tracker la posizion dai file che in chel moment a son selezionâts.
+
Copie il test tes notis
ALTB
Al copie la selezione atuâl intes notis.
+
Menù Impostazions
+
Salte lis cartelis che a tachin cuntun pont
Chest al è util cuant che si lavore intun ambient dal gjenar "unix", dulà che dispès i file di aministrazion a vegnin platâts dentri di ".cartelis/". I sistemis pe gjestion des varis versions dai sorzints, come SVN e CVS, a son esemplis di aplicazions che ju doprin e chescj programs a vegnin doprâts une vore in Haiku.
+
Espression regolâr
TextSearch al dopre il strument a rie di comant grep. Par lui, i caratars speciâi come '"*\$?! e i spazis a scugnin jessi interpretâts cul caratar “escape” \. Ativâ cheste impostazion al significhe che tu scugnis fâlu di bessôl, ma di cuintri ti garantìs lis potenzialitâts des espressions regolârs.
+
Dome file di test
TextSearch cumò al è util dome par cirî stringhis tai file di test sempliçs. Se si disative che impostazion al cirarà dut câs su ogni gjenar di file.
+
Vierç i file tal editôr di codiç
Al sfuarce la vierzidure dai file intal editôr di codiç preferît (che al gjestìs text/x-source-code). In câs contrari un file al vignarà viert in cualsisei aplicazion stabilide pal so gjenar di file. Util, par esempli, cuant che si modifiche i file HTML che di solit a vegnin vierts cul navigadôr.
+
Menù Cronologjie
+
Al conten lis stringhis cirudis di resint.
+
Menù Codifiche
+
Ti permet di sielzi codifichis di caratar diviersis se a coventin.
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. More documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision homepage.
-
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
-The most frequented channel is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.net.
-
Some advice, especially if you're new to IRC:
+
Vision al è un client IRC disvilupât in origjin par BeOS. Documentazion adizionâl e un a bug tracker a son disponibii te pagjine dal sît di Vision.
+
Tu puedis cjatâ altris utents di Haiku o disvilupadôrs che ti dedin une man sui canâi Haiku in variis lenghis.
+Il canâl plui frecuentât al è chel dulà che si cjacare par inglês: #haiku su irc.freenode.net.
+
Cualchi consei, in particolâr se no tu cognossis i IRC:
-
Search the web for "IRC etiquette" to learn about the do's and don'ts of chatting. Without much searching, I found Getting help on IRC by Christoph Haas to be quite helpful.
-
By registering your nickname you make sure nobody can pull any shenanigans and you gain the trust of the residents. See Freenode's FAQ on that matter.
-
Set up a sound in Haiku's Sounds preferences to be notified if someone mentions your nickname. People don't always watch their IRC client screen. Putting the nickname of the person you're talking to at the beginning of what you're about to post increases your chance to be noticed. Similar to the Terminal, Vision supports tab-completion for nicknames, i.e. if you enter the starting letters of a nickname and press the tab key, Vision completes it with the first name that matches.
+
Cîr sul web "IRC etiquette" (etichete di IRC) par imparâ ce che si fâs e ce che no si fâs tes chat. Cence cirî masse, o ai cjatât che Getting help on IRC di Christoph Haas al sedi une vore util.
+
Regjistrant il to sorenon tu ti siguris che nissun al passi par te e cussì tu vuadagnarâs la fiducie dai residents. Viôt lis FAQ di Freenode in merit.
+
Configure un sun tes preferencis dai Suns in Haiku par vignî notificât se cualchidun al menzone il to sorenon. La int no ten di voli simpri il schermi dal client IRC. Se tu cjacaris cuntune persone, metint il so sorenon al inizi dal messaç che tu stâs par publicâ al aumente lis pussibilitâts di jessi notâts. In maniere simile al Terminâl, Vision al supuarte il completament cul tast tab pai sorenons, cussì se tu inserissis lis letaris iniziâls di un sorenon e tu frachis il tast tab, Vision lu complete cul prin non che si comet.
Tab-completion like in Terminal: After entering a few letters of a nickname, hitting TAB completes to the first matching nickname.
-
↑ / ↓
When the input control has focus, this will cycle through your recently entered text.
-
ALT↑ / ↓
Activates the window that appears above / below the currently active (selected) one in the "Window list"
-
SHIFTALT↑ / ↓
Similar to ALT↑ / ↓, but with a twist. Instead of activating the window immedietly above / below the current one, it looks ahead. If there are any windows with higher status bits then the current window, it jumps to those. It jumps to the highest found status bit first.
+
TAB
Completament-Tab tant che in Terminâl: dopo vê inserît cualchi letare di un sorenon, fracant TAB al ven completât cul prin sorenon che si comet.
+
↑ / ↓
Cuant che il control pe imission al è focalizât, chest al fasarà il cicli tra il test inserît di resint.
+
ALT↑ / ↓
Al ative il barcon che al ven fûr parsore / sot di chel cumò atîf (selezionât) inte "Liste dai barcons"
+
MAIUSCALT↑ / ↓
Simil a ALT↑ / ↓, ma cuntune diference impuartante. Ivezit di ativâ il barcon subite parsore / sot di chel atuâl, al viôt plui in là. Se si à cualsisei barcon cui bit di stât plui alts di chel atuâl, al passe a chei. Al salte prime al bit di stât plui alt cjatât.
-To understand this, you must know that Vision color codes windows in the list with different "status bits" depending on how its contents have changed since it last had focus:
+Par capî chest, tu scugnis savê che Vision al codifiche i barcons cun colôrs relatîfs ai diferents “bit di stât”, chescj colôrs si àn in base a ce mût che i contignûts di un barcon a son cambiâts de ultime volte che al è stât focalizât:
-
black - no new text
-
gray - new text, but nothing exciting (joins, parts, etc.)
-
green - someone has said something
-
red - someone has said something, and mentioned your nickname
+
neri - nissune rie di test gnove
+
grîs - gnûf test, ma nie di eclatant (jentradis, jessudis, e vie indenant)
+
vert - cualchidun al à dite alc
+
ros - cualchidun al à dite alc e menzonât il to sorenon
-Vision treats these with sequential priority. When you press SHIFTALT↑ / ↓, Vision will first jump to a red window above / below the current one if it sees one. If it doesn't see a red one, it will jump to a green one, and so on.
+Vision al trate chescj cun prioritât secuenziâl. Cuant che tu frachis MAIUSCALT↑ / ↓, Vision prime al passarà al barcon ros parsor /sot di chel atuâl, se 'nt cjate une. Se nol cjate un ros, al passarà a un vert, e vie indenant.
Chi si à une liste dai comants integrâts, cjapade cul permès dal sît web di Vision.
+
La sintassi:
-
/COMMAND
the command
-
<required>
a required parameter
-
[optional]
an optional parameter
-
|
a logical OR
-
...
more parameters possible
+
/COMMAND
il comant
+
<required>
un parametri necessari
+
[optional]
un parametri opzionâl
+
|
une OR (O) logjiche
+
...
plui parametris pussibii
/ABOUT
-Opens Vision's About window.
+Al vierç il barcon des informazions su Vision.
-
/ACRONYM [word]
-Opens www.acronymfinder.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
/ACRONYM [peraule]
+Al vierç www.acronymfinder.com cul program atuâl che al gjestìs i html. (Note: Se il gjestôr dal file html nol è un navigadôr, al vierzarà la aplicazion che e je stade specificade in “Gjenars di file”).
-
/AWAY [away-reason]
-Sets away status on current network. If no away reason is specified, it is set to 'BRB'. (be right back)
+
/AWAY [motîf]
+Al stabilìs il stât di assent te rêt atuâl. Se non ven dade nissune reson pal jessi assent, cheste e ven stabilide a 'BRB'. (o torni daurman, be right back par inglês)
/BACK
-Sets your status to 'back' on current network.
+Al stabilìs il stât di “tornât” te rêt atuâl.
/CLEAR
-Clears the contents of the current text buffer.
+Al nete i contignûts dal buffer di test atuâl.
-
/CTCP <nick|channel> <PING|VERSION|FINGER|TIME|CLIENTINFO|USERINFO>
-Executes the specified ctcp command on a channel or nick.
+
/CTCP <sorenon|canâl> <PING|VERSION|FINGER|TIME|CLIENTINFO|USERINFO>
+Al eseguìs il comant ctcp specificât su un canâl o sorenon.
-
/DCC <CHAT> <nick>
-Opens a private dcc chat session with the specified nick.
+
/DCC <CHAT> <sorenon>
+Al vierç une session di chat dcc privade cul sorenon specificât.
-
/DCC <SEND> <nick> [file]
-Sends a file to <nick>. If no file is specified, a File panel will open.
+
/DCC <SEND> <sorenon> [file]
+Al invie un file a <sorenon>. Se nol ven specificât un file, un panel pai File al vignarà vierzût.
-
/DEOP /DOP /DEVOICE <nick1> [nick2] ...
-De-ops or de-voices <nick(s)>.
+
/DEOP /DOP /DEVOICE <sorenon1> [sorenon2] ...
+Al gjave i dirits di operadôr o de vôs a <sorenon(s)>.
-
/DESCRIBE <nick> <message>
-Like a private /ME, only <nick> can see it.
+
/DESCRIBE <sorenon> <messaç>
+Come un /ME privât, dome <sorenon> lu pues viodi.
-
/DNS <domain name/IP address>
-Resolves the given IP or domain name.
+
/DNS <non domini/direzion IP>
+Al risolf il IP indicât o il non dal domini.
/EXIT
-Quits Vision.
+Al jes di Vision.
-
/GAWAY [away-reason]
-Same as /AWAY [away-reason], but applies to all connected networks.
+
/GAWAY [motîf]
+Compagn di /AWAY [motîf], ma al ven aplicât a dutis lis rêts che si è colegâts.
/GBACK
-Same as /BACK, but on applies to all connected networks.
+Compagn di /BACK, ma al ven aplicât a dutis lis rêts che si è colegâts.
-
/GOOGLE [search-string]
-Opens www.google.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
/GOOGLE [stringhe-di-cirî]
+Al vierç www.google.com cul program che al gjestìs i html. (Note: Se il program che al gjestìs i html nol è un navigadôr, al vierzarà la aplicazion che e je stade specificade in “Gjenar di file”).
-
/INVITE /I <nick> <channel>
-Invites <nick> to the <channel>.
+
/INVITE /I <sorenon> <canâl>
+Al invide <sorenon> su <canâl>.
-
/JOIN /J <channel> [channel-key]
-Joins the <channel>. Provide a [channel-key] if necessary.
+
/JOIN /J <canâl> [clâf-canâl]
+Si unìs al <canâl>. Indiche un [clâf-canâl] se necessari.
-
/KICK /K <nick> [reason]
-Kicks <nick> from current channel. If [reason] is not specified, it will be set to the reason specified in Preferences.
+
/KICK /K <sorenon> [motîf]
+Al pide fûr <sorenon> dal canâl atuâl. Se nol ven specificât un [motîf], chest al sarà chel specificât tes Preferencis.
-
/KILL <nick> [message]
-IRC operator command to disconnect a user from the network.
+
/KILL <sorenon> [messaç]
+comant dal operadôr IRC par disconeti de rêt un utent.
/LIST
-Opens a new view which lists all the channels on the current network. [except hidden channels]
+Al vierç une gnove viodude che e liste ducj i canâi de rêt atuâl. [fûr che i canâi platâts]
/M
-Displays the channel modes of the current channel.
+Al mostre lis modalitâts-canâl dal canâl atuâl.
-
/M < -ohvbeqa> <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Same as /MODE <channel> <modes> <nick>, but on current channel.
+
/M < -ohvbeqa> <sorenon1> [sorenon2] ...
+Compagn di /MODE <canâl> <modalitâts> <sorenon>, ma sul canâl atuâl.
/M <+-kfL,l,psmntirRcOAQKVHGCuzN>
-Same as /MODE <channel> <modes>, but on current channel.
+Compagn di /MODE <canâl> <modalitâts>, ma sul canâl atuâl.
-
/MODE <canâl> <+-ohvbeqa> <sorenon1> [sorenon2] ...
+Al stabilìs la modalitât par <sorenon(s)> su <canâl>.
+p.e. /MODE #canâl +o sorenon1
+o /MODE #canâl +oo-o sorenon1 sorenon2 sorenon3
-
/MODE <channel> <+-kfL,l,psmntirRcOAQKVHGCuzN>
-Sets the mode of <channel>. (Note: Commata just for optical separation.)
-e.g. /MODE #channel +ms
+
/MODE <canâl> <+-kfL,l,psmntirRcOAQKVHGCuzN>
+Al stabilìs la modalitât di <canâl>. (Note: cu lis virgulis dome pe separazion otiche.)
+p.e. /MODE #canâl +ms
-
/MSG <nick> <message>
-Sends a <message> to <nick>.
+
/MSG <sorenon> <messaç>
+Al invie un <messaç> a <sorenon>.
/NAMES
-Displays all channels and all nicks of the network in the network window. (Careful with this one)
+Al mostre ducj i canâi e ducj i sorenons de rêt intal barcon de rêt. (Fâs atenzion cun chest)
-
/NAMES <channel>
-Displays nick(s) in <channel>.
+
/NAMES <canâl>
+Al mostre i sorenons tal <canâl>.
-
/NICK <newnick>
-Changes your nick to <newnick>.
+
/NICK <gnûfsorenon>
+Al cambie il to sorenon a <gnûfsorenon>.
-
/NOTICE <nick> <message>
-Sends a notice to <nick> with the given <message>.
+
/NOTICE <sorenon> <messaç>
+Al invie une notifiche a <sorenon> cul <messaç> indicât.
/NOTIFY <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Adds <nick(s)> to your notify list.
+Al zonte <sorenon(s)> ae liste des notifichis.
-
/PEXEC /RRUN <app1> [ | <app2> | ... ]
-Executes the given <app>. If more than one application is provided, they will be executed in a pipe.
-e.g. /PEXEC Terminal | StyledEdit opens a new Terminal, and afterwards StyledEdit
-or /PEXEC ls -la ~/Downloads/ displays the contents of your ~/Downloads/ directory in the current window (Attention!)
+
/PEXEC /RRUN <aplicazion1> [ | <app2> | ... ]
+Al eseguìs la <aplicazion> indicade. Se e ven indicade plui di une aplicazion, a vignaran eseguidin in sucession (come intun tubo, “pipe” par inglês ) .
+e.g. /PEXEC Terminal | StyledEdit al vierç un gnûf Terminâl e dopo StyledEdit
+o /PEXEC ls -la ~/Downloads/ al mostre i contignûts de tô cartele ~/Downloads/ intal barcon atuâl (Atenzion!)
-
/OP /VOICE <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Ops or voices to <nick(s)>.
+
/OP /VOICE <sorenon1> [sorenon2] ...
+Al da i dirits di operadôr o ae vôs a <sorenon(s)>.
/PART
-Leaves current channel or network.
+Al lasse il canâl o la rêt atuâl.
-
/PING <nick>
-Pings the <nick> and returns the ping-time. Equivalent to /CTCP <nick> PING.
+
/PING <sorenon>
+Al fâs il ping al <sorenon> e al torne indaûr il timp di durade dal ping. Ecuivalent a /CTCP <sorenon> PING.
-
/QUERY /Q <nick> [message]
-Opens a query window on <nick>, optionally along with a [message].
+
/QUERY /Q <sorenon> [messaç]
+Al vierç un barcon di interogazion su <sorenon>, adun cuntun [messaç] opzionâl.
-
/QUIT /QUI [custom-quit-message]
-Quits current network. If [custom-quit-message] is not specified, the default set in Preferences will be used.
+
/QUIT /QUI [messaç-jessude-personalizât]
+Al jes de rêt atuâl. Se nol ven specificât [messaç-jessude-personalizât], e vignarà doprade la impostazion predefinide intes Preferencis.
-
/RAW /QUOTE <command|text>
-Sends a raw IRC command.
+
/RAW /QUOTE <comant|test>
+Al invie un comant IRC grês.
/RECONNECT
-Will reconnect you to the current network if the 47 automatic reconnection attempts have failed.
+Tu tornarâs a conetiti ae rêt atuâl se a son lâts strucjs i 47 tentatîfs automatics par tornâ a tacâsi.
-
/SLEEP <deciseconds>
-Causes current thread to sleep for the specified time ; for future scripting use.
+
/SLEEP <deciseconts>
+Al mande in polse il thread atuâl pal timp specificât (in decims di secont); par un ûs su script futûr.
/SQUIT
-IRC operator command to disconnect a server.
+Comant di operadôr IRC par disconeti un servidôr.
-
/TIME <nick>
-Returns local time of <nick>. Equivalent to /CTCP <nick> TIME.
+
/TIME <sorenon>
+Al torne indaûr la ore locâl di <sorenon>. Ecuivalent a /CTCP <sorenon> TIME.
-
/TOPIC /T [channel]
-Displays the topic of the current channel or, if provided, of <channel>.
+
/TOPIC /T [canâl]
+Al mostre l'argoment dal canâl atuâl o, se indicât, di <canâl>.
-
/TOPIC <channel> <new-channel-topic>
-Sets the topic of <channel> to <new-channel-topic>.
+
/TOPIC <canâl> <gnûf-argoment-canâl>
+Al stabilìs l'argoment dal <canâl> a <gnûf-argoment-canâl>.
-
/TOPIC <new-channel-topic>
-Same as /TOPIC <channel> <new-channel-topic>, but on current channel.
+
/TOPIC <gnûf-argoment-canâl>
+Come /TOPIC <canâl> <gnûf-argoment-canâl>, ma sul canâl atuâl.
-
/UNNOTIFY <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Removes <nick(s)> from your notify list.
+
/UNNOTIFY <sorenon1> [sorenon2] ...
+Al gjave <sorenon(s)> de tô liste des notifichis.
/UPTIME [-l]
-Displays the systems uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+Al mostre il timp in esecuzion dal sisteme. Se al ven specificât [-l], il timp in esecuzion al vignarà “scoltât” (mandât) in locâl e no inviât ae rêt.
/VERSION <nick>
-Returns the client-version of <nicks> IRC-client. Equivalent to /CTCP <nick> VERSION.
+Al torne indaûr la version dal client IRC di <sorenon>. Ecuivalent a /CTCP <sorenon> VERSION.
/VISIT <url>
-Opens <url> with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+Al vierç <url> cu la tô aplicazion par gjestî i html. (Note: se il gjestôr nol è un navigadôr, al vierç la aplicazion specificade in “Gjenars di file”).
-
/WEBSTER /DICTIONARY [word]
-Opens www.m-w.com (Merriam Webster) with your current html handler. (Note: If the handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+
/WEBSTER /DICTIONARY [peraule]
+Al vierç www.m-w.com (Merriam Webster) cul to gjestôr dai html. (Note: se il gjestôr nol è un navigadôr, al vierç la aplicazion specificade in “Gjenars di file”).
/VUPTIME [-l]
-Displays the Vision uptime. If [-l] is specified, the uptime will be echoed locally, and not sent to the network.
+Al mostre il timp in esecuzion di Vision. Se al ven specificât [-l], il timp in esecuzion al vignarà “scoltât” (mandât) in locâl e no inviât ae rêt.
/WALLOPS
-IRC operator command that sends a wallops message (visible to those with umode w active).
+Comant di operadôr IRC che al invie un messaç wallops (visibil par chei cun umode w atîf).
-
/WHOIS /W <nick>
-Returns whois information of <nick>.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
WebPositive
Deskbar:
Applications
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
-
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
+
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - File di configuration, cookie, cache e cronologjie di navigazion
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - Ducj i segnelibris come file singui
-
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
+
WebPositive, o scurtât Web+, al è il navigadôr web natîf di Haiku. Une part dal so non al è par fâ onôr al sempliç NetPositive di BeOS, chê altre part pe sô fonde moderne: WebKit. Cheste librarie a codiç viert (open source) par visualizâ HTML, e je il cûr ancje di altris navigadôrs cognossûts, tant che Safari di Mac OS X e Chrome di Google. Doprant WebKit, che al è in continue evoluzion, Web+ al rivarà a lâ pâr a pâr cu lis gnovis tecnologjiis web.
-
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
-Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
-Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
-At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
-
Settings
-
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
La interface di WebPositive e je avonde semplice: Sot de sbare dai menù e je une altre sbare, lì si à botons par navigâ tra i sîts precedents e chei sucessîfs de tô cronologjie di navigazion, par fermâ il cjariament di une pagjine e (come opzion) un boton par saltâ ae tô pagjine iniziâl.
+Dopo al rive il cjamp pe direzion dulà che si inserìs un URL di sît.
+Sot di cheste sbare di navigazion a vegnin fûr lis pagjinis web. Tu puedis vierzi tantis pagjinis in paralêl cjariantlis intes lôr propriis schedis.
+In bas tal barcon si à une sbare di stât, che e mostre il URL dal sît cjariât o dal colegament che al sta sot dal pontadôr dal mouse. Intant che une pagjine e ven cjariade, une sbare di avanzament e ven fûr a diestre.
+
Impostazions
+
Dal menù Barcon tu puedis vierzi un panel Impostazions par configurâ cualchi element essenziâl di WebPositive.
-
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
-Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
-Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
-Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
-
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
-
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
-
Browsing
-
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
La prime schede e à a ce fâ cu lis impostazions gjenerâls: Cuâl file o URL al servìs tant che Pagjine iniziâl, Ce che si à di doprâ come Pagjine di ricercje, cuale Cartele dai file discjariâts doprâ pe robe che tu otegnis de rêt.
+Doi menù a tende ti permetin di decidi cuale pagjine cjariâ - se si 'nd à cualchidune - cuant che si vierç un gnûf barcon o schede.
+Gracie aes caselis di selezion lì sot tu puedis evitâ di mostrâ la sbare des schedis cuant che e je vierte dome une pagjine. Si pues dî ae interface di WebPositive di platâsi in automatic cuant che si è in modalitât plen visôr, e si pues platâ in automatic il pontadôr dal mouse ogni volte che nol ven mot par un pôc.
+Ae fin, tu puedis decidi se includi il boton "Inizi" (chel de cjasute) inte sbare di navigazion e stabilî par trops dîs che il navigadôr al à di visâsi i sîts che tu âs visitât, lassantju inte sô cronologjie.
+
Inte seconde schede tu puedis sielzi i caratars doprâts in maniere predefinide, i caratars serif, no-serif e a spaziadure fisse e stabilî lis lôr dimensions predefinidis.
+
La ultime schede e ven doprade par configurâ li servidôr proxy.
+
Sgarfâ
+
Se prime di cumò tu âs za doprât un cualsisei navigadôr, WebPositive nol varès di creâti masse sorpresis. Invezit di lâ a viodi ogni element e funzionalitât dai menù, din une voglade juste a cualchi pont.
-
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
-
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background. Holding SHIFT while middle-clicking, opens it in the foreground.
-
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
-
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
Lis gnovis schedis a vegnin creadis cul boton + a diestre inte sbare des schedis opûr, se si à ancjemò vonde spazi, fasint dopli clic suntune sô aree vueide. Se si à viertis plui schedis di chês che a puedin stâ inte sbare, i botons di scoriment <> a deventin atîfs, permetint cussì di scori la sbare des scedis a çampe e a drete. il boton ∨ plui in là a diestre al ospite un menù a tente cun dutis lis schedis viertis, par vê une navigazion ancjemò plui svelte.
+
Fasint clic suntun colegament cul boton centrâl dal mouse al vierzarà la pagjine intune gnove schede in sotfont. Tignint MAIUSC intant che si fâs il clic centrâl, lu vierç in prin plan.
+
Dal menù Viodude tu puedis fâ Aumente dimension e Diminuìs dimension di une pagjine. Si à ancje la opzion par dî Ingrandìs dome il test, lassant dutis lis imagjins aes lôr dimensions origjinâls.
+
Se tu passis ae modalitât plen visôr e tu âs ativât la impostazion par platâ la interface, chê e sparirà dopo un secont. Par fâle vignî fûr un moment, al baste spostâ il pontadôr te te part superiôr dal schermi.
-
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
-Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
-
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
-
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
Intant che tu scrivis intal cjamp di test pes direzions web, il navigadôr al cumbine la stringhe cui sîts che tu âs za visitât e ju liste lì sot. Tu puedis continuâ a zontâ letaris, cussì di scurtâ la liste opûr sielzi une vôs cun ↑ o ↓. INVIE al cjariarà la pagjine. Tu puedis ancje doprâ il boton lontan a diestre che al servìs par tornâ a cjariâ la pagjine.
+Lis stringhis che no vegnin ricognossudis tant che URL a vignaran cirudis in Google, cussì il cjamp pe direzion al doplee la sô funzion tant che rapide scurte pes ricercjis sul web.
+
Fasint clic diestri si vierç un menù contestuâl che, in base al ogjet che si à fat clic, al ufrìs la pussibilitât di vierzi il colegament intung gnûf barcon o intune gnove schede, discjariâ l'ogjet e vie indenant.
+
Modifiche | Cjate al mostre une sbare di ricercje in bas par scomençâ une ricercje inte pagjine. I risultâts inte pagjine che a corispuindin a vegnin evidenziâts.
-
Bookmarks
-
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
Segnelibris
+
I segnelibris di WebPositive a vegnin gjestîts in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/, tant che i file e lis cartelis. Zontant un segnelibri si crearà lì un gnûf file. Tu puedis vierzi daurman la cartele cun Gjestìs segnelibris....
-
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
-
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
-Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
-
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
-
Downloads
-
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
Tu puedis cambiâ un URL di segnelibri, un non, un titul e inserî peraulis clâf juste come cualsisei altri file: cui atribûts. Siguriti dome di vê visualizadis dutis lis lôr colonis midiant il menù Attributes di Tracker, dopo selezione un file, frache ALTE e tache a modificâ l'atribût; cambie lis colonis dai atribûts cun TAB. Tu puedis ordenâ i segnelibris in cartelis diviersis che tu puedis creâ tu stes.
+
Doprant Tracker par gjestî e navigâ tra i segnelibris tu puedis zovâti des sôs funzionalitât unichis par cirî cun rapiditât ce che ti interesse.
+Ativant il filtri scriture anticipade intes preferencis di Tracker, tu puedis intun lamp scurtâ la liste dai segnelibris in base ae tô stringhe-filtri. Cun cualchi ↑ o ↓ par spostâ la selezion e fracant INVIE al vierzarà il sît. Sigurit di visualizâ dutis lis colonis dai atribûts par vê il filtri aplicât al non, titul, URL e peraulis clâf.
+
Par che chest al funzioni, ducj i segnelibris a àn di sei tignûts inte cartele ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ e dome lis copiis a àn di jessi ordenadis in sot-cartelis personalizadis pal ûs intal menù Segnelibris di WebPositive (in câs). In plui, meti atribûts di peraulis clâf al jude...
+
File discjariâts
+
Barcon | File discjariâts al vierç un barcon che al liste ducj i discjariaments passâts e in vore:
-
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
-
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
-Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
-
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
-
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
-
Keyboard shortcuts
-
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
+
I file che si sta discjariant a vegnin mostrât cuntune sbare di avanzament che e cres e, in maniere simile al copiâ i file in Tracker, informazions su la velocitât di discjariament, la dimension dal file e l'ore previodude di fin. I botons a diestre ti permetin di fâ sui discjariaments Anule e Torne invie, o Vierç par vierzi il file, o Gjave par gjavâ la sô vôs de liste. I botons Gjave mancjants e Gjave completâts in bas a eseguissin chês azions su dutis lis vôs de liste. “Mancjants” a son i file che intant a son za stâts eliminâts.
+
Spostâ te Scovacere un file che si sta discjariant al fermarà il discjariament. Tu notarâs ancje, che la sô icone e devente “smamide”.
+In gjenerâl, WebPositive al è une vore tolerant cuant che si trate di gjestî i file cun Tracker. Si pue cambiâ i nons ai file o spostâju ancje intant che si ju sta discjariant e ancje dopo finît di discjariâ, chestis modifichis si rifletin tal barcon dai File discjariâts.
+
No tu ti impensis di cuâl sît tu âs discjariât chel pachet, imagjin o cualsisei altri file? Tu puedis rivâ a vê chê informazion vierzint Scandai dal disc e butâ un voli al so atribût META:url.
+
Desideristu vê simpri in viste il URL inte tô cartele dai file discjariâts? Al baste copiâ un segnelibri dentri, vê mostrade la colone dal atribût URL di un segnelibri e tornâ a gjaviâ il segnelibri.
+
Scurtis di tastiere
+
Chi e je cualchi scurte di tastiere utile:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
-
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
-
ALTN
Opens a new window.
-
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
-
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
-
ALTH
Opens the home page.
-
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
-
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
-
ALTB
Bookmarks the current page.
-
ALTM
Manage bookmarks, opening the Bookmarks folder.
-
ALT←
Previous page in the history.
-
ALT→
Next page in the history.
+
ALTT
Al vierç une gnove schede.
+
ALTW
Al siere la schede atuâl.
+
ALTN
Al vierç un gnûf barcon.
+
MAIUSCALTW
Al siere il barcon atuâl.
+
ALTINVIE
Al comute la modalitât plen visôr.
+
ALTR o F5
Al inzorne la pagjine atuâl.
+
ALTH
Al vierç la pagjine iniziâl.
+
ALTD
Al mostre/plate il barcon File discjariâts.
+
ALTF
Al mostre la sbare “cjate” pes ricercjis te-pagjine (plate cun ESC).
+
ALTB
Al met tai segnelibris la pagjine atuâl.
+
ALTM
Gjestî i segnelibris, vierzint la cartele dai segnelibris.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Il Boot Loader
-
Lis opzions dal Boot Loader di Haiku a puedin judâ cuant che si à a ce fâ un problemis di hardware opûr cuant che si à plui instalazions di Haiku e si desidere sielzi cuale instalazion di Haiku fâ partî (par esempli un CD di instalazion o une clavute USB). Al è ancje utile se si à instalât un component software che al impedìs di inviâ Haiku e duncje di gjavâlu, viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot.
+
Lis opzions dal Boot Loader di Haiku a puedin judâ cuant che si à a ce fâ cun problemis di hardware opûr cuant che si à plui instalazions di Haiku e si desidere sielzi cuale instalazion di Haiku fâ partî (par esempli un CD di instalazion o une clavute USB). Al è ancje util se si à instalât un component software che al impedìs di inviâ Haiku e duncje di gjavâlu, viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot.
Par jentrâ tes Opzions dal Boot Loader, tu âs di tignî fracât il tast MAIUSC prime che al tachi il procès di inviament di Haiku. Se al è instalât un gjestôr di inviament, tu puedis tacâ a tignî fracât MAIUSC prime di invocâ la vôs dal menù par Haiku. Se Haiku al è l'unic sisteme operatîf inte machine, tu puedis tacâ a fracâ il tast bielzà cuant che tu viodis i messaçs di inviament dal BIOS.
Sui computer che a doprin UEFI pal inviament al puest dal classic BIOS, tu scugnis doprâ invezit la SBARE DI SPAZI.
@@ -77,34 +76,34 @@
Select safe mode options
A son diviersis opzions di provâ tal câs di un probleme hardware o se il sisteme al devente instabil o no si pues inviâ par vie di un compuartament sbaliât di un component zontât. Cuant che si sposte la sbare di selezion suntune opzion, e ven fûr une curte spiegazion in bas tal schermi.
Safe mode
- Puts the system into safe mode. This can be enabled independently from the other options.
+ Al met il sisteme in modalitât sigure. Chest al pues jessi abilitât in maniere indipendente des altris opzions.
Disable user add-ons
- Prevents all user installed add-ons from being loaded. Only the add-ons in the system directory will be used. See Troubleshooting below.
+ Al impedìs il cjariament di dutis lis zontis (add-on) instaladis dal utent. Dome lis zontis inte cartele di sisteme a vignaran dopradis. Viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot.
Disable IDE DMA
- Disables IDE DMA, increasing IDE compatibility at the expense of performance.
+ Al disabilite il DMA dal IDE, aumentant la compatibilitât IDE al cost des prestazions.
Ignore memory beyond 4 GiB
- Ignores all memory beyond the 4 GiB address limit, overriding the setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Al ignore dute la memorie che e supere il limit di direzion di 4 GiB, passant parsore de impostazion tal file des impostazions dal kernel.
Use fail-safe graphics driver
- The system will use VESA mode and won't try to use any video graphics drivers.
+ Il sisteme al doprarà la modalitât VESA e no cirarà di doprâ nissun driver grafic di schede video.
Disable IO-APIC
- Disables using the IO APIC for interrupt routing, forcing the use of the legacy PIC instead.
+ Al disabilite l'ûs dal IO APIC pal indreçament dai interrupt, sfuarçant invezit l'ûs dal PIC vecje maniere.
Disable local APIC
- Disables using the local APIC, also disables SMP.
+ Al disabilite l'ûs dal APIC locâl, al disabilite ancje il SMP.
Disable X2APIC
- Disables second generation APIC.
+ Al disabilite la seconde gjenerazion di APIC.
Disable SMEP and SMAP
- Disables SMEP/SMAP security features of the CPU.
+ Al disabilite lis funzionalitâts di sigurece SMEP/SMAP de CPU.
Disable SMP
- Disables all but one CPU core.
+ Al disabilite ducj i cûrs de CPU infûr di un.
Don't call the BIOS
- Stops the system from calling BIOS functions.
+ Al ferme il sisteme dal clamâ lis funzions dal BIOS.
Disable APM
- Disables Advanced Power Management hardware support, overriding the APM setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Al disabilite il supuart hardware dal Advanced Power Management (gjestion alimentazion avanzade), passant parsore de impostazion APM tal file des impostazions dal kernel.
Disable ACPI
- Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface hardware support, overriding the ACPI setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Al disabilite il supuart hardware dal Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (configurazion avanzade e interface di alimentazion), passant parsore de configurazion ACPI intal file des impostazions dal kernel.
Blacklist entries
- Allows to select system files that shall be ignored. Useful e.g. to disable drivers temporarily. See Troubleshooting below.
+ Al permet di selezionâ i file di sisteme che si à di ignorâ. Util p.e. par disabilitâ i driver in mût temponi. Viôt la Risoluzion dai problemis chi sot.
Select debug options
Chi tu cjatarâs diviersis opzions che a judin cul debug o a vê detais par fâ une segnalazion di erôr. Di gnûf, une curte spiegazion par ogni opzion e ven mostrade in bas.
Enable serial debug output
@@ -167,7 +166,7 @@ I simbui diferents a corispuindin sù par jù a chestis fasis:
diff --git a/userguide/fur/contents.html b/userguide/fur/contents.html
index 1b924819..57b7984e 100644
--- a/userguide/fur/contents.html
+++ b/userguide/fur/contents.html
@@ -4,24 +4,26 @@
- Haiku User Guide - Contents
+ Vuide utent di Haiku - Contignûts
-
User guide
+
Vuide utent
@@ -56,11 +58,11 @@
-
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
+
La traduzion di cheste pagjine no je ancjemò finide. Spietant che lu sedi, pes parts che no son finidis, dopre la version origjinâl par Inglês.
-
Welcome to the Haiku User Guide
+
Benvignûts te Vuide Utent di Haiku
-
Below, you'll find the documentation of the most important aspects of Haiku. Naturally, completing and extending the documentation is a continuing process (see the online version for updated pages and translations). If you find errors, would like to suggest topics or maybe even contribute yourself, please get in touch on the documentation mailing list. If you're interested in helping with translations, you'll find information on that at the i18n user guide wiki.
+
Chi sot, tu cjatarâs la documentazion dai plui impuartants aspiets di Haiku. Sigûr, completâ e ingrandî la documentazion al è un lavôr cence soste (bute un voli ae version online pes pagjinis inzornadis e voltadis te tô lenghe). Se tu cjatis erôrs, o tu desideris sugjerî alc o magari ancje contribuî al progjet, par plasê contate la mailing list de documentazion. Se tu sês interessât a judâ cu lis traduzions, tu cjatarâs informazions in merit sul wiki de vuide utent i18n.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Tabele
@@ -75,8 +74,7 @@
Il Deskbar al è chel piçul panel che in maniere predefinide si cjate tal angul in alt a drete dal schermi. Al è la version di Haiku de sbare des ativitâts di Windows cul so boton Start. Al conten il menù di Deskbar di dulà che si pues inviâ aplicazions e preferencis, une guantiere cuntun orloi e sot di chel, altris struments. In bas, une liste dai programs atualmentri in esecuzion.
-
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray (see arrows above) and drag & drop it into the new position.
-You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag & dropping the knobbly area onto Deskbar's Leaf menu. Being only the height of a regular window tab, even windows that take up the whole screen won't obscure the Deskbar tray with its clock and icons.
+
Tu puedis spostâ il Deskbar in cualsisei angul o, tant che une sbare, vêlu dilunc l'ôr superiôr o inferiôr dal schermi. Par spostâlu al baste cjapâlu te aree cui groputs che e sta intune bande de guantiere (viôt la figure parose) e strissinâlu inte gnove posizion. Tu puedis ancje striçâlu intune disposizion plui compate strissinant la aree cui groputs sul menù cu la fuee dal Deskbar. Vint la altece de lenghete di un barcon regolâr, ancje i barcons slargjâts al massim no oscurin la vuantiere dal Deskbar cu lis sôs iconis e l'orloi.
Cjapant chel altri widget cui groputs de guantiere, tu puedis cambiâ la largjece dal Deskbar strissinant il mouse a drete o a çampe:
Un Deskbar plui larc al permet tantis plui iconis par rie te guantiere. In diplui al cjonce cetant di mancul i nons luncs des aplicazions inte liste dai programs in esecuzion, In particolâr se si dopre iconis plui grandis.
@@ -127,8 +125,8 @@ Tu creis un colegament de cartele dal menu in Barcon
Tal ultin, lis preferencis pal barcon dal Deskbar.
-
Simpri denant
Il Deskbar al starà simpri parsore dai altris barcons.
-
Tire sù in automatic
The Deskbar pops to the front when the mouse pointer touches where the Deskbar meets the screen edge, and is lowered when it leaves the Desktop area.
+
Simpri denant
Il Deskbar al starà simpri parsore dai altris barcons.
+
Tire sù in automatic
Il Deskbar al ven parât denant se il pontadôr dal mouse al va a tocjâ i ôrs dal schermi che il Deskbar al condivît e al ven parât sot cuant che il mouse al lasse la aree dal Deskbar.
Plate in automatic
Il Deskbar al ven ridusût a dome cualchi pixel e al comparirà dome se il pontadôr dal mouse ju tocjarà.
@@ -136,7 +134,7 @@ Tu creis un colegament de cartele dal menu in La guantiere
-
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
+
Par altri, la guantiere e ospite l'orloi. Passe parsore dal orloi cul mouse par visualizâ la date intun fumet. Fâs clic di çampe su di lui par mostrâ un calendari. Fâs clic di diestre par platâ/mostrâ l'orloi o par inviâ lis preferencis su Ore e par configurâlu.
Ducj i programs a puedin instalâ une icone te guantiere par furnî al utent une interface. Il sisteme e-mail, par esempli, al mostre un simbul diferent cuant che si à pueste no lete e al ufrìs un menù contestuâl par (par esempli) creâ o controlâ se si à gnove pueste. Controlôr dai procès al è un altri esempli che al dopre la sô icone te guantiere par dâ informazions (CPU/memorie doprade) e par ufrî un menù contestuâl.
@@ -145,9 +143,9 @@ Tu creis un colegament de cartele dal menu in
Tu puedis passâ a une specifiche aplicazion in esecuzion fasint clic su la sô vôs tal Deskbar e sielzint il so/un dai soi barcons dal sot-menù. Fasint clic diestri tu puedis Platâ/Mostrâ ducj i barcons opûr Sierâ dut e cun lôr la aplicazion interie.
Un MAIUSCCTRL clic suntune aplicazion al plate ducj i siei barcons, un CTRL clic ju torne a mostrâ.
-
When using the "expander" setting to show all windows of an application, you can middle-click on a window or app to start a new instance. For example, middle-clicking a running StyledEdit will open a new document window.
-Maybe more useful: while holding SHIFT, a middle-click on a window closes it. Handy when you'd like to close some of many open Tracker windows, for example.
-
Sometimes an application may hang and even though all its windows are gone, the entry in the list of running applications in the Deskbar just won't disappear. In such a situation you use the Vulcan Death Grip to get rid of it: hold SHIFTCTRLALT and click on the offending entry in the Deskbar. Fascinating!
+
Cuant che tu dopris la impostazion "estensôr" par mostrâ ducj i barcons di une aplicazion, tu puedis fâ clic-centrâl suntun barcon o aplicazion par fâ partî une gnove istance. Par esempli, fasint clic centrâl su un StyledEdit in esecuzion, al vierzarà un gnûf barcon-document.
+Forsit plui util: intant che si ten fracât MAIUSC, un clic centrâl suntun barcon lu fâs sierâ. Al va ben cuant che tu desideris sierâ un pôcs dai tancj barcons vierts di Tracker, par esempli.
+
Cualchi volte une aplicazion e podarès plantâsi e, ancje se i siei barcons si son sierâts, la vôs, inte liste dal Deskbar pes aplicazions in esecuzion, no sparirà. In chel câs tu dopris la Smuarse de Muart Vulcaniche par risolvi il probleme: ten fracât MAIUSCCTRLALT e fâs clic te vôs incriminade tal Deskbar. Fantastic!
Se tu âs ativât i Espansôrs tes impostazions dal Deskbar, tu puedis espandi/striçâ la liste dai barcons subite sot de vôs di une aplicazion.
Denant di ogni barcon de aplicazion al è un simbul che al da informazions sul so stât. Un simbul clâr al significhe che al è un barcon visibil, un scûr che al minimizât. Trê liniis denant di un simbul al indiche che nol sta sul spazi di lavôr atuâl.
@@ -157,7 +155,7 @@ Maybe more useful: while holding SHIFT, a middle-click
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
LaunchBox
@@ -65,39 +66,39 @@
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/LaunchBox/*
-
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag & drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
Al è pussibil inviâ une o plui applet di LaunchBox par organizâ lis scurtis aes tôs aplicazion prefereidis o ai tiei documents. Tu decidis tu par ognune di lôr se e àn di sei viodudis su ducj i spazis di lavôr o dome su chel atuâl. A puedin ancje servî par vierzi daurman un document intune aplicazion specifiche. Par esempli, tu puedis strissinâ e molâ un file HTML suntun editôr di test metût dentri di un LaunchBox, par vierzilu ta chel editôr invezit che la sô aplicazion preferide, il navigadôr.
-
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
Dal menù contestuâl si rive a dutis lis opzions:
-
Add button here
Adds an empty button.
-
Clear button
Empties a button.
-
Remove button
Removes a button.
-
Set description...
Hovering the mouse over an icon shows a tooltip with the file's name and, in case of an application, its short description if it differs from its name (see topic FileTypes). With this menu item you can customize the description for this tooltip.
-
Settings
-- Horizontal layout
-- Icon size
-- Ignore double-click
-- Show window border
-- Autostart
-- Auto raise
-- Show on all workspaces
-Aligns the buttons horizontally.
-Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
-Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
-Shows the window border.
-Starts LaunchBox automatically on boot-up.
-LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
-Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+
Zonte boton achì
Al zonte un boton vueit.
+
Nete boton
Al disvuede un boton.
+
Gjave boton
Al gjave un boton.
+
Stabilìs descrizion...
Passant parsore di une icone cul mouse al ven mostrât un fumet cul jenfri il non dal file e, tal câs di une aplicazion, une sô curte descrizion se e je divierse dal so non (viôt l'argoment Gjenars di file). Cun cheste vôs dal menù tu puedis personalizâ la descrizion par chest fumet.
+
Impostazions
+- Disposizion orizontâl
+- Dimension icone
+- Ignore dopli-clic
+- Mostre l'ôr dal barcon
+- Auto-invie
+- Tire sù in automatic
+- Mostre su ducj i spazis di lavôr
+Al met in rie i botons in orizontâl.
+Al stabilìs la dimension de icone tra 16 e 64 pixel.
+Al invie l'ogjet dome une volte, ancje cuant che tu fasis (per erôr) dopli-clic.
+Al mostre l'ôr dal bacon.
+Al fâs partî LaunchBox in automatic cuant che il computer si invie.
+LaunchBox si alce se il mouse al è dongje dal ôr dal schermi.
+Al mostre LaunchBox su ducj i spazis di lavôr.
Pad
-- New
+- Gnûf - Clone
-- Close
-Add a new pad.
-Duplicate the current pad.
-Close the current pad.
+- Siere
+Zonte un gnûf pad.
+Dupliche il pad atuâl.
+Siere il pad atuâl.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
NetworkStatus
+
Stât de Rêt
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus
Impostazions:
nissune
-
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+
“Stât de Rêt” al mostre il stât des tôs conessions di rêt. Se nol è ancjemò in esecuzion, inviant la applet ti domandarà se la à di vierzisi in modalitât barcon o “vivi” tal Deskbar. In modalitât barcon tu puedis ridimensionâ la icone ridimensionant il barcon e doprâ la mantie dal replicant par strissinalu sul scritori.
+Pardut là che tu lu instalis, al ven doprât cuntun menù contestuâl, vie clic diestri.
-The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
-Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
-Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
+La prime sezion e conten i nons di ducj i dispositîfs di rêt e il lôr stât. Fasint clic suntune di chês vôs al fâs vignî fûr un barcon che al mostri lis sôs direzions di IP, trasmission e mascare di rêt.
+Sot si à une liste cun dutis lis rêts cence fîi cjatadis cul prin adatadôr wireless e un indicadôr de fuarce dal lôr segnâl. Bute un vole al Laboratori: rêts cence fîi par vê plui informazions su ce mût configurâ une conession.
+Par ultin, tu puedis fâ Vierç lis preferencis di rêt... par cambiâ la tô configurazion de rêt o par jessî de applet cun Jes.
-
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
PowerStatus
+
Stât de Batarie
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/PowerStatus
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/PowerStatus settings
-
PowerStatus shows information about the battery level, so it's only useful on mobile computers. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-
Note: PowerStatus requires a working ACPI support.
+
Stât de Batarie al mostre lis informazions in merit al nivel di cjarie de batarie, duncje al è util dome sui computer portatii. Se nol è in esecuzion, inviant la applet cheste e domandarà se e à di vierzisi in modalitât barcon o “vivi” tal Deskbar. In modalitât barcon tu puedis ridimensionâ la icone ridimensionant il barcon e doprâ la manite dal Replicant par strissinâlu sul scritori.
+Pardut là che tu lu instalis, al ven doprât cuntun menù contestuâl, vie clic diestri.
+
Note: Stât de Batarie al à bisugne che al funzioni il supuart ACPI.
-
The context menu offers these options:
+
Il menù contestuâl al ufrìs chestis opzions:
-
Show text label
Shows battery level in percent or remaining time.
-
Show status icon
Shows icon of the applet.
-
Show percent / time
Switch between showing battery level in percent or remaining time (Show text label has to be active).
-
Battery info...
Shows the extended battery info window.
-
About...
Shows the About window.
-
Quit
Quits the PowerStatus applet.
+
Mostre etichete di test
Al mostre il nivel de batarie in percentuâl o il timp che al reste.
+
Mostre icone di stât
Al mostre la icone de applet.
+
Mostre percentuâl / timp
Passe tra la visualizazion dal nivel de batarie in percentuâl a chê dal timp che al reste (Mostre etichete di test al à di jessi atîf).
+
Informazions batarie...
Al mostre il barcon cu lis informazions completis de batarie.
+
Informazions...
Al mostre il barcon cu lis informazions sul program.
+
Jes
Al siere la applet Stât de Batarie.
-
When Show text label is active, the battery level is shown in brackets while charging.
+
Cuant che Mostre etichete di test al è atîf, se la batarie e je in cjarie, il nivel de batarie al ven mostrât tra parentesis.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
ProcessController
+
Controlôr dai procès
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Posizion:
/boot/system/apps/ProcessController
Impostazions:
nissune
-
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
Indicators on the left show each CPU's usage, while the bar on the right shows the memory consumption. Remember that the number of indicators depend on the number of processors/cores in the computer.
-
If not yet running, launching ProcessController asks if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you can resize the bar-display by resizing the window and then use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever it's installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
-To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in the Deskbar in its context menu.
-
Quit an application
+
Il compit principâl de applet “Controlôr dai procès” al è chel di mostrâ la ativitât dal/des to(s) CPU e la cuantitât di memorie doprade. Ti permet di monitorâ singui team, cambiâ la lôr prioritât, e copâju se il program si bloche. Intai ambients multi-processôrs ti permet di disabilitâ singui processôrs/core. Cuant che Tracker o Deskbar a colassin tu puedis tornâ a inviâju dal menù di Controlôr dai procès.
+
I indicadôrs a çampe a mostrin la utilizazion di ogni CPU, Invezit la sbare a diestre e mostre la memore consumade. Visiti che il numar di indicadôrsa al dipent dal numar di processôrs/core dal to computer.
+
Se nol è ancjemò in esecuzion, inviant “Controlôr dai procès” al domandarà se si à di vierzilu in modalitât barcon o “vivi” tal Deskbar. In modalitât barcon tu puedis ridimensionâ la visualizazion des sbaris ridimensionant il barcon e dopo doprâ la mantie dal Replicant par strissinâlu sul scritori.
+Pardut là che tu lu instalis, al ven doprât cuntun menù contestuâl, vie clic diestri.
+Par tornâ a gjavâ la applet dal Deskbar, deselezione tal so menù contestuâl Vîf tal Deskbar.
+
Sierâ une aplicazion
-
To quit an application just choose its name from the Quit an application menu. This is a clean way to close app, just like clicking its close button. Be careful not to quit system processes like servers or daemons, however. Your system may stop working reliably.
-
Memory usage
+
Par sierâ di une aplicazion al baste sielzi il so non dal menù Siere une aplicazion. Chest al è un mût net par sierâ aplicazions, tant che fâ clic sul so boton par sierâ. Dut câs, sta atent a no sierâ procès di sisteme o demonis. La afidabilitât dal sisteme e podarès jessi comprometude.
+
Ûs de memorie
-
Monitoring memory usage can be rather inaccurate.
-
This menu allows you to monitor memory usage of different teams in your system. Next to the team's name there are two columns: first with the amount reserved for writable memory, while the second shows all memory including read-only space (shared libraries for example).
-
The first row System resources & caches... shows the total amount of memory used by the system and all applications. The length of the blue bar is based on the total physical memory in your computer. The next rows show memory used by each process. Note that the length of the bar is based only on the actually used part of the memory.
+
Monitorâ la memorie al pues jessi pitost imprecîs.
+
Chest menù ti permet di tignî di voli la utilizazion de memorie par ogni team tal to sisteme. In bande al non dal team si à dôs colonis: la prime cu la cuantitât riservade pe memorie che si pues scrivi, la seconde e mostre dute la memorie includût il spazi in dome-leture (librariis condividudis par esempli).
+
La prime rie Risorsis di sisteme e cache... e mostre la cuantitât di memorie totâl doprade dal sisteme e di dutis lis aplicazions. La lungjece de sbare blu si base sul totâl de memorie fisiche tal computer. Lis riis sucessivis a mostri la memorie doprade par ogni procès. Fâs câs che la lungjece de sbare blu si base dome su la part atualmentri doprade de memorie.
-
Memory used only by given application (with write access)
-
Memory including read-only space (can be shared with other applications)
+
Memorie doprade dome de aplicazion indicade (cun acès in scriture)
+
Memorie includint il spazi in dome-leture (e pues jessi condividude cun altris aplicazions)
-
Threads and CPU usage
-
This menu allows you to change thread priorities, kill teams or debug them.
-
Changes via the commands in this menu reach deep into the system and can cause data loss and system instability. Keep that mouse hand steady!
+
Thread e ûs de CPU
+
Chest menù al permet di cambiâ lis prioritâts dai thread, copâ i team o fâur il debug.
+
Lis modifichis fatis cui comants in chest menù a rivin tal profont dal sisteme e a puedin causâ pierditis di dâts e instabilitâts di sisteme. Ten il mouse cun man salde!
-
Kernel code
-
User code
-
Idle thread
+
Codiç dal kernel
+
Codiç utent
+
Thread inatîf
-
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
-
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
-
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
+
Al prin nivel si viôt i nons dai team. Fasint clic su di un, tu puedis copâ il team intîr. La part blu scure de sbare al è il timp passât tal codiç dal kernel, la part blu clare in codiç utent, la part verde intal/intai thread inatîf(s). Une sbare jemplade dal dut di blu e significhe che il team al sta doprant dute la potence di elaborazion.
+
Il secont nivel al mostre i thread particolârs di un team. Fasint clic suntun, tu puedis fâ il debug o copâlu. Une sbare jemplade dal dut di blu e significhe che il thread si è tacât e al ocupe dal dut un processôr/core.
+
L'ultin nivel dal menù ti permet di cambiâ une prioritât dal thread. Sta atent cun chel! Come regule gjenerâl la prioritât di un thread e à di sei contrarie rispiet al so ûs de CPU. Cioè, plui al cîr di rivendicâ timp ae CPU, plui bas al à di jessi la sô prioritât. In gjenerâl, no sta fâ pastiei cu lis prioritâts de aplicazion; contate il so autôr, chel al è il so mistîr.
@@ -105,9 +106,9 @@ To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
-Change workspace count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
-
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag & drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+
Tu cjatis la applet Spazis di lavôr cu lis altris Desktop applets intal Deskbar. E mostre un version in miniature di ducj i spazis di lavôr. Dal barcon de applet si à tantis opzions disponibilis, che si spieghin dutis di bessolis.
+Cambie il numar dai spazis di lavôr... al vierzarà lis preferencis dal Schermi dulà che tu stabilirâs il numar di spazis di lavôr e la lôr disposizion (tropis riis e colonis).
+
Viodût che la applet e je un Replicant, tu puedis ridimensionâ il barcon tant che tu desideris e dopo strissinâle e molâle cu la sô mantie sul scritori (siguriti che Mostre replicants al sedi atîf intal menù dal Deskbar). Ten fracât MAIUSC intant che tu ridimensionis par mantignî lis proporzions dal visôr.
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
-
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
-
Try this: Make the Workspaces window really big and hide the window tab and border. Now go to the Shortcuts preferences and assign CTRL^ to the Workspaces applet (/system/apps/Workspaces).
-Now you can quickly summon the applet with a key combo and equally quickly dismiss it again with ESC.
+
Par spostâ un barcon, tu lu cjapis te applet dai Spaazis di lavôr e tu lu strissinis intun altri spazi di lavôr. Chest al à il vantaç di permetiti di spostâlu cence lassâ il to scritori attuâl. Si sa po, chest al lavore ben dome se no si à masse barcons tal spazi di lavôr e se la destinazion no je oscurade di altris barcons. Une altre pussibilitât e je chê di cjapâ un barcon pe sô schede e tignîle intant che si cambie spazi di lavôr cun ALTFx.
+
Par vê plui informazions sui spazis di lavôr in gjenerâl e su plui scurtis di tastiere, viôt l'argoment Spazis di lavôr.
+
Prove chest: Fâs deventâ il barcon di Spazis di lavôr une vore grant e plate la schede-titul dal barcon e l'ôr. Cumò va su lis preferencis des Scurtis e assegne CTRL^ ae applet Spazis di lavôr (/system/apps/Workspaces).
+Cumò tu puedis evocâ tun lamp la applet cu la cumbinazion di tascj e compagn, bot e sclop, mandâle vie cun ESC.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Disposizion dal filesystem
@@ -133,21 +132,21 @@ I file che tu desideris condividi cun altris utents, intun futûr ambient multi-
In cheste base di dâts MIME Haiku al ten iniments ducj i diferents gjenars di file e lis lôr impostazions.
deskbar/menu/
-
Copied or linked to files/folders/queries in this folder appear in the Deskbar menu.
+
Copiât in cheste cartele, o colegât simpri achì a file/cartelis/interogazions, al ven fûr tal menù dal Deskbar.
kernel/drivers/
-
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
Al è un file di impostazions che al podarès jessi di interès: kernel al ufrìs cualchi configurazion a bas nivel come par esempli la disabilitazion dal SMP, la ativazion dal debug seriâl e la abilitazion de gjestion avanzade de alimentazion. Tu ativis un rie di configurazion gjavant il simbul pai coments "#". Ocjo però sta atent a ce che tu fasis!
Tracker/
-
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
-
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
In diplui ai varis file di impostazion par Tracker, e je cualchi sot-cartele interessante:
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Mostre e dispon ducj i atribûts e la dimension dal barcon daûr dai tiei guscj. Ogni gnove cartele che tu creis lu doprarà come model.
-
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
Tu puedis definî la disposizion dai barcons dai risultâts es interogazions par cierts gjenars di file. Viôt l'argoment Interogazion: il barcon dai risultâts.
Add a template for any filetype that's then available from Tracker's File | New... menu. See topic Tracker: Working with files.
+
Tracker New Template/
Zonte un model par cualsisei gjenar di file, chel dopo al devente disponibil dal menù di Tracker File | Gnûf.... Viôt l'argoment Tracker: lavorâ cui file.
@@ -156,7 +155,7 @@ I file che tu desideris condividi cun altris utents, intun futûr ambient multi-
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Gjenars di file
-
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
-
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
+
Par ce che al rivuarde i gjenars di file Haiku, al contrari di Windows, nol fâs cont su lis 3 letaris de estension dai file (p.e. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). Chest metodi e je dome une ultime risorse di repeç. Haiku al dopre i gjenars MIME propite come che al è costum su internet.
+
Ancje se in Haiku no si à nissun motîf par doprâ lis estension dai file, visiti di zontâlis ai chei che tu desideris condividi cun altris utents di altris sistemis operatîfs, p.e. vie e-mail, o cjariâ suntun servidôr opûr scambiant une clavute USB. In câs contrari il lôr sisteme operatîf al podarès no ricognossi il gjenar di file.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
Tu puedis cambiâ il gjenar di un specific file, la sô icone e la aplicazion associade. Selezione il file e, cul tast diestri, clame il component adizionâl tal menù contestuâl Components adizionâi | Filetype .
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
Chel parsore al è un file PNG, cu la stringhe MIME image/png. Metìs che tu savedis par sigûr che nol è un PNG ma un GIF. Tu puedis modificâ il gjenar o inserint a man la stringhe MIME juste opûr cuntun dai doi botons sot de casele di test:
-
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
-
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
+
Selezione...
al mostre une liste jerarchiche dai gjenars di file dulà che tu puedis lâ su image | GIF Image.
+
Il stes di...
al vierç un dialic dai file dulà che tu puedis sielzi cualsisei file che al à za il gjenar di file che tu stâs cirint.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
Chest menù a tende al mostre une liste di dutis lis aplicazions che a puedins gjesti chest particolâr gjenar di file. Di chi tu puedis sielzi cuâl program al à di vierzi chest specific file cuant che tu i fâsis dopli clic. Par esempli tu puedis cambiâ la aplicazion preferide di un file HTML dal navigadôr a un editôr di tescj intant che tu i stâs lavorant parsore. Ogni altri file HTML si vierzarà ancjemò cul navigadôr, dome chel chi in particolâr al vignarà inviât tal to editôr di tescj.
-
The Default application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same as... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
+
La Aplicazion predefinide e je chê che e je stabilide in maniere globâl par chel gjenar di file. Se tal menù tende no tu cjatis il program che tu desideris associâ cun chest file, di gnûf tu cjatarâs i botons Selezione... e La stesse di... che al fâs plui o mancul la stesse robe descrite parsore in "Il gjenar di file".
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag & drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
Se tu ti stâs domandant ce mût mai che il ricuadri de icone al è vueit: lis iconis a vegnin di norme ereditadis di chês predefinidis dal sisteme par chel gjenar di file. Cul component adizionâl Filetype tu puedis vierzi un file che al conten une icone e duncje strissinâle sul ricuadri di icone dal to file. Opûr fâ dopli-clic sul ricuadri de icone e creâ o modificâ la to icone personâl. Par vê plui informazions su lis iconis e ce mût creâlis di bessôl, viôt l'argoment Icon-O-Matic.
Se tu clamis in vore il component adizionâl Filetype suntun eseguibil (chi: StyledEdit), tu varâs un dialic diferent:
-
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
-
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
Parsore tu viodarâs, al puest di une stringhe MIME standardizade, la firme uniche de aplication. Cun chê, il sisteme al cjatarà il program dapardut là che al è instalât.
+
Sot di chê si à diviersis opzions par controlâ il compuartament de aplicazion:
-
Single launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
-
Multiple launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
-
Exclusive launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
-
Args only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
-
Background app
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
Inviament singul
Par ogni file eseguibil al è pussibil inviâ dome une istance de aplicazion. Se tu âs dôs copiis di chê aplicazion, dut câs, a puedin jessi eseguidis une in bande di chê altre.
+
Inviament multipli
A puedin zirâ in simultanie tantis istancis de aplicazion.
+
Inviament esclusîf
E je permetude pardabon dome une istance ae volte che e vedi chê firme di aplicazion.
+
Dome argoments
Al indiche che la aplicazion no rispuint ai messaçs.
+
Aplicazion in sotfont
La aplicazion no vignarà fûr tal Twitcher o te liste des aplicazions dal Deskbar.
-
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
-
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
+
Dopo si à la liste dai gjenars di file supuartâts. Tu puedis zontâ (e gjavâ) i gjenars di file, se tu pensis che la aplicazion ju podedi gjestî. Come consecuence, la aplicazion e vignarà fûr intal menù des aplicazions preferidis o, cuant che tu fasis clic di diestre suntun file di chel gjenar, tal menù contestuâl di Tracker Vierç cun... .
+
In bas si à lis informazions di version e i dirits di autôr. Tant che la firme de aplicazion, a son stâts metûts lì dal autôr de aplicazion e no si varès di alterâju.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
-
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Lis preferencis Gjenars di file no àn a ce fâ cui singui file ma cu lis impostazions globâls dai gjenars di file. Tu puedis cambiâ lis iconis predefinidis e lis aplicazions preferidis o zontâ, gjavâ, o alterâ i atribûts di ducj i gjenars di file. Tu puedis adiriture creâ di zero il to gjenar di file.
+
Ducj i gjenars di gile e lis lôr configurazions a vegnin archiviâts in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Prime di tacâ a sperimentâ, al sarès prudent fâ une copie di backup di chê cartele...
La interface utent di Haiku e furnìs une funzionalitât uniche che e sfrute la particolaritât che i barcons a àn une lenghete zale invezit di vê une sbare dal titul largje tant che il barcon. E je clamade "Intassâ e piastrelâ", in inglês "Stack & Tile".
-Tal esempli chi sot, un barcon di Tracker cui segnelibris al è "piastrelât" a çampe di un barcon di WebPositive, chel chi invezit al è intassât cuntun altri barcon di Tracker che al mostre la cartele sorzint haiku. In cheste animazion, l'utent al fâs clic su lis lenghetis dai barcons "intassâts" par puartâ denant prime un e dopo chel altri.
La interface utent di Haiku e furnìs une funzionalitât uniche che e sfrute la particolaritât che i barcons a àn une lenghete zale invezit di vê une sbare dal titul largje tant che il barcon. E je clamade "Intassâ e intasselâ", in inglês "Stack & Tile".
+Tal esempli chi sot, un barcon di Tracker cui segnelibris al è "intasselât" a çampe di un barcon di WebPositive, chel chi invezit al è intassât cuntun altri barcon di Tracker che al mostre la cartele sorzint haiku. In cheste animazion, l'utent al fâs clic su lis lenghetis dai barcons "intassâts" par puartâ denant prime un e dopo chel altri.
-
Colegât cussì, il grup di barcons al pues jessi spostât e ridimensionât adun - une disposizion plasevule par lavorâ intun ambient plui orientât ai progjets. Invezit di stâ a cirî il just barcon, sedi il navigadôr di documentazions, un editôr o un barcon dal Tracker o magari ancje une mail che e rivuarde il progjet, metiju ducj adun intassant e piastrellant.
+
Colegât cussì, il grup di barcons al pues jessi spostât e ridimensionât adun - une disposizion plasevule par lavorâ intun ambient plui orientât ai progjets. Invezit di stâ a cirî il just barcon, sedi il navigadôr di documentazions, un editôr o un barcon dal Tracker o magari ancje une mail che e rivuarde il progjet, metiju ducj adun intassant e intasselant.
Eseguî chest mût di disponi i barcons al è facil: ten fracât OPT intant che tu strissinis un barcon pe sô lenghete, strissinilu dongje di une altre lenghete di un altri barcon o dal so ôr fintremai che al ven evidenziât, daspò mole il boton dal mouse e il lavôr al è fat.
-
Intassâ e piastrelâ al consist di dôs parts colegadis.
+
Intassâ e intasselâ al consist di dôs parts colegadis.
"Intassâ" al significhe meti un barcon sore di chel altri, spostant in automatic lis lenghetis zalis in posizion.
Intant che si ten fracât OPT, lis lenghetis a cambiin colôr cuant che si soreponin; mole il barcon par stabilî la tasse.
-
"Piastrelâ" al significhe incolâ in orizontâl o in verticâl i barcons.
+
"Intasselâ" al significhe incolâ in orizontâl o in verticâl i barcons.
Di gnûf, intant che si ten fracât OPT, i ôrs che si cumbinaran cuant che tu molarâs il barcon, a cambiin colôr cuant che a saran dongje un di chel altri.
La separazion e ven fate te stesse maniere, fracant OPT intant che dal grup si strissine fûr un barcon pe sô lenghete.
@@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ Un clic diestri suntune mantie di Replicant al presente un menù contestuâl par
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Tabele
-
Attributes and Queries are key features of Haiku. While attributes are useful on their own, to display additional information on a file, for a query on them, they need to be indexed. It puts them into a lookup table, which in turn makes queries lightning fast.
-The index is part of the filesystem and is kept for every volume/partition separately.
+
I atribûts e lis interogazions a son funzions clâf di Haiku. Ancje se i atribûts a son utii par lôr cont, par esempli par mostrâ informazions adizionâls suntun file, par fâur une ricercje, al covente che a sedin intabelâts. Duncje a vegnin metûts intune tabele di ricercje, cussì di rindi lis interogazions velocis come une saete.
+La tabele e fâs part dal filesystem e e je tignude par ogni volum/partizion separade.
-Indexing commands in Terminal
-
There are several commands to manage the index:
+Comants pe tabele tal Terminâl
+
A'ndi son diviers di comants par gjestî la tabele:
-
lsindex - Displays the indexed attributes on the current volume/partition.
-These are the attributes that are indexed by default:
+
lsindex - Al mostre i atribûts metûts in tabele sul volum/partizion atuâl.
+Intes impostazions predefinidis, chescj a son i atribûts metûts in tabele:
~ ->lsindex
BEOS:APP_SIG
@@ -113,7 +114,7 @@ name
size
-
mkindex - Adds an attribute to the index of a volume/partition.
+
mkindex - Al zonte un atribût te tabele di un volum/partizion.
Usage: mkindex [options] <attribute>
Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
@@ -127,11 +128,11 @@ Creates a new index for the specified attribute.
-v, --verbose print information about the index being created
-
Only new files with that attribute come automatically into the index!
-Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the originals after that. Alternatively you can use the command reindex.
+
Dome i file gnûfs cun chel atribût a jentrin in automatic te tabele!
+Si à di zontâ a man i file esistents, fasint une lôr copie e podopo eliminant i origjinâls. In alternative tu puedis doprâ il comant reindex.
-
reindex - Puts the attributes of existing files into the newly created index of a volume/partition.
+
reindex - Al met i atribûts dai file esistents inte apene creade tabele dal volum/partizion .
Usage: reindex [-rvf] attr <list of filenames and/or directories>
-r enter directories recursively
@@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ Existing files have to be added manually by copying them and deleting the origin
-
rmindex - Removes an attribute from the index of a volume/partition.
+
rmindex - Al gjave un atribût de tabele di un volum/partizion.
Usage: rmindex [OPTION]... INDEX_NAME
@@ -164,9 +165,9 @@ If no volume is specified, the volume of the current directory is assumed.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Shortcuts and key combinations
+
Scurtis e cumbinazions di tascj
-
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
-
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
-
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
+
In maniere predefinide, il tast di scurte di Haiku, par esempli, par clamâ i comants dai menù, nol è il solit CTRL, ma ALT. Chest al à resons storichis, par vie che BeOS si ispirave intune cierte maniere a MacOS. Dopo che tu ti abituis, al à i siei vantaçs come p.e. ALTC e ALTV si integrin te stesse maniere inte shell bash dal Terminâl, dulà che CTRLC al fâs terminâ il procès in esecuzion.
+
In ogni câs, tu puedis passâ, a chel che al podarès jessi plui familiâr, tast CTRL intes preferencis di Mape tastiere. La vuide utent e descrîf simpri la configurazion predefinide che e je chê cul tast di comant ALT.
+
Se no tu sâs cuai tascj che a son i tascjOPZ o MENÙ te tô particolâr mape-tastiere/disposizion-di-tastiere, dopre ancje chì lis preferencis di Mape tastiere. Lì tu puedis viodi cuale pression di tast e ven mandade cuant che tu frachis un tast de tastiere.
Chi e je une tabele cun tantis des plui dopradis scurtis simpri disponibilis, ancje se nol esist un menù corispondent:
-
ALTFx
Switches to Workspace X (Fx is the function key corresponding to that workspace). Take the active window with you by adding SHIFT
-
CTRLALT← / → / ↑ / ↓
Navigates spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. Add SHIFT to take the active window with you.
+
ALTFx
Al passe al Spazi di lavôr X (Fx al è il tast funzion corispondent a chel spazi di lavôr). Puarte con te barcon atîf fracant ancje MAIUSC
+
CTRLALT← / → / ↑ / ↓
Al navighe tra lis riis/colonis dai spazis di lavôr disponibii. Zonte MAIUSC par puartâ cun te il barcon atîf.
-
OPT
Holding OPT while dragging a window near another window's tab or border will stack or tile them (see chapter GUI).
-
OPT↑ / ↓
Cycles through the open windows within the current workspace.
-
CTRLALT + left mouse
Click and drag with left mouse button to move a window (see chapter GUI).
-
CTRLALT + right mouse
Click and drag with right mouse button to resize a window (see chapter GUI).
+
OPZ
Tignint fracât OPT intant che si strissine un barcon dongje di une altre lenghete di barcon o dal ôr, jù intassarà opûr intasselarà (viôt il cjapitul Interface grafiche di Haiku).
+
OPZ↑ / ↓
Al passe, un daûr di chel altri, ai barcons vierts intal spazi di lavôr atuâl.
+
CTRLALT + clic di çampe
Clic e strissinâ cul boton di çampe dal mouse par spostâ un barcon (viôt il cjapitul Interface grafiche di Haiku).
+
CTRLALT + clic di diestre
Clic e strissinâ cul boton di diestre dal mouse par ridimensionâ un barcon (viôt cjapitul Interface grafiche di Haiku).
-
CTRLALTZ
Zooms a window to an alternative size (maximum size for most applications).
-
CTRLALTM
Minimizes the active window.
-
CTRLALTH
Hides (minimizes) all windows of the active application.
-
CTRLALTF
Pulls the active window to the front (only applicable with the mouse setting Focus Follows Mouse).
-
CTRLALTB
Sends the active window to the back.
+
CTRLALTZ
Al ingrandìs un barcon a une dimension alternative (pe plui part des aplicazions e je la dimension massime).
+
CTRLALTM
Al minimize il barcon atîf.
+
CTRLALTH
Al plate (minimize) ducj i barcons de aplicazion ative.
+
CTRLALTF
Al sburte denant il barcon atîf (si pues fâ dome cu la impostazion dal mouse su Focalizazion daûr dal mouse).
Whenever you edit text – be it when renaming a file in Tracker, editing a file in StyledEdit, or chatting in Vision – there are some universal shortcuts:
Ogni volte che tu modifichis i tescj – sedi cambiâ non a un file in Tracker, modificâ un file in StyledEdit, o chatâ in Vision – si à cualchi scurte universâl:
-
ALT← / → or OPT← / →
Jump word-wise through the text. (Note: It may be useful to get used to using the OPT combination. Then you're all set if some app already uses the ALT combination for another command.)
-
ALTBACKSPACE or OPT BACKSPACE
Word-wise removing the text to the left of the cursor.
-
ALTDEL or OPT DEL
Word-wise removing the text to the right of the cursor.
-
HOME
Jumps to the beginning of the line.
-
END
Jumps to the end of the line.
-
ALTHOME
Jumps to the beginning of the document.
-
ALTEND
Jumps to the end of the document.
+
ALT← / → o OPZ← / →
Salte di peraule in peraule. (Note: al podarès jessi util abituâsi a doprâ la cumbinazion OPT. Cussì tu sês pront tal câs che cualchi aplicazion e dopredi za la cumbinazion ALT par cualchi altri comant.)
+
ALTBACKSPACE(cessâ) o OPZ BACKSPACE(cessâ)
Scancelament peraule par peraule a çampe dal cursôr.
+
ALTCANC o OPZ CANC
Scancelament peraule par peraule a diestre dal cursôr.
+
INIZI
Al salte al inizi de rie.
+
FIN
Al salte ae fin de rie.
+
ALTINIZI
Al salte al inizi dal document.
+
ALTFIN
Al salte ae fin dal document.
-
Holding SHIFT additionally when using the above key combinations will select the text between the cursor jumps.
+
Tignint fracât ancje MAIUSC cuant che si dopre lis cumbinazions di tascj chi parsore, al selezionarà il test tra i salts dal cursôr.
In zonte aes scurtis gjenerâls, chi si à cualchidune in plui pe navigazion cun Tracker:
-
ALT↑
Opens the parent folder.
-
ALT↓ o INVIE
Opens the selected folder.
-
OPT
Holding it while opening a folder will automatically close the parent folder. This also works when navigating with the mouse.
-
MENU
Opens the Deskbar menu (leave with ESC).
-
ALTZ
Undo last action. The undo history is only limited by the available memory. Note, this only works for actions on the file itself, changed attributes and permission settings can't be undone with this. Also, once a file is removed from Trash it's gone for good.
-
ALTSHIFTZ
Redo the action you just reverted with ALTZ.
-
SHIFT + Mousewheel
When scrolling through a long list of files in a Tracker window or when you're drilling down submenus, this will speed things up by doing page-wise scrolling.
+
ALT↑
Al vierç la cartele superiôr.
+
ALT↓ o INVIE
Al vierç la cartele selezionade.
+
OPZ
Tignintlu fracât intnat che si vierç une cartele, al sierarà in automatic la cartele superiôr. Chest al funzione ancje cuant che si navighe cul mouse.
+
MENÙ
Al vierç il menù dal Deskbar (molilu cun ESC).
+
ALTZ
Al disfe la ultime azion. La cronologjie “disfe” e je limitade dome de cuantitât di memorie disponibile. Fâs câs che chest al funzione dome pes azions sui file stès, lis modifichis ai atribûts e ai permès no puedin jessi disfatis in cussì. In diplui, une volte eliminât un file de Scovacere al è lât par simpri.
+
ALTMAIUSCZ
Al torne a fâ la azion che si veve apene anulât ALTZ.
+
MAIUSC + Rudiele dal mouse
Cuant che si scor une lungje liste di file intun barcon di Tracker o cuant che tu stâs sgarfant tai sot-menù, chest al sveltìs lis robis fasint un scoriment pagjine par pagjine.
Tab-completion. After entering a few letters, press TAB once to auto-complete a filename or path. If there is more than one match, it stops where the name starts to differ and you have to provide some more letters to further distinguish them. You can also press TAB twice to have all matches listed.
-
↑ / ↓
Moves up or down in a history of all previously entered commands.
-
CTRLR
Bash history. All the commands you enter
-are stored in the file ~/config/settings/bash_history. Press CTRLR and start to enter a command and you'll be provided with the first match from the bash history. Keep pressing CTRLR until you find the right command line and press ENTER to execute it.
-
CTRLC
Stops the currently running command.
-
CTRLD
Closes the current Terminal session.
+
ALTN
Al vierç une altre session di Terminâl intun gnûf barcon.
+
ALTT
Al vierç une altre session di Terminâl intune gnove schede.
+
ALT1, 2, 3 ...
Al passe ae schede corispondente.
+
ALTTAB
Al passe al barcon di Terminâl sucessîf.
+
MAIUSC← / →
Al passe ae schede a çampe/diestre.
+
ALTMAIUSC← / →
Al sposte la schede atuâl a çampe/diestre.
+
ALT+ / -
Aumente/Diminuì la dimension dal caratar.
+
ALTINVIE
Jentre/jes te/de modalitât plen visôr.
+
MAIUSC↑ / ↓
Al scor sù/jù di une rie tal output dal Terminâl.
+
MAIUSCPagj↑ / Pagj↓
Al scor sù/jù di une pagjine tal output dal Terminâl.
+
TAB
Completament-tab. Dopo vê inserît cualchi letare, frache TAB une volte par completâ in automatic un non di file o un percors. Se e esist plui di une corispondence, lui al ferme di scrivi dulà che il non al tache a vê diferencis e tu tu varâs di indicâ cualchi letare in plui par distinguiju. Tu puedis ancje fracâ dôs voltis TAB par vê dute la liste des corispondencis.
+
↑ / ↓
Al va in sù o in jù te cronologjie dai comants inserîts in precedence.
+
CTRLR
Cronologjie di Bash. Ducj i comants che tu inserissis a vegnin archiviâts intal file ~/config/settings/bash_history. Frache CTRLR e scomence a inserî un comant, ti vignaran dadis lis primis cumbinazions che a coincidin de cronologjie di bash. Continue a fracâ CTRLR fintremai che tu cjatis la rie di comant juste e frache INVIE par eseguîle.
Tu puedis zontâ o gjavâ elements a/di une selezion tignint fracât un tast modificadôr intant che tu fasis clic suntune vôs (o file tal câs di Tracker).
-
SHIFT
This will select everything between the first selected item and the one you click on.
-
ALT
Adds or removes the item you're clicking on from the selection.
+
MAIUSC
Chest al selezionarà dut tra il prin element selezionât e chel che tu i âs fat clic.
+
ALT
Al zonte, o al gjave, l'element che tu i stâs fasint clic ae (o de) selezion.
-
In a Tracker window, if you just start typing, Tracker scrolls to and selects the file that best fits your incremental search. If there's no file starting with your typed letters, files that contain the search string anywhere in their name or other displayed attributes are selected. This search is not case-sensitive.
-The letters you type appear at the bottom-left, where normally the number of items is listed. After a second it reverts back and you could start a new incremental search.
-Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be configured to filter out all non-matching files. See the topic on type-ahead filtering.
+
Intun barcon di Tracker, se tu tachis a scrivi, Tracker al scor e al selezione il file che plui al seme ae tô ricercje incrementâl. Se no si à nissun file che al tache cu lis letaris digjitadis, a vegnin selezionâts i file che a contegnin in cualsisei part dal lôr non, o dai atribûts visualizâts, la stringhe di ricercje. Cheste ricercje no je sensibile aes maiusculis/minusculis.
+Lis letaris che tu scrivis a vignaran fûr in bas a çampe, dulà che di solit al ven scrit il numar dai elements listâts. Dopo un secont alt torne indaûr e tu puedis tacâ une gnove ricercje incrementâl.
+Al puest di saltâ al prin câs che al corispuint ae stringhe di ricercje, Tracker al pues jessi configurât in mût di filtrâ vie ducj i file che no corispuindin. Viôt l'argoment filtri scriture anticipade.
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Instead of jumping to the first occurrence of your search string, Tracker can be
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Preferences
+
Preferencis
-
While a key philosophy of Haiku is to cut down on options and have sensible defaults instead, there are some things that have to be configured or can be set to individual preference. You find all panels in Deskbar's Preferences menu.
+
Ancje se la filosofie clâf di Haiku e je chê di ridusi lis opzions e vê al lôr puest impostazions predefinidis adatis, alc al à bisugne di jessi configurât o al pues vê preferencis individuâls. Tu cjatis ducj i panei intal menù Preferences(inglês di preferencis) di Deskbar.
Lis preferencis di Input a metin adun i vecjos panei pe tastiere, pal mouse e pal touchpad, plui cualsise altri dispositîf di input ricognossût dal sisteme. I dispositîfs a vegnin listâts a çampe, invezit il panel di diestre al cambie daûr des impostazions disponibilis pal dispositîf selezionât.
Stabilìs la velocitât di ripetizion e il timp di spiete che dopo di chel, par vie di un tast tignût fracât, al fâs partî la ripetizion. Tu puedis provâ lis tôs impostazions tal cjamp di test in bas.
+
+
Predefinîts
al torne a puartâ dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Torne indaûr
al puarte indaûr aes impostazion che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis de Tastiere.
Prime tu stabilissis il to gjenar di mouse: 1, 2 o 3 botons dal mouse. Tu puedis simulâ il secont boton dal mouse (=diestre) tignint fracât CTRL intant che tu fasis clic cun chel di çampe. Pal tierç boton dal mouse (=centrâl), si fâs CTRLALT e clic di çampe.
+
Tu puedis sestâ i botons dal mouse fasint clic su di lôr e sielzint il lôr gnûf significât dal menù a tende.
+
Cui cursôrs a diestre, tu justis la velocitât dal dopli-clic, la velocitât dal mouse a la acelerazion. La aree di prove sot dal dissen dal mouse e pues jessi doprade par controlâ se la velocitât dal dopli-clic ti plâs: se fasint un dopli-clic suntune peraule, chê no ven selezionade, alore al è stât metût masse veloç (opûr tu ti varâs di abituâ a fâ clic plui di corse...).
+
Si à trê Mûts par meti a fûc che a determinin ce mût che i barcons a rispuindin ai clic:
+
+
Clic par meti a fûc e parâ denant
Cheste e je la impostazion predefinide: tu fasis clic suntun barcon e chel al cjape la focalizazion e lu pare sù denant di chei altris.
+
Clic par meti a fûc
Fasint clic suntun barcon i da nome la focalizazion, ma no lu tirarà sù denant in automatic. Par fâlu, tu âs di fâ clic su la sô lenghete dal titul o tal ôr dal barcon opûr fasint clic intant che tu tegnis fracât i tascj di gjestion dai barconsCTRLALT.
+
Focalizazion daûr dal mouse
Il barcon sot dal pontadôr dal mouse al cjape in automatic la focalizazion. Però par parâlu sù denant di chei altris si à di fâ come che al è stât descrit inte modalitât Clic par meti a fûc.
+
+
Ativant Acete il prin clic ti sparagne il fat di vê prime di meti a fûc un barcon inatîf par podê ativâ e doprâ i varis widget di chel barcon, come par esempli un boton o un menù. Ma chest, par esempli, al puarte a riscjâ di sierâ par erôr un barcon, scliçant cence volê il boton par sierâ intant che si cîr di smirâ la schede dal barcon. Di chê altre bande però al sveltìs une vore lis operazions.
+
Dutis lis impostazions a vegnin aplicadis daurman.
+
+
Predefinîts
al torne a puartâ dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Torne indaûr
al puarte indaûr aes impostazion che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis dal mouse.
Strissinant lis riis rossis, chê verticâl o chê orizontâl, su pe rapresentazions dal touchpad, tu stabilissis la aree di scoriment (un pêl plui rosse rispiet ae aree di contat gjenerâl grise). Spostant il to dêt in chê part dal touchpad tu spostarâs lis sbaris di scoriment di un barcon, orizontâls o verticâls daûr dal câs.
+
A diestre a son i cursôrs par stabilî set la acelerazion di scoriment gjenerâl e la velocitât di scoriment orizontâl e verticâl.
+La configurazion de acelerazion e decît trop svelte che une liste e scor se tu scoris la aree une vore veloç (par intindisi, lassant stâ il contignût). Lis velocitâts di scoriment a controlin a velocitât gjenerâl cuant che si dopre la aree di scoriment in maniere “normâl”.
+
Sot de grafiche dal touchpad a son des caselis di selezion par abilitâ il "Scoriment cun doi dêts" pal scoriment verticâl e orizontâl. Spostâ doi dêts in paralêl in verticâl o orizontâl al spostarà lis sbaris di scoriment di un barcon. Se no altri par me, al funzione miôr cuntun dêt de man drete e un de man çampe.
+Se tu ti cjatis miôr a doprâ cheste funzion, tu puedis fâ di mancul de impostazion des areis di scoriment e doprâ invezit dut il touchpad pe normâl navigazion.
+
In bas si à un altri cursôr par stabilî la sensibilitât de batuçade sul touchpad. Se la tô batude e ven ignorade, aumente la sensibilitât. Se il sisteme al regjistre i clic in continuazion, cuant che invezit dut ce che tu vûs fâ al è spostâ il pontadôr dal mouse, prove a diminuîle.
+
+
Predefinîts
al torne a puartâ dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Torne indaûr
al puarte indaûr aes impostazion che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis dal touchpad.
+
+
Chi al è un consei che nol è leât aes preferencis dal touchpad, ma al centre cul argoment gjenerâl:
+Savevistu che tu puedis strissinâ e molâ doprant il touchpad, al vâl a dî cence doprâ i botons? Al baste fâ un dopli clic cence molâ il dêt dopo vê fat la seconde batuçade. La icone cjapade su e restarà tacade al pontadôr dal mouse e tu podarâs strissinale ator movint il dêt. Molant il dêt la icone e vignarà molade.
+
Se il to dêt al rive tal ôr dal touchpad intant che tu stâs strissinant une icone, ma il pontadôr dal mouse nol è rivât tal ôr dal schermi, ce mût rivistu a continuâ il strissinament? Apene che tu molis il dêt, la icone e ven molade jù.
+In base al to hardware, si à une funzionalitât elegante: al baste lassâ il dêt, cence molâlu, tal ôr dal touchpad. Il pontadôr dal mouse al continuarà a spostâsi cul pilote automatic.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Keymap
+
Mape tastiere
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Keymap
-
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Posizion des mapis di tastiere modificadis dal utent. ~/config/settings/Key_map
-
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
-Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
-
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
-
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
-
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
A diestre, il barcon di Mape tastiere al mostre une rapresentazion de tô tastiere. Cuant che tu frachis un tast, il tast corispondent si scurìs e il simbul assegnât al ven inserît tal cjamp di test Aree di prove in bas. Di lì tu puedis ancje copiâlu e tacâlu intun document.
+Duncje, lis preferencis Mape tastiere no son dome par configurâ la mapadure de tastiere locâl, ma a son ancje utilis cuant che si cîr un simbul speciâl doprât in altris lenghis. Par esempli, tu puedis cambiâ la mapadure de tastiere a "Francês", cirî la "ç" e copiâ te tô mail par François. (Ancje se tu cjatarâs la "cedilie" ancje in altris mapaduris di tastiere...)
+
Fracant i tascj modificadôrs come MAIUSC, CONTROL o OPZION al modifiche, secont il câs, la tastiere visualizade.
+
Dopo a son i tascj segnâts cuntun fonts blu. Chescj tascj a vegnin clamâts Tascj muarts e a puedin cambiâ il tast che tu frachis dopo. Se tu fasis clic suntun di chei tascj blu cul mouse, i tascj che a puedin cambiâ si impiin di zâl. Torne fâsi clic e dut al tornarà ae normalitât. Esemplis a son é, ñ, ó o ë.
+
Sot de rapresentazion de tastiere a son ancjemò dôs opzions:
-
Select dead keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
-
Switch shortcut key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
Selezione tascj muarts
par stabilî i tascj blu nomenâts prime.
+
Passe ai tascj...
par doprâ i tascj-scurte in modalitât Windows/Linux, vâl a dî CONTROL (normally CTRL) opûr modalitât Haiku, vâl a dî COMMAND (normally ALT).
-
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap in the keyboard representation: drag & drop one key on another and they switch places.
-
You can also create an individual mapping by drag & dropping a character from another app onto the key. For example, you could extend your regular keymap with often used currency symbols. Just click on the CONTROL key and drag & drop the pound symbol from CharacterMap onto the 'P' key to get a ₤ when you press CTRLP.
+
Lis listis a çampe a ufrissin lis mapis di tastiere pre-configuradis che a son disponibilis sul sisteme, sot di chês, se disponibilis, lis mapis definidis dal utent. Tu puedis cambiâ une mapadure di tastiere inte rapresentazion de tastiere: strissine e mole un tast suntun altri e chei doi si scambiaran di puest.
+
Tu puedis creâ ancje une mape individuâl strissinant un caratar di une altre aplicazion e molantlu sul tast. Par esempli, tu puedis ampliâ la mapadure de tastiere regolâr cui simbui des monedis dopradis plui dispès. Al baste fâ clic sul tast CONTROL e strissinâ e molâ il caratar sterline di “Mape caratars” sul tast 'P' par otignî cussì un ₤ cuant che tu frachis CTRLP.
-By right-clicking a normal key, the context menu offers to Remove its mapping. Modifier keys can have alternative mappings, like using CAPS LOCK as CTRL key:
+Fasint clic-diestri suntun tast normâl, il menù contestuâl al dâ la pussibilitât di fâ Gjave ae sô mapadure. I tascj Modificadôrs a puedin vê mapaduris alternativis, come par esempli doprâ CAPS LOCK tant che tast CTRL:
-
Alternatively to this or drag & dropping of keys, there's the menu File | Set modifier keys... that opens this window:
+
In alternative al strissinâ e molâ dai tascj, si à il menù File | Stabilìs tascj modificadôrs... che al vierç chest barcon:
-
Here, you can assign keys to their respective roles or even completely disable the role of a key. You can even assign the same key to different roles, though that's not a good idea most of the time and you'll be warned by a small exclamation mark beside the pop-up menus if you do that.
-Pressing Set modifier keys applies your changes and closes the window.
-
When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
-
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
-
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
-
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
+
Chi, tu puedis assegnâ i tascj aes lôr funzions o fintremai disabilitâ dal dut la funzion di un tast. Tu puedis ancje assegnâ il stes tast a diferents rûi, dut câs di solit no je une buine idee e, se tu lu fasis, tu vignarâs visât cuntun piçul segn di esclamazion in bande dal menù a tende.
+Fracant Stabilìs tascj modificadôrs al apliche lis modifichis e al siere il barcon.
+
Cuant che tu âs fat tu puedis salvâ il risultât dal menù File | Salve.... La tô mape modificade e vignarà fûr, dome inte liste definide dal utent, se e ven archiviade in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. In câs contrari tu varâs di cjariâle a man vie File | Vierç....
+
Par fâ corispuindi miôr il panel di Mape tastiere cu la tô tastiere, a son disponibilis, dal menù Disposizion, diviersis impostazions diferentis .
+
Il caratar doprât inte rapresentazion de tastiere al ven stabilît dal menù Caratar. Fâs câs che salacor il caratar al podarès contignî ducj i simbui par une specifiche mape di tastiere, ma nol è dit.
+
Intal ultin, si à un boton Torne indaûr par tornâ a puartâ indaûr lis impostazions che e jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis di Mape tastiere.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
-
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
-
keymap -d > MyKeymap
-
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
-At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use the Shortcuts preferences.
-
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
-
keymap -s < MyKeymap
-
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
-
keymap -c < MyKeymap
-
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its Open... menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
-
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
Al esist un altri metodi par personalizâ la mape de tastiere di là di chê dal panel des preferencis di “Mape tastiere”. Chest al coinvolç la modifiche di un file di test che al conten une vagonade di valôrs esadecimâi, che, a prin viodi, a puedin fâ pôre, ma nol è cussì difficil di capî.
+
Tu puedis tirâ jù la mape de tastiere atuâl cuntun comant tal Terminâl:
+
keymap -d > MêMapetastiere
+
Il file di test gjenerât al pues duncje jessi viert intun editôr di test. Bisugne sigurâsi di doprâ un caratar a spaziadure fisse in chel editôr o in câs contrari no tu capirâs mai chel file...
+Al inizi di chel file, tu cjatarâs une liende di une tastiere stilizade cul valôr esadecimâl corispondent a ogni tast. Sot si à lis assegnazions atuâls di ogni valôr. Tu puedis fâ dutis lis personalizazions che a son disponibilis dal panel des preferencis di Mape tastiere, e ancje di plui. Se ti capite di vê cualchi tast speciâl su pe tastiere, tu puedis rivâ a ativâlu. Se chest al è il câs, doprilu come tast ordenari o come un tast Opzion o Control. No tu rivarâs, par esempli, a vê i tascj multimediâi par aumentâ o diminuî il volum o par inviâ cualchi aplicazion. Par chescj tu puedis doprâ lis preferencis Scurtis.
+
Cuant che tu varâs finît, tu salvarâs il file e dopo, cun chest comant, tu fasarâs cjariâ al sisteme la mape di tastiere modificade:
+
keymap -s < MêMapetastiere
+
Se tu desideris impuartâ cheste mape di tastiere intal panel di Mape tastiere, prime tu âs di compilâle par vê un formât binari:
+
keymap -c < MêMapetastiere
+
Chest al crearà un file keymap.out che tu puedis cjariâ in “Mape tastiere” gracie al so menù Vierç.... A proposit, il comant keymap al rive ancje a cjariâ chest formât binari: keymap -l < keymap.out
+
Chest al è il file tirât jù (i tascj plui a diestre de tastiere stilizade a son stâts taiâts fûr par vê une visualizazion plui biele di cheste pagjine):
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Locale
+
Localizazion
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
-
Haiku's localization system does not only include replacing texts with their translations, but also more complex tasks such as formatting numbers, dates, and times in a way that matches your Locale preferences.
-
If you would like to help with translations or start with a language that is currently missing, please get in contact on the Haiku-i18n mailing list.
+
Il sisteme di adatament locâl (localizazion) di Haiku nol inclût dome la sostituzion dai tescj cu lis traduzions, ma ancje ativitâts plui complessis come la formatazion dai numars, des datis e des oris intune forme che e corispuindi aes tôs preferencis di Localizazion.
+
Se tu desideris judâ cu lis traduzions o tacâ cuntune lenghe che e mancje, par plasê jentre in contat cu la mailing list Haiku-i18n.
-Language
-
Haiku has been translated to dozens of languages, unfortunately some translations are not complete yet. For that reason, you can choose more than one language as “Preferred languages”. If some text is missing in a translation, it's replaced with the words of the next preferred language. English is the default fallback (also when not listed).
+Lenghe
+
Haiku al è stât voltât intun grum di lenghis, purtrop cualchi traduzion no je ancjemò completade. Par cheste reson tu puedis sielzi plui di une lenghe in “Lenghis preferidis”. Se cualchi toc al mancje intune traduzion, al ven sostituît cu lis peraulis de sucessive lenghe preferide. L'inglês e je la lenghe di repeç predefinide (ancje cuant che no je in liste).
-
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
-As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
In chest esempli, la lenghe preferide e je stade metude a Spagnûl. La prime lenghe di repeç e je il talian e se ancje lì al mancje il test, si torne ae lenghe predefinide, l'inglês.
+Come che tu puedis viodi, pandint une vôs di lenghe a çampe al mostre des sot-vôs pes specifichis variantis o dialets di chê lenghe (se disponibilis).
-Formatting
-
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+Formatazion
+
Inte schede Formatazion tu puedis configurâ il formât di date, ore, numars e monede in maniere indipendente rispiet a chê de configurazion de lenghe preferide.
-
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
-If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
-
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
Tu podaressis jessi un frut spagnûl che si cjate inte part de Svuizare dulà che si cjacare par talian. Cussì, tu varessis di preferî il to sisteme par Spagnûl, ma i numars e la monede formatade come che tu dopraressis a vore lì: Swiss/Italian.
+Se tu ti cjatis miôr cui tiei nons spagnûi pai dîs e pai mês (pense aes datis modificadis dai file, par esempli), tu puedis passâ parsore di cheste formatazion specifiche de date cu la casele di selezion in alt Dopre nons mês/dîs de lenghe preferide.
+
Ancje se l'esempli parsore forsit nol è il câs plui comun, al dimostre però la flessibilitât dal sisteme.
-Options
-
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+Opzions
+
La ultime schede e ufrìs une opzion che ti Volte i nons des aplicazions e des cartelis tal Deskbar e tal Tracker. Disabilite la casele di selezion se tu preferissis che la interface grafiche e sedi localizade, ma tignint i nons origjinâi in inglês pai panei des preferencis, pes aplicazions e pai nons standard des cartelis.
-
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
Lis modifichis a vegnin aplicadis daurman, dut câs tu varâs di sierâ e tornâ a inviâ lis aplicazion che in chel moment a son in esecuzion par fâ in mût che a mostredin lis gnovis impostazions.
-
Predefinîts
al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
-
Torne indaûr
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
+
Predefinîts
al torne a puartâ dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Torne indaûr
al puarte indaûr aes impostazion che e jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis di Localizazion.
@@ -99,8 +100,8 @@ If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Network
+
Rêt
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Network
Impostazions:
/boot/system/settings/network/
-
The Network preference is the one-stop panel to configure all available network devices and services. To the left is a collapsible list of your devices and services, the right has information or settings for the selected entry.
-At the bottom you find a checkbox to Show Network status in Deskbar. Revert brings back the settings that were active when you've started the panel.
+
Lis preferencis di Rêt a son l'unic panel par configurâ ducj i servizis e i dispositîfs di rêt disponibii. A çampe si à une liste che si pues striçâ dai tiei dispositîfs e servizis, a diestre si à informazions o impostazions pe vôs selezionade.
+In bas tu cjatis une casele di selezion par fâMostre il Stât de rêt tal Deskbar. Torne indaûr al puarte indaûr aes impostazions che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât il panel.
-
Devices
+
Dispositîfs
-
Here we see the wireless device, using the iprowifi4965 driver. From the pop-up menu you select the WLAN to connect to. After every WLAN name in the menu, you're shown a little icon representing the signal strength.
-Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every bootup. Select Choose automatically and it'll try to connect to the WLAN with the best signal around.
-
If you're connecting to a protected network, you'll be asked for the password and if to either allow that connection only once, or always, which will save the password so you won't be bothered to enter it in the future.
-
The buttons below let you Disable the device, or Renegotiate the connection.
+
In cheste figure o viodin i dispositîfs cence fîi, che a doprin il driver iprowifi4965. Dal menù a tende tu selezionis la rêt wireless dulà tacâti. Dopo il non di ogni rêt WLAN (cence fîi), ti ven mostrade une piçule icone che e rapresente la fuarce dal segnâl.
+Une volte selezionade la rêt cence fîi, Haiku al cirarà di conetisi in automatic a ogni inviament di sisteme. Selezione Sielç in automatic e lui al cirarà di conetisi ae rêt cence fîi cul segnâl plui fuart lì ator.
+
Se tu ti stâs conetint a une rêt protete, ti vignarà domandade la peraule di ordin e se permeti chê conession dome une volte o simpri, se chest al è il câs, al salvarà la peraule di ordin in mût di no jessi disturbât plui par inserîle.
+
I botons sot ti permetin di fâ: Disabilite il dispositîf o Torne a negoziâ la conession.
-
Beneath a device you find a list of the available protocols, IPv4 and IPv6:
+
Sot di un dispositîf tu cjatis une liste di protocoi disponibii, IPv4 e IPv6:
-
From the pop-up menu you set the mode to assign the vital network parameters IP Address, Netmask and Gateway. You can choose DHCP to dynamically get the configuration from your network (router etc.), or specify them yourself by selecting Static and pressing Apply when finished.
+
Dal menù a tende tu stabilissis la modalitât par assegnâ i parametris vitâi de rêt: Direzion IP, Mascare di rêt and Gateway. Tu puedis sielzi DHCP par otignî la configurazion in maniere dinamiche de tô rêt (vie router etc.), o specificâju di bessôl selezionant Statiche e fracant Apliche cuant che tu âs finît.
-
The settings for a tethered device are similar, without the WLAN connecting pop-up menu, obviously.
+
Lis impostazions par un dispositîf tethered (colegât pe condivision de conession) a son similârs, cence il menù a tende pe conession WLAN, logjic.
-
Services
-
DNS settings
+
Servizis
+
Impostazions DNS
-
If you're using DHCP the IP address for a DNS server and the domain are provided by you network (router etc.). You can add and remove other DNS servers and adjust their priorities by moving them up and down in the list with the buttons to the right of it.
-Apply will activate your new settings.
+
Se tu stâs doprant DHCP la direzion IP par un servidôr DNS e il domini a vegnin dâts de tô rêt (router etc.). Tu puedis zontâ e gjavâ altris servidôrs DNS e decidi la lôr prioritât spostantju sù e jù inte liste cui botons ae sô diestre.
+Apliche al ativarà lis gnovis impostazions.
FTP, SSH, Telnet
-
Haiku provides a few servers that you can Enable or Disable. On the right side of the window, you'll find information on that particular server that you should heed: The FTP and the Telnet server are insecure and unencrypted. By default they're turned off and should only be turned on, if you're aware of the security risks.
+
Haiku al furnìs cualchi servidôr, su di chei tu puedis fâ Abilite o Disabilite. De bande diestre dal barcon, tu cjatarâs informazions su chel particolâr servidôr che tu varessis di lei cun atenzion: Il servidôr FTP e chel Telnet no son sigûrs e no son cifrâts. Come sielte predefinide, a son distudâts e si varessin di impiâ dome se si è cussients dai risis di sigurece.
-
Settings files
+
I file des impostazions
-
The network settings are found in the folder /system/settings/network/. Normally you don't have to care about those, other than maybe having to delete them to begin with a clean slate after things have gone terribly wrong...
-
One file however can be really useful, especially when working from the Terminal. The hosts file lets you define aliases to specific IP addresses in the network. For example:
+
Lis impostazions di rêt si cjatin inte cartele /system/settings/network/. Di solit no ti varès di impuartâ, almancul che no tu vessis di eliminâlis par tacâ dal principi, parcè che dute la configurazion e je lade strucje...
+
Un file dut câs al pues jessi une vore util, in particolâr cuant che si lavore dal Terminâl. Il file hosts ti permet di definî i alias a specifichis direzions IP inte rêt. Par esempli:
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
In di plui al loopback che al ponte a localhost, jo o ai l'IP dal gno archivi rimot Synology, sot il non di "NAS" e chel dal gno riprodutôr multimediâl sot il non di "XIOS". Par tacâ une session FTP cul gno archivi rimot te rêt, no ai bisugne di visâmi la direzion IP, ma mi baste scrivi:
ftp NAS
@@ -113,8 +114,8 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Repositories
+
Dipuesits
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Repositories
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/Repositories_settings
-
Repositories are collections of software packages. Set up by default, there's the Haiku repo with all of the operating system's packages and HaikuPorts, which provides a large number of ported and native Haiku software. There are several more repositories, curated by members of the Haiku community. Checkout Software Sites on the website.
-
This is the preference panel to manage your respositories (you can open it also from HaikuDepot'sTools menu):
+
I Dipuesits a son colezions di pachets software. Configurâts in maniere predefinide, al è il dipuesit Haiku cun ducj i pachets dal sisteme operatîf e chel HaikuPorts, che al propon un grant numar di programs natîfs par Haiku e migrâts di altris plateformis. A esistin diviers altris dipuesits, curâts dai membris de comunitât di Haiku. Controle i Sîts dai software sul nestri sît web.
+
Chest al è il panel des preferencis par gjestî i tiei dipuesits (tu lu puedis vierzi ancje dal menù Struments dentri di HaikuDepot):
-
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
-
Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the +/- buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
-
To be able to remove a repository completely with the "-" button, it has to be disabled.
-You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+
La prime colone inte liste dai dipuesits cognossûts e mostre se un dipuesit in chel moment al è abilitât o mancul. Se nol è abilitât, nol vignarà interogât di HaikuDepot o di pkgman de rie di comant. Dopre i botons Abilite o Disabilite par abilitâ o disabilitâ il dipuesit selezionât, o fâs dopli clic suntun dipuesit par comutâ il so stât.
+
In base ae dimension dal dipuesit e de velocitât de tô conession internet, abilitâ un dipuesit al pues stâ cualchi secont. Se al sta di plui, tu vignarâs informât des ativitâts in vore intal piçul ricuadri parsore dai bontons +/-. Se al sta masse timp, ti si domandarà se anulâ o tornâ a provâ.
+
Par rivâ a gjavâ dal dut un dipuesit cul boton "-", al è di sei disabilitât.
+Tu zontis un gnûf dipuesit cul boton "+" , che al vierzarà chest panel:
-
To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
-
It goes without saying that adding a repository and downloading and installing software from it is a matter of trust. Don't carelessly just add any URL you happen upon on the internets.
+
Par zontâ un gnûf dipuesit, al baste tacâ il so URL tal cjamp di test. Al vignarà clamât "No cognossût" fin ae sô abilitazion.
+
Nol covente dî che zontâ un dipuesit, discjariâi i software e instalâju e je une cuistion di fiducie. No sta zontâ cence pinsîrs cualsisei URL che tu cjatis su internet.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Screen
+
Schermi
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Screen
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces
-~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Only when running in VESA mode.
-~/config/settings/Screen_data - Stores the panel's window position.
+~/config/settings/kernel/drivers/vesa - Dome cuant che si è in modalitât VESA.
+~/config/settings/Screen_data - Al archivie la posizion dal barcon dal panel.
-
Each of your workspaces can have its own resolution, color depth and refresh rate.
+
Ogni spazi di lavôr al pues vê la sô risoluzion, la sô profonditât di colôr e la sô frecuence di inzornament.
-
The top menu specifies if your changes are applied only to the current or to all workspaces. Depending on your graphics card, the other menus contain all supported resolution, color depth and refresh rate settings.
-
After clicking on Apply, the graphics mode is changed and an alert appears, asking you to keep or cancel the changes. If you don't answer that alert, the graphics mode reverts after 12 seconds to the previous setting. Maybe you couldn't see the alert because your monitor didn't support the setting.
-
There's a key combination that always works, not only when the Screen preferences are open: SHIFTCTRLALTESC sets a fall-back video safe mode. Handy if your monitor doesn't report its capabilities correctly and your settings result in a distorted or black screen. Here too, an alert pops up and if you do nothing for 12 seconds or press ESC you'll revert back.
-
On the left side of the window, you see a representation of your screen with the manufacturer and model it reports and it's resolution in dots per inch (dpi). It also shows the name of graphics card if it's supported by a driver. Otherwise it says "VESA", the quick fallback solution that works with pretty much every hardware.
-
While Haiku's VESA mode performs very well, you may experience some limitations. You may not be able to drive your widescreen display in its native resolution, resulting in a somewhat blurred picture. There may also be limitations with regard to available color depths and refresh rates.
-
Revert brings back the setting that was active when you started the Screen preferences.
-
To the bottom left you can set the number of workspaces and arrange them in columns and rows and open the Backgrounds preferences.
+
Il menù parsore al specifiche se si aplicarà lis modifichis dome al spazi di lavôr atuâl o a ducj. In base ae tô schede grafiche, i altris menù a contegnin lis impostazions pes risoluzions supuartadis, pe profonditât di colôr e pe frecuence di inzornament dal visôr.
+
Dopo vê fat clic su Apliche, la modalitât grafiche e ven cambiade e al vignarà fûr un avîs, che ti domandarà se tignî o anulâ lis modifichis. Se no si rispuint a chel avîs, la modalitât grafiche e torne indaûr aes impostazions precedentis daspò passâts 12 seconts. Magari no tu rivis a viodi l'avîs par vie che il visôr nol supuarte chê impostazion.
+
E je une cumbinazion di tascj che e funzione simpri, no dome cuant che si sta tes preferencis dal Schermi: MAIUSCCTRLALTESC al stabilìs une modalitât video sigure di repeç. Util se il visôr nol comuniche ben lis sôs capacitâts e duncje lis tôs impostazions ti puartin a vê un schermi neri o imberlât. Ancje chì, al ven fûr un avîs e se no tu fasis nuie par 12 seconts o tu frachis ESC si tornarà indaûr.
+
De bande di çampe dal barcon, tu puedis viodi une rapresentazion dal to schermi cul produtôr e il model (che il visôr al à comunicât) e la sô risoluzion in ponts par once (dot per inch - dpi). Al mostre ancje il non de schede grafiche se e je supuartade di un driver. In câs contrari al dîs "VESA", la soluzion di repeç rapide che e funzione su cuasi dut l'hardware.
+
Ancje se la modalitât VESA e va une vore ben, tu podaressis cjatâti a vê cualchi limitazion. No tu rivarâs a meti il tô visôr widescreen (16:9 o jù di lì) ae sô risoluzion native, e duncje al puartarà a vê imagjins fûr di fûc. Si podarès ancje vê limitazions par ce che al rivuarde lis profonditâts dai colôrs e lis frecuencis di inzornaments dal visôr.
+
Torne indaûr al puarte indaûr aes impostazions che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis dal Schermi.
+
In bas a çampe tu puedis stabilî il numar dai spazis di lavôr la lôr disposizion in riis e colonis e vierzi lis preferencis dal Fonts.
The top checkbox enables/disables the screen saver.
-With the slider below it, you control after how long an idle time the screen saver kicks in.
+
La casele di selezion plui in alt e abilite/disabilite il salveschermi.
+Cul cursôr subite sot, tu controlis trop timp di inativitât che si à di spietâ prime di fâ partî il salveschermi.
-
The next two sliders are only usable after you activated their checkboxes:
-One slider determines after how many minutes the screen is powered off.
-The other, after how many minutes you need a password to unlock your machine.
+
I doi cursôrs sucessîfs si puedin doprâ dome dopo vê ativât la lôr casele di selezion:
+Un cursôr al determine dopo trops minûts che il schermi al ven distudât.
+Chel altri, dopo trops minûts domandâ une peraule di ordin par sblocâ la machine.
-
By clicking into different corners of the two screens at the bottom, you tell the system when to immediately start the screen saver or when to prevent it from kicking in when you rest the mouse in the indicated corner. Click in the middle of the screens to disable that feature again.
+
Fasint clic su angui diferents dai doi visôrs in bas, tu disis al sisteme cuant fâ partî daurman il salveschermi o cuant impedî che al jentri in funzion se si lasse il mouse tal angul indicât. Un clic tal mieç dai visôrs par tornâ a disabilitâ chestis funzions.
The second tab shows a list of all installed screen savers and their individual settings. You can test your settings with the Test button below the list.
-New screen savers that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout):
+
La seconde schede e mostre une liste di salveschermis instalâts e lis lôr impostazions individuâls. Tu puedis provâ lis tôs impostazions cul boton Prove sot de liste.
+I gnûfs salveschermis che no rivin di un regolâr pachet .hpkg (o une sô part), a puedin jessi instalâts se si ju copie intes lôr rispetivis cartelis non-packaged (viôt l'argoment Disposizion dal Filesystem):
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Sounds
+
Suns
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Sounds
@@ -68,12 +69,12 @@
-
You can assign sounds to certain events in the system. Just select the event from the list and choose a sound from the pop-up menu below.
+
Tu puedis assegnâ suns a determinâts events dal sisteme. Al baste selezionâ l'event de liste e sielzi un sun dal menù a tende in bas.
-
None
will silence an event.
-
Other...
will open a file panel to find a new sound that isn't yet in the menu.
-
You can use any format that's supported by the system. If MediaPlayer can deal with it, so can any other program.
-You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the Play and Stop buttons.
+
Nissun
al cidinarà un event.
+
Altri...
al vierzarà un panel pai file par cjatâ un gnûf sun che nol è ancjemò tal menù.
+
Tu puedis doprâ cualsisei formât supuartât dal sisteme. Se MediaPlayer lu gjestìs, alore al rive cualsisei altri program.
+Tu puedis "pre-scoltâ" un sun di event selezionantlu e doprant i botons Riprodûs e Ferme.
@@ -82,8 +83,8 @@ You can "pre-hear" an event's sound by selecting it and using the
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Time
+
Ore
Deskbar:
Preferences
Posizion:
/boot/system/preferences/Time
-
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/networktime settings - All the settings concerning synchronizing the time through the network
-~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings - The setting of the hardware clock (local or GMT)
-~/config/settings/Time settings - The time zone setting
-~/config/settings/Time_preflet_window - The panel's window position etc.
+
Impostazions:
~/config/settings/networktime settings - Dutis lis impostazions che a rivuardin la sincronizazion de ore vie rêt
+~/config/settings/RTC_time_settings - La impostazion dal orloi hardware (locâl o GMT)
+~/config/settings/Time settings - La configurazion dal fûs orari
+~/config/settings/Time_preflet_window - La posizion dal barcon dal panel e vie indenant.
-
The panel of the Time preferences is split into four tabs:
+
Il panel des preferencis de Ore si divît in cuatri schedis:
On the left side, you can set the day of the month by simply clicking on it in the calendar. You change the month and year by clicking on it and using the up/down arrows to the right or the cursor keys on your keyboard.
-
Similarly, you set the time at the right. Or simply move the hands of the clock directly.
+
De bande di çampe, tu puedis stabilî il dì dal mês fasint un sempliç clic tal calendari. Tu puedis cambiâ il mês e l'an fasint clic su di chei e doprant lis frecis sù/jù che a son a diestre opûr lis frecis de tastiere.
+
Compagn a diestre, tu stabilissis la ore. Opûr spostant a man lis speris dal orloi.
Simply find and choose your country in the list of continents and press Set time zone. For countries with more than one time zone you'll have to expand one level deeper.
-To the right you'll find the time of the currently set time zone and the preview time of the the zone you've chosen.
-
Also on the right side is a setting for the hardware clock of your computer. There are two modes for the clock:
+
Al baste cjatâ e sielzi il to paîs inte liste dai continents e fracâ Stabilìs fûs orari. Pai paîs cun plui di un fûs orari tu varâs di pandi la liste ancjemò di un nivel.
+A diestre tu cjatarâs la ore dal fûs orari atuâl e la anteprime di chel che tu âs sielt.
+
In plui de bande di diestre e je une impostazion pal orloi hardware dal to computer. Si à dôs modalitâts pal orloi:
-
Local time
to display your local time, which you normally want if you dual-boot into Windows.
-
GMT
to display Greenwich Mean Time, which is the UNIX compatible setting.
+
Ore locâl
par visualizâ la tô ore locâl, che di norme tu vuelis se tu âs l'inviament dopli (dual-boot) ancje par Windows.
+
GMT
Par visualizâ il timp median di Greenwich (Greenwich Mean Time), che e je la impostazion compatibil cun UNIX.
Setting date and time manually is pretty much obsolete if you're connected to the internet. There are public servers that supply very exact time signals.
Stabilî la date e la ore a man e je une operazion une vore sorpassade se si è tacâts a internet. A esisitin servidôrs publics che a dan il segnâl orari plui precîs.
-
With the +/- buttons you can add/remove NTP-servers to/from the list.
-
The checkboxes below tell the system to Try all servers when synchronizing, not only the currently selected one, and to Synchronize at boot, so you can be sure you're clock always shows the correct time.
-
You can Reset to default server list if you accidentally deleted working NTP-servers and Synchronize your clock manually. The synchronization can be achieved from the command line (or a script) as well:
+
Cui botons +/- tu puedis zontâ/gjavâ i servidôrs NTP ae/de liste.
+
Lis caselis di selezion sot a disin al sisteme: “Prove ducj i servidôrs”, vâl a dî sincronize no dome cun chel cumò selezionât, e “Sincronize al inviament”, vâl a dî che tu puedis stâ sigûr che l'orloi al mostrarà simpri la ore juste.
+
Tu puedis fâ Ristabilìs ae liste di servidôrs predefinide se par erôr tu âs eliminât un servidôr NTP che al funzionave e fâ Sincronize par sincronizâ a man il to orloi. Si pues rivâ a sincronizâ ancje de rie di comant (o cuntun script):
The last tab shows the options of the clock displayed in the Deskbar. You can disable the clock there completely with the top checkbox. The rest are equally self-explanatory.
+
La ultime schede e mostre lis opzions dal orloi mostrât intal Deskbar. Lì tu puedis disabilitâ dal dut l'orloi cu la casele di selezion plui in alt. Chês che a restin si spieghin di bessolis.
-
In every tab is a button Revert that brings back the settings that were active when you started the Time preferences.
+
In ogni schede al è un boton Torne indaûr che al puarte indaûr aes impostazions che a jerin ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferncis de Ore.
Di norme, il file di scambi al ven scrit te partizion di inviament (boot). Se tu âs pocje memorie libare lì, tu puedis disativâ la Gjestion automatiche de memorie di scambi e sielzi une altre partizion montade dal menù a tende. La dimension dal file di scambi e ven stabilide cul cursôr de sbare lì sot.
Se al capite dispès che la testine dal disc fis e pinduli masse par vie memorie di scambi virtuâl, tu puedis provâ a doprâ un disc fis separât pal to file di scambi in mût di evitâ une congjestion dal I/O. Une altre partizion sul stes disc fis dal sisteme/dâts no judarà. Aumentâ la RAM e je di sigûr la vie plui buine par risolvi il fastidi...
-
Predefinîts
al puarte dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
+
Predefinîts
al torne a puartâ dut ai valôrs predefinîts.
Torne indaûr
al torne a puartâ indaûr lis impostazions a chês che si veve ativis cuant che si à inviât lis preferencis di Memorie virtuâl.
@@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ Se al capite dispès che la testine dal disc fis e pinduli masse par vie memorie
diff --git a/userguide/fur/queries.html b/userguide/fur/queries.html
index 7b630ec4..d15ed67d 100644
--- a/userguide/fur/queries.html
+++ b/userguide/fur/queries.html
@@ -9,19 +9,21 @@
*
* Authors:
* Humdinger
+ * Translators:
+ * Fabio Tomat
*
-->
- Queries
+ Interogazions
A query is a file search based on file attributes and can be performed within Tracker or in Terminal. Queries are saved in /boot/home/queries/ and by default last seven days before being purged. Note, these aren't static result lists of your search, but are the query formulas which trigger a new search whenever you open them.
-Even better, you don't have to double-click to re-do a query. You can drill down a saved query just like any folder by right-clicking on it and navigating through the submenus.
+
Une interogazion e je une ricercje di file basade sui atribûts dai file e e pues jessi fate di dentri Tracker o intal Terminâl. Lis interogazions a vegnin salvadis su /boot/home/queries/ e, come impostazion predefinide, a durin siet dîs prime di jessi eliminadis. Fâs câs che lis interogazions no son listis di risultâts statichis de tô ricercje, ma a son lis formulis de interogazion che ti daran fûr un gnûf risultât ogni volte che tu lis vierzis.
+Ancjemò miôr, no tu âs di fâ dopli clic par tornâ a eseguî une interogazion. Tu puedis sgarfâ jù intune interogazion salvade, tant che cualsisei cartele, fasinti un clic diestri e navigant cui sot-menù.
You start a query by invoking the Find... menu either from the Deskbar menu or any Tracker window or the Desktop (which is actually a fullscreen Tracker window). The shortcut is ALTF. You're presented with the Find window:
Tu iniziis une interogazion clamant la vôs dal menù Cjate..., sedi dal menù dal Deskbar, o di cualsisei barcon Tracker, o dal scritori (che a dile dute al è un barcon Tracker a plen visôr). La scurte e je ALTF. Ti si presentarà il barcon di Cjate:
-
Select recent or saved queries or save the current search parameters as Query Template.
-
Narrow down your search from All files and folders to specific file types.
-
Define the search method:
-
by name - a basic search by file or folder name
-
by attribute - an advanced search, you specify search terms for one or more attributes
-
by formula - an even more advanced search, you can fine-tune a complex query term
-
Select which drives to search on.
-
Enter the search term.
-
The expander hides/unhides the additional options.
-
Uncheck the Temporary checkbox if you don't want this query self-destruct after 7 days.
-
Check if your query is supposed to Include trash.
-
Optionally, enter a name for this query if you want to save it.
-
You can drag & drop the icon anywhere to save a query. Doing that with the right mouse button, offers the option to save as template.
+
Selezione lis interogazions resintis o salvadis, opûr salve i parametris de ricercje atuâl come Model di interogazion.
+
Strenç la ricercje di Ducj i file e lis cartelis a specifics gjenars di file.
+
Definìs il metodi di ricercje:
+
par non - une ricercje di base par non di file o non di cartele
+
par atribût - une ricercje avanzade, tu specifichis i tiermis di ricercje par un o plui atribûts
+
par formule - une ricercje ancjemò plui avanzade, tu puedis regolâ di fin un tiermin di interogazion complès
+
Selezione in cualis unitâts lâ a cirî.
+
Inserìs il tiermin di ricercje.
+
La freciute e mostre/plate lis opzions adizionâls.
+
Gjave la selezion ae casele Temporani se no tu desideris che cheste interogazion si auto-elimini dopo 7 dîs.
+
Segne la casele Inclût scovacere se la interogazion e varès di includi la scovacere te ricercje.
+
Come opzion, inserìs un non par cheste interogazion se tu desideris salvâle.
+
Tu puedis strissinâ e molâ la icone dulà che tu vûs, par salvâ une interogazion. Fasint la stesse robe cul boton diestri dal mouse, ti ven dade la pussibilitât di salvâ come model.
If you simply want to find all files and folders on your mounted disks that match a certain pattern, simply leave the search method at by Name, enter the search term into the text box and press ENTER.
Se tu desideris cjatâ juste ducj i file e lis cartelis sui tiei discs montâts cha a corispuindin a un specific model, al baste lassâ il metodi di ricercje su par non, inserìs il tiermin di ricercje tal ricuadri di test e frache INVIE.
Tu puedis creâ interogazions plui avanzadis cirint tra i atribûts dai specifics gjenars di file. Par che al funzioni, chescj atribûts a scugnin jessi metûts in tabele.
-
You start by setting the filetype from All files and folders to, for example, Text | E-mail and change the search method to by attribute.
-
This adds a pop-up menu to the left of the textbox and the buttons Add and Remove under that. From the menu you choose which attribute to query. With Add and Remove you can query additional attributes or remove them again. These attributes can be logically linked with AND/OR.
-
Let's do an email query as an example:
+
Si tache stabilint il gjenar di file cambiant di Ducj i file e lis cartelis a, par esempli, test | E-mail e dopo tu cambis il metodi di ricercje in par atribût.
+
Chest al zonte un menù a tende a çampe dal ricuadri di test e, sot dal ricuadri, al zonte i botons Zonte e Gjave. Dal menù tu sielzis cuâl atribût interogâ. Cun Zonte e Gjave tu puedis interogâ plui atribûts o tornâju a gjavâ. Chescj atribûts a puedin jessi colegâts in maniere logjiche cu lis funzions AND/OR (E / O par furlan).
+
Fasin un esempli cuntune interogazion di e-mail:
-
This is your Find window when you're looking for all emails Clara Oswald has sent to you in the last two months that had in the subject "sufflé" or "impossible".
-As you see, searching through time-based attributes supports some useful phrases: besides for the "last 2 months", you could also use "today", "yesterday", "Monday" or "last Monday" (which would be the Monday last week), or "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks".
-A good way to cut down the number of search results.
+
Chest al è il to barcon Cjate cuant che tu stâs cirint dutis lis e-mail che Clara Oswald ti à inviât tai ultins doi mês e che a àn come ogjet "sufflé" o "impossible".
+Tu puedis viodi che la ricercje a mieç di atribûts basâts sul timp e supuarte cualchi utile frase: sore a "last 2 months" (ultins doi mês) , tu puedis ancje doprâ "today"(vuê), "yesterday"(îr), "Monday"(Lunis) or "last Monday" (Lunis passât) (che al sarà il Lunis de setemane passade), o "last 2 minutes/hours/days/weeks" (ultins/ultimis 2 minûts/oris/dîs/setemanis).
+E je une buine maniere par taiâ vie tancj risultâts di ricercje.
Typing in a formula query by hand is daunting and really quite unpractical. It still has its uses.
-
Take the above query by attribute of Clara's mails concerning vibraphones etc. If you have all the attributes and their search terms set, try switching to by formula mode and be overwhelmed by this one line query string:
Scrivi une formule di interogazion a man al è un lavôr avilent e une vore pôc pratic. Ma al à ancje i siei motîfs.
+
Cjape la interogazion par atribûts di prime, chê des mail di Clara che a vevin a ce fâ cui vibrafons e vie indenant. Se tu âs stabilît ducj i atribûts e i lôr tiermins di ricercje, prove a passâ ae modalitât par formule e ven cjapât de maravee di cheste ugnule stringhe di interogazion:
-
Once more as text, edited for readability:
+
Ancjemò une volte come test, modificât pe facilitât di leture:
You could copy and paste the string into an email, forum or IRC for others to use or debug.
-
You can use this method to construct a query in Attribute mode and then switch to Formula mode, to comfortably generate a search string. Enclosed in single quotes, that string can then be used with the query command in the Terminal.
-
You can fine tune your query by inserting parenthesis where needed, make parts case-sensitive or negate logical combinations by changing. e.g. "==" to "!=" for a NOT AND. All you need is a basic understanding of regular expressions and maybe some scripting basics.
+
Tu puedis copiâ la stringhe e tacâle intune e-mail, forum o IRC par fâle doprâ a altris o par fâ un debug.
+
Tu puedis doprâ chest metodi par costruî une interogazion in modalitât Atribût e dopo passâ ae modalitât Formule, par gjenerâ in mût facil une stringhe di ricercje. Sierade tra virgulutis singulis, chê stringhe e pues vignî doprade cul comant query tal Terminâl.
+
Tu puedis rifinî la to interogazion inserint parentesis dulà che a coventin, rindi parts sensibilis aes maiusculis/minusculis o neâ cumbinazions logjichis cambiant p.e. "==" in "!=" par un NOT AND. Dut ce che ti covente e je une comprension di base des espressions regolârs e magari cualchi nozion di base su ce mût scrivi i script.
Dopo che tu âs tacât une ricercje, il barcon Cjate al ven sostituît di un barcon cui risultâts. Achì si à un esempli che al à interogât "server":
-
Besides the gray background, result windows work exactly like any other Tracker window. Some things are worth noting:
+
In plui di vê un fonts grîs, i barcons dai risultâts a funzionin juste come cualsisei altri barcon di Tracker. E vâl la pene notâ cualchi robe:
-
You can open the location of a file or folder by double clicking on its path attribute.
-
With File | Edit query or ALTG you get back to your Find window to refine your query.
-
A query is live, i.e. if a file that matches your search criteria appears or disappears from your system, this change is reflected in your results in real-time.
+
Tu puedis vierzi la posizion di un file o cartele fasint dopli clic sul so atribût posizion.
+
Cun File | Modifiche interogazion o ALTG tu tornis al barcon Cjate par rifinî la tô interogazion.
+
Une interogazion e je vive, vâl a dî che se un file, che al corispuint al criteri di ricercje, al ven fûr o al sparìs dal sisteme, cheste modifiche si riflet tai risultâts in timp reâl.
-
You can assign a sensible attribute layout for query results of a specific filetype. Open a folder containing files of the filetype you'd like to create a template for and arrange the attributes how you'd like to have query results presented. Copy this layout with Attributes | Copy layout.
-
Open /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, create a new folder named group/filetype, replacing the slash with an underscore, e.g. "audio_x-mp3". Open the new folder and paste in the previously copied layout with Attributes | Paste layout.
+
Tu puedis assegnâ une disposizion di un atribût particolâr pai risultâts di une ricercje di un specific gjenar di file. Vierç une cartele che e conten i file dal gjenar di file che par chei tu desideris creâ un model, organize i atribûts in mût di vêju come che tu ju vûs presentâts tai risultâts de ricercje. Copie cheste disposizion cun Atribûts | Copie disposizion.
+
Vierç /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/DefaultQueryTemplates, cree une gnove cartele clamade grup/gjenar-di-file, sostituint la sbare ( / ) cuntune liniute basse, p.e. "audio_x-mp3". Vierç la gnove cartele e tachi dentri la disposizion copiade prime cun Atribûts | Tache disposizion.
If you double click a saved query, the file search is at once started and the result window opens immediately. However, you may not want to search with these exact search parameters, but use it as starting point to only slightly tweak the formula.
-By using the Save query as template menu item (see (1) in screenshot at the top) or drag & dropping the icon (10) anywhere with the right mouse button, you can create just such a template. Double clicking it won't open a result window, but the Find panel, giving you the opportunity to quickly change search strings or add/remove attributes.
-
Wherever you choose to save query templates, they'll be listed in the Find panel's menu of recent queries.
Se tu fasis dopli clic suntune interogazion salvade, la ricercje dal file e partìs di colp e il barcon dai risultâts si vierç daurman. Dut câs, tu podaressis no volê cirî cun chescj precîs parametris di ricercje, ma doprâle tant che pont di partence par modificâ un tic la formule.
+Doprant la vôs dal menù Salve interogazion come model (viôt (1) te cature di schermi parsore) o strissinant e molant la icone (10) dulà che tu vûs cul boton diestri dal mouse, tu puedis creâ propite chel model. Fasinti dopli clic nol vierzarà un barcon cui risultâts, ma il panel Cjate, cussì di dâti la pussibilitât di cambiâ daurman lis stringhis di ricercje o zontâ/gjavâ atribûts.
+
Ogni volte che tu sielzis di salvâ un model di interogazion, chei a vignaran listâts tal menù dal panel Cjate des interogazions resintis.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Team Monitor
+
Monitor dai Team
-
With CTRLALTDEL you invoke the Team Monitor which lists all currently running programs.
+
Cun CTRLALTDEL tu clamis il Monitor dai Team che al liste ducj i programs in esecuzion in chel moment.
-
Programs that were launched by the system are blue, those started by the user black.
-Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashed, are marked red. You can try to quit a program by selecting it and pressing Quit application (or either DEL or Q). If that doesn't work, try Kill application (or SHIFTDEL or K) instead.
-
You can summon a Terminal with OPTALTT.
-
If your Tracker or Deskbar crashed or froze, a new button appears (you may have to kill the offending team first): Restart the desktop will restart Tracker and/or Deskbar for you.
+
I programs che a son stâts inviâts dal sistme a son blu, chei fats partî dal utent in neri.
+Lis aplicazions che no rispuindin, che di solit al è un segn che il program al è colassât, a son segnâts in ros. Tu puedis provâ a sierâ un program selezionantlu e fracant Jes de aplicazion (o in alternative CANC opûr Q). Se nol funzione, prove invezit Cope aplicazion (o in alternative MAIUSCCANC opûr K).
+
Tu puedis fâ vignî fûr un Terminâl cun OPZALTT.
+
Se il Tracker o il Deskbar a son colassâts o blocâts, al vignarà fûr un gnûf boton (tu varâs prime di copâ il team incriminât): Torne invie il scritori che al tornarà a inviâ il Tracker e/o il Deskbar.
@@ -75,8 +76,8 @@ Applications that are unresponsive, which is often a sign the program has crashe
- Twitcher
+ Il Twitcher
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Twitcher
+
Il Twitcher
-
The Twitcher is a task switcher to jump between running applications and their windows.
+
Il Twitcher al è un seletôr di ativitâts par passâ di une aplicazion a chês altris e tra i lôr barcons.
-
Hold CTRL and tap TAB to switch between the current and the last application/window. Tapping TAB very quickly will switch between all visible applications on the current workspace.
-Press and hold CTRLTAB to open the Twitcher window and go through all running applications by repeatedly hitting TAB or ←/→.
-If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as described and then go through its open windows with the ↑/↓ keys.
-
You cycle through all visible windows (on the current workspace) of an application with CTRL~ (which, depending on the keymap you're using, is the key below ESC).
-
It's also possible to invoke the Twitcher with CTRLTAB and then use the mouse to choose the application/window you'll jump to when releasing the CTRL key.
-
The Twitcher also offers a few more advanced keyboard shortcuts:
+
Ten fracât CTRL e da un colp su TAB par passâ tra il barcon/aplicazion atuâl e chel precedent. Batuçant TAB mût rapit ti permet di passâ a dutis lis aplicazions visibilis tal spazi di lavôr atuâl.
+Frache e ten fracât CTRLTAB par vierzi il barcon di Twitcher e passâ cussì tra dutis lis aplicazions in esecuzion fracant a ripetizion TAB o ←/→.
+Se ti covente di passâ a un specific barcon di un program, spostiti te sô icone, come che o ven dite, e daspò passe tra i siei barcons vierts cui tascj ↑/↓.
+
Tu puedis passâ a rotazion su ducj i barcons visibii di une aplicazion (sul spazi di lavôr atuâl) cun CTRL~ (che, in base ae mape di tastiere doprade, al è il tast che al sta sot di ESC, in chê furlane il tast al è \).
+
Si pues ancje clamâ il Twitcher cun CTRLTAB e dopo doprâ il mouse par sielzi la aplicazion/barcon, si saltarà a chê/chel cuant che si molarà il tast CTRL.
+
Il Twitcher al ufrìs ancje cualchi scurte di tastiere avanzade in plui:
-
ESC
Aborts the twitching and returns to the formerly active window.
-
Q
Quits the selected application.
-
H
Hides all windows of the selected application.
+
ESC
Al interomp il passaç e al torne al barcon che al jere atîf in precedence.
+
Q
Al siere la aplicazion selezionade.
+
H
Al plate ducj i barcons de aplicazion selezionade.
@@ -82,9 +83,9 @@ If you need to get to a specific window of a program, move to its icon as descri
diff --git a/userguide/fur/workshop-email.html b/userguide/fur/workshop-email.html
index 28c46110..11654f7b 100644
--- a/userguide/fur/workshop-email.html
+++ b/userguide/fur/workshop-email.html
@@ -9,19 +9,21 @@
*
* Authors:
* Humdinger
+ * Translators:
+ * Fabio Tomat
*
-->
- Workshop: Managing Email
+ Laboratori: gjestion de pueste
-
User guide
+
Vuide utent
@@ -59,7 +61,7 @@
-
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
+
La traduzion di cheste pagjine no je ancjemò finide. Spietant che lu sedi, pes parts che no son finidis, dopre la version origjinâl par Inglês.
@@ -72,7 +74,7 @@
-
Workshop: Managing Email
+
Laboratori: gjestion de pueste
This workshop takes a look on how to manage email under Haiku. It assumes that the email services are correctly configured with the E-Mail preferences and you're familiar with the basic features of the Mail application.
@@ -153,8 +155,8 @@ This finds all posts from the Haiku commit list of the past 12 hours.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
+
La traduzion di cheste pagjine no je ancjemò finide. Spietant che lu sedi, pes parts che no son finidis, dopre la version origjinâl par Inglês.
@@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ In any case, to these files we add a couple of attributes. Here we have to decid
Preferred application
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked.
-
Select...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
-
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
+
Selezione...
opens a file dialog where you choose the application to open with this filetype. Here, we set ShowImage to display the DVD's cover.
+
Il stes di...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the preferred application set that you're looking for.
@@ -235,8 +235,8 @@ Open the folder containing your DVDdb files and arrange the attributes how you'd
Getting the networking to run is essential in today's need for permanent internet connection. As keeping up to date with all the different and ever changing hardware and drivers is quite impossible for a small project, Haiku relies on a FreeBSD compatibility layer for its networking drivers.
-This ensures a massive amount of supported hardware, though probably not 100% of what's out there. See FreeBSD 12.0's release hardware notes for a list of supported models.
-
Currently only PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI, and Mini PCI-Express devices are expected to work.
-PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB and ISA devices still need more work to become functional.
+
Vê une rêt che e ledi al è essenziâl in dì di vuê, cu la necessitât di vê une conession permanente cun internet. Stant che tignîsi inzornâts cun ducj i diviers hardware e driver, che a son ancje in continue evoluzion, al è impussibil par un piçul progjet, pai siei driver di rêt Haiku al fâs afidament suntun strât di compatibilitât cun FreeBSD.
+Chest al sigure une grande cuantitât di hardware supuartât, ancje se magari no il 100% di ce che al è in cumierç. Viôt lis notis hardware di publicazion di FreeBSD 12.0 par vê une liste dai modei supuartâts.
+
Pal moment dome i dispositîfs PCI, PCI-X, PCI-Express, Mini PCI e Mini PCI-Express a varessin di funzionâ.
+I dispositîfs PCMCIA, CardBus, ExpressCard, USB e ISA a àn ancjemò bisugne di lavôr par vêju funzionants.
By default, Haiku will join the first unencrypted wireless network it finds after booting up. To connect to a specific network, you use the Desktop applet NetworkStatus.
-
Right-click on its icon in the Deskbar and choose the network's public name (which is the "SSID" it broadcasts) from the context menu.
Come configurazion predefinide, Haiku no si tacarà ae prime rêt no cifrade che al cjate daspò un inviament dal sisteme. Par conetisi a une speciiche rêt, si dopre la applet dal scritori Stât de Rêt.
+
Fâs clic diestri su pe sô icone tal Deskbar e sielç il non public de rêt (che al è il "SSID" che al trasmet ator) dal menù contestuâl.
-
A window opens where you enter the type of authentication (probably WPA/WPA2, WEP is not a secure encryption anymore!) and the password for that wireless network. Click OK to start the login process. Depending on your hardware and network configuration this may take a while. You'll be kept informed of the progress by notifications:
+
Si vierzarà un barcon dulà che tu inserirâs il gjenar di autenticazion (probabil WPA/WPA2, WEP no je plui une cifradure sigure!) e la peraule di ordin par chê rêt cence fîi. Fâs clic su Va ben par scomençâ il procès di acès. In base al to hardware e ae tô configurazion de rêt chest al pues tirâle a dilunc. Tu vignarâs tignût informât sui progrès cu lis notifichis:
-
Once it reads "Ready" and the NetworkStatus icon in the Deskbar shows a green round light, the connection is established. If the notifications end in "No link" and a yellow triangle, something went wrong, probably an incorrect password.
+
Une volte che tu leis "Pront" e la icone di Stât de Rêt tal Deskbar e mostre une lusute taronde verde, la conession e je stade stabilide. Se lis notifichis a finissin cun "Nissun colegament" e un triangul zâl, al al è lât strucj, probabile une peraule di ordin sbaliade.
If you prefer to use the command line or would like to use scripting or the ~/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript to automate things to join a specific network on bootup, there's the command ifconfig.
-
Start a Terminal and enter the first line to scan for available wireless networks:
Se tu preferissis doprâ la rie di comant o tu desideris doprâ un lengaç di scripting opûr ancjemò ~/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript automatizâ lis robis par tacâti a une specifiche rêt cuant che si invie il sisteme, si à il comant ifconfig.
+
Fâs partî un Terminâl e inserìs la prime rie par analizâ lis rêts cence fîi disponibilis:
ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 scan
name address signal auth
haiku-top 01:d0:19:a6:88:42 30 WPA
ArcorInternet123 00:20:12:a4:29:e1 15 WPA
-
The path to your wireless network adapter has to be adjusted, of course.
-The output shows the public name (SSID), MAC address, signal strength and authentication method of all found networks.
-
To join a network, use this line and insert the respective public name (SSID) and password:
Make sure the initial configuration of the wireless network adapter after booting up has finished, before issuing ifconfig commands or they might be ignored. Depending on your hardware and network configuration that may take a while. Watch those notifications...
+
Logjic, il percors pal to adatatôr di rêt wireless al à di jessi justât.
+Ce che al è jessût al mostre il non public (SSID), la direzion MAC, la fuarce dal segnâl e il metodi di autenticazion di dutis lis rêts cjatadis.
+
Par tacâsi a une rêt, dopre cheste rie e inserìs il rispetîf non public (SSID) e peraule di ordin:
+
ifconfig /dev/net/iprowifi3945/0 join {SSID} {peraule di ordin}
+
Daspò l'inviament, siguriti che la configurazion iniziâl dal adatadôr di rêt wireless e sedi finide, prime di mandâ i comants ifconfig opûr in câs contrari a vignaran ignorâts. In base al to hardware e ae tô configurazion de rêt cheste operazion e pues tirâle a dilunc. Ten di voli chês notifichis...
Ducj i components hardware cence fîi, modernis e supuartâts, a funzionin daurman.
-
A few quite old chipsets (Intel 2100/2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx, Marvell 88w8335) require binary firmware modules that Haiku cannot include due to licensing issues, though. To get these wireless cards to work, a simple script is included which will retrieve and install all of the needed proprietary bits for you.
-
Open a Terminal and type:
+
Però, cualchi chipset vecjo (Intel 2100/2200/2225/2915, Broadcom 43xx, Marvell 88w8335) al à bisugne di modui firmware binaris che Haiku nol pues includi par vie di problemis di licence. Par fâ funzionâ chestis schedis wireless, al è stât includût un sempliç script che al recuperarà e al instalarà ducj i bit proprietaris che ti coventin.
+
Vierç un Terminâl e scrîf:
install-wifi-firmwares.sh
-
Now review the licenses and accept them to install all of the available firmware files.
+
Cumò lei lis licencis e acetilis par instalâ ducj i file dai firmware disponibii.
-
If you cannot obtain the binary firmware files via the install-wifi-firmwares.sh script (for example due to lack of internet connection within Haiku), you can also download this shell script, and run it from another OS that has wget and zip installed.
-Windows users need to have wget and zip for Windows installed in their default locations and use this batch script.
-The script will download the needed files and create a zip file that is to be extracted to Haiku's /boot. Once unpacked, open a Terminal and type:
+
Se no tu puedis otignî i file dai firmware binaris cul script install-wifi-firmwares.sh (par esempli parcè che ti mancje la conession internet di jenfri Haiku), tu puedis ancje discjariâ chest script di shell, e eseguîlu intun altri SO che al vedi wget e zip instalâts.
+I utents di Windows a à bisugne di vê instalâts wget e zip par Windows tes lôr posizions predefinidis e doprâ chest script batch.
+Il script al discjariarà i file necessaris e al crearà un file zip che al varà di sei estrat su /boot di Haiku. Une volte estrat, vierç un Terminâl e scrîf:
install-wifi-firmwares.sh
-
Review the licenses and accept them to install all of the now available firmware files.
+
Lei lis licencis e acetilis par instalâ ducj i file dai firmware che cumò a son disponibii.
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Workspaces
+
Spazis di lavôr
-
Workspaces are virtual desktops, complete with their own resolution, color depth and background. Up to 32 of these workspaces can be set from the Screen preferences.
+
I Spazis di lavôr a son scritoris virtuâi, complets cu la lôr risoluzion, profonditât di colôrs e fonts. Si puedin vê fin a 32 di chescj spazis di lavôr e si puedin stabilî lì des preferencis dal Schermi.
You switch between workspaces by either clicking into the Workspaces applet (which is seen in the above image) or by using the keyboard shortcut ALTFx, where "x" is the workspace number. It's a good idea to arrange your workspaces in rows of four to mimick the layout of the Fx keys on the keyboard.
-Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send you to the workspace it's in.
-
Another very convenient way is to use CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ to navigate spatially the rows/columns of the available workspaces. If you additionally hold down SHIFT, the active window will move with you to the new workspace.
-
You can switch back and forth between two workspaces with ALT` (the actual key depends on the keymap you're using - it is the key below ESC). Again, holding SHIFT will take the active window with you.
Tu passis di un spazi di lavôr a chel altri o fasint clic inte applet Spazis di lavôr (che si pues viodi te imagjin parsore) o doprant la scurte di tastiere ALTFx, dulà che "x" al è il numar dal spazi di lavôr. No je mal pensade la idee di rangjâ i spazis di lavôr in riis di cuatri par fâ semeâ la disposizion dai tascj Fx te tastiere.
+Fasint clic suntune aplicazion o un dai siei barcons tal Deskbar ti mandarà sul scritori dulà che al sta.
+
Une altre maniere une vore furbe e je chê di doprâ CTRLALT←/→/↑/↓ par navigâ pes riis/colonis dai spazis di lavôr disponibii. Se cun diplui tu tegnis fracât MAIUSC, il barcon atîf si spostarà cun te sul gnûf spazi di lavôr.
+
Tu puedis lâ indaûr e indenant tra doi spazis di lavôr cun ALT` (il tast reâl al dipent de mape di tastiere che si sta doprant - al è il tast sot dal ESC). Ancje chì, tignint fracât MAIUSC al puartarà cun te ancje il barcon atîf.
@@ -81,8 +82,8 @@ Also, clicking on an application or one of its windows in the Deskbar will send
Az oldal fordítása még folyamatban van. Amíg tart a fordítás, addig a lefordítatlan részek angolul jelennek meg.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Haiku-specifikus parancssori programok
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ For more details on a parameter, append "--help", e.g. pkgman search --help<
filepanel -s -t "Mentse el a naplót" -d ~/config/settings -n Napló.log
hey
-
hey is a littler helper tool that sends BMessages to applications and prints out their answer. It can be used for application scripting, i.e. "remote controlling" a program from a script or the command line. It's usage is a bit complex... Humdinger's blog post serves as a good introduction, and thanks to Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, there is a much more comprehensive hey tutorial by Chris Herborth.
+
A hey egy hasznos kis program, ami segítségével BMessage üzeneteket küldhetünk programoknak, majd megkapjuk a válaszokat is. Ez szkript írásakor lehet hasznos, például egy program "távirányítása" szkriptből vagy parancssorból. A használata egy kicsit összetett... Köszönhetően Scot Hacker BeOS Bible könyvének, kapunk egy kis hey leírást, melyet Chris Herborth készített.
notify
notify shows a notification panel with a message. There are various parameters that are described when you call notify --help. A notification can also be used to show the progress of some action. When doing that, it's important to set a messageID and always use it when you update the progress (a float between 0.0 and 1.0 that's printed as percent). Otherwise you'll see several notification panels if you update quicker then the set timeout.
diff --git a/userguide/hu/applications/diskprobe.html b/userguide/hu/applications/diskprobe.html
index feb234de..d3d5516e 100644
--- a/userguide/hu/applications/diskprobe.html
+++ b/userguide/hu/applications/diskprobe.html
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
Az oldal fordítása még folyamatban van. Amíg tart a fordítás, addig a lefordítatlan részek angolul jelennek meg.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Index
@@ -79,11 +79,10 @@
Asztalsáv:
Alkalmazások
Útvonal:
/boot/system/apps/HaikuDepot
-
Beállítások:
~/config/settings/HaikuDepot/main_settings
-~/config/cache/HaikuDepot/ - Cached icons, screenshots, descriptions etc.
+
Beállítások:
~/config/settings/HaikuDepot/
-
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
The second tab shows All packages, the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
@@ -105,14 +104,13 @@
Aktív: A csomag már telepítve van és használatra készen áll.
Available: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
Folyamatban / %: A Folyamatban állapot akkor látható, amikor a csomag beütemezésre került letöltésre vagy telepítésre. Letöltés közben a folyamat százalékban jelenik meg.
-
Frissítés érhető el: A már telepített csomag egy újabb verziója érhető el.
A lista és az információs panel közötti pontozott vonalat függőlegesen mozgatva a lista méretét módosíthatjuk.
At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
-To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install, Uninstall or Update it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install or Uninstall it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
Below are four tabs: About, Ratings, Changelog and Contents.
About
@@ -157,7 +155,7 @@ The second item is to Manage repositories.... It opens
Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
After you click Send the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the Tools menu to Refresh repositories before you can see your changes.
-
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox Other users can see this rating.
+
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating a checkbox This rating is visible to other users, that appears in this window once you've rated a package.
The Input preferences combine the formerly separate panels for keyboard, mouse and touchpad, plus any other input device recognized by the system. The devices are listed to the left, while the panel to the right changes according to the available settings for the selected device.
First you set your type of mouse: 1, 2 or 3 button mouse. You can simulate the 2nd (=right) mouse button by holding down CTRL while left-clicking. For the 3rd (=middle) mouse button, it's CTRLALT and a left-click.
+
You can rearrange the mouse buttons by clicking on them and choosing their new meaning from the pop-up menu.
+
With the sliders to the right, you adjust double-click speed, mouse speed and acceleration. The test area below the mouse graphics can be used to check if the double-click speed meets your taste: if double-clicking a word doesn't select it, it's set too fast (or you'll have to get used to clicking quicker...).
+
There are three Focus modes that determine how windows react to clicks:
+
+
Click to focus and raise
This is the default setting: you click a window and it gets focus and is raised to the top.
+
Click to focus
Clicking a window only gives it the focus, but won't raise it automatically. To do that, you'd have to either click on its title tab or border or click anywhere while holding the window management keysCTRLALT.
+
Focus follows mouse
The window under the mouse pointer automatically gets the focus. Actually raising it, is done as described in the Click to focus mode.
+
+
Activating Accept first click relieves you of having to first put the focus on an inactive window in order to trigger widgets like a button or menu. This bears the risk of unintentionally closing a window, for example, by accidentally hitting the close button when aiming for the window tab. On the other hand it speeds up your workflow considerably.
+
All settings are immediately applied.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Mouse preferences.
By dragging the red vertical or horizontal lines on the touchpad representation, you set the scroll area (slightly reddish against the gray general touch area). Moving your finger on that part of the pad will move the scrollbars of a window accordingly.
+
To the right are sliders to set the general scroll acceleration and the vertical and horizontal scrolling speed.
+The acceleration setting decides how much quicker a list scrolls by if you swish over the scroll area very fast. The scrolling speeds control the general speed when using the scroll area in a "normal" way.
+
Below the touchpad graphic are checkboxes to enable "Two finger scrolling" for vertical and horizontal scrolling. Move two fingers in parallel vertically or horizontally to move the scrollbars of a window. At least for me, it works best with one finger from the left and one from the right hand.
+If you feel comfortable using this feature, you can dispense with setting scroll areas and instead use the whole pad for normal navigation.
+
At the bottom is another slider to set the tap click sensitivity. If your taps keep getting ignored, increase the sensitivity. If the system registers clicks all the time, while all you want is to move the mouse pointer, try decreasing it.
+
+
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Touchpad preferences.
+
+
Here is a tip that's not related to the Touchpad preferences, but fits the general topic:
+Did you know that you can do a drag and drop just by using the touchpad, i.e. not using the buttons? Just do a double click without lifting the finger after the second click. The picked up icon will stick to the mouse pointer and you can drag it around by moving your finger. Lifting your finger will drop the icon.
+
If your finger reaches a border of the touchpad while dragging an icon, but the mouse pointer hasn't yet reached the screen edge, how can you keep on dragging your icon? As soon as you lift your finger, the icon would be dropped.
+Depending on your hardware, there's a nifty feature: just leave your finger without lifting at the touchpad edge. The mouse pointer will keep on moving on auto-pilot.
Az oldal fordítása még folyamatban van. Amíg tart a fordítás, addig a lefordítatlan részek angolul jelennek meg.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Hálózat (Network)
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember its IP address, but can simply enter:
ftp NAS
@@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
Az oldal fordítása még folyamatban van. Amíg tart a fordítás, addig a lefordítatlan részek angolul jelennek meg.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Raktárak
+
Tárolók
Asztalsáv:
Beállítások
Útvonal:
/boot/system/preferences/Repositories
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
Depending on the size of the repository and the speed of the internet connection, enabling a repository may take a few seconds. If it takes longer, you're informed of pending tasks in the little text box above the +/- buttons. If it takes unusually long, you'll be asked to either cancel or retry.
To be able to remove a repository completely with the "-" button, it has to be disabled.
-You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel:
+You add a new repository with the "" button, which will open this panel
To add a new repository, just paste its URL into the text field. It'll be named "Unknown" until you enable it.
It goes without saying that adding a repository and downloading and installing software from it is a matter of trust. Don't carelessly just add any URL you happen upon on the internets.
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ You add a new repository with the "" button, which
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
ActivityMonitor
+
Monitor Aktifitas (ActivityMonitor)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/ActivityMonitor
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/ActivityMonitor settings
@@ -72,10 +71,10 @@
Dengan mengeklik kanan ke jendela, Anda dapat beralih tampilan semua jenis sumber daya: Used/Cached Memory, Swap Space, CPU Usage, Network Receive/Send, Page faults, Semaphores, Ports, Threads, Teams, Running Applications, Raw/Text Clipboard Size, Media Nodes.
-
Below the graph is a legend (hideable from the context menu). You can change the colors and that of the graph's background via drag & drop from any color picker, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
-
You can add more views from the File menu if it gets too crowded.
-
The Settings menu opens a panel to set the update interval.
-
Each view has it's own Replicant handle and can thus be arranged, for example, on the Desktop.
+
Di bawah grafik adalah legenda (disembunyikan dari menu konteks). Anda dapat mengubah warna dan latar belakang grafik melalui drag & drop dari pemilih warna apa pun, misal dariIcon-O-Matic.
+
Anda dapat menambahkan lebih banyak tampilan dari menu File jika terlalu ramai.
+
Menu Pengaturan membuka panel untuk mengatur interval pembaruan.
+
Setiap tampilan memiliki pegangan Replicant sendiri dan dengan demikian dapat diatur, misalnya, di Desktop.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
BootManager
+
Manajer Boot (BootManager)
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally started from Installer's Tools menu
+
Deskbar:
tiada entri, secara normal dijalankan dari installer Tools menu
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/BootManager
-
Pengaturan:
none MBR backups are saved by default in ~/config/settings/bootman/
+
Pengaturan:
tiada MBR bekap normalnya disimpan secara bawaan di ~/config/settings/bootman/
-
If you don't add the Haiku partition to an existing boot manager like GRUB, BootManager can install a small boot menu in the Master Boot Record (MBR) that looks something like this:
+
Jika Anda tidak menambahkan partisi Haiku ke boot manager yang ada seperti GRUB, BootManager dapat menginstal menu boot kecil di Master Boot Record (MBR) yang terlihat seperti ini:
-
BootManager isn't yet tested very well and still has a few restrictions that it will complain about if they aren't met: the menu can only be installed on your first harddisk and there has to be a 2KiB space after the Master Boot Record (MBR).
-
BootManager guides you through the installation process of the boot menu.
+
BootManager belum diuji dengan sangat baik dan masih memiliki beberapa batasan yang akan dikeluhkan jika mereka tidak terpenuhi: menu hanya dapat diinstal pada harddisk pertama Anda dan harus ada ruang 2KiB setelah Master Boot Record ( MBR).
+
BootManager memandu Anda melalui proses instalasi menu boot.
The BootManager starts off with a list of all available drives from which you choose the destination. If there's already a boot menu on that drive, the Uninstall button becomes active, leading you through the simple procedure to restore a formerly backed-up MBR, thereby removing the boot menu. Otherwise, choose Install to continue.
+
BootManager dimulai dengan daftar semua drive yang tersedia dari mana Anda memilih tujuan. Jika sudah ada menu boot pada drive itu, tombol Uninstall menjadi aktif, menuntun Anda melalui prosedur sederhana untuk mengembalikan MBR yang sebelumnya didukung, dengan demikian menghapus menu boot. Jika tidak, pilih Install untuk melanjutkan.
In case anything goes wrong or you want to remove the boot menu again, the Master Boot Record (MBR) is now saved. This is obviously a very important step, make sure you don't accidentally overwrite some other MBR-backup maybe from some earlier experimentation, for example!
Jika terjadi kesalahan atau Anda ingin menghapus menu boot lagi, Master Boot Record (MBR) sekarang disimpan. Ini jelas merupakan langkah yang sangat penting, pastikan Anda tidak sengaja menimpa beberapa MBR-cadangan lain mungkin dari beberapa eksperimen sebelumnya, misalnya!
-
Just select a destination for the backup file "MBR" or leave the default path. After clicking Next you'll get a confirmation if the backup was successful.
+
Cukup pilih tujuan untuk file cadangan "MBR" atau tinggalkan jalur default. Setelah mengklik berikutnya Anda akan mendapatkan konfirmasi jika cadangan berhasil.
Next you're presented with a list of all partitions on the destination drive. By setting checkmarks you decide what entries will appear in the boot menu, the text boxes allow you to rename an entry.
-
After that, you pick from the pop-up menu which partition will be booted from by default and set a timeout with the slider below. Here, "Immediately" will skip the boot menu entirely, "Never" will just stop at the boot menu. You can override the timeout setting by holding ALT while booting.
+
Selanjutnya Anda disajikan dengan daftar semua partisi pada drive tujuan. Dengan mengatur tanda centang Anda memutuskan entri apa yang akan muncul di menu boot, kotak teks memungkinkan Anda untuk mengubah nama entri.
+
Setelah itu, Anda memilih dari menu pop-up yang partisi akan di-boot dari secara default dan menetapkan batas waktu dengan slider di bawah ini. Di sini, "Segera" akan melewati menu boot sepenuhnya, "Tidak pernah" hanya akan berhenti di menu boot Anda dapat mengganti pengaturan batas waktu dengan menahan ALT saat booting.
Before the boot menu is written to the MBR, you'll get a summary of your configuration and then one last chance to abort the operation. Don't worry though, as long as you keep the MBR backup safe, you can easily revert the changes. Should things get thoroughly messed up, you can always boot from a Haiku install CD or USB stick and write back the MBR backup with BootManager.
+
Sebelum menu boot ditulis ke MBR, Anda akan mendapatkan ringkasan konfigurasi Anda dan kemudian satu kesempatan terakhir untuk membatalkan operasi. Jangan khawatir, selama Anda menyimpan cadangan MBR dengan aman, Anda dapat dengan mudah mengembalikan perubahan. Jika semuanya benar-benar kacau, Anda selalu dapat boot dari Haiku menginstal CD atau USB stick dan menulis kembali cadangan MBR dengan BootManager.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
CharacterMap
+
Pemetaan Karakter (CharacterMap)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/CharacterMap
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/CharacterMap settings
-
CharacterMap will show you the UTF-8 code of every character a font supports.
+
CharacterMap akan menunjukkan kepada Anda kode UTF-8 dari setiap karakter yang didukung font.
-
To the left you have the standardized blocks, together with a handy filter function. Optionally, you can choose to also Show private blocks from the View menu. The right shows the actual characters in these blocks, using the font specified in the Font menu. Below that you can change the font size. And below that, the values of the character currently under the mouse pointer is displayed in hex, decimal and UTF-8 notation.
-
You can drag & drop a character directly from the character map into a text editor, or right-click on one to either Copy character (ALTC) or Copy as escaped byte string (SHIFTALTC). Resulting in, e.g. either € or \xe2\x82\xac.
+
Di sebelah kiri Anda memiliki blok standar, bersama dengan fungsi filter praktis. Secara opsional, Anda dapat memilih untuk juga Show private blocks dari View. Di sebelah kanan menunjukkan karakter sebenarnya dalam blok ini, menggunakan font yang ditentukan dalam
+ menu Font. Di bawah itu Anda dapat mengubah ukuran font. Dan di bawah itu, nilai-nilai karakter saat ini di bawah penunjuk mouse ditampilkan dalam notasi hex, desimal dan UTF-8.
+
Anda dapat drag & drop sebuah karakter langsung dari peta karakter ke dalam editor teks, atau klik kanan pada salah satuCopy character (ALTC) or Salin sebagai string byte yang diloloskan (SHIFTALTC). menghasilkan, salah satu dari. € or \xe2\x82\xac.
All commandline applications shipped with Haiku are in /boot/system/bin/. Your own or additionally installed commandline apps will appear there as well, or in ~/config/bin/, when installed from a .hpkg package. Otherwise you can put them into /boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ or ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. All these locations are part of the PATH variable and are therefore automatically found.
-The following isn't an exhaustive list of all Haiku-specific CLI apps, it serves just to highlight a few of the most useful to give you a taste. Feel encouraged to explore what's in the bin/ folders on your own a bit. Executing an app with the parameter --help shows the usage of the command and all its various options.
+
Semua aplikasi commandline yang dikirimkan dengan Haiku ada di /boot/system/bin/. Aplikasi commandline Anda sendiri atau tambahan yang diinstal juga akan muncul di sana, atau di ~/config/bin/, ketika diinstal dari paket .hpkg . Jika tidak, Anda dapat meletakkan mereka di /boot/system/non-packaged/bin/ atau ~/config/non-packaged/bin/. Semua lokasi ini adalah bagian dari variabel PATH dan karenanya secara otomatis ditemukan.
+Berikut ini bukan daftar lengkap dari semua aplikasi CLI khusus Haiku, ini berfungsi hanya untuk menyoroti beberapa yang paling berguna untuk memberi Anda perasaan. Merasa terdorong untuk menjelajahi apa yang ada di bin/ sedikit pada Anda sendiri. eksekusi aplikasi dengan parameter --help menunjukkan penggunaan perintah dan semua berbagai pilihannya.
These commands are used to display, read out, add and remove attributes of files. Remember that these meta data are currently only available on BFS formatted volumes. Moving files onto other file systems will strip all attributes!
-All these commands are described in topic Attributes in Terminal.
Perintah-perintah ini digunakan untuk menampilkan, membaca, menambah dan menghapus atribut file. Ingat bahwa meta data ini saat ini hanya tersedia pada volume yang diformat BFS. Memindahkan file ke sistem file lain akan menghapus semua atribut!
+Semua perintah ini dijelaskan dalam topik Atribut di Terminal.
+
+
With these commands you list, make, reindex and remove attributes to BFS' index. Every volume has it's own index, remember that when copying files from one volume to another.
-These commands are described in topic Index.
Dengan perintah-perintah ini Anda membuat daftar, membuat, mengindeks ulang, dan menghapus atribut ke indeks BFS. Setiap volume memiliki indeks sendiri, ingat bahwa ketika menyalin file dari satu volume ke volume lain.
+Perintah-perintah ini dijelaskan dalam topik Indeks.
+
+
The package command is used to manage HPKG packages. Have a look at the article Installing applications to learn the very basics. Usually the tool haikuporter is used to automatically create packages from so-called recipes.
-
pkgman is used to search, install, update and uninstall packages. Package repositories can be added, dropped and their package lists refreshed. A special kind of update is invoked with the parameter full-sync: it is more aggressive and also downgrades or removes packages, if necessary.
-For more details on a parameter, append "--help", e.g. pkgman search --help
Perintah yang berkaitan dengan paket digunakan untuk mengelola paket HPKG. Lihatlah artikel Menginstal aplikasi untuk mempelajari dasar-dasarnya. Biasanya alat haikuporter digunakan untuk secara otomatis membuat paket dari apa yang disebut resep.
+
pkgman digunakan untuk mencari, menginstal, memperbarui, dan menghapus paket. Repositori paket dapat ditambahkan, dihapus, dan daftar paketnya di-refresh. Pembaruan khusus dilakukan dengan parameter full-sync: lebih agresif dan juga menurunkan atau menghapus paket. , jika perlu.
+Untuk detail lebih lanjut tentang parameter, tambahkan "--help", mis. pkgman search --help
Berikut adalah beberapa alat commandline yang sangat berguna untuk scripting (lihat juga topik Bash dan Scripting).
alert
-
alert conjures up the typical alert window with a pre-defined icon, explanatory text and up to three buttons. It will return the title of the pressed button and an exit status (starting with 0). For example, this is made of the line:
+
alert memunculkan jendela peringatan khas dengan ikon yang telah ditentukan, teks penjelasan dan hingga tiga tombol. Ini akan mengembalikan judul tombol yang ditekan dan status keluar (dimulai dengan 0). Misalnya, ini dibuat dari baris :
alert --idea "FantasticApp(tm) installed successfully! \
Would you like a link to it?" "On Desktop" "In Deskbar" "No thanks"
+
filepanel
-
filepanel displays a load or save file panel and lets the user choose a file or location. As a return value you'll get the chosen file or folder's path. There are several parameters available, for example to set a starting directory, a window title, a default name when saving or restrictions to the allowed types of files. This is an example of
+
filepanel
+ menampilkan memuat atau menyimpan panel file dan memungkinkan pengguna memilih file atau lokasi. Sebagai nilai kembali Anda akan mendapatkan jalur file atau folder yang dipilih. Ada beberapa parameter yang tersedia, misalnya untuk mengatur direktori mulai, judul jendela , nama standar saat menyimpan atau membatasi jenis file yang diizinkan. Ini adalah contoh dari
filepanel -s -t "Save your logfile" -d ~/config/settings -n Fantastic.log
+
+
hey
-
hey is a littler helper tool that sends BMessages to applications and prints out their answer. It can be used for application scripting, i.e. "remote controlling" a program from a script or the command line. It's usage is a bit complex... Humdinger's blog post serves as a good introduction, and thanks to Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, there is a much more comprehensive hey tutorial by Chris Herborth.
-
+
hey adalah alat pembantu yang lebih kecil yang mengirimkan BMessage ke aplikasi dan mencetak jawaban mereka. Dapat digunakan untuk skrip aplikasi, yaitu "mengendalikan jarak jauh" suatu program dari skrip atau baris perintah. Penggunaannya agak rumit ... postingan blog Humdinger berfungsi sebagai pengantar yang bagus, dan terima kasih kepada Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible, ada hey tutorial yang jauh lebih komprehensif oleh Chris Herborth.
notify
-
notify shows a notification panel with a message. There are various parameters that are described when you call notify --help. A notification can also be used to show the progress of some action. When doing that, it's important to set a messageID and always use it when you update the progress (a float between 0.0 and 1.0 that's printed as percent). Otherwise you'll see several notification panels if you update quicker then the set timeout.
+
notify menunjukkan panel notifikasi dengan pesan. Ada berbagai parameter yang dijelaskan ketika Anda memanggil notify --help. Notifikasi juga dapat digunakan untuk menunjukkan kemajuan beberapa tindakan. Ketika melakukan itu, penting untuk mengatur messageID dan selalu gunakan saat Anda memperbarui progres (float antara 0,0 dan 1.0 yang dicetak sebagai persen). Jika tidak, Anda akan melihat beberapa panel notifikasi jika Anda memperbarui lebih cepat daripada batas waktu yang ditetapkan.
An example:
query is the commandline version of the Find panel. In fact, a quick way to generate the search term is to build a query in the Find panel, switch to by formula, add double quotes (") in front and back and paste the whole string after your query command in Terminal or your script.
-
+
query adalah versi commandline dari panel Find. Faktanya, cara cepat untuk menghasilkan istilah pencarian adalah dengan membuat query di panel Find, beralih ke dengan formula , tambahkan tanda kutip ganda (") di depan dan belakang dan tempelkan seluruh string setelah perintah kueri Anda di Terminal atau skrip Anda.
waitfor
-
waitfor is a nice way to wait for a particular application or thread to be started or to have ended.
+
waitfor adalah cara yang bagus untuk menunggu aplikasi atau utas baru dimulai atau telah berakhir.
checkfs is an important tool to check for errors in your file system. Simply add a volume name like /Haiku or device path and it'll run through every file and correct inconsistencies where possible.
-
+
checkfs adalah alat penting untuk memeriksa kesalahan dalam sistem file Anda. Cukup tambahkan nama volume seperti /Haiku atau jalur perangkat dan itu akan dijalankan melalui setiap file dan memperbaiki ketidakkonsistenan jika memungkinkan.
desklink
-
desklink can install an icon for any file, folder, query or application in the Deskbar tray. It also offers the option to provide a context menu when right-clicking an icon to execute special actions. As an example, try this to add the commandline app screenshot with various options (the "\" in the first line is just for the line break in Terminal):
+
desklink dapat menginstal ikon untuk file, folder, kueri, atau aplikasi apa pun di baki Deskbar. Ia juga menawarkan opsi untuk menyediakan menu konteks ketika mengklik kanan ikon untuk melakukan tindakan khusus. Sebagai contoh, coba ini untuk menambahkan aplikasi commandline screenshot dengan berbagai opsi (karakter "\"di baris pertama hanya untuk ganti baris di Terminal ):
diskimage lets you register a regular file as disk device. For example, you can register a Haiku anyboot image, mount it in Tracker and copy, edit or remove files there before using it as source in the Installer.
-
+
diskimage memungkinkan Anda mendaftarkan file biasa sebagai perangkat disk. Misalnya, Anda dapat mendaftarkan gambar Haiku anyboot, pasang di Tracker dan salin, edit atau hapus file di sana sebelum menggunakannya sebagai sumber di Installer.
launch_roster
-
The launch_daemon starts all sorts of services and applications at boot-up. For some it was instructed to re-start them if they were quit. If you don't want that – maybe you'd like to test a modified Tracker, for example – you use launch_roster to stop the re-starting of the application before quitting it. Similarly, you can start it again or get info about it.c The parameter log prints out a log of all launch_daemon related events.
-Without parameter, launch_roster lists all apps/services that are under its control.
-For example, this will stop the re-launching of the Deskbar:
-
launch_roster stop x-vnd.be-tskb
+
Launch_daemon memulai semua jenis layanan dan aplikasi saat boot-up. Untuk beberapa itu diinstruksikan untuk memulai kembali jika mereka keluar. Jika Anda tidak mau - mungkin Anda ingin menguji Tracker yang dimodifikasi, misalnya - Anda menggunakan launch_roster untuk stop memulai kembali sebelum berhenti. Mirip, Anda dapat start lagi atau mendapatkan infohal itu.c parameter log mencetak semua log yang berkaitan dengan launch_daemon.
+Tanpa parameter, launch_roster mencantumkan semua aplikasi / layanan yang berada di bawah kendalinya.
+Misalnya, ini akan menghentikan peluncuran kembali Deskbar:
+
launch_roster stop x-vnd.be-tskb
+
mountvolume mount
-
mountvolume is preferred by many to mount local partitions and disks, because its usage is so easy: just call it with the name of the partition and you're done. Try --help for more options.
-
mount can additionally mount remote disks by using a network filesystem, like NFS4. You specify the used filesystem with the -t parameter and the remote location with the -p parameter. As filesystem parameter you can use anything you find in /system/add-ons/kernel/file_system (and corresponding file hierarchies under ~/config or "non-packaged", of course). You also have to create a folder as mountpoint. Here's an example:
+
mountvolume lebih disukai oleh banyak orang untuk me-mount partisi dan disk lokal, karena penggunaannya sangat mudah: cukup panggil dengan nama partisi dan Anda selesai. Cobalah --help untuk opsi lainnya.
+
mount juga dapat me-mount disk remote dengan menggunakan sistem file jaringan, seperti NFS4. Anda menentukan filesystem yang digunakan dengan parameter -t dan lokasi remote dengan parameter -p. Sebagai parameter filesystem Anda dapat menggunakan apa pun yang Anda temukan di /system/add-ons/kernel/file_system (and corresponding file hierarchies under ~/config or "non-packaged" tentu saja). Anda juga harus membuat folder sebagai mountpoint. Berikut ini contohnya:
mkdir -p /DiskStation
mount -t nfs4 -p "192.168.178.3:volume1" /DiskStation
open
-
open is a very handy little tool. With it you open any file with its preferred application, or start a specific application by its signature without the need to know its exact path. It also works with URLs and even with the "virtual" directories . for the current directory and .. for the parent, opening the folder in Tracker.
-
+
open adalah alat kecil yang sangat berguna. Dengan itu Anda membuka file apa pun dengan aplikasi pilihannya, atau memulai aplikasi tertentu dengan tanda tangannya tanpa perlu mengetahui jalurnya dengan tepat. Ia juga bekerja dengan URL dan bahkan dengan direktori "virtual". . untuk direktori saat ini dan .. untuk orang tua, buka folder di Tracker.
ramdisk
-
A ramdisk is like a harddisk running only in the computer's memory. That makes it very fast but also volatile, because its contents vanishes when you shut down the computer, or it crashes or you experience a blackout.
-To create a ramdisk of 1 GiB, format to the name "RAMses" and mount it, you enter this in Terminal or create a script of it:
+
Ramdisk adalah seperti harddisk yang hanya berjalan di memori komputer, yang membuatnya sangat cepat tetapi juga mudah berubah, karena isinya menghilang ketika Anda mematikan komputer, atau crash atau Anda mengalami pemadaman.
+Untuk membuat ramdisk 1 GiB, format dengan nama "RAM" dan pasang, masukkan ini di Terminal atau buat skripnya:
ramdisk create -s 1gb
mkfs -q -t bfs /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw RAMses
mountvolume RAMses
-
Note: When creating a ramdisk, the ramdisk command prints out the path to it. If you create several disks, that path /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw will change!
-
To preserve the contents, at least if no calamity like a blackout etc. strikes, a ramdisk can be set up to read/write an image on the harddisk. For that, you need to supply a file of the desired size that will be read from every time you start your ramdisk, and written to when you unmount it. To create an image file "RAMimage" of 500MiB and format it, do this:
+
Catatan: Saat membuat ramdisk, perintahramdisk mencetak path ke sana. Jika Anda membuat beberapa disk, path /dev/disk/virtual/ram/0/raw akan berubah!
+
Untuk mempertahankan konten, setidaknya jika tidak ada musibah seperti pemadaman dll., Ramdisk dapat diatur untuk membaca / menulis gambar pada harddisk. Untuk itu, Anda perlu menyediakan file dengan ukuran yang diinginkan yang akan dibaca dari setiap kali Anda memulai ramdisk, dan menulis ketika Anda melepasnya. Untuk membuat file image "RAMimage" dari 500MiB dan memformatnya, lakukan ini:
Mulai saat ini, amda mulai ramdisk dengan seperti ini :
ramdisk create RAMimage
mountvolume RAMimage
-
It's very important to always cleanly unmount you ramdisk, either from Tracker or with unmount /RAMimage, or the changes won't be written back to the image file!
+
Sangat penting untuk selalu melakukan unmount ramdisk dengan bersih, baik melalui Tracker atau dengan unmount /RAMimage, jika tidak perubahan anda tidak ditulis kembali ke berkas image!
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
CodyCam
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/CodyCam
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/codycam
-
CodyCam lets you take pictures at a specified interval from a connected webcam or any other video-in device and save them via FTP.
+
CodyCam memungkinkan Anda mengambil gambar pada interval tertentu dari webcam yang terhubung atau perangkat video-in lainnya dan menyimpannya melalui FTP.
-
To the left under the preview, you set the filename that'll be suffixed with an increasing number for every picture taken. Beneath that you decide on the file format and the rate the pictures are taken.
-
To the right you choose either FTP or sFTP (if SSH is available) and enter the needed data to save the images on a server.
+
Di sebelah kiri di bawah pratinjau, Anda mengatur nama file yang akan berakhiran dengan angka yang meningkat untuk setiap gambar yang diambil. Di bawah Anda menentukan format file dan tingkat gambar yang diambil.
+
Di sebelah kanan Anda memilih FTP atau sFTP (jika SSH tersedia) dan masukkan data yang diperlukan untuk menyimpan gambar di server.
The Debugger is an application the common user hasn't much use for. It's targeted at developers to investigate bugs in programs. Sometimes those bugs result in crashes and that is when even end users come into contact with the Debugger. When a program crashes, you're confronted with this alert :
+
Debugger adalah aplikasi yang tidak banyak digunakan oleh pengguna biasa. Ini ditargetkan pada pengembang untuk menyelidiki bug dalam program. Terkadang bug itu menyebabkan crash dan saat itulah pengguna akhir pun bersentuhan dengan Debugger. Ketika sebuah program crash, Anda dihadapkan dengan peringatan ini:
-
It offers four options to react to the crash:
+
Ia menawarkan empat opsi untuk bereaksi terhadap crash:
-
Terminate will clean up after the crashed app but otherwise does nothing further.
-
Debug will start the Debugger for further investigation.
-
Save report creates a debug report which is saved as a text file on the Desktop and can be emailed to the developer of the crashed app or attached to a ticket at its bugtracker, if available.
-The debug report contains information on your hardware (type of CPU and used memory etc.), the exact version of Haiku and all available information on the state of the system that could be relevant to the crash.
-
Write core file creates a possibly huge dump of the system's state. Better attach a regular debug report first when submitting a bug report and only provide a core file on request.
+
Terminate akan membersihkan setelah aplikasi macet tetapi sebaliknya tidak melakukan apa-apa lagi.
+
Debug akan memulai Debugger untuk penyelidikan lebih lanjut.
+
Save report Simpan laporan membuat laporan debug yang disimpan sebagai file teks pada Desktop dan dapat diemail ke pengembang aplikasi yang macet atau dilampirkan ke tiket di bugtracker-nya, jika tersedia.
+Laporan debug berisi informasi tentang perangkat keras Anda (jenis CPU dan memori yang digunakan dll.), Versi persis Haiku dan semua informasi yang tersedia tentang keadaan sistem yang mungkin relevan dengan kerusakan.
+
+
Write core file membuat laporan keadaan sistem --kemungkinan berukuran besar. Lebih baik lampirkan laporan debug biasa terlebih dahulu saat mengirimkan laporan bug dan hanya berikan file inti berdasarkan permintaan.
-
The default action when a crash happens can be configured with a text file ~/config/settings/system/debug_server/settings.
-The file takes on a driver_settings style format as follows:
+
Tindakan bawaan ketika terjadi kecelakaan dapat dikonfigurasi dengan file teks ~/config/settings/system/debug_server/settings.
+File ini mengambil format style driver_settings sebagai berikut:
default_action user
executable_actions {
app1 log
/path/app2* debug
}
-
Valid values for a default_action are:
+
Nilai yang valid untuk default_action adalah:
-
user
Prompt the user for action.
-
kill
Silently terminate the crashing team.
-
debug
Attach the debugger to the crashing team.
-
log / report
Save a crash report and terminate the team.
-
core
Save a (possibly very large) core file and terminate the team.
+
user
Meminta pengguna untuk bertindak.
+
kill
Diam-diam hentikan tim yang crash.
+
debug
Lampirkan debugger ke tim yang crash.
+
log / report
Simpan laporan kerusakan dan hentikan tim.
+
core
menyimpan berkas core (mungkin sangat besar) dan hentikan tim.
-
If no default_action is specified, "user" is assumed.
-
The executable_actions subsection contains individual overrides of the default. These take the form above, where the individual lines can be only a team name, or a path, with wildcards.
+
Jika tidak ada default_action ditentukan, diasumsikan "pengguna".
+
berisi settingan individual yang diambilalih dari default. Ini mengambil bentuk di atas, di mana masing-masing baris bisa hanya nama tim, atau path, dengan wildcard.
-
Describing the usage of the actual Debugger is out of scope for this guide that is addressing the needs of the common user of Haiku. For completeness sake, here's the window that'll come up if you choose the Debug option in the above alert:
+
Menjelaskan penggunaan Debugger yang sebenarnya berada di luar cakupan untuk panduan ini yang membahas kebutuhan pengguna umum Haiku. Demi kelengkapan, inilah jendela yang akan muncul jika Anda memilih opsi Debug dalam peringatan di atas:
-
As you'll quickly see when you start poking around a bit, the Debugger is one of the most complex and sophisticated applications for Haiku. If you're a developer and are used to graphical debuggers on other platforms, many features will be familiar to you.
-
Below are a few links that may shed some light on the intricacies of Haiku's Debugger. If you have a specific question, you may want to consider posting it on the development mailing list. If you find more useful resources, please file a bugreport with that info.
+
Seperti yang akan Anda lihat dengan cepat ketika Anda mulai mencari-cari sedikit, Debugger adalah salah satu aplikasi yang paling kompleks dan canggih untuk Haiku. Jika Anda seorang pengembang dan terbiasa dengan debugger grafis di platform lain, banyak fitur yang tidak asing bagi Anda.
+
Di bawah ini adalah beberapa tautan yang dapat menjelaskan seluk-beluk Debugger Haiku. Jika Anda memiliki pertanyaan khusus, Anda mungkin ingin mempertimbangkan untuk mempostingnya di development mailing list. Jika Anda menemukan sumber daya yang lebih berguna, silakan laporkan bugreport dengan info tersebut.
A video from the BeGeistert meeting in 2012, in which Ingo Weinhold demonstrates the state of the Debugger back then and shows other interesting tools like the profiler to hunt down bottlenecks.
026 Video dari pertemuan BeGeistert pada 2012, di mana Ingo Weinhold menunjukkan keadaan Debugger saat itu dan menunjukkan alat menarik lainnya seperti profiler untuk memburu kemacetan.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
DeskCalc
+
Kalkulator (DeskCalc)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/DeskCalc
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/DeskCalc_settings
-
DeskCalc is a simple calculator that nevertheless has some nice features that aren't apparent on first sight.
+
DeskCalc adalah kalkulator sederhana yang memiliki beberapa fitur bagus yang tidak terlihat pada pandangan pertama.
-
DeskCalc understands much more than its simple keypad suggests.
-Besides the operators , -, *, /, %, ^ and the constants pi and e the following math functions are supported:
+
DeskCalc mengerti lebih dari yang disarankan keypad sederhana.
+Selain operator , -, *, /, %, ^ dan konstanta pi and e fungsi matematika berikut ini didukung: !, acos, asin, atan, atan2, cbrt, ceil, cos, cosh, exp, floor, log, log10, pow, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, tanh.
-
Right-clicking offers these options:
+
Mengklik kanan menawarkan opsi ini:
-
Enable Num Lock on start up
Automatically activates the number block when launching DeskCalc.
-
Radiants/Degrees
Switch between "rad" and "deg" as unit for angular measure.
-
Compact
ALT0
A minimal view mode that hides the keypad.
-
Basic
ALT1
The standard look of DeskCalc.
-
Scientific
ALT2
Show additional buttons for advanced calculations.
+
Aktifkan Num Lock saat start up
Secara otomatis mengaktifkan blok angka saat meluncurkan DeskCalc.
+
Radiant/Derajat
Beralih antara "rad" dan "deg" sebagai satuan untuk ukuran sudut.
+
Ringkas
ALT0
Mode tampilan minimal yang menyembunyikan keypad.
+
Dasar
ALT1
Tampilan standar DeskCalc.
+
Ilmiah
ALT2
Tampilkan tombol tambahan untuk perhitungan lanjutan.
-
When it comes to user input, DeskCalc is quite tolerant:
-/, :, \ are all interpreted as division operators,
-*, x are valid symbols for multiplication.
-Also, be aware that . and , are both considered floating points, which means you mustn't use them as 1000-separators.
-
You can resize the calculator until it fits your needs and then put it as Replicant onto the Desktop via drag & drop of the symbol in the bottom right corner. Make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar.
-
The keypad can be colored with a drag & drop from any color well, e.g. from Icon-O-Matic.
-
You can move up and down in a history of past calculations with ↑ and ↓.
-
You can select DeskCalc's contents and drag & drop it into any application. Or you drop it into a Tracker window or onto the Desktop and a text file with that clipping is created there.
-
Even better, the reverse is also possible:
-Create clippings as described at various stages of your calculation and go back to them by drag & dropping them back into DeskCalc.
-Or you drag & drop a calculation directly out of an email onto DeskCalc.
-
DeskCalc can be used in Terminal. Just put the expression in double quotes, like this:
+
Dalam hal input pengguna, DeskCalc cukup toleran:
+/, :, \ semua ditafsirkan sebagai operator pembagi,
+*, x adalah simbol yang valid untuk perkalian.
+Perlu diketahui juga bahwa . and , keduanya dianggap sebagai floating point, yang berarti Anda tidak boleh menggunakannya sebagai pemisah 1000.
+
Anda dapat mengubah ukuran kalkulator hingga sesuai dengan kebutuhan Anda dan kemudian meletakkannya sebagai Replicant ke Desktop melalui drag & drop simbol di sudut kanan bawah. Pastikan Show replicants diaktifkan di Deskbar.
+
+
Papan tombol dapat diwarnai dengan drag & drop dari sembarang sumber warna, misalnya dari Icon-O-Matic.
+
Anda dapat bergerak naik dan turun dalam riwayat perhitungan sebelumnya dengan↑ and ↓.
+
Anda dapat memilih konten DeskCalc dan drag & drop it ke aplikasi apa pun, atau Anda jatuhkan ke jendela Tracker atau ke Desktop dan file teks dengan kliping dibuat di sana.
+
Bahkan lebih baik, kebalikannya juga dimungkinkan:
+Buat kliping seperti yang dijelaskan pada berbagai tahap perhitungan Anda dan kembali ke sana dengan drag & dropping kembali ke DeskCalc.
+Atau Anda drag & drop penghitungan langsung dari email ke DeskCalc.
+
+
DeskCalc dapat digunakan di Terminal. Cukup cantumkan ekspresi dalam tanda kutip ganda, seperti ini:
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
DiskProbe
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/DiskProbe
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/DiskProbe_data
-
DiskProbe is a HEX editor to view and alter data of a file or on a device on a byte-level. It's a very low-level tool and has therefore the potential to really mess things up if you're not careful!
-
Always work with the backup of a file and be extra careful when working directly on a device.
-
When starting DiskProbe you'll first be asked for the file or the device to work on. After that you are presented with this interface:
+
DiskProbe adalah editor HEXA untuk melihat dan mengubah data file atau perangkat pada tingkat byte. Ini adalah alat tingkat sangat rendah dan karena itu memiliki potensi untuk benar-benar mengacaukan semuanya jika Anda tidak hati-hati!
+
Selalu bekerja dengan cadangan file dan ekstra hati-hati saat bekerja langsung pada perangkat.
+
Saat memulai DiskProbe, Anda pertama-tama akan diminta file atau perangkat untuk bekerja. Setelah itu Anda disajikan dengan antarmuka ini:
-
The main view shows always one block of data, the size of which can be adjusted with View | BlockSize. To the left is the offset to the start of the block, in the middle the data as HEX values and to the right the same as ASCII symbols.
-You can move from block to block with the slider above or with ALT← and ALT→ and switch between the HEX and ASCII columns with TAB.
-
Block | Selection will not only show the selection with different endianess (and in HEX or decimal, set by View | Base), it will also interpret the selection as a block offset that you can jump to. It will be grayed out if the position is outside of the file/device.
-This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often contain pointers to other blocks.
-
If the file you're probing includes attributes, the Attributes menu can be used to open any of them in a new DiskProbe window. Here's the SYS:PACKAGE attribute of the AboutSystem application:
-
-
Depending on the kind of attribute, you'll get a different editor tab besides the always present Raw Editor. For example, there are editors for strings and MIME types or an icon viewer for the vectoricon attribute.
+
Tampilan utama menunjukkan selalu satu blok data, yang ukurannya dapat disesuaikan dengan View | BlockSize. Di sebelah kiri adalah offset ke awal blok, di tengah data sebagai nilai HEX dan ke kanan sama dengan Simbol ASCII.
+Anda dapat berpindah dari blok ke blok dengan slider di atas atau dengan ALT← dan ALT→ dan beralih antara kolom HEX dan ASCII dengan TAB.
+
Block | Selection tidak hanya akan menampilkan seleksi dengan endian-ess yang berbeda (dan dalam HEX atau desimal, diatur oleh View | Base), itu juga akan menginterpretasikan seleksi sebagai blok offset yang dapat Anda lompati. Ini akan berwarna abu-abu jika posisi berada di luar file / perangkat.
+Ini adalah fitur yang berguna sebagian besar ketika melihat sistem file, karena mereka sering mengandung pointer ke blok lain.
+
+
Jika file yang Anda selidiki menyertakan atribut, menu Attributes dapat digunakan untuk membukanya di jendela DiskProbe baru. Berikut atribut SYS:PACKAGE dari aplikasi AboutSystem:
+
Bergantung pada jenis atribut, Anda akan mendapatkan tab editor berbeda selain Raw Editor yang selalu ada. Misalnya, ada editor untuk string dan tipe MIME atau penampil ikon untuk atribut vectoricon.
@@ -85,7 +86,7 @@ This is a handy feature mostly when looking at file systems, as they often conta
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
DiskUsage
+
Penggunaan Disk (DiskUsage)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/DiskUsage
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/DiskUsage
DiskUsage menunjukkan secara grafis bagaimana ruang pada volume Anda digunakan.
Alat yang berguna untuk menjawab pertanyaan, " Ke mana semua ruang disk saya hilang? ".
-
After launching, DiskUsage shows only an empty window with all mounted volumes as tabs at the top. You'll have to choose the one you're interested in and click Scan to start chugging through the disk. For larger disks this can take some time... While you wait, you may switch to a different tab and start exploring that volume or begin the scan process there as well.
-It's not recommended to start several concurrent scan processes on the same physical disk, as the constant repositioning of the heads of the drive will only extend the wait.
+
Setelah diluncurkan, DiskUsage hanya menampilkan jendela kosong dengan semua volume yang terpasang sebagai tab di bagian atas. Anda harus memilih yang Anda minati dan klik Pindai untuk mulai melongok melalui disk. Untuk disk yang lebih besar ini dapat memerlukan waktu ... Sambil menunggu, Anda dapat beralih ke tab lain dan mulai menjelajahi volume itu atau memulai proses pemindaian di sana juga.
+Tidak disarankan untuk memulai beberapa proses pemindaian bersamaan pada disk fisik yang sama, karena reposisi kepala drive yang konstan hanya akan memperpanjang penantian.
-
The concentric circles represent different levels in the file system hierarchy. Above, the circle in the center represents the /boot/home/ folder. Each segment of the ring immediately outside that circle is a file or folder under /boot/home/. Every segment farther outside brings you one level deeper in the file hierarchy. You may have to resize the window to accommodate very deep folders.
+
Lingkaran konsentris mewakili tingkat yang berbeda dalam hierarki sistem file. Di atas, lingkaran di tengah mewakili folder/boot/home/ . Setiap segmen cincin tepat di luar lingkaran itu adalah file atau folder di bawah /boot/home/. Setiap Segmen lebih jauh di luar membawa Anda satu tingkat lebih dalam dalam hierarki file. Anda mungkin harus mengubah ukuran jendela untuk mengakomodasi folder yang sangat dalam.
-
If the graphical representation of a file or folder comprises less than about 2° of a circle, it is excluded from the display.
-
The number of files that's reported for a folder includes files in subfolders too. A folder counts as a file.
-
DiskUsage ignores symbolic links.
+
Jika representasi grafis dari file atau folder terdiri dari kurang dari 2 ° lingkaran, itu dikeluarkan dari tampilan.
+
Jumlah file yang dilaporkan untuk folder juga termasuk file dalam subfolder. Folder dianggap sebagai file.
+
DiskUsage mengabaikan tautan simbolik.
-
As you move the mouse over a segment, information about that file or folder appears in the status bar at the bottom.
-
Right-clicking a segment offers a context menu to Get info, Open (with Tracker), Open with another suitable application or Rescan that particular folder.
-Left-clicking a segment makes that file/folder the center circle.
-Left-clicking the center circle moves you up one level.
-
You can drag files and folders from DiskUsage to other applications or to the Desktop or other Tracker windows for copying. Vice versa, dropped volumes and folders on DiskUsage's window will zoom directly to them, making them the new center circle.
-
You can also use the Tracker add-on from the context menu of any folder to start DiskUsage with that particular location.
+
Saat Anda menggerakkan mouse di atas segmen, informasi tentang file atau folder itu muncul di bilah status di bagian bawah.
+
Mengklik kanan segmen menawarkan menu konteks untuk Dapatkan info, Buka (dengan Tracker), Buka dengan aplikasi lain yang sesuai, atau Telusuri ulang folder tersebut.
+Mengklik kiri sebuah segmen menjadikan file / folder itu lingkaran tengah.
+Mengklik kiri lingkaran tengah membuat Anda naik satu tingkat.
+
Anda dapat menyeret file dan folder dari DiskUsage ke aplikasi lain atau ke Desktop atau jendela Tracker lain untuk disalin. Sebaliknya, volume dan folder yang terjatuh di jendela DiskUsage akan memperbesar langsung ke mereka, menjadikannya lingkaran pusat baru.
+
Anda juga dapat menggunakan add-on Tracker dari menu konteks folder apa pun untuk memulai DiskUsage dengan lokasi tertentu.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
DriveSetup
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/DriveSetup
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/DriveSetup
-
DriveSetup is a tool to create, delete and format partitions. At this time it can't resize or move existing partitions, so that you'll either need an unpartitioned volume (perhaps an external USB drive or another harddisk) or do the initial setup with a tool like the GParted LiveCD to provide the space for another partition.
+
DriveSetup adalah alat untuk membuat, menghapus, dan memformat partisi. Pada saat ini, DriveSetup tidak dapat mengubah ukuran atau memindahkan partisi yang ada, sehingga Anda akan memerlukan volume yang tidak dipartisi (mungkin drive USB eksternal atau harddisk lain) atau melakukan pengaturan awal dengan alat seperti LiveCD GParted untuk memberikan ruang bagi partisi lain.
-
At the top is a graphical representation of all partitions inside the device chosen in the list below it. Each device, by default, can hold a maximum of 4 primary partitions. This limit can be removed by making one of those an extended partition, which in turn can hold theoretically an unlimited number of logical partitions (practical limitations depend on, for example, other OSes installed).
-You may have to expand such a list with the +/- widget that appears in that case in front of that device to see the details of every logical partition.
-
Colors and icons provide some more information about the available volumes and partitions.
-Besides the familiar icons for harddisks, CD drives and USB sticks etc., there are a few that indicate a their mount mode:
+
Di atas adalah representasi grafis dari semua partisi di dalam perangkat yang dipilih dalam daftar di bawah ini. Setiap perangkat, secara default, dapat menampung maksimum 4 partisi primer . Batas ini dapat dihapus dengan membuat salah satu dari mereka partisi extended, yang pada gilirannya dapat menampung secara teoritis jumlah partisi logis yang tidak terbatas (keterbatasan praktis bergantung pada, misalnya, OS lain yang diinstal).
+Anda mungkin harus memperluas daftar tersebut dengan widget +/- yang muncul dalam kasus di depan perangkat itu untuk melihat detail setiap partisi logis.
+
Warna dan ikon memberikan beberapa informasi lebih lanjut tentang volume dan partisi yang tersedia.
+Selain ikon hardisk, drive CD, dan stik USB dll., Ada beberapa yang menunjukkan mode pemasangannya:
When mounted, a colored bar shows the used space of a partition. The color depends on the kind of partition:
+
Saat dipasang, bilah berwarna menunjukkan ruang partisi yang digunakan. Warnanya tergantung pada jenis partisi:
-
A BFS formatted partition
-
A non-BFS formatted partition
-
A read-only partition
-
An encrypted partition
+
partisi dengan format BFS
+
Partisi dengan format non-BFS
+
Partisi hanya-baca
+
Partisi ter-enkripsi
-
You can select a partition and choose various commands from the context or Partition menu, like Mount/Unmount, or to Open in DiskProbe.
-
You can also Format or completely Delete a partition.
-
Dealing with creating/deleting/formatting partitions is very dangerous business. Always check twice to be sure you're working with the right one and always keep an up-to-date backup of your data in case something goes wrong!
+
Anda dapat memilih partisi dan memilih berbagai perintah dari menu konteks atau Partisi , seperti Mount/ unmount, atau untuk Buka di DiskProbe.
+
Anda juga bisa memformat sepenuhnya Menghapus sebuah partisi.
+
Berurusan dengan membuat/menghapus/ memformat partisi adalah urusan yang sangat berbahaya. Selalu periksa dua kali untuk memastikan Anda bekerja dengan yang benar dan selalu menyimpan cadangan data Anda yang terbaru jika terjadi kesalahan!
If you don't plan to use just one of the partitions of a larger disk, but the entire drive as one partition, e.g. a USB stick or a Compact Flash card, you'll have to initialize the disk first.
-
You do this by selecting the raw disk from list of devices and choose a partition map from the Disk | Initialize menu. The Intel Partition Map is the right choice for classical booting via a BIOS.
Jika Anda tidak berencana untuk menggunakan hanya salah satu partisi dari disk yang lebih besar, tetapi keseluruhan drive sebagai satu partisi, mis. Stik USB atau kartu Compact Flash, Anda harus menginisialisasi disk terlebih dahulu.
+
Anda melakukan ini dengan memilih disk mentah dari daftar perangkat dan memilih peta partisi dari menu Diska | Inisialisasi, Adapun Peta partisi intel adalah pilihan yang tepat untuk boot klasik melalui BIOS.
+
Proses inisialisasi akan menhapus semua data di drive!
Ketika Anda menemukan ruang yang tidak diformat pada drive, seperti <empty> di atas, Anda dapat membuat partisi baru di ruang ini dengan Partition | Create...(ALTC)..
-
You're prompted with this dialog that lets you adjust the partition size and type. Choose Be File System if you want to use the partition for an Haiku installation or if you want to use all the interesting Haiku features with it, like attributes and queries. Note, that other operating systems might not be able to access such a partition.
-
The Active partition checkbox is only available if you have created a primary partition instead of just another logical partition within an extended one. You'll have to tick that checkbox if you plan to use that partition to boot a Haiku installation.
-
Before you can use, or even mount the newly created partition, it has to be formatted with a filesystem.
+
Anda diminta dengan dialog ini yang memungkinkan Anda menyesuaikan ukuran dan jenis partisi. Pilih Be File System jika Anda ingin menggunakan partisi untuk instalasi Haiku atau jika Anda ingin menggunakan semua fitur Haiku yang menarik dengannya, seperti atribut dan kueri Perhatikan, bahwa sistem operasi lain mungkin tidak dapat mengakses partisi seperti itu.
+
Kotak centang Partisi aktif hanya tersedia jika Anda telah membuat partisi utama bukan hanya partisi logis lain dalam ekstensi yang diperluas. Anda harus mencentang kotak centang itu jika Anda berencana untuk menggunakan partisi itu untuk mem-boot instalasi Haiku.
+
Sebelum Anda dapat menggunakan, atau bahkan me-mount partisi yang baru dibuat, itu harus diformat dengan sistem file.
Only unmounted partitions can be formatted by choosing a filesystem from the sub-menu of Partition | Format. The Be File System (BFS) is mandatory for a Haiku boot partition and recommended for data partitions to be used with Haiku. Only BFS formatted partitions can be queried and fully support Haiku's file attributes.
Hanya partisi yang tidak di-mount yang dapat diformat dengan memilih filesystem dari sub-menu Partisi | Format. Be File System (BFS) wajib untuk partisi boot Haiku dan direkomendasikan untuk partisi data yang akan digunakan dengan Haiku. Hanya partisi yang diformat BFS yang dapat diformat. tanya dan sepenuhnya mendukung atribut file Haiku.
-
Here you set the name for the partition and it's blocksize. The blocksize is the space in bytes that a file will allocate at minimum. 2048 bytes per block are recommended, but you can choose larger or smaller sizes if you have these very specific needs.
-If the future data on your partition won't need any querying, you can uncheck Enable query support to save a bit of overhead for managing the index.
-
Formatting will destroy all data on the partition!
+
Di sini Anda mengatur nama untuk partisi dan itu blocksize. The blocksize adalah ruang dalam byte yang file akan mengalokasikan minimum. 2048 byte per blok direkomendasikan, tetapi Anda dapat memilih ukuran yang lebih besar atau lebih kecil jika Anda memiliki kebutuhan yang sangat spesifik ini.
+Jika data masa depan pada partisi Anda tidak memerlukan kueri, aktifkan dukungan kueri untuk menghemat sedikit overhead untuk mengelola indeks.
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install, update and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
+
HaikuDepot is the central application when it comes to managing your software packages. With it you can browse and search through package repositories and install and uninstall packages. By default, HaikuDepot starts up with a list of "Featured packages", software that's deemed interesting to many users.
-
The second tab shows All packages, the display changes to smaller icons and more information arranged in columns:
+
Tab kedua menunjukkan Semua paket,tampilan berubah menjadi ikon yang lebih kecil dan informasi lebih lanjut diatur dalam kolom:
Di bagian atas kami menemukan beberapa cara untuk memfilter daftar paket yang tersedia di bawah:
-
The Category pop-up menu lets you limit the list to individual categories like "Audio" or "Games".
-
The Search terms text field filters the list to those packages that have all the entered (space-delimited) strings in their name or description.
-
The Repositories menu of the menu bar determines which repos are being queried. "Local" packages are the ones that were installed from somewhere other than an online repo; maybe from a USB thumb drive or downloaded from some website or a package that you've built yourself.
+
Menu pop-up Kategori memungkinkan Anda membatasi daftar untuk kategori individual seperti "Audio" atau "Games".
+
Pencarian terminologi Bidang teks memfilter daftar ke paket-paket yang memiliki semua string yang dimasukkan (dibatasi-spasi) dalam nama atau deskripsi mereka.
+
+
menu Repositori Pada bilah menu menentukan repo mana yang sedang di-kueri. Paket "Lokal" adalah paket yang diinstal dari suatu tempat selain dari repo online; mungkin dari USB thumb drive atau diunduh dari beberapa situs web atau paket yang telah Anda miliki membangun diri sendiri.
Like in any Tracker window, you can choose from a context menu which columns to display by right-clicking the column heading. A left-click sorts the list according to that column. Of course, you can rearrange the columns by dragging them to a new position.
-
The status column of a package can have one of several states:
Seperti pada jendela Tracker, Anda dapat memilih dari menu konteks kolom mana yang akan ditampilkan dengan mengklik kanan judul kolom. Klik kiri mengurutkan daftar sesuai dengan kolom itu. Tentu saja, Anda dapat mengatur ulang kolom dengan menyeretnya ke posisi baru.
+
Kolom status suatu paket dapat memiliki salah satu dari beberapa status:
-
Active: The package is currently installed and ready to be used.
-
Available: The package exists in that repository and can be downloaded and installed. If there are any dependencies on other packages, you'll be informed of that while installing and get the choice of downloading/installing all that's necessary.
-
Pending / %: Pending is shown for a package that is queued for download/installation. While a package is downloaded, the progress is shown as percentage.
-
Update available: There's a newer version than your installed one available.
+
Aktif : Paket saat ini diinstal dan siap digunakan.
+
+
Tersedia: Paket ada di repositori itu dan dapat diunduh dan diinstal. Jika ada dependensi pada paket lain, Anda akan diberitahu tentang itu saat menginstal dan mendapatkan pilihan untuk mengunduh/menginstal semua yang diperlukan.
+
Pending / %: Pending ditampilkan untuk paket yang antri untuk diunduh / dipasang. Saat sebuah paket diunduh, progresnya ditampilkan sebagai persentase.
-
You can grab the dotted line between the packages list and the info area to vertically resize the packages list.
+
Anda dapat mengambil garis putus-putus antara daftar paket dan area info untuk mengubah ukuran vertikal daftar paket.
At the bottom is an area that displays information on the package that is currently selected in the list above it.
-To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install, Uninstall or Update it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
-
Below are four tabs: About, Ratings, Changelog and Contents.
+To the right of package name, author, rating and version is a button, that – depending on the current state of the package – lets you Install or Uninstall it. If a package is already installed, you'll find an additional button there to Open the application.
+
Dibawah ada empat tab yaitu: Tentang, Peringkat, Logperubahan and Isi.
-
About
-
The first tab has a detailed description of the package, as well as screenshots and a contact address and URL of the team that maintains the packaged software, if available. Clicking the screenshot thumbnail will open it full-size in a new window
+
Tentang
+
Tab pertama memiliki deskripsi terperinci tentang paket, serta tangkapan layar dan alamat kontak serta URL tim yang mengelola perangkat lunak yang dikemas, jika tersedia. Mengklik thumbnail gambar mini akan membukanya dalam ukuran penuh di jendela baru
Ratings
-
The second tab shows ratings and comments of users, if available.
+
Tab kedua menunjukkan peringkat dan komentar pengguna, jika tersedia.
-
To the left is a statistic, showing the number of stars (1 to 5) the package got from how many users.
-In the middle are user comments with their nickname, the number of stars they gave the package and which version of the package they were rating or commenting on. You'll find more on how to rate a package yourself further down.
+
Di sebelah kiri adalah statistik, menunjukkan jumlah bintang (1 hingga 5) paket yang didapat dari berapa banyak pengguna.
+Di tengah adalah komentar pengguna dengan nama panggilan mereka, jumlah bintang yang mereka berikan paket dan versi paket yang mereka beri peringkat atau komentari. Anda akan menemukan lebih banyak tentang bagaimana menilai suatu paket oleh anda sendiri lebih jauh ke bawah..
-
Changelog
-
Here you find a detailed history of all the versions of the package that have been released so far, if the maintainer of the package provides that information.
-
Contents
-
The last tab shows all the files and folders a package contains. This only works for already downloaded packages.
+
Log perubahan
+
Di sini Anda menemukan riwayat terperinci dari semua versi paket yang telah dirilis sejauh ini, jika pengelola paket memberikan informasi itu.
+
Isi
+
Tab terakhir menunjukkan semua file dan folder yang berisi paket. Ini hanya berfungsi untuk paket yang sudah diunduh.
In the Tools menu at the top of the window, you'll find an item to Refresh repositories. This will request an up-to-date list of all available packages from the repositories.
-The second item is to Manage repositories.... It opens the Repositories preferences, to add/remove or disable and enable repositories.
-Check for updates... opens the SoftwareUpdater to search and install updated packages.
-
Under Show you can choose to also display Develop packages and Source packages in the packages list. For the normal user those are of no interest and would only clutter the list. They are important, however, for people who need the libraries, headers etc. of a package to develop and compile programs depending on them.
-
Of more interest are the options to only show Available packages and Installed packages.
Di menu Perkakas di bagian atas jendela, Anda akan menemukan item untuk Refresh repositories. Ini akan meminta daftar terbaru dari semua paket yang tersedia dari repositori.
+Item kedua adalah untuk Mengelola repositori.... Ini membuka preferensi Repositori , untuk menambah/menghapus atau menonaktifkan dan mengaktifkan repositori.
+Periksa pembaruan... buka SoftwareUpdater untuk mencari dan menginstal paket yang diperbarui.
+
Di bawah Menunjukkan Anda dapat memilih untuk juga menampilkan Paket pengembangan dan Paket sumber dalam daftar paket. Untuk pengguna normal, hal itu tidak menarik dan hanya akan mengacaukan daftar. Tetapi penting bagi orang-orang yang membutuhkan perpustakaan, header, dll. paket untuk mengembangkan dan menyusun program tergantung pada mereka.
+
Yang lebih menarik adalah pilihan untuk hanya menampilkan paket yang tersedia dan paket-paket terpasang.
To be able to rate a package, you need a user account at the Haiku Depot Server that serves all the packages and keeps track of ratings and user comments. You can create an account within the HaikuDepot application by clicking on the menu in the far right of the menu bar that shows your current status: Not logged in. Choosing Log in... opens a window with two tabs; one to enter your user name and password (once you have those) to log in, and the other to create a new account:
Untuk dapat menilai sebuah paket, Anda memerlukan akun pengguna di Haiku Depot Server yang melayani semua paket dan melacak peringkat dan komentar pengguna. Anda dapat membuat akun di dalam aplikasi HaikuDepot dengan mengklik menu di paling kanan. dari bilah menu yang menunjukkan status Anda saat ini: Tidak masuk. Memilih Masuk ... membuka jendela dengan dua tab; satu untuk memasukkan nama pengguna dan kata sandi Anda (setelah Anda memilikinya) untuk masuk, dan yang lain untuk membuat akun baru:
-
To create an account you need to:
-
use an all lower-case user name without special characters
-
use a password that's at least 8 characters long with at least 2 capitals and 2 numbers
-
provide a valid email address (if you want a new password sent to you in case you forgot it)
-
solve the captcha
-
tick the checkmarks to confirm you're over 16 and have read the usage conditions linked below them.
-
After logging in, the top-right menu of the HaikuDepot window will now say Logged in as (...), showing your user name. The menu now offers you to Switch account... or Log out.
+
Untuk membuat akun, Anda perlu:
+
gunakan nama pengguna semua huruf kecil tanpa karakter khusus
+
gunakan kata sandi yang panjangnya minimal 8 karakter dengan setidaknya 2 huruf kapital dan 2 angka
+
berikan alamat email yang valid (jika Anda ingin kata sandi baru dikirimkan kepada Anda seandainya Anda lupa)
+
Menyelesaikan captcha
+
centang tanda centang untuk mengonfirmasi bahwa Anda berusia di atas 16 dan telah membaca kondisi penggunaan yang tertaut di bawahnya.
+
Setelah masuk, menu kanan-atas jendela HaikuDepot akan mengatakan Masuk sebagai (...), menunjukkan nama pengguna Anda. Menu sekarang menawarkan Anda untuk Beralih akun... atau Keluar.
After you've created a user account and are logged in, you can rate a package and leave a comment, if you want. Just hover the mouse over the rating stars in the info area of a package and they turn into a Rating... button. Click it to open the rating window:
Setelah Anda membuat akun pengguna dan masuk, Anda dapat memberi peringkat pada sebuah paket dan memberikan komentar, jika Anda mau. Cukup arahkan mouse ke peringkat bintang di bidang info paket dan mereka berubah menjadi tombol Rating.... Klik tombol untuk membuka jendela penilaian:
-
Here you move the mouse over the stars to light them up and choose your rating, you can also choose from a number of levels to judge the stability of the application and pick the language of your optional comment. To make a comment meaningful, you should have worked with the application you're about to rate for a while to become familiar with its features, bugs and quirks. And don't write the next great American novel... keep it short, sweet and polite. :)
-After you click Send the data is transmitted to the server. You may have to go to the Tools menu to Refresh repositories before you can see your changes.
-
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating the checkbox Other users can see this rating.
+
Di sini Anda menggerakkan mouse di atas bintang-bintang untuk menyalakannya dan memilih peringkat Anda, Anda juga dapat memilih dari beberapa level untuk menilai stabilitas aplikasi dan memilih bahasa komentar opsional Anda. Untuk membuat komentar bermakna, Anda harus telah bekerja dengan aplikasi yang akan Anda nilai sebentar untuk menjadi akrab dengan fitur-fiturnya, bug dan kebiasaan. Dan jangan menulis novel besar Amerika berikutnya ... tetap pendek, manis dan sopan. :)
+Setelah Anda mengklik Kirim data ditransmisikan ke server. Anda mungkin harus pergi ke menu Tools menu to Muat ulang repositori sebelum Anda dapat melihat perubahan Anda.
+
At any time, you can come back and edit your comment and re-rate it. You can also hide your rating from other users by deactivating a checkbox This rating is visible to other users, that appears in this window once you've rated a package.
As HaikuDepot is used, it interacts with network as well as local services. Things can go wrong, sometimes in ways that were not anticipated when the application was written. In those cases the error message may be quite unspecific. To help diagnosing a given problem, HaikuDepot can provide a log of what the application does.
-
An error message may suggest to view the logs to get further in-depth information or you may be asked to provide the log when you file an issue at the Haiku bug tracking system.
-
To see the diagnostic logs, HaikuDepot needs to be started from Terminal:
Karena HaikuDepot digunakan, ia berinteraksi dengan jaringan dan juga layanan lokal. Bisa terjadi kesalahan, kadang-kadang dengan cara yang tidak diantisipasi ketika aplikasi ditulis. Dalam kasus-kasus itu pesan kesalahan mungkin sangat tidak spesifik. Untuk membantu mendiagnosis masalah yang diberikan , HaikuDepot dapat memberikan log tentang apa yang dilakukan aplikasi.
+
Pesan kesalahan mungkin menyarankan untuk melihat log untuk mendapatkan informasi mendalam lebih lanjut atau Anda mungkin diminta untuk memberikan log ketika Anda mengajukan masalah di sistem pelacakan bug Haiku.
+
Untuk melihat log diagnostik, HaikuDepot perlu dimulai dari Terminal:
HaikuDepot -v debug
-
The command uses the -v flag to control the verbosity of the diagnostic logs. Possible values are: off, info, debug and trace. Using off will do only a small amount of logging, while trace does it in the highest detail.
-
As HaikuDepot starts up and when interacting with the application, you will see text scroll by in the Terminal window; this is the diagnostic log.
+
Perintah ini menggunakan bendera -v untuk mengontrol verbositas dari log diagnostik. Nilai yang mungkin: off, info, debug dan trace. Menggunakan off hanya akan melakukan sejumlah kecil logging, while trace melakukannya dengan detail tertinggi.
+
Ketika HaikuDepot memulai dan ketika berinteraksi dengan aplikasi, Anda akan melihat teks bergulir di jendela Terminal, ini adalah log diagnostik.
Contrary to the BeOS, Haiku uses vector icons instead of bitmap icons. A special Haiku Vector Icon Format (HVIF) was developed that is highly optimized for small file sizes and fast rendering. That's why our icons are for the most part much smaller than either a bitmap or the widely used SVG format. Also, unlike BeOS' bitmap icons, Haiku isn't limited to an 8bit palette (256 colors).
-Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Berlawanan dengan BeOS, Haiku menggunakan ikon vektor, bukan ikon bitmap. Format ikon vektor Haiku (HVIF) khusus dikembangkan yang sangat dioptimalkan untuk ukuran file kecil dan rendering cepat. Itulah sebabnya sebagian besar ikon kita jauh lebih kecil daripada bitmap atau format SVG yang banyak digunakan. Juga, tidak seperti ikon bitmap BeOS, Haiku tidak terbatas pada palet 8bit (256 warna).
+Ambil ikon Terminal ini, misalnya:
Bitmap
SVG
HVIF
-
1,024 byte + 256 byte
7,192 byte
768 byte
+
1,024 bita + 256 bita
7,192 bita
768 bita
-
Note that the BeOS used two versions of an icon, one 16x16 and one 32x32, to achieve good visuals in List and Icon View mode.
-
This trick isn't needed with vector icons. Besides only taking up a few hundred bytes in a file, vector icons also scale much better than bitmaps. (Note: BeOS offered only a 16x16 and 32x32 display.)
+
Perhatikan bahwa BeOS menggunakan dua versi ikon, satu 16x16 dan satu 32x32, untuk mencapai visual yang baik dalam mode Daftar dan Ikon Tampilan.
+
Trik ini tidak diperlukan dengan ikon vektor. Selain hanya mengambil beberapa ratus byte dalam file, ikon vektor juga berskala jauh lebih baik daripada bitmap. (Catatan: BeOS hanya menawarkan tampilan 16x16 dan 32x32.)
16x16
32x32
64x64
128x128
Bitmap
@@ -104,7 +105,7 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
-
Vector
+
Vektor
@@ -114,40 +115,40 @@ Take this icon of the Terminal, for example:
Icons are stored as an attribute with their file. However, that doesn't mean that every file has to have this attribute to appear with an icon in a Tracker window: data files inherit their icon from their filetype. To globally change the filetype's icon you use the FileTypes preferences. If you only want to add a special icon to an individual file, you use the FileType add-on on it instead. See topic Filetypes for more information.
-
Being an attribute, it follows that only filesystems supporting metadata can retain a file's individual icon. So, if you move files off your BFS volume, consider zipping them up so you don't lose icons or other attributes.
Ikon disimpan sebagai atribut dengan file mereka. Namun, itu tidak berarti bahwa setiap file harus memiliki atribut ini untuk muncul dengan ikon di jendela Tracker: file data mewarisi ikon mereka dari jenis file mereka. Untuk mengubah ikon filetype secara global, Anda menggunakan preferensi FileTypes. Jika Anda hanya ingin menambahkan ikon khusus ke file individual, Anda menggunakan FileType add-on sebagai gantinya. Lihat topik Filetypes untuk informasi lebih lanjut.
+
Menjadi atribut, itu berarti bahwa hanya sistem file yang mendukung metadata yang dapat mempertahankan ikon file individu. Jadi, jika Anda memindahkan file dari volume BFS Anda, pertimbangkan untuk memperbesarnya sehingga Anda tidak kehilangan ikon atau atribut lainnya.
Icon-O-Matic is Haiku's icon editor that can save your work as HVIF, SVG or PNG. The icon can also be directly attached as attribute to an existing file or exported as a resource or source file used by developers. Since the application was tailored to the optimized HVIF format, its usage reflects the inner workings of this format.
-
Other than your normal vector graphics software, you don't deal with separate objects that each include all their specific properties like path, stroke width, stroke and fill color etc. Rather, you assemble your objects ("shapes") from shared paths and colors ("styles") and set certain properties. This re-using of elements is one secret of HVIF's efficiency. Although that imposes some constraints on the icon designer, there are a few advantages, too.
-For example, by re-using a path, several objects can be modified together by manipulating this one path. Think of an object and its shadow. Modifying their shared path will change the object itself and automatically its (maybe slightly distorted/translated) shadow.
Icon-O-Matic adalah editor ikon Haiku yang dapat menyimpan pekerjaan Anda sebagai HVIF, SVG atau PNG. Ikon juga dapat secara langsung dilampirkan sebagai atribut ke file yang ada atau diekspor sebagai sumber daya atau file sumber yang digunakan oleh pengembang. Karena aplikasi ini dirancang untuk format HVIF yang dioptimalkan, penggunaannya mencerminkan cara kerja dalam format ini.
+
Selain dari perangkat halus grafik vektor normal, Anda tidak berurusan dengan objek terpisah yang masing-masing menyertakan semua properti spesifiknya seperti jalur, lebar garis, garis dan warna isi dll. Sebaliknya, Anda merakit objek Anda ("bentuk") dari jalur bersama dan warna ("gaya") dan atur properti tertentu. Penggunaan kembali elemen-elemen ini adalah satu rahasia efisiensi HVIF. Meskipun itu memberlakukan beberapa kendala pada desainer ikon, ada beberapa keuntungan juga.
+Misalnya, dengan menggunakan kembali jalur, beberapa objek dapat dimodifikasi bersama dengan memanipulasi jalur yang satu ini. Pikirkan sebuah objek dan bayangannya. Memodifikasi path bersama mereka akan mengubah objek itu sendiri dan secara otomatis bayangannya (mungkin sedikit terdistorsi / diterjemahkan).
-
Here's a quick overview of Icon-O-Matic's window:
+
Berikut ini ikhtisar singkat jendela Icon-O-Matic:
-
To create any visible object on the canvas, you need a shape with a path and a style. Conveniently, you can create one, two or all three of those together from the Shape menu. Every kind of object (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, and Styles) has a menu above its list of elements, offering various commands. Every element has certain options that are set in the Properties view.
+
Untuk membuat objek yang terlihat di kanvas, Anda memerlukan bentuk dengan jalur dan gaya. Dengan mudah, Anda dapat membuat satu, dua, atau ketiganya dari menu Shape. Setiap jenis objek (Paths, Shapes, Transformers, dan Styles) memiliki menu di atas daftar elemen, menawarkan berbagai perintah. Setiap elemen memiliki opsi tertentu yang diatur dalam tampilan Properti.
A path consists of several points which are connected with lines or Bezier curves. To add or change points, make sure the path is selected in the path list.
Jalur terdiri dari beberapa titik yang terhubung dengan garis atau kurva Bezier. Untuk menambah atau mengubah titik, pastikan jalur dipilih dalam daftar jalur.
-
Simply clicking in the canvas will set the first point. While setting a point, you decide if the resulting line will be straight or curved: a simple click and release produces a straight line, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse will drag out the handles for a Bezier curve. Of course, you can also change it all later on.
+
Cukup mengklik di kanvas akan mengatur titik pertama. Saat menetapkan titik, Anda memutuskan apakah garis yang dihasilkan akan lurus atau melengkung: klik dan lepaskan sederhana menghasilkan garis lurus, menahan tombol mouse dan menggerakkan mouse akan menarik pegangan untuk kurva Bezier. Tentu saja, Anda juga bisa mengubahnya nanti.
-
To get from "A" to "B", you have to transform some points from corner-points to curve-points. That's done by holding ALT while clicking on a point and dragging out the handles. This results in a symmetrical Bezier: the second handle follows the movement of the other. If you need to move the handles independently, again click & drag on a Bezier handle while holding ALT.
-Vice versa, to go from Bezier to a corner-point, hold ALT and click on a point.
+
Untuk mendapatkan dari "A" ke "B", Anda harus mengubah beberapa titik dari titik sudut ke titik kurva. Itu dilakukan dengan menahan ALT sambil mengklik pada suatu titik dan menarik keluar pegangan. Ini menghasilkan Bezier simetris: pegangan kedua mengikuti gerakan yang lain. Jika Anda perlu memindahkan gagang secara mandiri, click & drag pada gagang Bezier sambil menahan ALT.
+Begitu juga sebaliknya, untuk beralih dari Bezier ke titik sudut, tahan ALT dan klik satu titik.
-
To move a point, simply click & drag it. To select more than one point, hold down SHIFT and draw a selection rectangle. Selected points are marked with a red border instead of the usual black.
-To insert a point into a path you click on the connecting line between two points.
-Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by clicking on any point while holding CTRL.
+
Untuk memindahkan titik, cukup klik & seret. Untuk memilih lebih dari satu titik, tahan SHIFT dan gambarkan kotak pilihan. Poin yang dipilih ditandai dengan batas merah, bukan hitam biasa.
+Untuk menyisipkan titik ke jalur Anda mengklik pada garis penghubung antara dua titik.
+Poin yang dipilih dihapus dengan menekan DEL atau dengan mengklik titik mana saja sambil menahan CTRL.
-
The mouse pointer indicates the current mode:
+
Pointer mouse menunjukkan mode saat ini:
@@ -158,46 +159,47 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move point(s)
-
Insert point
-
Add point
-
Delete point CTRL
-
Corner↔Bezier ALT
-
Select points SHIFT
+
Pindahkan titik
+
Sisipkan titik
+
Menambah titik
+
Menghapus titik CTRL
+
Pojok↔Bezier ALT
+
Pilih titik SHIFT
-
You can invoke a context menu by right-clicking a point or a selection of points:
+
Anda dapat menjalankan menu konteks dengan mengklik kanan titik atau pilihan titik:
+
-
Select all
ALTA
Selects all points of the current path.
-
Transform
T
Puts all selected points in a transformation box, so you can move, resize and rotate them together. It works just like with shapes, described a bit further down.
-
Split
Splits selected points into two, one sitting on top of the other.
-
Flip
Rotates selected points by 180°. Only has an effect on Bezier points.
-
Remove
DEL
Deletes selected points.
+
Pilih semua
ALTA
Memilih semua titik dari jalur saat ini.
+
Transformasi
T
Letakkan semua titik yang dipilih dalam kotak transformasi, sehingga Anda dapat memindahkan, mengubah ukuran, dan memutar keduanya. Ini bekerja seperti halnya dengan bentuk, dijelaskan sedikit lebih jauh ke bawah.
+
Belah
Membagi poin yang dipilih menjadi dua, satu duduk di atas yang lain.
+
Balik
Memutar titik yang dipilih sebesar 180°. Hanya berpengaruh
The Path menu offers a few obvious entries to Add rectangle and Add circle or to Duplicate or Remove a path. Here are some that may need a bit more explaining:
Menu Jalur menawarkan beberapa entri yang jelas untuk Tambahkan persegi and Tambahkan lingkaran or to Gandakan or Hapus jalur. Berikut ini beberapa yang mungkin perlu sedikit dijelaskan:
-
Reverse
If your path isn't "closed" (see Path Properties below), a click into the canvas always creates a new point, connecting it with the last one. "Reverse" will reverse this order and your new point will connect to original start point instead.
-
Clean up
Most useful with imported SVGs, this function will remove redundant points.
-
Rotate indices right
ALTR
Practically, this rotates the opening of a path. It's best seen when using a not-closed path with a style and a shape with a stroke transformer. Now, if your path looks like a ⊂ it will rotate like this: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
-
Rotate indices left
ALTSHIFTR
Does the same in the other direction.
+
Membalikkan
Jika jalur Anda tidak "tertutup" (lihat Properti Jalur di bawah), klik ke kanvas selalu membuat titik baru, menghubungkannya dengan yang terakhir. "Balikkan" akan membalikkan pesanan ini dan titik baru Anda akan terhubung ke titik awal asli sebagai gantinya.
+
Bersihkan
Paling berguna dengan SVG yang diimpor, fungsi ini akan menghapus titik-titik redundan.
+
Putar indeks ke kanan
ALTR
Secara praktis, ini memutar bukaan jalan. Paling baik dilihat saat menggunakan jalur yang tidak tertutup dengan gaya dan bentuk dengan transformator stroke. Sekarang, jika jalur Anda terlihat seperti ⊂ itu akan berputar seperti ini: ⊂ ∩ ⊃ ∪.
Properties at the bottom left of the window offers all available settings of the currently selected object. A path only has two: a Name and if it's Closed or not.
Properti di kiri bawah jendela menawarkan semua pengaturan yang tersedia dari objek yang saat ini dipilih. Jalur hanya memiliki dua: Nama dan jika Ditutup atau tidak.
A shape groups together one or more paths with a style. Practically, it's the object that you'll actually see on the canvas. The grouping is done with the checkboxes in front of the paths and styles: Just select your shape and tick off the desired path(s) and a style.
-
A shape defines how a path and style is applied, e.g. if the object is filled or only stroked (which is done by using Transformers on the shape, we'll get to that later). Also, a shape can be moved, rotated or resized without touching the used path. That way, you can re-use a single path and get different, but related, shapes.
Suatu bentuk mengelompokkan satu atau beberapa jalur dengan suatu gaya. Praktis, itu objek yang benar-benar akan Anda lihat di kanvas. Pengelompokan dilakukan dengan kotak centang di depan jalur dan gaya: Cukup pilih bentuk Anda dan centang dari jalur yang diinginkan dan gaya.
+
Bentuk menentukan bagaimana jalur dan gaya diterapkan, mis. jika objek diisi atau hanya dibelai (yang dilakukan dengan menggunakan Transformers pada bentuk, kita akan membahasnya nanti). Juga, suatu bentuk dapat dipindahkan, diputar atau diubah ukurannya tanpa menyentuh jalur yang digunakan. Dengan begitu, Anda bisa menggunakan kembali satu jalur dan mendapatkan bentuk yang berbeda namun terkait.
-
When a shape is selected from the list, a rectangle is drawn around it. Depending on where exactly you grab it, the shape is moved, resized or rotated around a point in its center, which itself can be moved. Holding SHIFT will lock direction when moving, limit rotating to 45° angles and restrict the aspect ratio while resizing. The mouse pointer again indicates the current mode:
+
Ketika suatu bentuk dipilih dari daftar, sebuah persegi panjang digambar di sekitarnya. Tergantung di mana tepatnya Anda mengambilnya, bentuknya dipindahkan, diubah ukurannya atau diputar di sekitar titik di tengahnya, yang dengan sendirinya dapat dipindahkan. Memegang SHIFT akan mengunci arah saat bergerak, membatasi sudut putar hingga 45° dan membatasi rasio aspek saat mengubah ukuran. Pointer mouse lagi menunjukkan mode saat ini:
@@ -206,32 +208,33 @@ Selected points are deleted by pressing DEL or by click
-
Move
-
Resize
-
Rotate
-
Move rotation point
+
Pindah
+
Ubah size
+
Putar
+
Pindahkan titik putar
-
Shapes lie on top of each other, each is on its own layer, if you will. To reorder them you drag & drop their entry to a different position in the list.
+
Bentuk berbaring di atas satu sama lain, masing-masing pada lapisannya sendiri, jika Anda mau. Untuk menyusun ulang mereka, Anda seret & jatuhkan entri mereka ke posisi yang berbeda dalam daftar.
Menu Shape menawarkan kemungkinan yang disebutkan sebelumnya untuk Tambahkan kosong, dengan jalur/gaya/jalur & gaya dan untuk Gandakan atau Hapus bentuk. Lalu ada:
-
Reset transformation
Reverts all the move, resize and rotate transformations you have applied to the shape.
-
Freeze transformation
When you transform a shape, its assigned path(s) stay in their original position. This may be intended; maybe more than one shape is using that path, maybe you intentionally used Options | Snap to grid to set the points at precise pixel borders.
-If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to the assigned path(s). A future "Reset Transformation" will then return to this new state.
+
Atur ulang transformasi
Mengembalikan semua gerakan, mengubah ukuran, dan memutar transformasi yang telah Anda terapkan pada bentuk.
+
Bekukan transformasi
Ketika Anda mengubah bentuk, jalur yang ditugaskan tetap pada posisi aslinya. Ini mungkin dimaksudkan; mungkin lebih dari satu bentuk menggunakan jalur itu, mungkin Anda sengaja menggunakan Pilihan | Jepret ke kisi untuk mengatur titik pada batas piksel yang tepat.
+Jika tidak, "Pembekuan Transformasi" akan menerapkan transformasi bentuk saat ini ke jalur yang ditetapkan. "Reset Transformasi" yang akan datang kemudian akan kembali ke keadaan baru ini.
+
@@ -239,95 +242,96 @@ If not, "Freeze transformation" will apply the current shape transformation to t
-
See how there are no numbers in the 16px version of the BeVexed icon? That's done with the "Level of Detail" setting of their shapes.
-With the LOD you control the visibility of a shape depending on its size. That way, you can leave away details of an icon that look good on a bigger icon, but maybe not so much on its smaller version.
-
This is how it works: A LOD of 1.0 is defined as a 64px icon size. To get the LOD of a particular icon size you simply divide it by 64, e.g. a 16px icon has a LOD of 16/64 = 0.25. A shape won't be visible below its Min LOD and above its Max LOD.
-
So, if you set a shape's Min LOD to 0.0 and the Max LOD to 0.5, this means that the shape will only be visible for icon sizes smaller or equal to 32px. If you wanted to exclude the 32px icon size, you'd have to stay below 0.5, say 0.49.
-
The LOD is not only for leaving out detailing shapes, but also to e.g. change the stroke width at different sizes, if you feel that's needed. Simply duplicate a shape, make your changes and set both of their LOD settings to show either one or the other. Here lies the only source of potential confusion, when you unwittingly overlap LODs of shapes, and wonder why at some size both are visible...
-For example, if Shape 1 were to be shown below 48px and Shape 2 from 48px upward (LOD: 48/64 = 0.75):
+
Lihat bagaimana tidak ada angka dalam versi 16px dari ikon BeVexed? Itu dilakukan dengan pengaturan "Level of Detail" dari bentuknya.
+Dengan LOD Anda mengontrol visibilitas bentuk tergantung pada ukurannya. Dengan begitu, Anda dapat meninggalkan detail ikon yang terlihat bagus pada ikon yang lebih besar, tetapi mungkin tidak begitu banyak pada versi yang lebih kecil.
+
Beginilah cara kerjanya: LOD 1.0 didefinisikan sebagai ukuran ikon 64px. Untuk mendapatkan LOD dari ukuran ikon tertentu, Anda cukup membaginya dengan 64, mis. ikon 16px memiliki LOD 16/64 = 0,25. Bentuk tidak akan terlihat di bawah Min LOD dan diatas Max LOD.
+
Jadi, jika Anda mengatur Min LOD bentuk ke 0,0 dan Max LOD ke 0,5, ini berarti bahwa bentuk hanya akan terlihat untuk ukuran ikon yang lebih kecil atau sama dengan 32px. Jika Anda ingin mengecualikan ukuran ikon 32px, Anda harus tetap di bawah 0,5, katakan 0,49.
+
LOD tidak hanya untuk meninggalkan detail bentuk, tetapi juga untuk mis. ubah lebar goresan pada ukuran yang berbeda, jika Anda merasa itu diperlukan. Cukup duplikat bentuk, buat perubahan Anda dan atur kedua pengaturan LOD mereka untuk menunjukkan salah satu atau yang lain. Di sinilah letak satu-satunya sumber kebingungan potensial, ketika Anda tanpa sadar tumpang tindih bentuk-bentuk LOD, dan bertanya-tanya mengapa pada beberapa ukuran keduanya terlihat ...
+Misalnya, jika Bentuk 1 ditunjukkan di bawah 48px dan Bentuk 2 dari 48px ke atas (LOD: 48/64 = 0,75):
A style can either be a solid color or some type of gradient.
-Besides the predefined colors under Swatches, you can mix your own by clicking on the current color. Also, note the slider under the color spectrum which sets the alpha-channel (transparency).
Gaya dapat berupa warna solid atau beberapa jenis gradien.
+Selain warna yang telah ditentukan di bawah Swatches, Anda dapat mencampur warna Anda sendiri dengan mengklik warna saat ini. Perhatikan juga slider di bawah spektrum warna yang mengatur saluran alpha (transparansi).
-
You quickly create a new style by mixing your color and simply drag & dropping it into the list of styles.
-
If you go for a gradient, you set the type (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) and then define the start and end colors. This is done with a drag & drop from a color bucket into the respective color indicator under the gradient.
-Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. You can also insert more indicators to add more colors by double-clicking into the gradient. Pressing DEL removes the selected indicator.
-
You can move, resize and rotate the representing box of a gradient on the canvas until it fits your needs. This works just like with shapes.
+
Anda dengan cepat membuat gaya baru dengan mencampur warna Anda dan cukup seret & jatuhkan ke dalam daftar gaya.
+
Jika Anda memilih gradien, Anda mengatur tipe (Linear, Radial, Diamond, Cone) dan kemudian menentukan warna awal dan akhir. Ini dilakukan dengan drag & drop dari ember warna ke masing-masing indikator warna di bawah gradien.
+Tentu saja Anda dapat memindahkan indikator ini untuk mengubah gradien sesuai keinginan Anda. Anda juga dapat memasukkan lebih banyak indikator untuk menambahkan lebih banyak warna dengan mengklik dua kali pada gradien. Menekan DEL menghapus indikator yang dipilih.
+
Anda dapat memindahkan, mengubah ukuran, dan memutar kotak gradien pada kanvas hingga sesuai dengan kebutuhan Anda. Ini berfungsi seperti halnya dengan bentuk.
A shape can have Transformers which change its appearance. The effects, however, are more subtle than a truck turning into a battle robot...
+
Suatu bentuk dapat memiliki Transformer yang mengubah penampilannya. Efeknya, bagaimanapun, lebih halus daripada truk yang berubah menjadi robot pertempuran
There's your usual menu bar at the top, File, Edit, Options. The usage is pretty much self-explaining, so we'll only look at how to save your work.
-
File | Save as... will save in a special Icon-O-Matic format that retains additional information like the names of paths, shapes and styles. These will be stripped from the actual icon once you export it to save space. It's a good idea to back-up your work like this, because without named objects everything's named "<path>/<shape>/<style>" which makes specific changes tedious.
Ada bilah menu seperti biasa di bagian atas, Berkas, Edit, Opsi. Penggunaannya cukup menjelaskan sendiri, jadi kami hanya akan melihat bagaimana cara menyimpan pekerjaan Anda.
+
Berkas | Simpan sebagai... akan menyimpan dalam format Ikon-O-Matic khusus yang menyimpan informasi tambahan seperti nama jalur, bentuk, dan gaya. Ini akan dihapus dari ikon sebenarnya setelah Anda mengekspornya untuk menghemat ruang. Sebaiknya buat cadangan pekerjaan Anda seperti ini, karena tanpa menyebut objek semuanya bernama "<path>/<shape>/<style>" yang membuat perubahan spesifik menjadi membosankan.
-
File | Export as... opens a familiar save panel with a file format pop-up menu at the bottom, offering these choices:
+
berkas | Export sebagai ... membuka panel simpan yang familier dengan menu pop-up format file di bagian bawah, menawarkan pilihan ini:
HVIF
Haiku Vector Icon Format
-
HVIF RDef
Saves as resource used by programmers
-
HVIF source code
Saves as source code used by programmers
-
SVG
Saves as SVG
-
PNG
Saves as a 64px sized PNG
-
PNG set
Saves as 16, 32 and 64px sized PNGs
-
BEOS:ICON attribute
Choose a file and set its icon attribute directly
-
META:ICON attribute
Choose a file and attach the icon as mere meta data
+
HVIF RDef
disimpan sebagai resource yang dipakai programmer
+
HVIF source code
disimpan sebagai resource yang dipakai programmer
+
SVG
Simpain sebagai SVG
+
PNG
Simpan sebagai PNG berukuran 64px
+
PNG set
Simpan sebagai PNG berukuran 16,32 dan 64px
+
BEOS:ICON attribute
Pilih file dan atur atribut ikonnya secara langsung
+
META:ICON attribute
Pilih file dan lampirkan ikon sebagai data meta belaka
Beberapa hal yang harus Anda ingat ketika bekerja dengan Icon-O-Matic dan beberapa tips umum untuk penggunaannya:
-
Read the Icon Guidelines to learn about important characteristics of Haiku icons, e.g. perspective, shadows and the Haiku color palette.
-
You should always try to minimize your use of paths, those are the most expensive, file size wise. Re-use paths wherever possible and work with manipulated shapes and their transformers instead. Smart use of gradients can also save space.
-
Wherever possible, you should activate Snap-to-Grid from the Options menu when editing paths. Path points that align with the 64x64 pixel grid use less storage space. You'll also get the crispest look if points are set on exact pixel borders. For example, it is important to align the most prominent outlines with the 16x16 grid.
-
Check the preview to see if your icon still looks good in 16x16. You may want to use the Level Of Detail settings described in the Shapes section.
-
There's an easy way to produce letters, even if Icon-O-Matic doesn't provide such a tool. Just enter the text in a text editor such as StyledEdit, adjust font type and style, and drag & drop or copy & paste the selected text into Icon-O-Matic. This will create the according paths and shapes.
-
If you assign more than one path to a shape, their overlapping areas will cancel each other out. When one path is completely inside another, it practically creates a hole in the resulting shape.
-
You can zoom in and out of the canvas with the mouse wheel. Panning is done either by click & drag with the middle mouse button or with a normal left-click & drag while holding SPACE.
+
Baca Panduan Ikon untuk mempelajari tentang karakteristik penting ikon Haiku, mis. perspektif, bayangan dan palet warna Haiku.
+
Anda harus selalu berusaha meminimalkan penggunaan jalur Anda, itu yang paling mahal, ukuran file bijaksana. Gunakan kembali jalur sedapat mungkin dan bekerja dengan bentuk yang dimanipulasi dan transformernya. Penggunaan gradien yang cerdas juga dapat menghemat ruang.
+
Jika memungkinkan, Anda harus mengaktifkan Snap-to-Grid dari menu Opsi saat mengedit jalur. Jalur poin yang sejajar dengan grid 64x64 piksel menggunakan lebih sedikit ruang penyimpanan. Anda juga akan mendapatkan tampilan yang paling tajam jika titik ditetapkan pada batas piksel yang tepat. Misalnya, penting untuk menyelaraskan garis besar paling menonjol dengan kisi 16x16
+
Periksa pratinjau untuk melihat apakah ikon Anda masih terlihat bagus di 16x16. Anda mungkin ingin menggunakan pengaturan Level Of Detail yang dijelaskan di bagian Bentuk.
+
Ada cara mudah untuk menghasilkan huruf, bahkan jika Icon-O-Matic tidak menyediakan alat seperti itu. Cukup masukkan teks dalam editor teks seperti StyledEdit, sesuaikan jenis dan gaya font, dan seret & lepas atau salin & tempel teks yang dipilih ke dalam Icon-O-Matic. Ini akan membuat jalur dan bentuk yang sesuai.
+
Jika Anda menetapkan lebih dari satu jalur ke suatu bentuk, area yang tumpang tindih akan saling membatalkan. Ketika satu jalur benar-benar di dalam yang lain, itu praktis membuat lubang dalam bentuk yang dihasilkan.
+
Anda dapat memperbesar dan memperkecil kanvas dengan roda mouse. Panning dilakukan dengan mengklik & seret dengan tombol tengah mouse atau dengan klik kiri normal & seret sambil menahan SPACE.
@@ -353,7 +357,7 @@ Of course you can move these indicators to change the gradient to your liking. Y
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
Installer
+
Penginstall (Installer)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/Installer
Pengaturan:
tiada
@@ -73,22 +72,24 @@
Ini adalah perangkat halus berkualitas beta. Buat cadangan atau menderita konsekuensinya!
Penginstall memerlukan partisi yang disiapkan. Anda dapat menggunakan DriveSetup untuk membuat dan memformat partisi, tetapi belum dapat mengubah ukuran partisi yang ada. Untuk itu, Anda harus menggunakan GParted LiveCD atau alat serupa untuk saat ini.
-
Haiku can be added manually to the bootmanager GRUB. How that is done exactly is available as an online guide.
+
Haiku dapat ditambahkan secara manual ke GRUB bootmanager. Cara yang dilakukan persis tersedia sebagai panduan online.
-
Once you acknowledged with Continue, you're presented with the main window:
+
Setelah Anda mengakui dengan Lanjutkan, Anda akan diberikan jendela utama:
+
+
-
In the first pop-up menu you choose the source for the installation. It can be a currently installed Haiku or can come from an install CD or USB drive, etc.
-The second pop-up menu specifies the target for the installation. This target partition/volume will be completely overwritten and has to be set aside beforehand by a partitioning tool like GParted.
-
Clicking the little expander widget will Show optional packages, if available, that you can choose to install in addition to the basic Haiku.
-
You should do a last check if you really picked the right target before starting the installation process. Click on Setup partitions... to open DriveSetup and have a look at the naming and layout of the available volumes and partitions.
-
Begin starts the installation procedure, which basically copies the /home/ and /system/ folder onto the target volume and makes it bootable.
+
Pada menu pop-up pertama Anda memilih sumber untuk instalasi. Ini bisa menjadi Haiku yang saat ini diinstal atau dapat berasal dari CD instal atau drive USB, dll.
+Menu pop-up kedua menentukan target untuk instalasi. Partisi / volume target ini akan sepenuhnya ditimpa dan harus disisihkan sebelumnya oleh alat partisi seperti GParted.
+
Mengklik widget expander kecil akan Tampilkan paket opsional,jika tersedia, yang dapat Anda pilih untuk diinstal sebagai tambahan untuk Haiku dasar.
+
Anda harus melakukan pemeriksaan terakhir jika Anda benar-benar memilih target yang tepat sebelum memulai proses instalasi. Klik pada Setup partisi... to open DriveSetup dan lihatlah penamaan dan tata letak volume dan partisi yang tersedia.
+
Mulai memulai prosedur instalasi, yang pada dasarnya menyalin folder /home/ dan /system/ volume target dan membuatnya dapat di-boot.
At the end of the installation procedure, the partition is automatically made bootable. However, it can happen that some other operating system or partitioning tool (accidentally) overwrites the boot sector of your Haiku volume. In this case, boot your installation CD and start the Installer. Select your Haiku boot partition from the Onto: Please choose target menu and select Write boot sector from the Tools menu to make it bootable again.
-
The other item in the Tools menu is used to Set up a boot menu that puts a menu in the boot sector to choose what operating system to boot. See topic BootManager for more information.
- You don't need to run the BootManager if you already use a bootmanager like GRUB, in which case you have to add Haiku manually (see above), or Haiku runs exclusively on your machine.
Pada akhir prosedur instalasi, partisi secara otomatis dibuat dapat di-boot. Namun, dapat terjadi bahwa beberapa sistem operasi atau alat pemartisi lain (tanpa sengaja) menimpa sektor boot volume Haiku Anda. Dalam hal ini, boot CD instalasi Anda dan mulai Installer. Pilih partisi boot Haiku Anda dari ke: Silakan pilih target menu and select Write boot sector dari menu perkakas menu untuk membuatnya bisa boot lagi.
+
Item lain di menu Tools digunakan untuk mengatur menu bootyang menempatkan menu di sektor boot untuk memilih sistem operasi apa yang akan di-boot. Lihat topik BootManager funtuk informasi lebih lanjut.
+ Anda tidak perlu menjalankan BootManagerjika Anda sudah menggunakan bootmanager seperti GRUB, dalam hal ini Anda harus menambahkan Haiku secara manual (lihat di atas), atau Haiku berjalan secara eksklusif di mesin Anda.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
Magnify
+
Pembesar (Magnify)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/Magnify
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Magnify_prefs
-
Magnify shows an enlarged version of the area around your mouse pointer.
+
Magnify menunjukkan versi area yang diperbesar di sekitar penunjuk mouse Anda.
-
At the top you'll find the size and magnification level of the area. "64 x 32 @ 8 pixels/pixel" means that you look at a 64x32 pixel rectangle around your mouse pointer and every pixel is enlarged by a factor of 8.
-
Below that is the color of the pixel that's marked by a red outline. Its color is presented as RGB and hex value.
+
Di bagian atas Anda akan menemukan ukuran dan tingkat pembesaran area. "64 x 32 @ 8 piksel / piksel" berarti Anda melihat persegi panjang 64x32 piksel di sekitar penunjuk tetikus dan setiap piksel diperbesar dengan faktor 8.
+
Di bawah itu adalah warna piksel yang ditandai oleh garis merah. Warnanya disajikan sebagai nilai RGB dan hex.
+Anda dapat memindahkan garis merah dengan
+
You can move the red outline with ← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
To measure distances and align objects, you can add up to two blue crosshairs with ALTH. Their X/Y coordinates toward the top left corner and, if both are added, their X/Y distance from each other, are displayed at the bottom.
-They can also be moved with ← / → / ↑ / ↓. The active crosshair is marked with an "x".
-
You can move the mouse pointer pixel by pixel with ALT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
-
Clicking on the pop-up menu or right-clicking into the pixel grid gives you a number of options:
+
Untuk mengukur jarak dan meluruskan objek, Anda dapat menambahkan hingga dua garis bidik biru dengan ALTH. Koordinat X / Y ke sudut kiri atas dan, jika keduanya ditambahkan, jarak X / Y satu sama lain, ditampilkan di bagian bawah.
+Mereka juga dapat dipindahkan dengan ← / → / ↑ / ↓. bidik biru aktif ditandai dengan "x".
+
Anda dapat memindahkan pixel pointer mouse dengan pixel dengan ALT← / → / ↑ / ↓.
+
Mengklik pada menu pop-up atau mengklik kanan ke dalam pixel grid memberi Anda sejumlah opsi:
-
Save image
ALTS
Saves the current display as a PNG image.
-
Copy image
ALTC
Copies the current display to the clipboard.
-
Show info
ALTT
Shows additional information.
-
Add a crosshair
ALTH
Adds a crosshair you can drag around.
-
Remove a crosshair
ALTSHIFTH
Removes the last added crosshair.
-
Show grid
ALTG
Shows a grid overlay.
-
Freeze image
ALTF
Stops updating the magnification area.
-
Stick coordinates
ALTI
Keeps updating the magnification area, but doesn't follow the mouse pointer any more.
-
Make square
ALT/
Reverts back to a square display after resizing the window.
-
Decrease window size
ALT-
Shrinks the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Increase window size
ALT+
Enlarges the magnified area around the mouse pointer.
-
Decrease pixel size
ALT,
Lowers magnification.
-
Increase pixel size
ALT.
Increases magnification.
+
Simpan citra
ALTS
Menyimpan tampilan saat ini sebagai gambar PNG.
+
Salin Citra
ALTC
Menyalin tampilan saat ini ke papan klip.
+
Tunjukkan info
ALTT
Memperlihatkan informasi tambahan.
+
menambah sebuah titikbidik
ALTH
Menambahkan titik bidik yang bisa Anda seret.
+
Menghapus satu titikbidik
ALTSHIFTH
Menghapus crosshair terakhir yang ditambahkan.
+
+tunjukkan grid
ALTG
Menampilkan hamparan kisi.
+
Bekukan gambar
ALTF
Berhenti memperbarui area perbesaran.
+
Bertahan di koordinat
ALTI
Terus memperbarui area perbesaran, tetapi tidak mengikuti pointer mouse lagi.
+
Buat persegi
ALT/
Kembali ke tampilan persegi setelah mengubah ukuran jendela.
+
Kurangi ukuran jendela
ALT-
Mengecilkan area yang diperbesar di sekitar penunjuk mouse.
+
Meningkatkan ukuran jendela
ALT+
Memperbesar area yang diperbesar di sekitar penunjuk mouse.
+
Kurangi ukuran piksel
ALT,
Menurunkan pembesaran
+
Tingkatkan ukuran piksel
ALT.
Meningkatkan pembesaran
@@ -97,7 +101,7 @@ They can also be moved with ← / →
~/config/settings/Mail/ ~/config/settings/Mail/Menu Links/ - Objects put here appear in the mailbox' context menu
@@ -84,12 +86,12 @@
Reading messages
You double-click an email file to open it in Mail. The interface is quite simple:
-
A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the Decoding from the pop-up menu.
+
A menu and optional tool bar on top, with an area of the interesting attributes of a mail (to, from, subject, date) below that, and then the actual body of the mail. If the mail appears with strange characters or empty, try to change the Encoding in the Message menu.
If there are files attached to an email, they are listed at the end of the message. A right-click on one opens a context menu to Save attachment... or Open attachment. You can also drag & drop directly to the Desktop or another Tracker window.
Most of the menu and tool bar items are pretty self-explaining, so we'll concentrate just on the highlights.
File
-
When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the Close and... submenu. There you'll also find the option Set to... to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
+
When you close the window of a new mail, its status is normally switched from "New" to "Read". But you can set other statuses as well, by choosing from the Close and submenu. There you'll also find the option Set to... to create your own custom statuses, which are saved under ~/config/settings/Mail/status/.
Edit
Here you'll find an item to open Mail's Preferences... (see below) and a shortcut to manage your Accounts..., which will open the E-mail preference panel.
A new email is created by invoking the New mail message menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose Create new message... from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
+
A new email is created by invoking New mail message of the File menu or the corresponding icon from the tool bar of an open email. Or you just start the Mail application or choose Create new message... from the context menu of the mailbox icon in the Deskbar.
The window is pretty similar to the one when reading mails. The menu and tool bar items are slightly different and the text boxes have to be filled with the recipient's email address, subject and so on, of course.
Cc is short for the anachronistic term "carbon copy" and results in copies of your mail being sent to the listed people. The difference to just listing a buch of addresses in the "To" field is, that you don't directly address the cc'ed people, thereby signaling that you probably don't expect an answer of them.
diff --git a/userguide/id/applications/mediaplayer.html b/userguide/id/applications/mediaplayer.html
index 2a8ef07b..4f94ea98 100644
--- a/userguide/id/applications/mediaplayer.html
+++ b/userguide/id/applications/mediaplayer.html
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@
* Authors:
* Humdinger
* Szymon Barczak (Google Code-In student)
+ * Translators:
+ * mazbrili abu ibrahim
*
-->
@@ -22,7 +24,7 @@
-
Panduan pengguna
+
User guide
@@ -59,73 +61,77 @@
-
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
MediaPlayer
+
Pemutar Media (MediaPlayer)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/MediaPlayer
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/MediaPlayer
-
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to it's ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
+
MediaPlayer is the default player for all audio and video files. Thanks to its ffmpeg backend, a plethora of widely used formats are supported. Its simple interface has all the controls you'd expect:
-
The slider of the progress bar allows you to quickly skim to a position, resting the mouse over it shows the current and remaining time of the clip. Clicking on the time display to the right of it, toggles between length, current and remaining time.
-Below that you find the usual controls to skip to the previous track, play/pause, stop and jump to the next track. Then comes a volume control (clicking the speaker symbol toggles muting) and a VU meter.
+
Slider dari progress bar memungkinkan Anda untuk dengan cepat menelusuri posisi, meletakkan mouse di atasnya menunjukkan waktu saat ini dan sisa klip. Mengklik tampilan waktu di sebelah kanannya, beralih antara panjang, saat ini dan waktu yang tersisa.
+Di bawah ini Anda menemukan kontrol yang biasa untuk lompat ke trek sebelumnya, main / jeda, berhenti dan lompat ke trek berikutnya. Kemudian datang kontrol volume (mengklik simbol speaker matikan mematikan) dan VU meter.
-
Audio and video playback
-
Since there aren't any specific features for for audio playback, we'll go straight to video or general features.
+
Pemutaran audio dan video
+
Karena tidak ada fitur khusus untuk pemutaran audio, kami akan langsung ke fitur video atau umum.
-
Available to all media is the File info... (ALTI). It shows information about the currently loaded file, like playing time or details of the audio/video track and its codec.
-
Most of the often used commands from the menus are also available from a right-click context menu on the video area. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
-Under Video you'll find options to zoom the window to various levels or force the aspect ratio to some standard values. Leaving the aspect ration to the default Stream settings should work best for correctly encoded files.
-
MediaPlayer supports subtitles in SRT format. To have them show up under Subtitles, their filenames have to be identical to their video file, with a suffixed language name and ".srt" instead of the video's extension. For example:
+
Yang tersedia untuk semua media adalah info File ... (ALTI).Ini menampilkan informasi tentang file yang sedang dimuat, seperti waktu pemutaran atau detail trek audio / video dan codec-nya.
+
Sebagian besar perintah yang sering digunakan dari menu juga tersedia dari menu konteks klik kanan pada area video. Nyaman ketika dalam mode layar penuh.
+Di bawah Video Anda akan menemukan opsi untuk memperbesar jendela ke berbagai tingkat atau memaksa rasio aspek ke beberapa nilai standar. Meninggalkan rasio aspek ke bawaan pengaturan Stream akan berfungsi paling baik untuk file yang disandikan dengan benar.
+
MediaPlayer mendukung subtitle dalam format SRT. untuk membuatnya muncul di bawah
+ Subtitles, nama filenya harus identik dengan file videonya, dengan nama bahasa yang diterjemahkan dan ".srt" bukan ekstensi video. Sebagai contoh:
Multiple audio tracks, most often used for several languages inside one video file, are available from the Audio track submenu. The Video | Track submenu offers the same when having multiple video streams available.
-
You can toggle the Full screen mode (ALTENTER or F or a double left-click), hide MediaPlayer's window borders and controls with Hide interface (ALTH or a double right-click) or have it's window Always on top (ALTA).
+
Beberapa trek audio, paling sering digunakan untuk beberapa bahasa di dalam satu file video, tersedia dari submenu Audio track submenu. The submenu Video | Track menawarkan hal yang sama ketika memiliki beberapa stream video tersedia.
+
Anda dapat beralih ke mode layar penuh (ALTENTER atau F atau double-click kiri ), sembunyikan perbatasan MediaPlayer dan kontrol dengan Hide interface (ALTH atau klik kanan dua kali) or have it's window Selalu di atas (ALTA).
-
Playlists
-
MediaPlayer | Playlist... (ALTP) opens a window with the files currently queued up for playback. Double-clicking an entry starts playing it.
+
Daftar putar (playlist)
+
MediaPlayer | Daftar putar... (ALTP) membuka jendela dengan file yang saat ini antri untuk diputar. Mengklik dua kali entri mulai memainkannya.
+
-
You can add more files by dropping them into the list and rearrange their position via drag & drop. From the Edit menu you can Randomize or Remove (DEL) an entry from the list or delete the actual file with Move to Trash (ALTT).
-
Of course, you can Save a playlist and later Open it again, or start it with simply double-clicking the playlist file.
+
Anda dapat menambahkan lebih banyak file dengan menjatuhkannya ke dalam daftar dan mengatur ulang posisinya melalui & drop. Dari menu Edit Anda dapat Mengacak or Menghapus (DEL) entri dari daftar atau menghapus file aktual dengan Pindahkan ke Sampah (ALTT).
+
Tentu saja, Anda dapat Menyimpan daftar putar dan kemudian Buka lagi, atau mulai dengan mengklik dua kali file daftar putar.
-
Settings
-
There are several settings to fine-tune MediaPlayer's behavior:
+
Pengaturan
+
Ada beberapa pengaturan untuk menyempurnakan perilaku MediaPlayer:
-
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining. Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+
The first batch, Play mode, is pretty self-explaining.
+Start playback automatically, close windows when finished or play clips in a loop.
+From the pop-up menu you choose MediaPlayer's launch behavior. Should it resume playing where it left off last time: always, never, or ask every time.
Next are different View options.
You can opt to Use hardware overlay if available, which cuts down CPU usage but only works for one video window and needs a supporting video card driver.
You can Scale movies smoothly (when not in overlay mode) which uses very fast filtering to smooth over otherwise blocky pixels when zooming video or watching in full-screen mode. Scale controls in full-screen mode if you prefer slightly bigger controls, maybe because you watch the screen from a bit farther away when in full-screen mode.
-Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of window, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
-
The last setting determines the volume of clips whose windows are not currently active. You can have them all blaring at Full volume, at less confusing Low volume or quietly Muted.
+Then there are settings for Subtitle size and Subtitle placement. They can be shown at the Bottom of video, which will always have them overlayed over the picture. Or Bottom of screen, which allows you to resize the window vertically and have the subtitles appear in the black bar at the bottom instead.
+
Pengaturan terakhir menentukan volume klip yang jendelanya sedang tidak aktif. Anda dapat membuat semuanya menggelegar Full volume, menurunkan rasa pusing dengan volume rendah atau Diam-diam Dibisukan.
-
Keyboard controls
-
MediaPlayer offers convenient key combinations to control playback without using the mouse.
+
Kontrol keyboard
+
MediaPlayer menawarkan kombinasi tombol yang nyaman untuk mengontrol pemutaran tanpa menggunakan mouse.
-
Z
Skip to previous track
-
X
Play
-
C
Pause
+
Z
Lompat ke trek sebelumnya
+
X
Mainkan
+
C
Jeda
V
Stop
-
B
Skip to next track
+
B
Lompat ke trek berikutnya
-
These keys are assigned to the functions of the control buttons. They are always the bottom left letter keys on the keyboard, i.e. they are used independently of your current keymapping. The above keys correspond to a standard US-american keymap.
+
Tombol-tombol ini ditetapkan untuk fungsi tombol kontrol. Tombol-tombol itu selalu merupakan tombol huruf kiri bawah pada keyboard, mis. Tombol-tombol tersebut digunakan secara terpisah dari penekanan tombol Anda saat ini. Tombol-tombol di atas sesuai dengan keymap standar AS-Amerika.
-
← / →
Seek backwards/forwards
-
SHIFT← / →
Jump backwards/forwards 10 seconds
-
ALT← / →
Jump backwards/forwards 30 seconds
+
← / →
Cari mundur / maju
+
SHIFT← / →
Lompat mundur / maju 10 detik
+
ALT← / →
Melompat mundur/maju 30 detik
-
↓ / ↑
Decrease/Increase volume
+
↓ / ↑
Kurangi / Tambah volume
-
ALT↓ / ↑
Skip to next/previous Track
+
ALT↓ / ↑
Lewati ke Trek berikutnya / sebelumnya
-
Spacebar
Toggle play/pause
-
ALTENTER
Toggle full-screen mode (also done by double left-clicking the video area or pressing F or TAB)
-
ALTSHIFT0 / 1 / 2 / 3
Changes aspect ratio to Stream settings (how the video was encoded), No aspect correction (maps the pixels of the video 1:1 to the screen), 4:3, 16:9
+
Spacebar
Beralih / berhenti sementara
+
ALTENTER
Mengalihkan mode layar penuh (juga dilakukan dengan mengklik dua kali area video atau menekan F or TAB)
+
ALTSHIFT0 / 1 / 2 / 3
Mengubah rasio aspek ke pengaturan Stream (bagaimana video dikodekan), Tidak ada koreksi aspek (memetakan piksel video 1: 1 ke layar), 4:3, 16:9
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
MidiPlayer
+
Pemutar midi (MidiPlayer)
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/MidiPlayer
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/MidiPlayerSettings
-
As the name suggests, MidiPlayer is used to playback MIDI music files. MIDI files are special, as they don't contain the actual digitized and in some way encoded music, but only a description of it: Hold this note for that long with this volume and use instrument X for it.
-While this keeps file sizes pretty small, it also follows that depending on the instrument library (the so-called "SoundFont") the results can differ hugely. Also, these SoundFonts tend to be quite large, increasingly so with the number and quality of the instrument samples.
-
Haiku releases include a small but relatively high quality SoundFont. People who use MIDI more seriously often already have very high quality or custom SoundFonts.
-
To use other SoundFonts (that don't come installable via HaikuDepot as a HPKG), just copy the .sf file to e.g. ~/config/non-packaged/data/synth/. You can select the active SoundFont in the Media preferences under MIDI.
+
Seperti namanya, MidiPlayer digunakan untuk memutar file musik MIDI. File MIDI khusus, karena tidak mengandung musik digital yang sebenarnya dan dalam beberapa cara disandikan, tetapi hanya deskripsi saja: Pegang catatan ini selama itu dengan ini volume dan gunakan instrumen X untuk itu.
+Walaupun ini membuat ukuran file cukup kecil, ini juga mengikuti bahwa tergantung pada perpustakaan instrumen (yang disebut "SoundFont") hasilnya dapat sangat berbeda. Juga, SoundFonts ini cenderung cukup besar, semakin meningkat dengan jumlah dan kualitas sampel instrumen.
+
Rilis Haiku termasuk SoundFont kecil tapi berkualitas tinggi. Orang-orang yang menggunakan MIDI lebih serius sering sudah memiliki SoundFonts kualitas sangat tinggi atau kustom.
+
Untuk menggunakan SoundFont lain (yang tidak dapat diinstal melalui HaikuDepot sebagai HPKG), cukup salin file .sf ke e.g. ~/config/non-packaged/data/synth/. Anda dapat memilih SoundFont aktif di preferensi Media di bawah. MIDI.
-
MidiPlayer's interface is very simple. Just double-click or drag & drop a midi file and playback starts. You control the volume with the slider and add reverb effects from the Reverb pop-up menu. Activating the scope will show a visualization in form of an oscilloscope running at the top.
+
Antarmuka MidiPlayer sangat sederhana. Cukup klik dua kali atau drag & drop file midi dan pemutaran dimulai. Anda mengontrol volume dengan slider dan menambahkan efek reverb dari menu pop-up Reverb. Mengaktifkan ruang lingkup akan menampilkan visualisasi dalam bentuk sebuah osiloskop berjalan di bagian atas.
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
tiada entri,normalnya diluncurkan lewat dobel-klik dari berkas yang disupport.
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/LegacyPackageInstaller
Pengaturan:
tiada
-
This page is currently only a first draft. Please check back later for a refined version.
-
LegacyPackageInstaller is an installer for BeOS packages in PKG format. It provides an easy-to-use GUI that helps in fast package installation in Haiku.
-
It is being executed automatically when you try to open files with .pkg extension.
+
Halaman ini saat ini hanya konsep pertama. Silakan periksa kembali nanti untuk versi yang disempurnakan.
+
LegacyPackageInstaller adalah penginstal untuk paket BeOS dalam format PKG. Ini menyediakan GUI yang mudah digunakan yang membantu dalam instalasi paket cepat di Haiku.
+
Dijalankan secara otomatis ketika Anda mencoba untuk membuka file dengan ekstensi .pkg.
-
The main window gives access to two configurations:
+
Jendela utama memberikan akses ke dua konfigurasi:
-
type of installation (depending on the developer there might be more than one (standard) installation option).
-
Installation location (only entire partitions/hard disks can be chosen, not custom paths)
+
jenis instalasi (tergantung pada pengembang mungkin ada lebih dari satu opsi instalasi (standar)).
+
Lokasi pemasangan (hanya seluruh partisi / hard disk yang dapat dipilih, bukan jalur kustom)
-
After clicking Install the extraction and installation process will begin.
+
Setelah mengklik Instal proses ekstraksi dan instalasi akan dimulai.
-
At this point warnings and errors can appear saying which libraries and dependencies are missing in order to run the program. It might be required to install these packages before attempting to install desired program.
-
When the installation is complete, package should appear in the Deskbar applications menu.
+
Pada titik ini peringatan dan kesalahan dapat muncul mengatakan perpustakaan dan dependensi mana yang hilang untuk menjalankan program. Mungkin diperlukan untuk menginstal paket-paket ini sebelum mencoba menginstal program yang diinginkan.
+
Ketika instalasi selesai, paket akan muncul di menu aplikasi Deskbar.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
ShowImage
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via
-double-clicking a supported file.
+
Deskbar:
tiada entri,normalnya diluncurkan lewat dobel-klik dari berkas yang disupport.
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/ShowImage
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/ShowImage_settings
@@ -85,7 +86,7 @@ ShowImage provides minimal editing features to crop, rotate and flip images and
From left to right: Previous image, next image, start slide show (in full screen mode), selection mode, original size, fit to window, zoom in, zoom out, previous and next page (when an image format like TIFF allows multiple pages in one file, see below).
Most of the more often used commands are also available from a right-click context menu on the image. Convenient when in full-screen mode.
-
Browsing
+
Menjelajah
After opening an image you can quickly browse through all the other images in its folder (or query result window) by pressing ↑/↓ or ←/→. You can see the selection change accordingly in the Tracker window.
There is a quick way to open the folder of the current image and even navigate to its parent and subfolders. It works just like with drill-down navigating in Tracker by clicking in the info area in the status bar that shows size and format of the current image.
@@ -103,7 +104,7 @@ Often quicker, especially when the Tracker window with the destination folder is
This is also how the above mentioned cropping is finalized. Either select a frame as described above, or choose Edit | Select all for the whole image. Then drag & drop the selection onto the Desktop or any Tracker window to create a new image clipping in the same format of the original image.
To save in another file format, do the dragging with the right mouse button and choose a format from the context menu when dropping the image.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
StyledEdit
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/StyledEdit
Pengaturan:
tiada
-
StyledEdit is Haiku's simple text editor. Although it saves files in plain text format, additional attributes are written in order to have limited formatting capabilities when viewed with StyledEdit.
+
StyledEdit adalah editor teks sederhana Haiku. Meskipun menyimpan file dalam format teks biasa, atribut tambahan ditulis agar memiliki kemampuan format terbatas ketika dilihat dengan StyledEdit.
-
If you're interested, this is what those additional attributes look like when examined in Terminal with listattr:
+
Jika Anda tertarik, inilah yang terlihat seperti atribut tambahan ketika diperiksa di Terminal dengan: listattr:
~> listattr /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
File: /boot/home/Desktop/test.txt
Type Size Name
@@ -81,10 +82,10 @@ MIME String 11 "BEOS:TYPE"
Raw Data 1048 "styles"
1071 bytes total in attributes.
-
As you can see, all the formatting options from StyledEdit's menu are present: line wrapping (on/off) and alignment (left/center/right), each in one attribute. Styles (font, size, color) of each letter mangled into another.
-
Because these attributes are a file system feature of BFS, this means that not only other platforms just see a plain text file, it also follows, that the formatting will be lost when a file is stored on a non-BFS partition. The above attributes are simply stripped and what's left is the ordinary, plain text file.
-
In any case, it's a nice idea having the possibility of colored text in different fonts and sizes while still being a normal text file. A ReadMe.txt, for example, is therefore readable in a shell on any platform and still has a bit of style when viewed via double-click from Haiku.
-
Actually using StyledEdit is so simple, we'll skip explaining every mundane menu item. Just write down your text then select the words you'd like to format and apply font, size and color from the Font menu. Line wrapping and alignment from the Document menu only work on the whole file.
+
Seperti yang Anda lihat, semua opsi pemformatan dari menu StyledEdit hadir: pembungkus garis (on/off) dan perataan (kiri/ tengah/kanan),masing-masing dalam satu atribut. Gaya (font, ukuran, warna) dari setiap huruf berubah menjadi huruf lain.
+
Karena atribut-atribut ini adalah fitur sistem file BFS, ini berarti bahwa tidak hanya platform lain hanya melihat file teks biasa, itu juga mengikuti, bahwa format akan hilang ketika file disimpan pada partisi non-BFS. hanya dilucuti dan apa yang tersisa adalah file teks biasa, benar benar text biasa.
+
Bagaimanapun, itu ide yang baik memiliki kemungkinan teks berwarna dalam font dan ukuran yang berbeda sementara masih menjadi file teks biasa. ReadMe.txt,misalnya, karena itu dapat dibaca dalam shell pada platform apa pun dan masih memiliki sedikit gaya bila dilihat melalui klik dua kali dari Haiku.
+
Sebenarnya menggunakan StyledEdit sangat sederhana, kami akan lewati menjelaskan setiap item menu biasa. Cukup tulis teks Anda lalu pilih kata-kata yang ingin Anda format dan menerapkan font, ukuran dan warna menu Font Pembungkus garis dan perataan dari Menu Document hanya berfungsi pada seluruh file.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
Terminal
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/Terminal
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Terminal
-~/config/settings/profile - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/profile
-~/config/settings/inputrc - adds/overrides defaults in /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc
+~/config/settings/profile - menambah/menimpa setting bawaan di /boot/system/settings/etc/profile
+~/config/settings/inputrc - menambah/menimpa setting bawaan di /boot/system/settings/etc/inputrc
-
The Terminal is Haiku's interface to bash, the Bourne Again Shell.
-
Please refer to the topic on Scripting for a few links to online tutorials on working in the shell and also have a look at Haiku's commandline applications. Here, we'll concentrate on the Terminal application itself.
+
Terminal adalah antarmuka Haiku ke bash, Bourne Again Shell.
+
Silakan merujuk ke topik tentang Scripting untuk beberapa tautan ke tutorial online tentang cara bekerja di shell dan lihat juga aplikasi commandline Haiku. Di sini, kita akan berkonsentrasi pada aplikasi Terminal itu sendiri.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in it's own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALTT.
You can open as many Terminals as needed, either each in its own window by simply launching more Terminals or with ALTN from an already running Terminal. Or you use Terminal's tabbed view and open more tabs with ALTT.
Double-clicking into the emtpy part of the tab bar opens a new tab; onto a tab opens a dialog to rename its title. There are several %-designated variables that are explained with a tooltip when you hover the mouse over the text field.
By default, %1d: %p, a tab shows the current directory and, separated by a :, the name of the currently running process (or -- if it's just bash running, probably idling). The screenshot above shows the first tab with a FTP session in the Desktop folder and a second tab idling at home.
-Via Edit | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
+Via Settings | Window title... the Terminal window's title can be edited in a similar way.
Right-clicking a tab shows a context menu to Close tab, Close other tabs or, like double-clicking, Edit tab title....
A Terminal window can be resized like any other window or you use the presets from the Settings | Window size menu. ALTENTER toggles fullscreen mode.
All the settings you change directly through the Settings menu, like Window title, Window size, Text encoding or Font size are only kept for the current session. If you want to make permanent changes, you have to apply them in the Settings... panel.
@@ -98,12 +100,12 @@ You can choose pre-defined color schema like Midnight
Activate the checkbox to Confirm exit if active programs exist and you'll be warned when trying to close a Terminal window while an app is still being executed.
Save to file...
let's you save different settings as separate profiles, which on double-click open an accordingly configured Terminal.
-
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you opened the settings panel.
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
+
Pulihkan
brings back the settings that were active when you opened the settings panel.
Another nice feature that is more a key & mouse combination: When holding ALT a path or URL under the mouse pointer gets highlighted. A left-click opens the file/folder or website. A right-click opens a context menu to either Copy path or Copy absolute path. Imagine you're in /MyData/source/haiku/ and have the path generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit under the mouse pointer, the latter menu item will result in the combined, absolute path <deep breath>: /MyData/source/haiku/generated/objects/haiku/x86_gcc2/release/apps/stylededit/StyledEdit.
If you hold down ALTSHIFT, only the path from beginning to where your mouse pointer sits will be highlighted.
@@ -119,12 +121,12 @@ Both files can be created in the /boot/home/config/settings/<
The profile is loaded every time you open a new Terminal. It sets all kinds of aliases and variables that will affect bash's behavior and appearance. You'll find many online resources that will detail all possibilities.
The Haiku/BeOS Tip Server has quite a few tips to get you started, for example:
The inputrc deals with keybindings. Since Haiku provides useful defaults, you probably don't have to mess with these more involved settings. If you do have special needs here, consult one of the many online resources, e.g. The GNU Readline Library.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
TextSearch
+
Pencarian kata (TextSearch)
-
Deskbar:
No entry, normally launched via Tracker Add-on
+
Deskbar:
tiada entri, secara normal dijalankan lewat Add-on Tracker
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/TextSearch
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/TextSearch
-
TextSearch looks for a string in text files. Typically it is invoked from Tracker's Add-on context menu on the selection of files or folders you want to search.
+
TextSearch mencari string dalam file teks. Biasanya ini dipanggil dari menu konteks Tracker's Add-on pada pemilihan file atau folder yang ingin Anda cari.
Vision is an IRC client originally developed for the BeOS. More documentation and a bug tracker are available at the Vision homepage.
-
You can find help from other Haiku users and developers on Haiku channels in various languages.
-The most frequented channel is the English speaking #haiku at irc.freenode.net.
-
Some advice, especially if you're new to IRC:
+
Vision adalah klien IRC yang awalnya dikembangkan untuk BeOS. Lebih banyak dokumentasi dan pelacak bug tersedia di beranda Vision. Vision homepage.
+
Anda dapat menemukan bantuan dari pengguna dan pengembang Haiku lainnya di Haiku channelsalam berbagai bahasa.
+Saluran yang paling sering dikunjungi adalah #haiku berbahasa Inggris di irc.freenode.net.
+
+
Beberapa saran, terutama jika Anda baru mengenal IRC:
-
Search the web for "IRC etiquette" to learn about the do's and don'ts of chatting. Without much searching, I found Getting help on IRC by Christoph Haas to be quite helpful.
-
By registering your nickname you make sure nobody can pull any shenanigans and you gain the trust of the residents. See Freenode's FAQ on that matter.
-
Set up a sound in Haiku's Sounds preferences to be notified if someone mentions your nickname. People don't always watch their IRC client screen. Putting the nickname of the person you're talking to at the beginning of what you're about to post increases your chance to be noticed. Similar to the Terminal, Vision supports tab-completion for nicknames, i.e. if you enter the starting letters of a nickname and press the tab key, Vision completes it with the first name that matches.
+
Cari di web untuk "etiket IRC" untuk mengetahui apa yang harus dan tidak boleh dilakukan dalam obrolan. Tanpa banyak pencarian, saya menemukan Mendapatkan bantuan di IRC oleh Christoph Haas sangat membantu.
+
+
+
Dengan mendaftarkan nama panggilan Anda, Anda memastikan tidak ada yang bisa menarik perhatian dan Anda mendapatkan kepercayaan dari penduduk. Lihat Freenode's FAQ tentang hal itu.
+
+
Siapkan suara di preferensi Suara Haiku untuk diberitahukan jika seseorang menyebutkan nama panggilan Anda. Orang tidak selalu menonton layar klien IRC mereka. Menempatkan nama panggilan orang yang Anda ajak bicara di awal apa yang akan Anda posting meningkatkan peluang Anda untuk diperhatikan. Mirip dengan Terminal, Vision mendukung penyelesaian tab untuk nama panggilan, yaitu jika Anda memasukkan huruf awal nama panggilan dan menekan tombol tab, Vision melengkapinya dengan nama depan yang cocok.
Vision menyediakan beberapa pintasan keyboard praktis:
-
TAB
Tab-completion like in Terminal: After entering a few letters of a nickname, hitting TAB completes to the first matching nickname.
-
↑ / ↓
When the input control has focus, this will cycle through your recently entered text.
-
ALT↑ / ↓
Activates the window that appears above / below the currently active (selected) one in the "Window list"
-
SHIFTALT↑ / ↓
Similar to ALT↑ / ↓, but with a twist. Instead of activating the window immedietly above / below the current one, it looks ahead. If there are any windows with higher status bits then the current window, it jumps to those. It jumps to the highest found status bit first.
+
TAB
TAB penyelesai seperti di Terminal: Setelah memasukkan beberapa huruf nama panggilan, memukul TAB melengkapi nama panggilan yang cocok pertama.
+
↑ / ↓
Ketika kontrol input memiliki fokus, ini akan menggilir teks yang baru Anda masukkan.
+
ALT↑ / ↓
Mengaktifkan jendela yang muncul di atas / di bawah jendela yang saat ini aktif (dipilih) di "Daftar jendela"
+
SHIFTALT↑ / ↓
Mirip dengan ALT↑ / ↓, tetapi dengan twist. Alih-alih mengaktifkan jendela dengan segera di atas / di bawah yang sekarang, itu terlihat di depan. Jika ada jendela dengan bit status yang lebih tinggi daripada jendela saat ini, ia melompat untuk itu, ia melompat ke bit status tertinggi yang ditemukan terlebih dahulu.
-To understand this, you must know that Vision color codes windows in the list with different "status bits" depending on how its contents have changed since it last had focus:
+Untuk memahami hal ini, Anda harus tahu bahwa Vision color mengkodekan windows dalam daftar dengan "bit status" yang berbeda tergantung pada bagaimana isinya telah berubah sejak terakhir memiliki fokus:
-
black - no new text
-
gray - new text, but nothing exciting (joins, parts, etc.)
-
green - someone has said something
-
red - someone has said something, and mentioned your nickname
+
black - tidak ada teks baru
+
gray - baru, tetapi tidak ada yang menarik (bergabung, bagian, dll.))
+
green - -seseorang telah mengatakan sesuatu
+
+
red -seseorang telah mengatakan sesuatu, dan menyebutkan nama panggilan Anda
-Vision treats these with sequential priority. When you press SHIFTALT↑ / ↓, Vision will first jump to a red window above / below the current one if it sees one. If it doesn't see a red one, it will jump to a green one, and so on.
+Visi memperlakukan ini dengan prioritas berurutan. Ketika Anda menekan SHIFTALT↑ / ↓, Visi pertama-tama akan melompat ke jendela merah di atas / di bawah jendela saat ini jika melihat. Jika tidak melihat yang merah, itu akan melompat ke yang hijau, dan sebagainya.
Berikut adalah daftar dari perintah bawaan ,diambil dengan izin dari situs web Vision.
+
sintaks:
-
/COMMAND
the command
-
<required>
a required parameter
-
[optional]
an optional parameter
-
|
a logical OR
-
...
more parameters possible
+
/COMMAND
perintah
+
<required>
parameter dibutuhkan
+
[optional]
parameter opsional
+
|
tanda logika "atau"
+
...
memungkinkan lebih banyak parameter
/ABOUT
-Opens Vision's About window.
+Buka jendela Tentang Visi..
/ACRONYM [word]
-Opens www.acronymfinder.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+Membuka www.acronymfinder.com dengan html handler Anda saat ini. (Catatan: Jika file-handler bukan browser, itu membuka aplikasi yang ditentukan dalam FileTypes.))
-
/AWAY [away-reason]
-Sets away status on current network. If no away reason is specified, it is set to 'BRB'. (be right back)
+
/AWAY [alasan-jauhnya]
+Menyetel status di jaringan saat ini. Jika tidak ada alasan jauhnya yang ditentukan, itu diatur ke 'BRB'. (Segera kembali)
/BACK
-Sets your status to 'back' on current network.
+Atur status Anda ke 'kembali' di jaringan saat ini.
/CLEAR
-Clears the contents of the current text buffer.
+Menghapus konten buffer teks saat ini.
/CTCP <nick|channel> <PING|VERSION|FINGER|TIME|CLIENTINFO|USERINFO>
-Executes the specified ctcp command on a channel or nick.
+Menjalankan perintah ctcp yang ditentukan pada saluran atau nick.
/DCC <CHAT> <nick>
-Opens a private dcc chat session with the specified nick.
+Membuka sesi obrolan dcc pribadi dengan nick yang ditentukan.
/DCC <SEND> <nick> [file]
-Sends a file to <nick>. If no file is specified, a File panel will open.
+Mengirim file ke <nick>. Jika tidak ada file yang ditentukan, panel File akan terbuka.
+
/DEOP /DOP /DEVOICE <nick1> [nick2] ...
-De-ops or de-voices <nick(s)>.
+Non-aktifkan atau non-suara <nick(s)>.
/DESCRIBE <nick> <message>
-Like a private /ME, only <nick> can see it.
+Seperti private /ME, hanya <nick> yang bisa melihatnya.
/DNS <domain name/IP address>
-Resolves the given IP or domain name.
+meresolve IP atau nama domain yang diberikan.
/EXIT
-Quits Vision.
+Keluar dari Vision.
/GAWAY [away-reason]
-Same as /AWAY [away-reason], but applies to all connected networks.
+Sama seperti /AWAY [alasan-jauhnya], tetapi berlaku untuk semua jaringan yang terhubung.
/GBACK
-Same as /BACK, but on applies to all connected networks.
+Sama seperti /BACK, tetapi aktif berlaku untuk semua jaringan yang terhubung.
/GOOGLE [search-string]
-Opens www.google.com with your current html handler. (Note: If the file-handler is not a browser, it opens the application specified in FileTypes.)
+Buka www.google.com dengan html handler Anda saat ini. (Catatan: Jika file-handler bukan browser, itu membuka aplikasi yang ditentukan dalam FileTypes.)
/INVITE /I <nick> <channel>
-Invites <nick> to the <channel>.
+Undang <nick> ke <kanal>.
/JOIN /J <channel> [channel-key]
-Joins the <channel>. Provide a [channel-key] if necessary.
+gabung ke <channel>. menyediakan [channel-key] jika dibutuhkan.
/KICK /K <nick> [reason]
-Kicks <nick> from current channel. If [reason] is not specified, it will be set to the reason specified in Preferences.
+Tendang <nick> dari saluran saat ini. Jika [alasan] tidak ditentukan, itu akan diatur ke alasan yang ditentukan dalam Preferensi.
/KILL <nick> [message]
-IRC operator command to disconnect a user from the network.
+Perintah operator IRC untuk memutuskan pengguna dari jaringan.
/LIST
-Opens a new view which lists all the channels on the current network. [except hidden channels]
+Membuka tampilan baru yang mencantumkan semua saluran di jaringan saat ini. [Kecuali saluran tersembunyi]
/M
-Displays the channel modes of the current channel.
+Menampilkan mode saluran dari saluran saat ini.
/M < -ohvbeqa> <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Same as /MODE <channel> <modes> <nick>, but on current channel.
+sama seperti /MODE <channel> <modes> <nick>, tetapi pada saluran saat ini.
/M <+-kfL,l,psmntirRcOAQKVHGCuzN>
-Same as /MODE <channel> <modes>, but on current channel.
+Sama seperti /MODE <channel> <modes>, tetapi pada saluran saat ini.
+Mengeset mode untuk <nick(s)> di <channel>.
+mis. /MODE #channel +o nick1
+atau /MODE #channel +oo-o nick1 nick2 nick3
/MODE <channel> <+-kfL,l,psmntirRcOAQKVHGCuzN>
-Sets the mode of <channel>. (Note: Commata just for optical separation.)
+mengeset mode of <channel>. (Note: Commata hanya untuk pembagi optik.)
e.g. /MODE #channel +ms
/MSG <nick> <message>
-Sends a <message> to <nick>.
+Kirim <pesan> ke <nick>.
/NAMES
-Displays all channels and all nicks of the network in the network window. (Careful with this one)
+Menampilkan semua saluran dan semua torehan jaringan di jendela jaringan. (Hati-hati dengan yang ini)
/NAMES <channel>
-Displays nick(s) in <channel>.
+tampilkan nick(s) di <channel>.
/NICK <newnick>
-Changes your nick to <newnick>.
+Rubah nickname anda ke <newnick>.
/NOTICE <nick> <message>
-Sends a notice to <nick> with the given <message>.
+Kirim notifikasi ke <nick> dengan <message>.
/NOTIFY <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Adds <nick(s)> to your notify list.
+tambahkan <nick(s)> ke daftar notifikasi.
/PEXEC /RRUN <app1> [ | <app2> | ... ]
-Executes the given <app>. If more than one application is provided, they will be executed in a pipe.
-e.g. /PEXEC Terminal | StyledEdit opens a new Terminal, and afterwards StyledEdit
-or /PEXEC ls -la ~/Downloads/ displays the contents of your ~/Downloads/ directory in the current window (Attention!)
+Menjalankan <app>. yang diberikan. Jika lebih dari satu aplikasi disediakan, mereka akan dieksekusi dalam pipa.
+misalnya /PEXEC Terminal | StyledEdit membuka Terminal baru, dan setelahnya StyledEdit
+atau /PEXEC ls -la ~/Downloads/ menampilkan isi direktori ~/Downloads/ Anda di jendela saat ini (Perhatian!)
/OP /VOICE <nick1> [nick2] ...
-Ops or voices to <nick(s)>.
+Ops atau suara ke <nick(s)>.
/PART
-Leaves current channel or network.
+Meninggalkan kanal atau jaringan saat ini.
/PING <nick>
-Pings the <nick> and returns the ping-time. Equivalent to /CTCP <nick> PING.
+ping <nick> dan mengembalikan waktu ping. Setara dengan /CTCP <nick> PING.
/QUERY /Q <nick> [message]
-Opens a query window on <nick>, optionally along with a [message].
+Membuka jendela permintaan pada <nick>, opsional bersama dengan sebuah [message].
/QUIT /QUI [custom-quit-message]
-Quits current network. If [custom-quit-message] is not specified, the default set in Preferences will be used.
+Keluar dari jaringan saat ini. Jika [custom-quit-message] tidak ditentukan, pengaturan default di Preferensi akan digunakan.
+
+
/RAW /QUOTE <command|text>
-Sends a raw IRC command.
+Mengirim perintah IRC mentah.
/RECONNECT
-Will reconnect you to the current network if the 47 automatic reconnection attempts have failed.
+Akan menghubungkan kembali Anda ke jaringan saat ini jika 47 upaya koneksi ulang otomatis gagal.
/SLEEP <deciseconds>
-Causes current thread to sleep for the specified time ; for future scripting use.
+Menyebabkan utas saat ini tidur untuk waktu yang ditentukan; untuk penggunaan skrip di masa depan.
/SQUIT
-IRC operator command to disconnect a server.
+Perintah operator IRC untuk memutuskan koneksi server.
/TIME <nick>
-Returns local time of <nick>. Equivalent to /CTCP <nick> TIME.
+Mengembalikan waktu lokal <nick>. Setara dengan /CTCP <nick> TIME.
+
/TOPIC /T [channel]
-Displays the topic of the current channel or, if provided, of <channel>.
+Menampilkan topik saluran saat ini atau, jika disediakan, dari <channel>.
+
/TOPIC <channel> <new-channel-topic>
Sets the topic of <channel> to <new-channel-topic>.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
WebPositive
-
Deskbar:
Applications
+
Deskbar:
Aplikasi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/WebPositive
-
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Configuration files, cookies, cache and browsing history
-
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - All bookmarks as single files
+
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/WebPositive/ - Berkas konfigurasi, cookies, cache dan sejarah rambahan
+
~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks - semua bukmak dalam satu berkas
-
WebPositive, or Web+ for short, is Haiku's native web browser. One part of its name is a tip of the hat to BeOS' simple NetPositive, the other points to its modern foundation: the WebKit. This open source HTML rendering library is at the heart of other mainstream browsers as well, like Safari of Mac OS X and Google's Chrome. By using the ever evolving WebKit, Web+ will be able to keep up with new web technologies.
+
WebPositive, atau singkatnya Web+, adalah peramban web asli Haiku. Salah satu bagian dari namanya adalah untuk perambah sederhana BeOS NetPositive , yang lain menunjuk pada fondasinya yang modern: WebKit. Pustaka terbuka pemroses HTML ini adalah jantung dari browser populer yang lain, seperti Safari di Mac OS X dan Google Chrome. Dengan menggunakan pustaka weblik, Web+ dapat sejajar dengan teknologi web yang baru.
-
WebPositive's interface is pretty straight forward: Under a menu bar is another bar with buttons to navigate to the previous and next sites in your browsing history, to stop the loading of a page and (optionally) a button to jump to your starting page.
-Then comes the locator field to enter a site's URL.
-Below this navigating bar appear the webpages. You can open many pages in parallel by loading them into their own tab.
-At the bottom of the window is a status bar, showing the URL of the site being loaded or of the link the mouse pointer is hovering over. While a page is being loaded, a progress bar appears to the right.
-
Settings
-
From the Window menu you can open a Settings panel to configure a few essentials of WebPositive.
+
Antarmuka WebPositive tidak bertele-tele: Di bawah bilah menu adalah bilah lain dengan tombol untuk menavigasi ke situs sebelumnya dan berikutnya dalam riwayat penjelajahan Anda, untuk menghentikan pemuatan halaman dan (opsional) tombol untuk melompat ke halaman awal Anda.
+Kemudian muncul bidang locator untuk memasukkan URL situs.
+Di bawah bilah navigasi ini muncul halaman web Anda dapat membuka banyak halaman secara paralel dengan memuatnya ke dalam tab mereka sendiri.
+Di bagian bawah jendela adalah bilah status, yang menunjukkan URL situs yang sedang dimuat atau tautan penunjuk mouse melayang-layang. Saat halaman sedang dimuat, bilah kemajuan muncul di sebelah kanan.
+
Pengaturan
+
Dari menu Jendela Anda dapat membuka panel Pengaturan untuk mengkonfigurasi beberapa hal penting dari WebPositive.
-
The first tab deals with general settings: What file or URL serves as a Start page, what's used as a Search page, what Download folder is used for stuff you get from the net.
-Two pop-up menus let you decide what page to load - if any - when opening a new window or tab.
-Via the following checkboxes you can avoid showing the tab bar when there's only one page open anyway. WebPositive's interface can be told to automatically hide in full screen mode, and the mouse pointer can be automatically hidden whenever it's not moved for a while.
-Finally, you can decide to include the "Home" button in the navigation bar and set the number of days the browser remembers the sites you have visited in its history.
-
In the second tab you can choose the fonts used for standard, serif, non-serif and monospaced fonts and set their default sizes.
-
The last tab is used to configure a proxy server.
-
Browsing
-
If you have used any browser before, WebPositive shouldn't provide too many surprises. Instead of going through every menu item and feature, let's have a look at just a few points.
+
Tab pertama berkaitan dengan pengaturan umum: File atau URL apa yang berfungsi sebagai Start page, apa yang digunakan sebagai Halaman pencarian , Folder unduhan apa yang digunakan untuk barang yang Anda dapatkan dari internet.
+Dua menu pop-up memungkinkan Anda memutuskan halaman mana yang akan dimuat - jika ada - saat membuka jendela atau tab baru.
+Melalui kotak centang berikut, Anda dapat menghindari menampilkan bilah tab saat hanya ada satu halaman yang terbuka. Antarmuka WebPositive dapat diperintahkan untuk secara otomatis bersembunyi dalam mode layar penuh, dan penunjuk tetikus dapat secara otomatis disembunyikan kapan pun tidak dipindahkan untuk sementara waktu.
+Terakhir, Anda dapat memutuskan untuk memasukkan tombol "Beranda" di bilah navigasi dan mengatur berapa hari browser mengingat situs yang telah Anda kunjungi dalam riwayatnya.
+
Pada tab kedua Anda dapat memilih font yang digunakan untuk font standar, serif, non-serif dan monospace dan mengatur ukuran bawaan-nya.
+
Tab terakhir digunakan untuk mengonfigurasi server proxy.
+
Menjelajah
+
Jika Anda pernah menggunakan peramban apa pun sebelumnya, WebPositive seharusnya tidak memberikan terlalu banyak kejutan, alih-alih memeriksa setiap item menu dan fitur, mari kita lihat beberapa poin saja.
-
New tabs are created with the + button to the right in the tab bar or, if there's still enough space, by double-clicking into an empty area of it. If there are more tabs open than fit into the bar, the <> scroll-buttons become active, allowing you to scroll the tab bar left and right. The ∨ button to the far right hosts a pop-up menu with all open tabs for even quicker navigation.
-
Clicking on a link with the middle mouse button opens the page in a new tab in the background. Holding SHIFT while middle-clicking, opens it in the foreground.
-
From the View menu you can Zoom in and Zoom out of a page. There's also an option to Zoom text only, leaving all images with their original size.
-
If you switch to full screen mode and have activated the setting to hide the interface, it will disappear after a second. To slide it temporarily back in, simply move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen.
+
Tab baru dibuat dengan tombol + di sebelah kanan di bilah tab atau, jika masih ada ruang yang cukup, dengan mengklik dua kali ke area kosong itu. Jika ada lebih banyak tab yang terbuka daripada masuk ke dalam bilah, gulir <> tombol menjadi aktif, memungkinkan Anda untuk menggulir bilah tab ke kiri dan ke kanan. Tombol ∨ di paling kanan meng-host menu pop-up dengan semua tab terbuka untuk navigasi yang lebih cepat.
+
Mengklik tautan dengan tombol tengah mouse akan membuka halaman di tab baru di latar belakang. Memegang SHIFT sambil mengklik tengah, membukanya di latar depan.
+
Dari menu Lihat, Anda dapat Memperbesar dan Memperkecil halaman. Ada juga pilihan untuk Perbesar Text saja, meninggalkan semua gambar dengan ukuran aslinya.
+
Jika Anda beralih ke mode layar penuh dan telah mengaktifkan pengaturan untuk menyembunyikan antarmuka, itu akan menghilang setelah satu detik. Untuk menggesernya kembali sementara, cukup gerakkan penunjuk mouse ke bagian atas layar.
-
While you type in the locator text field, the browser matches the string to sites you have visited in the past and lists them below the text field. You either keep adding more letters to shorten the list of possible sites, or choose an entry with ↑ or ↓. ENTER will load the page. You can also use the button to the far right which also serves to reload a page.
-Strings not recognized as URLs will get looked up with Google, so the locator field doubles as quick shortcut to web searches.
-
Right-clicking opens a context menu which, depending on the object you've clicked on, offers to open the link in a new window or a new tab, download the object etc.
-
Edit | Find shows a find bar at the bottom to start an in-page search. Matches are highlighted in the page.
+
Saat Anda mengetik di bidang teks locator, browser mencocokkan string ke situs yang telah Anda kunjungi di masa lalu dan mencantumkannya di bawah bidang teks. Anda tetap menambahkan lebih banyak surat untuk mempersingkat daftar situs yang mungkin, atau memilih entri dengan ↑ atau ↓. ENTER akan memuat halaman. Anda juga dapat menggunakan tombol di ujung kanan yang juga berfungsi untuk memuat ulang halaman.
+Text yang tidak dikenali sebagai URL akan terlihat oleh Google, sehingga bidang locator berfungsi ganda sebagai pintasan cepat untuk pencarian web.
+
Mengklik kanan membuka menu konteks yang, tergantung pada objek yang Anda klik, menawarkan untuk membuka tautan di jendela baru atau tab baru, mengunduh objek dll.
+
Sunting | cari menunjukkan bilah cari di bagian bawah untuk memulai pencarian dalam halaman. Kecocokan disorot dalam halaman.
-
Bookmarks
-
WebPositive's bookmarks are managed as files and folders in ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Adding a bookmark will create a new file there. You can quickly open the folder with Manage Bookmarks....
+
Bookmark
+
Bookmark WebPositive dikelola sebagai file dan folder di ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/. Menambahkan bookmark akan membuat file baru di sana. Anda dapat dengan cepat membuka folder Memenej Bookmark....
-
You can change a bookmark's URL, name, title and enter keywords just like with any other file with attributes. Just make sure you have all their columns displayed via Tracker's Attributes menu, then select a file, press ALTE and start editing the attribute; change attribute columns with TAB. You can sort bookmarks into different folders you create yourself.
-
By using Tracker to manage and navigate bookmarks you can lift its unique features to quickly find what you're looking for.
-Activating Type-ahead filtering in Tracker's preferences, you can instantly trim down your list of bookmarks to matches of your filter-string. A few more ↑ or ↓ to move the selection and pressing ENTER opens the site. Make sure to display all attribute columns to have the filter applied to name, title, URL and keywords.
-
For this to work, all bookmarks should be kept in the ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ folder and only copies should be sorted into custom subfolders for usage in WebPositive's Bookmarks menu (if at all). Also, actually filling the keywords attribute helps...
-
Downloads
-
Window | Downloads opens a window listing all past and ongoing downloads:
+
Anda dapat mengubah URL bookmark, nama, judul, dan memasukkan kata kunci seperti halnya file lain dengan atribut. Pastikan Anda memiliki semua kolomnya ditampilkan melalui menu Atribut Tracker, lalu pilih file, tekan ALTE dan mulai mengedit atribut; ubah kolom atribut dengan TAB.
+Anda dapat mengurutkan bookmark ke folder berbeda yang Anda buat sendiri.
+
Dengan menggunakan Pelacak untuk mengelola dan menavigasi penanda, Anda dapat mengangkat fitur uniknya untuk dengan cepat menemukan apa yang Anda cari.
+Mengaktifkan pemfilteran Type-ahead dalam preferensi Tracker , Anda dapat langsung memangkas daftar bookmark untuk mencocokkan string-filter Anda. Beberapa lagi ↑ atau ↓ untuk memindahkan pilihan dan menekan ENTER membuka situs. Pastikan untuk menampilkan semua kolom atribut agar filter diterapkan pada nama, judul, URL, dan kata kunci.
+
Agar ini berfungsi, semua bookmark harus disimpan di folder ~/config/settings/WebPositive/Bookmarks/ dan hanya salinan yang akan disortir ke dalam subfolder khusus untuk digunakan dalam menu Bookmarks WebPositive (jika ada) juga , sejatinya membantu mengisi kata kunci atribut ...
+
Unduhan
+
Jendela | Unduhan membuka jendela yang berisi daftar semua unduhan yang lalu dan yang sedang berlangsung:
-
Currently downloading files are shown with a growing progress bar and, similar to copying files in Tracker, information on the download speed, file size and expected finishing time. Buttons to the right let you Cancel and Restart a download, or Open the file, or Remove its entry from the list. The Remove missing and Remove finished buttons at the bottom do this for all entries in this list. "Missing" are files that were deleted in the meantime.
-
Moving a file that is currently being downloaded to Trash will stop the download. You'll also notice, that its icon becomes "ghosted".
-Generally, WebPositive is very tolerant when it comes to managing files with Tracker. Files can be renamed or moved even while they are being downloaded and even after the download is finished, these changes are reflected in the Downloads window.
-
Ever wondered from what site you downloaded a particular package, image or any other file? You can track that down by opening the file with DiskProbe and have a look at its META:url attribute.
-
Want to have the URL permanently shown in your downloads folder? Just copy a bookmark into it, have the bookmark's URL attribute column displayed and remove the bookmark again.
-
Keyboard shortcuts
-
Here are some useful keyboard shortcuts:
+
Saat ini mengunduh file ditunjukkan dengan bilah kemajuan yang berkembang dan, mirip dengan menyalin file dalam Pelacak, informasi tentang kecepatan unduh, ukuran file dan waktu penyelesaian yang diharapkan. Tombol di sebelah kanan memungkinkan Anda Batal dan Mulai ulang unduhan, atau Buka file, atau Hapus entri dari daftar. Tombol buang hilang dan buang yang selesai selesai di bagian bawah melakukan ini untuk semua entri dalam daftar ini. "Hilang" adalah file yang dihapus sementara itu.
+
Memindahkan file yang saat ini sedang diunduh ke Sampah akan menghentikan unduhan. Anda juga akan melihat, bahwa ikonnya menjadi "hantu".
+Secara umum, WebPositive sangat toleran ketika mengelola file dengan Tracker. File dapat diubah namanya atau dipindahkan walaupun sedang diunduh dan bahkan setelah pengunduhan selesai, perubahan ini tercermin di jendela Unduhan.
+
Pernah bertanya-tanya dari situs apa Anda mengunduh paket tertentu, gambar atau file lain? Anda dapat melacaknya dengan membuka file dengan DiskProbe dan melihat atribut META:url.
+
+
+Ingin URL ditampilkan secara permanen di folder unduhan Anda? Cukup salin bookmark ke dalamnya, minta kolom atribut URL bookmark ditampilkan dan hapus bookmark lagi.
+
Pintasan keyboard
+
Berikut beberapa pintasan keyboard yang bermanfaat:
-
ALTT
Opens a new tab.
-
ALTW
Closes the current tab.
-
ALTN
Opens a new window.
-
SHIFTALTW
Closes the current window.
-
ALTENTER
Toggles full screen mode.
-
ALTR or F5
Refreshes the current page.
-
ALTH
Opens the home page.
-
ALTD
Shows/hides the Downloads window.
-
ALTF
Shows the find bar for in-page searching (hide with ESC).
-
ALTB
Bookmarks the current page.
-
ALTM
Manage bookmarks, opening the Bookmarks folder.
-
ALT←
Previous page in the history.
-
ALT→
Next page in the history.
+
ALTT
Buka tab baru
+
ALTW
Menutup tab saat ini.
+
ALTN
Buka jendela baru.
+
SHIFTALTW
Menutup jendela saat ini.
+
ALTENTER
Mengalihkan mode layar penuh.
+
ALTR or F5
Perbarui halaman saat ini.
+
ALTH
Buka halaman beranda.
+
ALTD
Memperlihatkan/menyembunyikan jendela Unduhan.
+
ALTF
Memperlihatkan bilah cari untuk pencarian dalam-halaman (sembunyikan dengan ESC).
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Atribut
@@ -116,18 +115,19 @@ MIME String 21 "BEOS:TYPE"
Raw Data 20 "_trk/pinfo_le"
131 bytes total in attributes.
-
Besides all the "META:*" attributes that hold the contact's information, there are two attributes that are managed by the system:
+
Selain semua atribut "META:*" yang menyimpan informasi kontak, ada dua atribut yang dikelola oleh sistem:
-
BEOS:TYPE holds the file type as a MIME string, here "application/x-person". It determines the default icon and the application that opens the file when you e.g. double click it.
-
"_trk/pinfo_le" is the attribute with which Tracker keeps track of a file's icon position.
-
Note the backslash after "Clara". In Terminal you have to "escape" special characters like '"*\$?!. The space between "Clara" and "Botters" is also one of those. Therefore the backslash is really in front of the space character, and not after "Clara".
+
BEOS:TYPE menyimpan tipe file sebagai MIME
+disini "application/x-person" Ini menentukan ikon default dan aplikasi yang membuka file ketika Anda mis. klik dua kali.
+
"_trk/pinfo_le" adalah atribut yang dengannya Tracker melacak posisi ikon file.
+
Catat backslash setelah "Clara". Di Terminal Anda harus "escape" karakter khusus seperti '"*\$?!. Ruang antara "Clara " dan "Botters" juga salah satunya. Oleh karena itu backslash benar-benar ada di depan karakter ruang, dan bukan setelah "Clara".
penggunaan: addattr [-t type] attr value file1 [file2...]
+ atau: addattr [-f value-from-file] [-t type] attr file1 [file2...]
- Type is one of:
+ Type adalah salah satu dari:
string, mime, int, llong, float, double, bool, icon, raw
or a numeric value (ie. 0x1234, 42, 'ABCD', ...)
- The default is "string"
+ nilai default adalah "string"
Jadi, katakanlah Clara mengambil pekerjaan dengan perusahaan multi-nasional Barkelbaer Inc., Anda mengisi atribut "Perusahaan" yang sebelumnya kosong dengan data itu (yang bertipe "string"):
~/people ->addattr -t string META:company Barkelbaer\ Inc. Clara\ Botters
penggunaan: rmattr [-p] attr filename1 [filename2...]
'attr' is the name of an attribute of the file
If '-p' is specified, 'attr' is regarded as a pattern.
-
Though in all practicality it would be enough to just not fill the "Fax" attribute, you can completely remove it from Clara's file by typing:
+
Meskipun dalam semua kepraktisan itu sudah cukup untuk tidak mengisi atribut "Faks", Anda dapat menghapusnya sepenuhnya dari file Clara dengan mengetik:
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
Bash and Scripting
+
Bash dan Scripting
-
"Scripting" is the technique of automating procedures by stringing together commands and saving it all as text files, so called "scripts". Every time you run such a script, the commands are processed one after the other just like they would if you entered them into the Terminal by hand.
-Scripts can range from simply executing a few commands in a specific order to sophisticated pieces of code that solve complex tasks.
+
"Scripting" adalah teknik mengotomatisasi prosedur dengan merangkai perintah bersama dan menyimpan semuanya sebagai file teks, yang disebut "script". Setiap kali Anda menjalankan script seperti itu, perintah diproses satu demi satu sama seperti yang akan Anda lakukan jika Anda memasukkan mereka ke Terminal dengan tangan.
+Skrip dapat berkisar dari hanya menjalankan beberapa perintah dalam urutan tertentu hingga potongan kode canggih yang menyelesaikan tugas kompleks.
Since scripts rely naturally a lot on the shell they are interpreted by, you should first familiarize yourself with the BASH that's used by Haiku. There are many resources online as it's a widely used shell. One nice document is Johan Jansson's Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
-The Bash Reference Manual (PDF, 720 KiB) is a nice resource to get into the details.
Karena skrip sangat bergantung pada shell yang ditafsirkan olehnya, Anda harus terlebih dahulu membiasakan diri dengan BASH yang digunakan oleh Haiku. Ada banyak sumber daya online karena ini adalah shell yang banyak digunakan. Salah satu dokumen yang bagus adalah Pengantar Johan Jansson Introduction to bash - a tutorial for bash under BeOS.
+Bash Reference Manual (PDF, 720 KiB) adalah sumber yang bagus untuk masuk ke detail.
After you've learned a few basics about working in the shell, it's time to slowly ease yourself into the world of scripting. Again, you'll find loads of tutorials and reference material online as well as in bookstores. A very nice introduction that's practically tailor-made for Haiku is the online available Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900 KiB) of Scot Hacker's BeOS Bible.
Setelah Anda mempelajari beberapa dasar-dasar tentang cara bekerja di shell, sekarang saatnya untuk perlahan-lahan mempermudah diri Anda dalam dunia scripting. Sekali lagi, Anda akan menemukan banyak tutorial dan bahan referensi online maupun di toko buku. Pengantar yang sangat bagus itu praktis dibuat khusus untuk Haiku adalah yang tersedia secara online di Scripting Chapter (PDF, 900 KiB) dari Kitab BeOS Scot Hacker.
Haiku used to have scripts for booting and shutting down. Today it uses the launch_daemon instead. However, the user can still augment this process with certain user scripts.
-If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Otherwise simply add your commands where in the process you want them to be executed.
Haiku dulu memiliki skrip untuk boot dan shutdown. Hari ini ia menggunakan launch_daemon sebagai gantinya. Namun, pengguna masih dapat menambah proses ini dengan skrip pengguna tertentu. Jika belum ada, Anda harus membuat file yang dibutuhkan sendiri Jika tidak, cukup tambahkan perintah Anda di mana dalam proses yang Anda inginkan dijalankan.
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript will be executed after the system has finished its boot process. For example, you could launch a number of programs that would then be automatically started on every boot up:
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserBootscript akan dieksekusi setelah sistem menyelesaikan proses bootingnya. Misalnya, Anda dapat meluncurkan sejumlah program yang kemudian akan dimulai secara otomatis pada setiap boot:
+
# Memulai LaunchBox
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox &
-# Start Workspaces Applet
+# Memulai Applet Workspaces
/boot/system/apps/Workspaces &
-
Remember to end a command with an "&" to start it as a background process, or the script will halt until that command has finished (in this case: the launched app was closed).
+
Ingatlah untuk mengakhiri perintah dengan "&" untuk memulainya sebagai proses latar belakang, atau skrip akan berhenti sampai perintah itu selesai (dalam hal ini: aplikasi yang diluncurkan ditutup).
-
A simple alternative to the above for launching applications at boot up is to put links to them in the /boot/home/config/settings/boot/launch directory. This can be done simply by right-clicking on the application you wish to have started automatically, going to Create Link and then navigating to the above directory.
+
Alternatif sederhana di atas untuk meluncurkan aplikasi saat boot up adalah dengan meletakkan tautan ke dalam direktori /boot/home/config/settings/boot/launch.Ini dapat dilakukan hanya dengan mengklik kanan pada aplikasi yang ingin Anda miliki mulai secara otomatis, pergi ke Buat link dan kemudian navigasi ke direktori diatas.
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownScript will be executed as the first step in the shutdown process. If the script returns a non-zero exit status, the shutdown is aborted.
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownScript akan dieksekusi sebagai langkah pertama dalam proses shutdown.Jika script mengembalikan status keluar yang tidak nol, shutdown dibatalkan.
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript is executed as the last step in the shutdown process. Note, that most parts of the system have terminated by the time this script is executed.
/boot/home/config/settings/boot/UserShutdownFinishScript dieksekusi sebagai langkah terakhir dalam proses shutdown. Perhatikan, bahwa sebagian besar sistem telah dihentikan pada saat script ini dieksekusi.
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ If they don't exist already, you'll have to create the needed files yourself. Ot
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Boot Loader
-
Haiku's Boot Loader Options can help when you experience hardware related problems or want to choose which Haiku installation to start, if you have more than one (maybe on an installation CD or USB stick). It's also handy if you have installed a software component that acts up and prevents you from booting Haiku, see Troubleshooting below.
-
To enter the Boot Loader Options, you have to press and keep holding the SHIFT key before the beginning of Haiku's boot process. If there's a boot manager installed, you can start holding SHIFT before invoking the boot entry for Haiku. If Haiku is the only operating system on the machine, you can begin holding the key while still seeing boot messages from the BIOS.
-
On computers that use UEFI for booting instead of the classic BIOS, you need to use the SPACEBAR instead.
+
Opsi Boot Loader Haiku dapat membantu ketika Anda mengalami masalah terkait perangkat keras atau ingin memilih instalasi Haiku mana yang akan dimulai, jika Anda memiliki lebih dari satu (mungkin pada CD instalasi atau stik USB). Ini juga berguna jika Anda telah menginstal komponen perangkat lunak yang bertindak dan mencegah Anda mem-boot Haiku, lihat Pemecahan Masalah di bawah ini.
+
Untuk masuk ke Opsi Boot Loader, Anda harus menekan dan terus menahan tombol SHIFT sebelum awal proses boot Haiku. Jika ada boot manager diinstal, Anda dapat mulai memegang SHIFT sebelum memanggil entri boot untuk Haiku. Jika Haiku adalah satu-satunya sistem operasi pada mesin, Anda dapat mulai memegang kunci sambil masih melihat pesan boot dari BIOS.
+
Pada komputer yang menggunakan UEFI untuk melakukan booting alih-alih BIOS klasik, Anda harus menggunakan SPACEBAR sebagai gantinya.
Ketika sampai disana, anda akan dihadapkan pada empat menu:
-
Select boot volume
Choose which Haiku installation/state to start (see Troubleshooting below).
-
Select safe mode options
There are several options to try in case of hardware related trouble or if the system becomes unstable or unbootable because of a misbehaving add-on. When moving the selection bar to an option, a short explanation appears at the bottom of the screen.
+
Select boot volume
Pilih instalasi / negara bagian Haiku untuk memulai (lihat Pemecahan Masalah di bawah).
+
Select safe mode options
Ada beberapa opsi untuk dicoba jika terjadi masalah terkait perangkat keras atau jika sistem menjadi tidak stabil atau tidak bisa di-boot karena add-on yang salah tingkah. Saat memindahkan bilah pilihan ke suatu opsi, penjelasan singkat muncul di bagian bawah layar.
Safe mode
- Puts the system into safe mode. This can be enabled independently from the other options.
+ Menempatkan sistem ke mode aman.Ini dapat diaktifkan secara independen dari opsi lain.
Disable user add-ons
- Prevents all user installed add-ons from being loaded. Only the add-ons in the system directory will be used. See Troubleshooting below.
+ Mencegah semua add-on yang diinstal pengguna dari dimuat. Hanya add-on di direktori sistem yang akan digunakan. Lihat Troubleshooting di bawah ini.
Disable IDE DMA
- Disables IDE DMA, increasing IDE compatibility at the expense of performance.
+ Menonaktifkan IDE DMA, meningkatkan kompatibilitas IDE dengan mengorbankan kinerja.
Ignore memory beyond 4 GiB
- Ignores all memory beyond the 4 GiB address limit, overriding the setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Abaikan semua memori di luar batas alamat 4 GiB, yang mengabaikan pengaturan dalam file pengaturan kernel.
Use fail-safe graphics driver
- The system will use VESA mode and won't try to use any video graphics drivers.
+ Sistem akan menggunakan mode VESA dan tidak akan mencoba menggunakan driver grafis video apa pun.
Disable IO-APIC
- Disables using the IO APIC for interrupt routing, forcing the use of the legacy PIC instead.
+ Menonaktifkan menggunakan IO APIC untuk mengganggu routing, memaksa penggunaan PIC lawas sebagai gantinya.
Disable local APIC
- Disables using the local APIC, also disables SMP.
+ Menonaktifkan menggunakan APIC lokal, juga menonaktifkan SMP.
Disable X2APIC
- Disables second generation APIC.
+ Menonaktifkan APIC generasi kedua.
Disable SMEP and SMAP
- Disables SMEP/SMAP security features of the CPU.
+ Menonaktifkan fitur keamanan SMEP / SMAP dari CPU.
Disable SMP
- Disables all but one CPU core.
+ Menonaktifkan semua kecuali satu inti CPU.
Don't call the BIOS
- Stops the system from calling BIOS functions.
+ Menghentikan sistem dari memanggil fungsi BIOS.
Disable APM
- Disables Advanced Power Management hardware support, overriding the APM setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Menonaktifkan dukungan perangkat keras Manajemen Daya Lanjutan, mengabaikan pengaturan APM dalam file pengaturan kernel.
Disable ACPI
- Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface hardware support, overriding the ACPI setting in the kernel settings file.
+ Menonaktifkan dukungan Konfigurasi Lanjut dan antarmuka perangkat keras Power, mengesampingkan pengaturan ACPI di file pengaturan kernel.
Blacklist entries
- Allows to select system files that shall be ignored. Useful e.g. to disable drivers temporarily. See Troubleshooting below.
-
Select debug options
Here you'll find several options that help with debugging or getting details for a bug report. Again, a short explanation for each option is displayed at the bottom.
+ Memungkinkan untuk memilih file sistem yang harus diabaikan. Berguna misalnya untuk menonaktifkan driver sementara. lihat Troubleshooting di bawah ini.
+
Select debug options
Di sini Anda akan menemukan beberapa opsi yang membantu dengan debugging atau mendapatkan detail untuk Laporan bug. Sekali lagi, penjelasan singkat untuk setiap opsi ditampilkan di bagian bawah.
Enable serial debug output
- Turns on forwarding the syslog output to the serial interface (default: 115200, 8N1).
+ Menyalakan penerusan output syslog ke antarmuka serial (default: 115200, 8N1).
Enable on screen debug output
- Display debug output on screen while the system is booting, instead of the normal boot logo.
+ Tampilkan hasil debug di layar saat sistem melakukan booting, alih-alih logo boot normal.
Disable on screen paging
- Disables paging when on screen debug output is enabled.
+ Menonaktifkan paging saat output debug layar diaktifkan.
Enable debug syslog
- Enables a special in-memory syslog buffer for this session that the boot loader will be able to access after rebooting.
+ Mengaktifkan buffer syslog dalam memori khusus untuk sesi ini yang dapat diakses oleh boot loader setelah reboot.
Display current boot loader log
- Displays the debug info the boot loader has logged (press Q to exit the log)
+ Menampilkan info debug yang telah dicatat oleh boot loader (pencet Q untuk keluar dari log)
Add advanced debug option
- Allows advanced debugging options to be entered directly.
-
If Enable debug syslog is activated, a warm reboot after a crash shows these additional options:
+ Mengizinkan opsi debug lanjutan dimasukkan secara langsung.
+
If Enable debug syslog diaktifkan, reboot hangat setelah crash menunjukkan opsi tambahan ini:
Save syslog from previous session during boot
- Saves the syslog from the previous Haiku session to /var/log/previous_syslog when booting.
-
Display syslog from previous session
+ Menyimpan syslog dari sesi Haiku sebelumnya ke /var/log/previous_syslog saat booting.
+
Menampilkan syslog dari sesi Haiku sebelumnya.
Displays the syslog from the previous Haiku session.
Save syslog from previous session
- Saves the syslog from the previous Haiku session to disk. Currently only FAT32 volumes are supported.
-
Select screen resolution
Lets you force a certain screen resolution and color depth.
+Menyimpan syslog dari sesi Haiku sebelumnya ke disk. Saat ini hanya volume FAT32 yang didukung.
+
+
+
+
+
Select screen resolution
Memungkinkan Anda memaksakan resolusi layar dan kedalaman warna tertentu.
If Haiku refuses to boot on your hardware from the get-go, try out setting different options under Select safe mode options. Consider filing a bug report in any case.
-
On the other hand, if Haiku only suddenly acts up after you have installed some software, especially hardware drivers, you have several options to get Haiku bootable again so you can uninstall the offending package:
Jika Haiku menolak untuk mem-boot perangkat keras Anda sejak awal, cobalah mengatur berbagai opsi di bawah Pilih opsi mode aman. . Pertimbangkan mengajukan laporan bug dalam hal apa pun.
+
+
Di sisi lain, jika Haiku hanya tiba-tiba bertindak setelah Anda menginstal beberapa perangkat lunak, terutama driver perangkat keras, Anda memiliki beberapa opsi untuk membuat Haiku dapat di-boot kembali sehingga Anda dapat menghapus paket yang menyinggung:
-
Activating Safe mode will prevent most servers, daemons and the UserBootscript from being started.
-
Activating Disable user add-ons will prevent using any add-ons (drivers, translators, etc.) you have installed in the user hierarchy under your Home folder.
-
If activating Use fail-safe graphics driver solves your troubles by falling back to VESA graphics, you can make the setting permanent by removing the # of the line #fail_safe_video_mode true in the text file /boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel.
-
If the offending driver, add-on etc. is installed in the system hierarchy, things get a bit more complicated, because that area is read-only. Here, the Blacklist entries comes into play. With it, you can navigate through the whole system hierarchy and disable the component that's messing things up for you by checking an entry with the SPACE or RETURN key. ESC returns you up one level to the parent directory.
Under Select boot volume you can specify what former "version" of Haiku to boot. Every time you un/install a package, the old state is saved and you can boot into it by choosing it from the list presented in the boot loader options.
-So, if you encounter boot problems after installing some package, boot a Haiku state from before that time and uninstall the offending package.
+
Mengaktifkan Safe mode akan mencegah sebagian besar server, daemon dan skrip UserBoot dimulai.
+
Mengaktifkan Disable user add-ons akan mencegah penggunaan add-on apa pun (driver, penerjemah, dll.) Yang telah Anda instal dalam hierarki pengguna di bawah folder Beranda Anda.
+
Jika mengaktifkan Use fail-safe graphics driver menyelesaikan masalah Anda dengan kembali ke grafik VESA, Anda dapat menjadikan pengaturan ini permanen dengan menghapus # dari baris #fail_safe_video_mode true dalam text file /boot/home/config/settings/kernel/drivers/kernel.
+
Jika driver yang menyinggung, add-on dll diinstal dalam hierarki sistem, hal-hal menjadi sedikit lebih rumit, karena area itu hanya baca. Di sini, Blacklist entries ikut bermain. Dengan itu, Anda dapat menavigasi keseluruhan hierarki sistem dan nonaktifkan komponen yang mengacaukan Anda dengan memeriksa entri dengan kunci SPACE or RETURN key. ESC mengembalikan Anda satu tingkat ke direktori induk.
Di bawah Select boot volume Anda dapat menentukan "versi" Haiku mana yang akan di-boot. Setiap kali Anda menghapus paket, kondisi lama disimpan dan Anda dapat mem-boot-nya dengan memilihnya dari daftar yang disajikan dalam opsi boot loader.
+Jadi, jika Anda mengalami masalah boot setelah menginstal beberapa paket, boot kondisi Haiku dari sebelum waktu itu dan hapus instalan paket yang menyinggung.
The Deskbar is the little panel that by default is located in the upper right corner of the screen. It's Haiku's version of Windows' taskbar with its Start button. It contains the Deskbar menu from where you can start applications and preferences, a tray with a clock and other tools below that and a list of currently running programs at the bottom.
+
Deskbar adalah panel kecil yang secara default terletak di sudut kanan atas layar. Ini adalah versi taskbar Windows Haiku dengan tombol Start-nya. Ini berisi menu Deskbar dari mana Anda dapat memulai aplikasi dan preferensi, baki dengan jam dan alat-alat lain di bawahnya dan daftar program yang sedang berjalan di bagian bawah.
-
You can move the Deskbar to any corner or as a bar along the upper or lower border of the screen by gripping the knobbly area on one side of the tray (see arrows above) and drag & drop it into the new position.
-You can also fold it into a more compact layout by drag & dropping the knobbly area onto Deskbar's Leaf menu. Being only the height of a regular window tab, even windows that take up the whole screen won't obscure the Deskbar tray with its clock and icons.
-
By gripping the other knobbly widget of the tray, you can change the width of the Deskbar by dragging the mouse left or right:
+
Anda dapat memindahkan Deskbar ke sudut mana pun atau sebagai bilah di sepanjang batas atas atau bawah layar dengan memegang area knobbly di satu sisi baki (lihat panah di atas) dan drag & drop ke posisi yang baru.
+Anda juga dapat melipatnya menjadi tata letak yang lebih ringkas dengan drag & dropping knobbly ke menu Leaf Deskbar. Menjadi hanya ketinggian tab jendela biasa, bahkan jendela yang mengambil seluruh layar tidak akan mengaburkan baki Deskbar dengan jamnya dan ikon.
+
Dengan memegang widget knobbly lainnya dari baki, Anda dapat mengubah lebar Deskbar dengan menyeret mouse ke kiri atau kanan:
-
A wider Deskbar allows for more icons in the tray on a single row. It also truncates longer application names in the list of running programs less often, especially if you use larger icons.
+
Deskbar yang lebih luas memungkinkan lebih banyak ikon dalam baki dalam satu baris, tetapi juga lebih jarang memotong nama aplikasi dalam daftar program yang sedang berjalan, terutama jika Anda menggunakan ikon yang lebih besar.
Show replicants - Shows/hides the little Replicant widget you use to drag it around, remove or access its context menu.
-
Mount - Offers the same options as when invoked by right-clicking the Desktop (see Mounting Volumes).
-
Deskbar preferences... - Opens a panel to configure the Deskbar (see below).
-
Shutdown - Offers options to either Restart system or Power off.
-
Recent documents, folders, applications - List of the last recently opened documents, folders and applications (see Deskbar preferences below).
-
Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, Preferences - List of installed applications, demos, applets and preferences. You can add links to other programs (or any folder, document, query etc.) by putting them into ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/.
Show replicants - Memperlihatkan/menyembunyikan widget Replicant kecil yang Anda gunakan untuk menyeretnya, menghapus atau mengakses menu konteksnya.
+
Mount - Menawarkan opsi yang sama seperti ketika dipanggil dengan mengklik kanan Desktop (lihat Melakukan mount Volume).
+
Deskbar preferences... - Buka panel untuk mengonfigurasi Deskbar (lihat di bawah).
+
Shutdown - Menawarkan opsi untuk Restart atau Matikan.
+
Recent documents, folders, applications - Daftar dokumen, folder, dan aplikasi yang terakhir dibuka (lihat preferensi Deskbar dibawah).
+
Aplikasi, Demo, applet Deskbar, Preferensi -Daftar aplikasi yang terinstal, demo, applet dan preferensi. Anda dapat menambahkan tautan ke program lain (atau folder, dokumen, kueri, dll.) Dengan memasukkannya ke ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/.
+
+
-Deskbar Preferences
+preferensi Deskbar
-
The Deskbar preference panel is divided into three sections.
+
Panel preferensi Deskbar dibagi menjadi tiga bagian.
Aplikasi
-
The following settings don't apply to your installed applications, but to the behavior and visuals of the list of running applications.
+
Pengaturan berikut tidak berlaku untuk aplikasi yang Anda instal, tetapi untuk perilaku dan visual dari daftar aplikasi yang berjalan.
-
Sort running applications
Sorts the list of running programs alphabetically.
-
Tracker always first
Even if you sort alphabetically, the Tracker entry always stays first in the list.
-
Show application expander
Provides a small widget to show/hide all windows of a program directly under its entry in the Deskbar.
-
Expand new applications
Newly launched programs have their windows automatically expanded under their entry in the Deskbar.
-
Hide application names
Removes the text labels of running applications.
-
Icon size
Adjusts the icon size of running applications.
+
Urutkan aplikasi yang sedang berjalan
Urutkan daftar program yang sedang berjalan berdasarkan abjad.
+
Tracker selalu pertama
Bahkan jika Anda mengurutkan menurut abjad, entri Pelacak selalu tetap pertama dalam daftar.
+
Tunjukkan aplikasi expander
Menyediakan widget kecil untuk menampilkan / menyembunyikan semua jendela program langsung di bawah entri di Deskbar.
+
Perluas aplikasi baru
Program yang baru diluncurkan membuat windows mereka diperluas secara otomatis di bawah entri mereka di Deskbar.
+
Sembunyikan nama aplikasi
Menghapus label teks dari aplikasi yang sedang berjalan.
+
Ukuran ikon
Menyesuaikan ukuran ikon dari aplikasi yang sedang berjalan.
Menu
-
While the first couple of menu items of the Deskbar are fixed, you can customized the ones below Shutdown....
-Here you can set the number of recent documents, folders and applications that are shown in their menu in the Deskbar, or if you want to see them at all.
-The button Edit in Tracker... opens the folder ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/. In it you'll find the files and folders that appear in the Deskbar, by default these are Applications, Demos, Deskbar applets, and Preferences.
-You can delete or add entries like links to applications, documents or even queries by simply copying/deleting them to/from this folder.
+
Meskipun beberapa item menu Deskbar sudah diperbaiki, Anda dapat menyesuaikan yang di bawah Shutdown....
+Di sini Anda dapat mengatur jumlah dokumen, folder, dan aplikasi terbaru yang ditampilkan di menu mereka di Deskbar, atau jika Anda ingin melihatnya sama sekali.
+Tombol Edit di Tracker... membuka folder ~/config/settings/deskbar/menu/. Di dalamnya Anda akan menemukan file dan folder yang muncul di Deskbar, secara default ini adalah Applications, Demo, Deskbar applets, and Preferensi.
+Anda dapat menghapus atau menambahkan entri seperti tautan ke aplikasi, dokumen, atau bahkan kueri hanya dengan menyalin / menghapusnya ke/dari folder ini.
-
Programs installed from a package automatically put an entry into the Deskbar. Depending on the number of packages you have installed, this can become a bit crowded. If you prefer to have total control, and only want to see applications you link there yourself (possibly in categorizing sub-folders), here's how to do it:
-You create a link of the menu folder in ~/config/settings/deskbar/ and rename to menu_entries. From Terminal that is achieved with:
+
Program yang diinstal dari suatu paket secara otomatis memasukkan entri ke Deskbar. Tergantung pada jumlah paket yang telah Anda instal, ini dapat menjadi agak ramai. Jika Anda lebih suka memiliki kontrol total, dan hanya ingin melihat aplikasi yang Anda tautkan sendiri di sana (mungkin dalam mengkategorikan sub-folder), inilah cara melakukannya:
+Anda membuat tautan menu folder di~/config/settings/deskbar/ dan ganti nama ke menu_entries. Dari Terminal yang dicapai dengan:
Among other things, the tray is housing the clock. Hover the mouse over it to display the date in a tooltip. Left-click it to show a calendar. Right-click it to hide/show the clock or launch the Time preferences to set it.
-
Any program can install an icon in the tray to provide an interface to the user. The email system, for instance, shows a different symbol when there's unread mail and offers a context menu to e.g. create or check for new mail. ProcessController is another example that uses its icon in the tray to provide information (CPU/memory usage) and to offer a context menu.
+
Di antara hal-hal lain, baki adalah tempat jam. Arahkan tetikus ke atasnya untuk menampilkan tanggal dalam tooltip. Klik kiri untuk menampilkan kalender. Klik kanan untuk menyembunyikan / menampilkan jam atau meluncurkan preferensi Waktu untuk mengaturnya.
+
Program apa pun dapat memasang ikon di baki untuk menyediakan antarmuka bagi pengguna. Sistem email, misalnya, menunjukkan simbol yang berbeda ketika ada surat yang belum dibaca dan menawarkan menu konteks untuk misalnya membuat atau memeriksa surat baru. ProcessController adalah contoh lain yang menggunakan ikonnya di tray untuk memberikan informasi (penggunaan CPU / memori) dan untuk menawarkan menu konteks.
You can change to a specific running application by clicking on its entry in the Deskbar and choosing (one of) its windows from the submenu. By right-clicking you can Hide/Show all windows or Close all and with them the entire application.
-
A SHIFTCTRL click on an application hides all its windows, a CTRL click shows them again.
-
When using the "expander" setting to show all windows of an application, you can middle-click on a window or app to start a new instance. For example, middle-clicking a running StyledEdit will open a new document window.
-Maybe more useful: while holding SHIFT, a middle-click on a window closes it. Handy when you'd like to close some of many open Tracker windows, for example.
-
Sometimes an application may hang and even though all its windows are gone, the entry in the list of running applications in the Deskbar just won't disappear. In such a situation you use the Vulcan Death Grip to get rid of it: hold SHIFTCTRLALT and click on the offending entry in the Deskbar. Fascinating!
-
If you activated Expanders in the Deskbar settings, you can expand/collapse the list of windows directly under an application's entry.
-
In front of every application's window is a symbol providing info on its state. A bright symbol means a window is visible, a dark one that it's minimized. Three lines in front of a symbol shows that it's not on the current workspace.
+
Anda dapat mengubah aplikasi berjalan tertentu dengan mengklik entri di Deskbar dan memilih (salah satu) windows dari submenu. Dengan mengklik kanan Anda dapat Sembunyikan/Tampilkan semua windows atau Tutup semua dengannya seluruh aplikasi.
+
SHIFTCTRL pada aplikasi menyembunyikan semua window, sebuah klik CTRL menunjukkannya lagi.
+
Saat menggunakan pengaturan "expander" untuk menampilkan semua jendela aplikasi, Anda dapat mengklik tengah pada jendela atau aplikasi untuk memulai contoh baru. Misalnya, mengklik tengah StyledEdit yang sedang berjalan akan membuka jendela dokumen baru.
+Mungkin lebih bermanfaat: sambil menahan tombol SHIFT, klik tengah pada jendela menutupnya. Berguna ketika Anda ingin menutup beberapa jendela Tracker yang terbuka, misalnya.
+
Terkadang aplikasi mungkin hang dan meskipun semua jendelanya hilang, entri dalam daftar aplikasi yang berjalan di Deskbar tidak akan hilang. Dalam situasi seperti itu Anda menggunakan Vulcan Death Grip untuk menyingkirkannya: tahan SHIFTCTRLALT dan klik pada entri yang menyinggung di Deskbar. Menyenangkan!.
+
Jika Anda mengaktifkan Ekspander dalam pengaturan Deskbar, Anda dapat memperluas / menutup daftar jendela langsung di bawah entri aplikasi.
+
Di depan setiap jendela aplikasi adalah simbol yang memberikan info tentang keadaannya. Simbol cerah berarti jendela terlihat, yang gelap yang diminimalkan. Tiga baris di depan simbol menunjukkan bahwa itu tidak ada di ruang kerja saat ini.
@@ -155,8 +159,8 @@ Maybe more useful: while holding SHIFT, a middle-click
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
LaunchBox
+
(Kotak peluncur) LaunchBox
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/LaunchBox
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/LaunchBox/*
-
One or more LaunchBox applets can be started to organize shortcuts to your favorite applications or documents. You decide if each is shown on all or just the current workspace. They can also serve to quickly open a document in a specific application. For example, you could drag & drop a HTML file onto a text editor in a LaunchBox to open it in the editor instead of its preferred application, the browser.
+
Satu atau lebih applet LaunchBox dapat mulai mengatur pintasan ke aplikasi atau dokumen favorit Anda. Anda memutuskan apakah masing-masing ditampilkan pada semua atau hanya ruang kerja saat ini. Mereka juga dapat berfungsi untuk dengan cepat membuka dokumen dalam aplikasi tertentu. Misalnya, Anda dapat drag & drop file HTML ke editor teks di LaunchBox untuk membukanya di editor alih-alih aplikasi yang disukai, browser.
-
All options are reached from the context menu:
+
Semua opsi dicapai dari menu konteks:
-
Add button here
Adds an empty button.
-
Clear button
Empties a button.
-
Remove button
Removes a button.
-
Set description...
Hovering the mouse over an icon shows a tooltip with the file's name and, in case of an application, its short description if it differs from its name (see topic FileTypes). With this menu item you can customize the description for this tooltip.
+
Tambahkan tombol di sini.
Menambah tombol kosong.
+
Bersihkan tombol
Mengosongkan tombol.
+
Lepas tombol
Menghapus tombol.
+
Atur deskipsi ...
Melayang mouse di atas ikon menunjukkan tooltip dengan nama file dan, dalam kasus aplikasi, deskripsi singkatnya jika berbeda dari namanya (lihat topik FileTypes). Dengan item menu ini Anda dapat menyesuaikan deskripsi untuk tooltip ini.
Settings
-- Horizontal layout
-- Icon size
-- Ignore double-click
-- Show window border
-- Autostart
-- Auto raise
-- Show on all workspaces
-Aligns the buttons horizontally.
-Sets the icon size between 16 and 64 pixel.
-Launches the object only once, even when you (accidentally) double-click.
-Shows the window border.
-Starts LaunchBox automatically on boot-up.
-LaunchBox pops up if the mouse is near the screen edge.
-Shows the LaunchBox on every workspace.
+- layout Horizontal
+- Ukuran ikon
+- Abaikan double-click
+- Tunjukan batas window
+- Otostart
+- Auto bangkit
+- Tunjukkan di semua workspaces
+Sejajarkan tombol secara horizontal.
+Mengatur ukuran ikon antara 16 dan 64 piksel.
+Luncurkan objek hanya sekali, bahkan ketika Anda (secara tidak sengaja) mengklik dua kali.
+Menunjukkan batas jendela.
+Mulai LaunchBox secara otomatis saat boot-up.
+LaunchBox muncul jika mouse berada di dekat tepi layar.
+Memperlihatkan LaunchBox di setiap workspace.
Pad
-- New
-- Clone
-- Close
-Add a new pad.
-Duplicate the current pad.
-Close the current pad.
+- Baru
+- Klon
+- Tutup
+Tambah pad baru.
+Duplikasi pad ini.
+Tutup pad ini.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
NetworkStatus
+
Status jaringan (NetworkStatus)
Deskbar:
Desktop Applets
Lokasi:
/boot/system/apps/NetworkStatus
Pengaturan:
tiada
-
NetworkStatus shows the status of your network connections. If not yet running, launching the applet will ask if it should open in window mode or live in the Deskbar. In window mode you're able to resize the icon by resizing the window and use the Replicant handle to drag it to the Desktop.
-Wherever installed, it's operated via a right-click context menu.
+
NetworkStatus menunjukkan status koneksi jaringan Anda. Jika belum berjalan, meluncurkan applet akan menanyakan apakah itu harus dibuka dalam mode jendela atau langsung di Deskbar. Dalam mode jendela Anda dapat mengubah ukuran ikon dengan mengubah ukuran jendela dan menggunakan pegangan Replicant untuk menyeretnya ke Desktop.
+Di mana pun diinstal, itu dioperasikan melalui menu konteks klik kanan.
-The first section contains all network devices' names and their state. Clicking on such an entry brings up a window showing its IP, broadcast and netmask address.
-Below is a list of all wireless networks found by the first wireless adapter and an indicator of their signal strength. Have a look at the Workshop: Wireless networking for more information on how to set up a connection.
-Lastly, you can Open network preferences... to change your network configuration or Quit the applet.
+Bagian pertama berisi nama semua perangkat jaringan dan statusnya. Mengklik entri seperti itu memunculkan jendela yang menampilkan IP, broadcast, dan alamat netmask-nya.
+Di bawah ini adalah daftar semua jaringan nirkabel yang ditemukan oleh adaptor nirkabel pertama dan indikator kekuatan sinyalnya. Lihat Workshop: Jaringan nirkabel untuk informasi lebih lanjut tentang cara mengatur koneksi.
+Terakhir, Anda dapat Buka preferensi jaringan ... untuk mengubah konfigurasi jaringan Anda atau Keluar the applet.
-
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
ProcessController
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in
At the first level you see team names. By clicking on one, you can kill the whole team. The dark-blue part of the bar is time spent in kernel code, the light-blue part in user code, the green part in the idle thread(s). A bar completely filled with blue means that the team is using all processoring power.
The second level shows particular threads of a team. By clicking on one, you can debug or kill it. A bar completely filled with blue means that the thread is pegging one processor/core.
-
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be it's priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
+
The last level of the menu allows you to change a thread's priority. Be careful with that! As a rule of thumb the priority of a thread should be inverse its CPU usage. That is, the more it tries to claim CPU time, the lower should be its priority. In general, don't mess with an app's priorities; contact its author, that's his business.
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ To remove the applet again from the Deskbar, uncheck Live in
You find the Workspaces applet with the other Desktop applets in the Deskbar. It shows a miniature version of all workspaces. There are several options available from the context menu of the applet's window, which are all pretty self-explaining.
-Change workspace count... will open the Screen preferences where you set the number of workspaces and their arrangement (how many rows and columns).
-
Since the applet is a Replicant, you can resize the window as desired and then drag & drop it by its handle onto the desktop (make sure Show replicants is activated in the Deskbar menu). Hold SHIFT while resizing to keep your screen's aspect ratio.
+
Anda dapat menemukan applet Workspaces dengan applet Desktop lain di Deskbar. Ini menunjukkan versi miniatur dari semua ruang kerja. Ada beberapa opsi yang tersedia dari menu konteks jendela applet, yang semuanya cukup menjelaskan sendiri.
+ Ubah jumlah workspace ... akan membuka preferensi Layar tempat Anda mengatur jumlah ruang kerja dan pengaturannya (berapa banyak baris dan kolom).
+
Karena applet adalah Replicant, Anda dapat mengubah ukuran jendela seperti yang diinginkan dan kemudian drag & drop dengan pegangannya ke desktop (pastikan Show replicants diaktifkan pada menu Deskbar). Tahan SHIFT sambil mengubah ukuran untuk menjaga rasio aspek layar Anda.
To move a window, you grab it in the Workspaces applet and simply drag it to another workspace. This has the advantage, that you can move it without leaving your current desktop. Of course, that only works well when there aren't too many windows in a workspace and your target isn't obscured by other windows. Another possibility is to grab a window by its tab and just holding on to it while switching workspaces with ALTFx.
-
For more information on workspaces in general and more keyboard shortcuts, see topic Workspaces.
-
Try this: Make the Workspaces window really big and hide the window tab and border. Now go to the Shortcuts preferences and assign CTRL^ to the Workspaces applet (/system/apps/Workspaces).
-Now you can quickly summon the applet with a key combo and equally quickly dismiss it again with ESC.
Untuk memindahkan jendela, Anda ambil di applet Workspace dan cukup seret ke workspace lain. Ini memiliki keuntungan, bahwa Anda dapat memindahkannya tanpa meninggalkan desktop Anda saat ini. Tentu saja, itu hanya berfungsi dengan baik ketika tidak ada terlalu banyak jendela di ruang kerja dan target Anda tidak dikaburkan oleh jendela lain. Kemungkinan lain adalah untuk mengambil jendela dengan tabnya dan hanya memeganginya sambil berpindah ruang kerja dengan ALTFx.
+
Untuk informasi lebih lanjut tentang ruang kerja secara umum dan pintasan keyboard lainnya, lihat topik Workspaces.
+
Coba ini: Jadikan jendela ruang kerja benar-benar besar dan sembunyikan tab dan batas jendela. Sekarang buka preferensi Shortcuts dan tetapkan CTRL^ ke applet Workspaces (/system/apps/Workspaces).
+Sekarang Anda dapat dengan cepat memanggil applet dengan kombo kunci dan sama-sama menolaknya dengan ESC.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Layout Filesystem
@@ -73,81 +72,83 @@
/boot/system/
Berisi file sistem dan aplikasi/paket yang dipakai bersama oleh semua pengguna.
/boot/home/
Ini adalah folder pribadi Anda tempat Anda menyimpan data dan pengaturan Anda serta aplikasi/paket yang tidak dipakai bersama oleh semua pengguna.
-
As long as Haiku isn't multi-user, this distinction between shared and not-shared applications/packages has no apparent effect, as there's only one user with one home folder. But since there will be support for more users than one eventually, it makes sense to learn the right way from the start.
+
Selama Haiku bukan multi-pengguna, perbedaan antara aplikasi / paket yang dibagikan dan tidak dibagi ini tidak memiliki efek yang jelas, karena hanya ada satu pengguna dengan satu folder rumah. Tetapi karena akan ada dukungan untuk lebih banyak pengguna daripada satu akhirnya, masuk akal untuk mempelajari cara yang benar sejak awal.
Under Haiku's predecessor BeOS, this folder was named /boot/beos/. You may still find it in some older documentation (e.g. in the original BeBook).
-Most of the folders inside /boot/system/ are read-only, which is sensible as they contain the files necessary for Haiku to function correctly and therefore have to be safe from (accidental) alteration. The only user-writable folders are:
Di bawah BeOS pendahulu Haiku, folder ini bernama /boot/beos/. Anda masih dapat menemukannya di beberapa dokumentasi yang lebih lama (mis. Dalam BeBook asli).
+Sebagian besar folder di dalam /boot/system/ adalah read-only, yang masuk akal karena mengandung file-file yang diperlukan agar Haiku berfungsi dengan benar dan karenanya harus aman dari perubahan (tidak disengaja). Hanya folder yang dapat ditulis pengguna adalah:
-
/boot/system/cache/
Contains cached files and the temporary folder linked to /tmp/.
-
/boot/system/non-packaged/
Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives).
-
/boot/system/packages/
Besides holding Haiku's system packages, you can add/remove packages shared by all users.
-
/boot/system/settings/
Contains system-wide settings.
-
/boot/system/var/
Contains logs like the syslog (important when troubleshooting) and is the default location for the swap file.
+
/boot/system/cache/
Berisi file cache dan folder sementara yang ditautkan ke /tmp/.
+
/boot/system/non-packaged/
Berisi hierarki untuk file yang bukan bagian dari .hpkg (mungkin dari arsip BeOS lama).
+
/boot/system/packages/
Selain memegang paket sistem Haiku, Anda dapat menambah / menghapus paket yang dibagikan oleh semua pengguna.
+
/boot/system/settings/
Berisi pengaturan seluruh sistem.
+
/boot/system/var/
Berisi log seperti syslog (penting saat pemecahan masalah) dan merupakan lokasi default untuk file swap.
-
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
+
Informasi lebih lanjut tentang folderpackages and non-packaged , bisa dilihat di topic Aplikasi.
+
This folder belongs to you. Here you can create and delete files and folders as you wish. (By the way, the tilde ("~") is a shortcut for your home folder, so you don't always have to write "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
-Files that you'd like to share with other users in a future multi-user environment have do be put outside /boot/home/. For example, you could create a folder /boot/all-users/ and put the stuff there.
Folder ini milik Anda. Di sini Anda dapat membuat dan menghapus file dan folder sesuai keinginan. (Omong-omong, tilde ("~") adalah jalan pintas untuk folder rumah Anda, jadi Anda tidak selalu harus menulis "/boot/home/" in Terminal.)
+File yang ingin Anda bagikan dengan pengguna lain di lingkungan multi-pengguna di masa depan harus diletakkan di luar /boot/home/. Misalnya, Anda dapat membuat folder /boot/all-users/ dan meletakkan berkas anda di sana.
~/Desktop/
-
Holds the files of your desktop. Double-clicking won't open it, as it is already always visible. When your files happen to be obscured by open windows, just switch quickly to another Workspace. Of course, drilling down by right-clicking is also possible.
+
Memegang file desktop Anda. Mengklik dua kali tidak akan membukanya, karena sudah selalu terlihat. Ketika file Anda dikaburkan oleh jendela yang terbuka, cukup beralih cepat ke Workspace lain . Tentu saja, drilling dengan mengklik kanan juga dimungkinkan.
~/mail/
-
This is the default location for your mails.
+
lokasi bawaan untuk surat-surat Anda.
~/people/
-
This is the default location for you contact files, see People.
+
lokasi default untuk file kontak Anda, lihat Orang (people) .
~/queries/
-
Queries are stored here, by default temporarily for 7 days.
+
Kueri (Queries) disimpan di sini, secara bawaan sementara untuk 7 hari..
-
The folder /boot/home/config/ is special: just like /boot/system/ it's mostly under the control of the package management and therefore read-only. It too contains these similar user-writable folders:
+
Folder /boot/home/config/adalah spesial: seperti /boot/system/ sebagian besar di bawah kendali manajemen paket dan karenanya hanya-baca. Folder ini juga berisi folder serupa yang dapat ditulis pengguna:
~/config/packages/
-
Here you can add/remove packages that are not shared by all users.
+
Di sini Anda dapat menambah / menghapus paket yang tidak dibagikan oleh semua pengguna.
~/config/non-packaged/
-
Contains a hierarchy for files that aren't part of a .hpkg (probably from old BeOS archives) and are not shared by all users.
+
Berisi hierarki untuk file yang bukan bagian dari .hpkg (mungkin dari arsip BeOS lama) dan tidak dibagikan oleh semua pengguna.
~/config/settings/
-
This folder contains the settings to all applications and a few configurations for the system. Some applications manage their settings in their own subfolders, others simply put their configuration file in there.
+
Folder ini berisi pengaturan untuk semua aplikasi dan beberapa konfigurasi untuk sistem.Beberapa aplikasi mengelola pengaturan mereka dalam subfolder mereka sendiri, yang lain cukup meletakkan file konfigurasi mereka di sana.
-
For more information on the packages and non-packaged folders, see topic Applications.
-
Here are some of the more interesting subfolders in ~/config/settings/:
+
Informasi lebih lanjut tentang folderpackages and non-packaged , bisa dilihat di topic Aplikasi.
+
+
Berikut adalah beberapa subfolder yang lebih menarik di ~/config/settings/:
boot/
-
This folder is the place for User Scripts that are executed before or after the system boots up or shuts down.
+
Folder ini adalah tempat untuk Script Pengguna yang dieksekusi sebelum atau setelah sistem dinyalakan atau dimatikan.
boot/launch/
-
Links to programs or documents in this folder are automatically launched on every boot-up.
+
Tautan ke program atau dokumen dalam folder ini secara otomatis diluncurkan pada setiap boot-up.
beos_mime/
-
In this MIME database Haiku keeps track of all the different filetypes and their settings.
+
Disini MIME database Haiku yang menyimpan semua jenis filetypes dan pengaturannya.
deskbar/menu/
-
Copied or linked to files/folders/queries in this folder appear in the Deskbar menu.
+
Disalin atau ditautkan ke files/folders/queries di folder ini muncul di Deskbar menu.
kernel/drivers/
-
There's one settings file that may be of interest: kernel offers some low level configurations like disabling SMP, activating serial debugging or enabling advanced power management. You activate a configuration line by removing the commentary symbol "#". Be careful here!
+
Ada satu file pengaturan yang mungkin menarik: kernel menawarkan beberapa konfigurasi tingkat rendah seperti menonaktifkan SMP, mengaktifkan debugging serial atau mengaktifkan manajemen daya lanjutan. Anda mengaktifkan baris konfigurasi dengan menghapus simbol komentar "#". Hati-hati di sini !
Tracker/
-
Besides the various settings files for Tracker, there are some interesting subfolders:
-
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Show and arrange all attributes and the window size to your liking. Every new folder you create will use it as a template.
+
Selain berbagai pengaturan file untuk Tracker, ada beberapa subfolder yang menarik:
+
DefaultFolderTemplate/
Tampilkan dan atur semua atribut dan ukuran jendela sesuai keinginan Anda. Setiap folder baru yang Anda buat akan menggunakannya sebagai templat.
-
DefaultQueryTemplates/
You can define the layout of query result windows for certain filetypes. See topic Query: The result window.
+
DefaultQueryTemplates/
Anda dapat menentukan tata letak jendela hasil kueri untuk tipe file tertentu. Lihat topik Query: window hasil kueri.
Taruh tautan ke lokasi favorit Anda di sini untuk membuatnya tersedia misalnya di panel buka dan simpan. Lihat topik GUI Haiku: Favorit dan folder terkini..
-
Tracker New Template/
Add a template for any filetype that's then available from Tracker's File | New... menu. See topic Tracker: Working with files.
+
Tracker New Template/
Tambahkan templat untuk semua jenis file yang kemudian tersedia dari menu File | New... menu. See topic Tracker: Bekerja dengan berkas.
@@ -156,7 +157,7 @@ Files that you'd like to share with other users in a future multi-user environme
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
Filetypes
+
Tipe file
-
Other than Windows, Haiku doesn't rely on the 3-letter file extension for a file type (e.g. .txt, .jpg, .mp3). This method is only a last resort fallback. Haiku uses MIME types just like it's custom on the internet.
-
While there's no reason to use file extensions in Haiku, remember to add them to files you want to share with users of other operating systems, e.g. over email, uploading to a server or via exchange of an USB drive. Otherwise their system may not recognize the file type.
+
Selain Windows, Haiku tidak bergantung pada ekstensi file 3 huruf untuk jenis file (misalnya .txt, .jpg, .mp3). Metode ini hanya merupakan pilihan mundur terakhir. Haiku menggunakan tipe MIME sama seperti yang di internet.
+
Meskipun tidak ada alasan untuk menggunakan ekstensi file di Haiku, jangan lupa menambahkannya ke file yang ingin Anda bagikan dengan pengguna sistem operasi lain, misalnya melalui email, mengunggah ke server atau melalui pertukaran drive USB. Jika tidak, sistem mereka mungkin tidak mengenali jenis file.
You can change the type of a specific file, its icon and the associated application. Select the file and invoke the Add-Ons | Filetype add-on from the right-click context menu.
The above is a PNG file, it's MIME string image/png. Let's say you definitely know that it's not a PNG but a GIF. You can change that either by entering the correct MIME string by hand or with one of the two buttons below the textbox:
Di atas adalah file PNG, ini adalah gambar string MIME/png. Katakanlah Anda pasti tahu bahwa itu bukan PNG tetapi GIF. Anda dapat mengubahnya dengan memasukkan string MIME yang benar dengan tangan atau dengan salah satu dari dua tombol di bawah textbox:
-
Select...
shows a hierarchical list of filetypes where you navigate to image | GIF Image.
-
Same as...
opens a file dialog where you choose any file that already has the filetype you're looking for.
+
pilih...
menunjukkan daftar hierarki jenis file tempat Anda menavigasi ke image | GIF Image.
+
Sama seperti...
membuka dialog file di mana Anda memilih file yang sudah memiliki tipe file yang Anda cari.
This pop-up menu shows a list of all applications that can handle this particular filetype. From here you can choose which program should open this specific file when it's double-clicked. You could, for example, change a HTML file's preferred application from the browser to a text editor while you're working on it. Every other HTML file still opens in the browser, only this particular one starts in your text editor.
Menu pop-up ini menampilkan daftar semua aplikasi yang dapat menangani jenis file khusus ini. Dari sini Anda dapat memilih program mana yang harus membuka file spesifik ini ketika diklik dua kali. Anda dapat, misalnya, mengubah aplikasi file HTML pilihan dari browser ke editor teks saat Anda sedang mengerjakannya. Setiap file HTML lainnya masih terbuka di browser, hanya ini yang dimulai di editor teks Anda.
-
The Default application is the one that's set globally for that filetype. If you don't find the program you want to associate with this file in the pop-up menu, you'll again find the buttons Select... and Same as... which do the similar thing described under "The File Type" above.
+
Aplikasi Default adalah aplikasi yang ditetapkan secara global untuk tipe file tersebut. Jika Anda tidak menemukan program yang ingin Anda kaitkan dengan file ini di menu pop-up, Anda akan menemukan lagi tombol Pilih... dan Sama seperti.... yang melakukan hal serupa yang dijelaskan di bawah "Type File" di atas.
If you're wondering why the icon well on the top right is empty: Icons are normally inherited from the system default for that filetype. You can open the Filetype add-on of a file that contains an icon and drag & drop it into your file's icon well. Or you double-click the icon well and create or edit your own icon. For more info on icons and how to create your own, see topic Icon-O-Matic.
Jika Anda bertanya-tanya mengapa ikon di kanan atas kosong: Ikon biasanya diwarisi dari sistem default untuk tipe file tersebut. Anda dapat membuka Pengaya Filetype dari file yang berisi ikon seret & lepas ke dalam file Anda. ikon file dengan baik. Atau Anda mengklik dua kali ikon dengan baik dan membuat atau mengedit ikon Anda sendiri. Untuk info lebih lanjut tentang ikon dan cara membuat ikon Anda sendiri, lihat topik Icon-O-Matic.
Jika Anda mengaktifkan pengaya Filetype pada executable (di sini: StyledEdit), Anda akan mendapatkan dialog yang berbeda:
-
On top, you'll see, instead of a standardized MIME string, the unique application signature. With it, the system finds the program wherever it's installed.
-
Below it are several flags, controlling the app's behaviour:
+
Di atas, Anda akan melihat, alih-alih string MIME standar, tanda tangan aplikasi unik. Dengan itu, sistem menemukan program di mana pun ia diinstal.
+
Di bawahnya ada beberapa flag, mengendalikan perilaku aplikasi:
-
Single launch
Only one instance of the app can be running per executable file. If you have two copies of that app, however, they can run side by side.
-
Multiple launch
Many instances of the app can run simultaneously.
-
Exclusive launch
Really only one instance with that app's signature is allowed to run at a time.
-
Args only
Indicates the app doesn't respond to messages.
-
Background app
The app won't appear in Twitcher or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+
Peluncuran tunggal
Hanya satu contoh aplikasi yang dapat berjalan per file yang dapat dieksekusi. Jika Anda memiliki dua salinan aplikasi itu, mereka dapat berjalan berdampingan.
+
Beberapa peluncuran
Banyak contoh aplikasi dapat berjalan secara bersamaan.
+
Peluncuran eksklusif
Benar-benar hanya satu contoh dengan tanda tangan aplikasi yang diizinkan berjalan pada satu waktu.
+
Hanya args
Menunjukkan aplikasi tidak menanggapi pesan.
+
Aplikasi latar
The app won't appear in or the list of running apps of the Deskbar.
+Aplikasi ini tidak akan muncul di Twitcher atau daftar aplikasi yang menjalankan Deskbar.
-
Then there's the list of supported filetypes. You can add (and remove) filetypes if you think the application can handle them. As a consequence, the app will appear in the menu for preferred applications or Tracker's Open with... context menu when you right-click on a file of that type.
-
At the bottom are version and copyright information. Like the application signature, they are filled in by the app's author and shouldn't be altered.
+
Lalu ada daftar tipe file yang didukung. Anda dapat menambahkan (dan menghapus) tipe file jika Anda pikir aplikasi dapat menanganinya. Sebagai konsekuensinya, aplikasi akan muncul di menu untuk aplikasi pilihan atau menu konteks Tracker Buka dengan... ketika Anda klik kanan pada file jenis itu.
+
Di bagian bawah adalah informasi versi dan hak cipta. Seperti tanda tangan aplikasi, itu diisi oleh penulis aplikasi dan tidak seharusnya diubah.
The FileTypes preferences don't deal with individual files but with global settings of filetypes. You can change default icons and preferred applications or add, remove, or alter attributes of whole filetypes. You can even create your own filetype from scratch.
-
All filetypes and their configurations are stored in /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Before you start experimenting, it may be prudent to make a backup of that folder...
Preferensi FileType tidak berurusan dengan file individual tetapi dengan pengaturan global dari tipe file. Anda dapat mengubah ikon default dan aplikasi pilihan atau menambah, menghapus, atau mengubah atribut dari seluruh tipe file. Anda bahkan dapat membuat tipe file Anda sendiri dari awal.
+
Semua tipe file dan konfigurasinya disimpan di /boot/home/config/settings/beos_mime/. Sebelum Anda mulai bereksperimen, mungkin bijaksana untuk membuat cadangan folder itu ...
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Indeks
@@ -84,86 +83,90 @@
Anda meminimalkan jendela dengan mengklik dua kali pada tabnya (atau dengan CTRLALTM). Jendela tersembunyi semacam itu dapat diakses dengan entri di jendela Deskbar or the Twitcher.
Anda dapat mengirim jendela ke belakang dengan mengklik kanan tabnya (atau pembatasnya).
Tombol untuk menutup.
-
The "zoom" button (or CTRLALTZ). In most applications, this will expand a window to maximum size without obscuring the Deskbar (hold SHIFT to cover the Deskbar as well). It doesn't have to, however. Tracker windows, for example, will resize to best fit the contents.
+
Tombol "zoom" (atau CTRLALTZ). Pada sebagian besar aplikasi, ini akan memperluas jendela ke ukuran maksimum tanpa mengaburkan Deskbar (tahan SHIFT untuk menutup Deskbar juga). Namun, tidak perlu. , misalnya, akan mengubah ukuran agar paling sesuai dengan konten..
Moving and resizing windows is a large part of interacting with several concurrently running applications. Instead of aiming at the small yellow title tab or the even tinier window border, there's a more convenient way to move a window. Also, additionally to its small size, the resize corner has another limitation: It only allows resizing at and in the direction of the lower right corner. Right-dragging a border for resizing works, but again you'll have to aim carefully.
-
To address these issues, Haiku provides a neat solution using the window management key combo CTRLALT and the mouse. See also chapter Shortcuts and key combinations for more shortcuts concerning window management.
Memindahkan dan mengubah ukuran jendela adalah bagian besar dari berinteraksi dengan beberapa aplikasi yang berjalan bersamaan. Alih-alih membidik tab judul kuning kecil atau batas jendela yang lebih kecil, ada cara yang lebih nyaman untuk memindahkan jendela. Juga, selain ukurannya yang kecil, sudut pengubahan ukuran memiliki batasan lain: Pengubahan ukuran hanya memungkinkan pada dan ke arah sudut kanan bawah.
+Seret kanan batas untuk mengubah ukuran karya, tetapi sekali lagi Anda harus membidik dengan hati-hati.
+
Untuk mengatasi masalah ini, Haiku memberikan solusi yang rapi menggunakan kombo kunci manajemen jendela CTRLALT dan mouse. Lihat juga bab Pintasan dan kombinasi tombol untuk pintasan lainnya terkait pengelolaan jendela.
-
Holding down CTRLALT will highlight the window borders nearest to the mouse pointer. Move the mouse in the direction of another border to change the target. Click and dragging with the right mouse button will resize the window along the highlighted border(s).
-
Hold down CTRLALT and click and drag with the left mouse button anywhere in a window to move it around. A quick click with the right mouse button sends it to the back.
+
Menekan CTRLALT akan menyorot batas jendela yang terdekat dengan penunjuk mouse. Gerakkan mouse ke arah perbatasan lain untuk mengubah target. Klik dan seret dengan tombol kanan mouse akan mengubah ukuran jendela di sepanjang batas yang disorot.
+
+
Tahan CTRLALT dan klik dan seret dengan left mouse button di mana saja di jendela untuk memindahkannya.Klik cepat dengan right mouse button mengirimkannya ke belakang.
Haiku's user interface provides a unique feature that puts the fact that windows have a yellow tab instead of a full-width title bar to perfect use. It's called "Stack & Tile".
-In the example below, a Tracker window with bookmarks is tiled to the left of a WebPositive window, which itself is stacked with another Tracker window showing the source folder haiku. In this animation, the user clicks on the tabs of the stacked windows to alternately bring one or the other to the front.
Antarmuka pengguna Haiku menyediakan fitur unik yang menempatkan fakta bahwa windows memiliki tab kuning alih-alih bilah judul penuh untuk digunakan dengan sempurna. Ini disebut "Stack & Tile".
+Pada contoh di bawah ini, jendela Pelacak dengan penanda di-ubin di sebelah kiri jendela WebPositive, yang dengan sendirinya ditumpuk dengan jendela Pelacak lain yang menunjukkan folder sumber haiku. Dalam animasi ini, pengguna mengklik tab dari jendela yang ditumpuk untuk bergantian bawa satu atau yang lain ke depan.
-
Connected like this, the group of windows can be moved and resized together - a nice arrangement to work in a more project centric environment. Instead of looking for the right browser window with documentation, editor and Tracker windows and maybe a related email concerning one project you are currently working on, just stack&tile them together.
-
Doing the actual arranging of windows is easy: Hold down OPT while dragging a window by its tab close to another window's tab or border until it's highlighted and release the mouse button.
-
Stack & Tile consists of two related parts.
+
Terhubung seperti ini, kelompok jendela dapat dipindahkan dan diubah ukurannya bersama-pengaturan yang bagus untuk bekerja di lingkungan yang lebih sentris proyek Daripada mencari jendela browser yang tepat dengan dokumentasi, editor dan jendela Tracker dan mungkin email terkait tentang satu proyek yang sedang Anda kerjakan, cukup stack&tile bersama.
+
Melakukan pengaturan jendela yang sebenarnya itu mudah: Tekan dan tahan OPTsambil menyeret jendela dengan tabnya dekat dengan tab atau perbatasan jendela lain sampai disorot dan lepaskan tombol mouse.
+
Stack & terdiri dari dua bagian terkait.
-
"Stacking" is putting windows on top of each other, automatically moving the yellow tabs into position.
-While holding OPT, tabs change color when they overlap; drop the window to establish the stacking.
+
"Stacking" adalah menempatkan jendela di atas satu sama lain, secara otomatis memindahkan tab kuning ke posisinya.
+Sambil memegang OPT, tab berubah warna saat tumpang tindih; jatuhkan jendela untuk membentuk susunan.
-
"Tiling" means gluing windows horizontally or vertically together.
-Again, while holding OPT, the borders that'll fuse together when you drop the window change color when brought near each other.
-
Separation is done in the same way, by holding OPT while dragging a window by its tab out of the group.
+
"Tiling" berarti menempelkan jendela secara horizontal atau vertikal bersamaan.
+Sekali lagi, sambil memegang OPT, batas-batas yang akan melebur bersama ketika Anda menjatuhkan warna jendela berubah ketika dibawa berdekatan.
+
Pemisahan dilakukan dengan cara yang sama, dengan memegang OPT sambil menyeret jendela dengan tabnya keluar dari grup.
Saat membuka atau menyimpan file dari aplikasi apa pun, panel seperti ini terbuka:
-
It has all the usual things: A list of files of the current folder to choose from, in case of a save panel, a text field to enter a filename and a pop-up menu for different file formats and their settings.
-You can enter parent folders with the pop-up menu above the file listing.
-
If you already have a Tracker window with the location for a file open, you can simply drag either any file or the folder-representation (i.e. the symbol to the far right in its menu bar) into the panel. This changes the panel to that new location.
+
Ini memiliki semua hal yang biasa: Daftar file folder saat ini untuk dipilih, dalam kasus panel simpan, bidang teks untuk memasukkan nama file dan menu pop-up untuk berbagai format file dan pengaturannya.
+Anda dapat memasukkan folder induk dengan menu pop-up di atas daftar file.
+
Jika Anda sudah memiliki jendela Tracker dengan lokasi file terbuka, Anda dapat dengan mudah menyeret file atau representasi folder (yaitu simbol ke paling kanan di bilah menu) ke dalam panel. Ini mengubah panel menjadi lokasi baru.
Many shortcuts in open and save panels are the same used in Tracker. Besides the commands that are also available through the File menu, there are a few not that obvious:
Banyak pintasan di panel buka dan simpan sama dengan yang digunakan di Pelacak. Selain perintah yang juga tersedia melalui menu Berkas, ada beberapa cara yang tidak terlalu jelas:
-
ALTN
Creates a new folder.
-
ALTE
Lets you rename the selected entry.
-
ALT↑
Moves into the parent folder.
-
ALT↓ or ENTER
Moves into the selected folder.
-
ALTD
Takes you to your Desktop.
-
ALTH
Takes you to your Home folder.
+
ALTN
Membuat folder baru.
+
ALTE
Memungkinkan Anda mengubah nama entri yang dipilih.
The Favorites menu in open and save panels provides recently visited folders and favorite locations that you can set up yourself. As indicated by the little arrow, you can also use these locations to navigate further down the hierarchy via submenus.
Menu Favorit di panel buka dan simpan menyediakan folder yang baru-baru ini dikunjungi dan lokasi favorit yang dapat Anda atur sendiri. Seperti ditunjukkan oleh panah kecil, Anda juga dapat menggunakan lokasi ini untuk menavigasi lebih jauh ke bawah hierarki melalui submenu.
-
To add a Favorite, you simply navigate to your destination and choose Favorites | Add current folder. From now on it will appear in every open/save panel. To remove a Favorite, choose Favorites | Edit favorites... and delete its entry.
-All Favorites are kept in /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. So you might as well add and remove links to files and folders there directly.
+
Untuk menambahkan Favorit, Anda cukup menavigasi ke tujuan Anda dan memilih Favorit | Tambahkan folder saat ini.. Mulai sekarang akan muncul di setiap panel buka / simpan. Untuk menghapus Favorit, pilih Favorit | Edit favorit... and delete its entry.
+Semua Favorit disimpan di /boot/home/config/settings/Tracker/Go/. Jadi Anda mungkin juga menambahkan dan menghapus tautan ke file dan folder di sana secara langsung.
Replicants are small self-contained parts of applications that can be integrated into other programs. Provided Deskbar's option to Show replicants is activated, you'll recognize a replicantable part of an application by its small handle, normally in the bottom right corner:
+
Replicants adalah bagian kecil aplikasi mandiri yang dapat diintegrasikan ke dalam program lain. Menyediakan opsi Deskbar untuk Show replicants diaktifkan, Anda akan mengenali bagian yang dapat direplikasi dari aplikasi dengan gagang kecilnya, biasanya di sudut kanan bawah:
-
The most prominent place that accepts Replicants is the Desktop: You simply drag & drop the little handle onto it. From now on it's part of the Desktop and the Replicant's originating app doesn't have to be started for it to work.
-A right-click on a Replicant handle offers a context menu to show the originating app's About window and to Remove replicant.
-
Should you experience difficulties with a Replicant on the Desktop and just can't get rid of it, delete ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Unfortunately, this will remove all Replicants from the Desktop.
Tempat paling menonjol yang menerima Replicants adalah Desktop: Anda cukup drag & drop gagang kecil ke atasnya. Mulai sekarang ini adalah bagian dari Desktop dan aplikasi yang berasal dari Replicant tidak harus dimulai agar dapat berfungsi.
+Klik kanan pada pegangan Replicant menawarkan menu konteks untuk menunjukkan jendela About aplikasi asal dan Menghapus replicant.
+
Jika Anda mengalami kesulitan dengan Replicant di Desktop dan tidak bisa menghilangkannya, hapus ~/config/settings/Tracker/tracker_shelf. Sayangnya, ini akan menghapus semua Replicants dari Desktop.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Shortcuts and key combinations
+
Pintasan dan kombinasi tombol
-
By default, Haiku's shortcut key, to invoke commands from menus for example, is not the usual CTRL key, but ALT instead. This has historical reasons, because the BeOS was inspired somewhat by MacOS. After you get used to it, it actually has advantages as e.g. ALTC and ALTV integrate seamlessly into the bash shell of the Terminal, where CTRLC quits the running process.
-
In any case, you can switch to the maybe more familiar CTRL key in the Keymap preferences. The user guide always describes the default configuration with the command key being ALT.
-
If you're in doubt which keys are the OPT or MENU keys on your particular keymap/keyboard-layout, again use the Keymap preferences. There you can see what keystroke is sent when you press a key on your keyboard.
+
Secara bawaan, tombol pintas Haiku, untuk menjalankan perintah dari menu misalnya, bukan kunci CTRL sebagaimana biasa, melainkan ALT. Ini memiliki alasan historis, karena BeOS diilhami oleh MacOS. Setelah Anda terbiasa, ia sebenarnya memiliki keuntungan seperti misalnya ALTC and ALTV berintegrasi dengan mulus ke dalam bash shell Terminal, di mana CTRLC berhenti dari proses yang sedang berjalan.
+
Dalam hal apa pun, Anda dapat beralih ke kunci CTRL yang mungkin lebih akrab di preferensi Keymap. Panduan pengguna selalu menjelaskan konfigurasi default dengan kunci perintah adalah kunci ALT.
+
Jika Anda ragu tombol mana yang merupakan tombol OPT atau MENU pada layout keymap / keyboard khusus Anda, gunakan lagi preferensi Keymap. Di sana Anda dapat melihat keystroke apa yang dikirim ketika Anda menekan tombol pada keyboard Anda.
Haiku mendefinisikan tiga font standar untuk tujuan yang berbeda. Anda mengatur jenis dan ukuran font biasa, tebal dan tetap yang akan digunakan di seluruh sistem. Selain itu, ada juga pengaturan terpisah untuk font yang digunakan dalam menu.
New fonts that don't come as part of a regular .hpkg package, can be installed by copying them into a subfolder according to the font type (psfonts or ttfonts) into their respective non-packaged folder (see topic Filesystem layout). For TrueType fonts that would be:
Font baru yang tidak datang sebagai bagian dari paket .hpkg biasa, dapat diinstal dengan menyalinnya ke dalam subfolder sesuai dengan jenis font (psfonts atau ttfonts) ke masing-masing folder yang non-packaged (lihat topik Layout system file ). Font TrueType yang akan menjadi:
In the Colors tab, you can change the colors of different parts of the user interface. The color well accepts drag & drops from other programs, letting you drag colors over from e.g. WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic or the Backgrounds panel.
+
Dalam tab Warna ,Anda dapat mengubah warna dari berbagai bagian antarmuka pengguna. Warnanya dengan baik menerima seret & jatuhkan dari program lain, memungkinkan anda menyeret dari misal:WonderBrush, Icon-O-Matic atau panel Backgrounds.
Decorators determine the look and feel of windows and all GUI elements. Currently Haiku comes with only one default decorator. Should you find and install other decorators, you can choose a different one from the pop-up menu.
-
Haiku's default decorator lets you set the arrow style of the scroll bar: either single arrows at the end of scrollbars to conserve a bit of space, or double arrows — the traditional BeOS way — potentially saving some mouse moving when scrolling up and down or left and right...
+
Dekorator menentukan tampilan dan nuansa jendela dan semua elemen GUI. Saat ini Haiku hanya memiliki satu dekorator standar. Jika Anda menemukan dan memasang dekorator lain, Anda dapat memilih yang lain dari menu pop-up.
+
Dekorator standar Haiku memungkinkan Anda mengatur gaya panah di bilah gulir: salah satu panah di ujung bilah gulir untuk menghemat sedikit ruang, atau panah ganda -- cara BeOS tradisional -- berpotensi menghemat pergerakan mouse saat menggulir ke atas dan ke bawah atau ke kiri dan benar ...
The tab Antialiasing provides different settings for how things are rendered on screen.
+
Tab Antialiasing menyediakan pengaturan yang berbeda untuk bagaimana hal-hal ditampilkan di layar.
-Glyph hinting
-
An activated Glyph hinting aligns all letters in such a way that their vertical and horizontal edges rest exactly between two pixels. The result is a perfect contrast, especially when dealing with black on white. Text appears crisper. There's also a setting for Monospaced fonts only that's especially helpful with low resolution devices like netbooks. Small fonts can look pretty bad when hinting is turned on, but with this setting you still have the advantage of hinting for text editors and Terminal.
-
See the difference hinting makes with these magnified screenshots:
+Penjelas aksara (Glyph hinting)
+
Petunjuk Penjelas aksara (Glyph hinting) menyelaraskan semua huruf sedemikian rupa sehingga tepian vertikal dan horizontal persis di antara dua piksel. Hasilnya adalah kontras sempurna, terutama ketika berhadapan dengan hitam putih. Teks tampak lebih tajam. Ada juga pengaturan untuk font Monospaced saja itu sangat membantu dengan perangkat resolusi rendah seperti netbook. Font kecil dapat terlihat sangat buruk ketika mengisyaratkan diaktifkan, tetapi dengan pengaturan ini Anda masih memiliki keuntungan mengisyaratkan untuk editor teks dan Terminal.
+
Lihat perbedaan petunjuk yang dibuat dengan tangkapan layar yang diperbesar ini:
-
Hinting: off
Hinting: on
+
Penjelas: mati
Penjelas: nyala
-
It should be pointed out that all the Magnify windows on this page are of course rendered themselves with the different options as well. So, you get a real world impression of the settings by comparing, for example, the bold yellow tab title or the text "33 x 15 @ 8 pixels/pixel".
+
Harus ditunjukkan bahwa semua jendela Magnify pada halaman ini tentu saja dirender sendiri dengan opsi yang berbeda pula. Jadi, Anda mendapatkan kesan dunia nyata dari pengaturan dengan membandingkan, misalnya, judul tab tebal kuning atau teks "33 x 15 @ 8 piksel / piksel".
-Antialiasing type
-
Another technique to improve rendering is Antialiasing, which supports all vector graphics as well as text. It smooths lines by changing the color of certain pixels. There are two methods for that:
-
Grayscale changes the intensity of pixels at the edge.
-LCD subpixel does an even better job, especially with (high resolution) LCD monitors. Instead of the intensity of a pixel, it changes its color which moves an edge by a fraction of a pixel, because LCD displays produce every pixel with a red, green and blue component.
-
Again, the two different methods with magnified screenshots:
+Type Antialias (Antialiasing type)
+
Teknik lain untuk meningkatkan rendering adalah Antialiasing, yang mendukung semua grafik vektor dan juga teks. Ini menghaluskan garis dengan mengubah warna piksel tertentu. Ada dua metode untuk itu:
+
Grayscale mengubah intensitas piksel di bagian tepi.
+LCD subpixel melakukan pekerjaan yang lebih baik, terutama dengan monitor LCD (resolusi tinggi). Alih-alih intensitas piksel, ia mengubah warnanya yang menggerakkan tepi dengan sepersekian piksel, karena layar LCD menghasilkan setiap piksel dengan warna merah, komponen hijau dan biru.
+
Sekali lagi, dua metode berbeda dengan tangkapan layar diperbesar:
-
Grayscale, Hinting: off
LCD subpixel, Hinting: off
+
Grayscale, Penjelas: mati
LCD subpixel, penjelas: mati
-
Subpixel based antialiasing adds a slight colored shine to objects. Something not everyone tolerates. In Haiku you can mix the two antialiasing methods and find the right setting for you by using a slider.
-
The subpixel based antialiasing in combination with the glyph hinting is subject of a software patent and is therefore not available by default. Depending on where in the world you live, you may get an unlocked version. Sorry about that. Talk with your representative.
-
If you do activate hinting plus LCD subpixel rendering by changing the source and recompiling, this is how it looks compared to hinting with Grayscale:
+
Antialiasing berbasis Subpixel menambahkan sedikit kilau berwarna pada objek. Sesuatu yang tidak semua orang mentolerir. Di Haiku Anda dapat mencampur dua metode antialiasing dan menemukan pengaturan yang tepat untuk Anda dengan menggunakan slider.
+
Antialiasing berbasis subpixel dalam kombinasi dengan glyph hinting adalah subjek dari paten perangkat lunak dan karenanya tidak tersedia secara bawaan. Tergantung di mana di dunia tempat Anda tinggal, Anda mungkin mendapatkan versi yang tidak terkunci. Maaf tentang itu. Bicaralah dengan perwakilan Anda.
+
Jika Anda mengaktifkan rending plus LCD rendering subpiksel dengan mengubah sumber dan mengkompilasi ulang, ini adalah tampilannya dibandingkan dengan memberi petunjuk pada Grayscale:
-
Grayscale, Hinting: on
LCD subpixel, Hinting: on
+
Grayscale, penjelas: menyala
LCD subpixel, penjelas: menyala
-
At the bottom of the panel are two buttons:
+
Di bagian bawah panel ada dua tombol:
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Appearance preferences.
+
Bawaan
mengatur ulang semuanya ke nilai bawaan.
+
Pulihkan
mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif ketika Anda memulai preferensi tempilan.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Backgrounds (latar)
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/Backgrounds
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/system/app_server/workspaces ~/config/settings/Backgrounds settings - stores the panel's window position
@@ -76,17 +75,17 @@
Di bawah ini Anda dapat menetapkan gambar atau memilih tiada jika Anda inginkan hanya latar belakang berwarna. Gambar juga dapat didrag & drop ke pratinjau kiri.
Jika Anda menggunakan gambar, Anda harus memutuskan penempatan:
-
Manual
lets you specify the coordinates. You can drag the picture around in the preview to the left or enter X and Y manually.
-
Center
centers the picture in the middle of the screen.
-
Scale to fit
enlarges the picture with no regard to its aspect ratio until it fills the screen.
-
Tile
fills the screen by repeating the picture.
+
Manual
memungkinkan Anda menentukan koordinat. Anda dapat menyeret gambar di dalam pratinjau ke kiri atau masukkan X and Y secara manual.
+
Tengah
menempatkan gambar di tengah layar.
+
Skalakan hingga pas
memperbesar gambar tanpa memperhatikan rasio aspeknya hingga memenuhi layar.
+
Ubin
mengisi layar dengan mengulangi gambar.
-
Activating Icon label outline puts a thin contour around icon labels.
-
Whether an icon label's actual text is black or white depends on the setting of the color picker. A dark color sets the text to white, a light color to black. So, if you assign a very bright image to the background, you should also set the color picker to a bright color in order to have icon labels readable in black. (Or use the outline option above.)
-The selected color is also reflected in the Workspaces applet, which ignores images as backgrounds.
+
Mengaktifkan garis Icon label outline menempatkan kontur tipis di sekitar label ikon.
+
Apakah teks label label yang sebenarnya adalah hitam atau putih tergantung pada pengaturan pemilih warna. Warna gelap mengatur teks menjadi putih, warna terang menjadi hitam. Jadi, jika Anda menetapkan gambar yang sangat terang ke latar belakang, Anda juga harus atur color picker ke warna cerah agar label ikon dapat dibaca dalam warna hitam (Atau gunakan opsi garis besar di atas.)
+Warna yang dipilih juga tercermin dalam Workspaces applet, yang mengabaikan gambar sebagai latar belakang.
-
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Backgrounds preferences.
-
Apply
sets your changes.
+
Pulihkan
mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai preferensi Latar belakang.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
DataTranslations
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/DataTranslations
-
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/* - Every Translator creates its own settings file here after you've changes its defaults.
-~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Stores the panel's window position.
+
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/* - Setiap Penerjemah membuat file pengaturannya sendiri di sini setelah Anda mengubah default-nya.
+~/config/settings/system/DataTranslations settings - Menyimpan posisi jendela panel.
-
Every application has the ability to open and save every file format for which there's a Translator installed. The settings for these Translators are configured in the DataTranslations preferences.
+
Setiap aplikasi memiliki kemampuan untuk membuka dan menyimpan setiap format file yang sudah ada Penerjemah yang terpasang. Pengaturan untuk Penerjemah ini dikonfigurasikan dalam preferensi DataTranslations.
-
Depending on its capabilities, each Translator offers different settings. At least you'll get an Info... button that opens a window with the credits and the installation path.
-The following table gives an overview of the default Translators and their most useful options.
+
Tergantung pada kemampuannya, masing-masing Penerjemah menawarkan pengaturan yang berbeda. Setidaknya Anda akan mendapatkan tombol Info... yang membuka jendela dengan kredit dan jalur pemasangan.
+Tabel berikut memberikan gambaran umum tentang Penerjemah default dan opsi yang paling berguna.
-
Apple icons
Valid image sizes are 16, 32, 48, 128, 256, 512, 1024 (RGB32 and RGBA32)
-
BMP images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency
-
EXR images
ILM's high dynamic-range (HDR) format
-
GIF images
8bit, lossless compression, transparency
-You can reduce the filesize by limiting the number of used colors and the palette.
-You can write images with transparency, either by automatically using the alpha channel or by setting the RGB value that will be transparent by hand.
-
HVIF icons
Translator for Haiku's vector icon format
-
JPEG2000 images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
-Here, you normally only care about the output quality.
-
JPEG images
24bit, compressed, no transparency
-Besides the output quality you can also set a smoothing that will lessen compression artefacts but can blur the picture a little.
-
PCX images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, PC Paintbrush Exchange format
-
Photoshop images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
-The translator reduces all layers to one bitmap layer.
-
PNG images
32bit, lossless compression, transparency
-
PPM images
24bit, uncompressed, no transparency, Portable PixMap format
8-bit YUV 4:2:0 image format, compressed, no transparency
-
Windows icons
Valid image sizes are 16, 32, 48
-
WonderBrush images
32bit, layers, transparency, vector/pixel data
+
Ikon Apple
ukuran gambar yang valid adalah 16, 32, 48, 128, 256, 512, 1024 (RGB32 and RGBA32)
+
Citra BMP
24bit, tak-terkompresi, tiada transparansi
+
Citra EXR
format ILM high dynamic-range (HDR)
+
Citra GIF
8bit, kompresi lossless, transparansi
+Anda dapat mengurangi ukuran file dengan membatasi jumlah warna yang digunakan dan palet.
+Anda dapat menulis gambar dengan transparansi, baik dengan secara otomatis menggunakan saluran alfa atau dengan mengatur nilai RGB yang akan transparan secara manual.
+
ikon HVIF
Penerjemah untuk format ikon vektor Haiku
+
Citra JPEG2000
24bit, terkompresi, tidak ada transparansi Di sini, Anda biasanya hanya peduli dengan kualitas output.
+
Citra JPEG
24bit, terkompresi, tidak ada transparansi Selain kualitas output Anda juga dapat mengatur penghalusan yang akan mengurangi artefak kompresi tetapi dapat mengaburkan gambar sedikit.
+
Citra PCX
tanpa kompresi, tanpa transparansi, format PC Paintbrush Exchange
+
Citra Photoshop
32bita, kompresi lossless, transparansi
+Penerjemah mengurangi semua layer menjadi satu layer bitmap.
+
Citra PNG
32bita, kompresi lossless, transparansi
+
Citra PPM
24bit, tanpa kompresi, tanpa transparansi, format Portable PixMap
8-bit YUV 4: 2: 0 format gambar, dikompresi, tidak ada transparansi
+
ikon Windows
ukuran Citra 16, 32, 48
+
Citra WonderBrush
32bit, lapisan, transparansi, data vektor / piksel
-
Screenshots, charts, black&white drawings and other images with few used colors, as well as small pictures are best saved as GIF (up to 256 colors) or PNG (millions of colors). JPEG, for example, introduces compression artefacts without gain in smaller filesize.
+
Tangkapan layar, bagan, gambar hitam putih dan gambar lain dengan sedikit warna yang dipakai, serta gambar kecil paling baik disimpan sebagai GIF (hingga 256 warna) atau PNG (jutaan warna) .JPG, misalnya, memperkenalkan artefak kompresi tanpa penambahan dalam ukuran yang lebih kecil filesize.
Haiku provides a system that retrieves e-mail regularly via a Mail Service (also known as mail_daemon) and saves each mail as a single text file. It parses the mail and fills its attributes with all necessary header information, like from, to, subject and its unread status. Now it can be queried by you or any application. This system also makes switching e-mail clients easy as all the data and your configuration stays the same.
-The configuration is done in the E-Mail preference panel.
+
Haiku menyediakan sistem yang mengambil email secara teratur melalui Layanan Mail (juga dikenal sebagai mail_daemon) dan menyimpan setiap email sebagai file teks tunggal. Ini mem-parsing email dan mengisi atributnya dengan semua informasi header yang diperlukan, seperti dari, ke, subjek dan statusnya yang belum dibaca. Sekarang dapat ditanyakan oleh Anda atau aplikasi apa pun. Sistem ini juga memudahkan pengalihan klien surel karena semua data dan konfigurasi Anda tetap sama.
+Konfigurasi dilakukan di panel preferensi E-mail.
Let's go through the process of setting up an e-mail account.
-You start by clicking the Add button to create a new, unnamed account. This opens a panel where you fill in your account info:
Mari kita pergi melalui proses pengaturan akun email.
+Anda mulai dengan mengklik tombol untuk membuat akun baru tanpa nama. Ini Tambah membuka panel tempat Anda mengisi info akun Anda:
-
First, you set how you get your mail, via POP3 or IMAP.
-
Now you enter your E-mail address, Login name and Password, give an Account name under which it will be known under Haiku and your Real name.
-
If your account is from a major e-mail provider, Haiku already knows all technical details like server IP addresses. If that is not the case, clicking Next will open another window to enter this information by hand:
+
Pertama, Anda mengatur bagaimana Anda mendapatkan email Anda, melalui POP3 atau IMAP.
+
Sekarang Anda memasukkan alamat email Anda, nama login dan kata sandi, berikan nama akun yang akan dikenal di bawah Haiku dan nama asli Anda.
+
Jika akun Anda berasal dari penyedia email utama, Haiku sudah mengetahui semua detail teknis seperti alamat IP server. Jika itu tidak terjadi, mengklik Berikutnya akan membuka jendela lain untuk memasukkan informasi ini manual:
-
You first set the Server name, Login type and Connection type for the incoming mail, below that for the outgoing mail. You should find the necessary information on your email provider's website.
-See below for more info about the various settings and additional options.
+
Anda pertama-tama mengatur nama Server, jenis Login dan jenis Koneksi untuk surat masuk, di bawah itu untuk surat keluar. Anda harus menemukan informasi yang diperlukan di situs web penyedia email Anda.
+Lihat di bawah untuk info lebih lanjut tentang berbagai pengaturan dan opsi tambahan.
+
Dengan memilih nama akun di daftar kiri, Anda dapat mengubah beberapa pengaturan umum:
-
The Account name is the name that's shown for example in the list of accounts in the E-mail preferences. Real name is the name someone sees when she gets mail from you. Return address is the email address that is used when someone replies to your mail. Normally that is the same address you've sent your email from.
-
If you'd like to use an email account to only send or only receive email, you can de/activate that usage by right-clicking the account's name in the leftside list to set the checkmarks accordingly.
+
Nama Akun adalah nama yang ditampilkan misalnya dalam daftar akun di preferensi E-mail. Nama asli adalah nama yang dilihat seseorang ketika ia menerima surat dari Anda. Alamat pengembalian adalah alamat email yang digunakan ketika seseorang membalas balasan Anda biasanya alamat yang sama dengan yang Anda kirimi email.
+
Jika Anda ingin menggunakan akun email untuk hanya mengirim atau hanya menerima email, Anda dapat menonaktifkan / mengaktifkan penggunaan itu dengan mengklik kanan nama akun di daftar leftside untuk mengatur tanda centang yang sesuai.
Klik Incoming dengan nama akun Anda untuk mengatur bagaimana email diterima.
-
First is the Mail server address for incoming mails. If your provider needs you to log into a specific port, you add that to the address, separated by a colon. For example, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
-
Then you enter your login information, Login name and Password, and if necessary change the Login type from the default Plain text to APOP for authentication.
-
If you use POP3 and retrieve mails of this account from different computers, you may want to activate the option to Leave mail on server and only Remove mail from server when deleted locally.
-
If you use IMAP instead, you have the option to Remove mail from server when deleted locally. You can specify IMAP folders to only synchronize with a specific folder and its subfolders.
-
Also, you can opt to only Partially download messages larger than a certain size. This will only get the header and you can decide if you want to download the rest of the message plus possible attachments after seeing the subject and who sent it. Useful if you have a slow connection.
-
You can change the Destination of your inbox (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), which is useful if you'd like to separate the mails from different accounts into their own folders. However, queries let you sort things out just as well.
+
Pertama adalah alamat server Mail untuk email masuk. Jika penyedia Anda meminta Anda untuk masuk ke port tertentu, Anda menambahkannya ke alamat tersebut, dipisahkan dengan tanda titik dua. Misalnya, pop.your-provider.org:1400.
+
Kemudian Anda memasukkan informasi login Anda, nama Login dan Kata Sandi, dan jika perlu ubah jenis Login dari text biasa ke APOP untuk otentikasi.
+
Jika Anda menggunakan POP3 dan mengambil email dari akun ini dari komputer yang berbeda, Anda mungkin ingin mengaktifkan opsi untuk Tinggalkan email di server dan hanya Hapus email dari server ketika dihapus secara lokal.
+
Jika Anda menggunakan IMAPsebagai gantinya, Anda memiliki opsi untuk Menghapus email dari server ketika dihapus secara lokal. Anda dapat menentukan folder IMAP untuk hanya menyinkronkan dengan folder tertentu dan subfoldernya.
+
Selain itu, Anda dapat memilih untuk hanya mengunduh sebagian pesan yang lebih besar dari ukuran tertentu. Ini hanya akan mendapatkan tajuk dan Anda dapat memutuskan apakah Anda ingin mengunduh sisa pesan plus kemungkinan lampiran setelah melihat subjek dan siapa yang mengirimnya. Anda memiliki koneksi yang lambat.
+
Anda dapat mengubah Tujuan kotak masuk Anda (default: /boot/home/mail/in/), yang berguna jika Anda ingin memisahkan email dari akun yang berbeda ke dalam folder mereka sendiri. Namun, kueri juga memungkinkan Anda menyelesaikan masalah.
Klik Outgoing dengan nama akun Anda untuk mengatur cara pengiriman email.
-
First is the SMTP server address for outgoing mails. As with the incoming server before, you can use a specific port if needed, e.g. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
-
If you need to login, you change the Login Type to ESMTP and enter username and password above. The other type is used for providers that need you to check for mail with POP3 before SMTP for identification.
-
As with incoming mail, you can also change the Destination of your outbox (default: /boot/home/mail/out/).
+
Pertama adalah alamat server SMTP untuk surat keluar. Seperti dengan server masuk sebelumnya, Anda dapat menggunakan port tertentu jika diperlukan, mis. mail.your-provider.org:1200.
+
Jika Anda perlu masuk, Anda mengubah Jenis Login menjadi ESMTPdan memasukkan nama pengguna dan kata sandi di atas. Jenis lainnya digunakan untuk penyedia yang perlu Anda periksa email dengan POP3 sebelum SMTP untuk identifikasi.
+
Seperti halnya surat masuk, Anda juga dapat mengubah Tujuan kotak keluar Anda (default:/boot/home/mail/out/).
Notifications for newly arrived email and methods to sort and filter emails are found in E-Mail filters under an account's name. You can add any number of filters that are applied one after the other and rearrange them by drag & dropping them to their new position.
-Currently there are three Incoming mail filters you can add. After adding a filter, you have to select it to see its options.
Pemberitahuan untuk email yang baru tiba dan metode untuk mengurutkan dan memfilter email ditemukan di filter E-Mail dengan nama akun. Anda dapat menambahkan sejumlah filter yang diterapkan satu demi satu dan mengatur ulang dengan seret & lepas ke posisi baru mereka.
+Saat ini ada tiga filter surat masuk yang dapat Anda tambahkan. Setelah menambahkan filter, Anda harus memilihnya untuk melihat opsinya.
Spam filter (AGMS Bayesian)
-
The spam filter uses statistical methods to classify a mail as unwanted spam. It assigns a value between 0 and 1 to it and you can decide what are the limits for a genuine mail and what will be considered spam.
-You can have that spam rating added to the start of the subject.
-Also, the spam filter can learn from all incoming e-mail. Of course, you'll have to teach it by sorting out the false positives, mails that were mistakenly marked as spam. You'll find more on that when we discuss the application Mail.
-
Together with the following Rule filter, you're able to automatically sort out detected spam mails.
+
Filter spam menggunakan metode statistik untuk mengklasifikasikan email sebagai spam yang tidak diinginkan. Ini memberikan nilai antara 0 dan 1 dan Anda dapat memutuskan berapa batas untuk email asli dan apa yang akan dianggap sebagai spam.
+Anda dapat memiliki peringkat spam yang ditambahkan ke awal subjek.
+Juga, filter spam dapat belajar dari semua email masuk. Tentu saja, Anda harus mengajarkannya dengan memilah positif palsu, email yang keliru ditandai sebagai spam. Anda akan menemukan lebih banyak tentang itu ketika kita membahas aplikasi Mail..
+
Bersama dengan aturan penyaringan berikut, Anda dapat memilah email spam yang terdeteksi secara otomatis.
-Rule filter
+Aturan penyaringan
-
This filter compares the mail header to a search pattern and performs some action according to the rules you set up.
- With the first text field you specify which header to check against. These are available:
+
Filter ini membandingkan header email dengan pola pencarian dan melakukan beberapa tindakan sesuai dengan aturan yang Anda buat. Dengan bidang teks pertama Anda menentukan header mana yang akan diperiksa. Tersedia:
-
Name
-
the name of the sender
-
From
-
the e-mail address of the sender
-
To
-
your e-mail address (different for each e-mail account)
-
Reply to
-
the e-mail address replies are sent to
-
When
-
the date and time the mail was received
-
Subject
-
the subject line
-
Cc
-
addresses of anyone receiving a carbon copy (Cc)
-
Account
-
the name of the e-mail's account
+
Nama
+
Nama pengirim
+
Dari
+
Dari alamat email pengirim
+
Ke
+
alamat email Anda (berbeda untuk setiap akun email)
+
Balas ke
+
alamat email balasan yang dikirim ke
+
Kapan
+
tanggal dan waktu surat diterima
+
Subjek
+
baris subyek
+
Alamat cc
+
dari siapa pun yang menerima salinan karbon (Cc)
+
Akun
+
nama akun email itu
Status
-
The current status of the e-mail. Normally, this can be "Read", "Replied", "Sent", "Forwarded", "New", or anything you have defined yourself. However, unless you change it yourself in a filter, it will always be "New" after the Mail Service fetched the mail.
-
Priority
-
is set by the sender's e-mail program (e.g. "urgent")
-
Thread
-
essentially the same as "Subject", but without things like Re: or Fwd:
-
Classification group
-
depending on what the spam filter classified it as, this will either be empty (if uncertain) or contain the word "Genuine" or "Spam"
-
Spam/Genuine estimate
-
this is a numerical estimate that the spam filter assigned to the e-mail. They are shown in scientific notation, where 1.065e-12 translates to 1.065 divided by 10 to the 12th power, which in this case translates to 0.000000000001065.
+
Status email saat ini. Biasanya, ini bisa "Baca", "Dibalas", "Terkirim", "Teruskan", "Baru", atau apa pun yang telah Anda tetapkan sendiri. Namun, kecuali jika Anda mengubahnya sendiri dalam filter, itu akan selalu "Baru" setelah Layanan Surat mengambil surat
+
Prioritas
+
ditetapkan oleh program email pengirim (mis. "Mendesak")
+
Utas
+
dasarnya sama dengan "Subjek", tetapi tanpa hal-hal seperti Re: atau Fwd:
+
Klasifikasi grup
+
tergantung pada apa yang diklasifikasikan sebagai filter spam, ini akan kosong (jika tidak pasti) atau mengandung kata "Asli" atau "Spam"
+
Perkiraan Spam / Asli
+
ini adalah perkiraan numerik yang ditugaskan oleh filter spam ke email. Mereka ditunjukkan dalam notasi ilmiah, di mana 1,065e-12 diterjemahkan menjadi 1,065 dibagi 10 menjadi exponen -12, yang dalam hal ini diterjemahkan menjadi 0,00000000000101065.
-
The second text field holds your search pattern. It accepts regular expressions which gives it great flexibility, while unfortunately complicating things a bit. Read up on it a bit, it's well worth it and simple search patterns aren't that complicated at all.
-
With the pop-up menu below it, you assign an action when the pattern matches. You can move or delete a mail, set the status to "Read" or anything else or set the e-mail account you'll reply with.
+
Bidang teks kedua memegang pola pencarian Anda. Ini menerima regular expressions yang memberikan fleksibilitas besar, sementara sayangnya hal-hal sedikit rumit. Bacalah sedikit, itu layak dan pola pencarian sederhana dan sama sekali tidak rumit.
+
Dengan menu pop-up di bawahnya, Anda menetapkan tindakan saat polanya cocok. Anda dapat memindahkan atau menghapus email, mengatur status menjadi "Baca" atau apa pun atau mengatur akun email yang akan Anda balas.
-New mails notification
+Notifikasi email baru
-
There are several ways you can choose to be notified of newly arrived email. Under Method you find a number of options that can be combined as well:
+
Ada beberapa cara yang dapat Anda pilih untuk diberi tahu tentang email yang baru tiba. Metode di bawah Anda menemukan sejumlah opsi yang dapat digabungkan juga:
-
none
-
No notification
+
tiada
+
Tidak ada pemberitahuan
Beep
-
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences for every new email
-
Alert
-
Shows an alert window for every new email
-
Keyboard LEDs
-
Blinks some LEDs like the caps-lock indicator
-
Central alert
-
Shows one alert window for all new mails
-
Central beep
-
Plays the sound file of the "New E-mail" event set in the Sounds preferences once for new mail
-
Log window
-
Shows the log window
+
Memutar file suara dari even "E-mail Baru" yang diatur dalam preferensi Suara untuk setiap email baru
+
Peringatan
+
Menampilkan jendela peringatan untuk setiap email baru
+
LED Keyboard
+
Berkedip beberapa LED seperti indikator caps-lock
+
Peringatan pusat
+
Menunjukkan satu jendela peringatan untuk semua email baru
+
Pusat bip
+
Memutar file suara dari acara "E-mail Baru" yang diatur dalam preferensi Suara satu kali untuk surat baru
+
Jendela log
+
Menunjukkan jendela log
-Outgoing Mail Filters
+Filter Surat Keluar
At this moment, there's only one filter that deals with outgoing mail: fortune.
- It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
+ It will attach a randomly chosen funny or wise "fortune cookie" to the end of every mail before it's sent out. You can do a dry run by issuing the command fortune in a Terminal.
+
+Saat ini, hanya ada satu filter yang berhubungan dengan surat keluar: fortune.
+Itu akan melampirkan "kue keberuntungan" lucu atau bijaksana yang dipilih secara acak untuk akhir setiap email sebelum dikirim. Anda dapat melakukan lari kering dengan mengeluarkan perintah fortune di Terminal.
Now that your incoming and outgoing mail servers (and maybe some filters, too), are configured, you have to tell the Mail Service that does all the actual checking and fetching how to do its job.
Sekarang setelah server surat masuk dan keluar Anda (dan mungkin beberapa filter juga) dikonfigurasikan, Anda harus memberi tahu Layanan Surat yang melakukan semua pemeriksaan aktual dan mengambil cara melakukan tugasnya.
-
Under Mail checking you configure the interval at which the account's mail server is probed for new mail.
-If you're on a dial-up connection, you may want to do that Only when dial-up is connected and also Schedule outgoing mail when dial-up is disconnected to avoid dialing automatically in regularly only to check for mail.
-
The Mail Service has a status window which you can set to show up Never, While sending, While sending and receiving or Always.
-
Make sure to Start mail services on startup or there will be no mail_daemon running to do your bidding...
+
Di bawah Pemeriksaan surat Anda mengonfigurasi interval saat server surat akun diperiksa untuk surat baru.
+Jika Anda menggunakan koneksi dial-up, Anda mungkin ingin melakukannya Hanya ketika dial-up terhubung dan juga Menjadwalkan surat keluar ketika dial-up terputus untuk menghindari panggilan secara otomatis masuk secara teratur hanya untuk memeriksa surat.
+
Layanan Mail memiliki jendela status yang dapat Anda atur untuk menampilkan Takpernah, Saat mengirim, Saat mengirim dan menerima atauSelalu.
+
Pastikan untuk Memulai layanan email saat startup atau tidak akan ada mail_daemon yang berjalan untuk melakukan penawaran Anda...
-
Edit mailbox menu... will open the folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. All folders or queries (!) or their links put into this folder will appear in the context menu of the mailbox icon of the Mail Services in the Deskbar tray.
-
From that menu, you can also Create new message..., Check for mail now or edit Preferences....
-
If you hold down SHIFT when invoking the context menu, you'll get additional commands:
+
Edit menu kotak surat... akan membuka folder /boot/home/config/Mail/Menu Links/. Semua folder atau kueri (!) Atau tautannya yang dimasukkan ke folder ini akan muncul di menu konteks ikon kotak surat dari Layanan Mail di baki Deskbar.
+
Dari menu itu, Anda juga dapat Membuat pesan baru..., Periksa surat sekarang atau edit Preferensi ....
+
Jika Anda menahan SHIFT saat menjalankan menu konteks, Anda akan mendapatkan perintah tambahan:
-
Check for mails only
-
Offers a submenu to check only one specific account
-
Send pending mails
-
Allows you to send pending mails without also checking for new mails
-
Shutdown mail services
-
Quits the whole email infrastructure (mail_daemon)
+
Hanya periksa surat
+
Menawarkan submenu untuk memeriksa hanya satu akun tertentu
+
Kirim surat tertunda
+
Memungkinkan Anda untuk mengirim surat tertunda tanpa juga memeriksa surat baru
+
Matikan layanan email
+
Keluar dari seluruh infrastruktur email (mail_daemon)
-
The mailbox icon itself shows if there are unread messages (status "New") when there are envelopes inside.
+
Ikon kotak surat itu sendiri menunjukkan jika ada pesan yang belum dibaca (status "Baru") ketika ada amplop di dalamnya.
Preferensi input menggabungkan panel yang sebelumnya terpisah untuk keyboard, mouse, dan touchpad, ditambah perangkat input lain yang dikenali oleh sistem. Perangkat terdaftar di sebelah kiri, sedangkan panel di sebelah kanan berubah sesuai dengan pengaturan yang tersedia untuk perangkat yang dipilih.
Pertama-tama Anda mengatur jenis mouse: mouse tombol 1, 2 atau 3. Anda dapat mensimulasikan tombol mouse ke-2 (= kanan) dengan menekan CTRL sambil mengklik kiri. Untuk tombol mouse ke-3 (= tengah), itu adalah CTRLALT dan klik kiri.
+
Anda dapat mengatur ulang tombol mouse dengan mengkliknya dan memilih artinya baru dari menu pop-up.
+
Dengan bilah geser ke kanan, Anda menyesuaikan kecepatan klik dua kali, kecepatan mouse, dan akselerasi. Area pengujian di bawah grafik mouse dapat digunakan untuk memeriksa apakah kecepatan klik dua kali sesuai dengan selera Anda: jika mengklik dua kali sebuah kata tidak pilih itu, sudah diatur terlalu cepat (atau Anda harus terbiasa mengklik lebih cepat ...).
+
Ada tiga mode Fokus yang menentukan bagaimana jendela bereaksi terhadap klik:
+
+
Klik untuk fokus dan naikkan
Ini adalah pengaturan default: Anda mengklik sebuah jendela dan mendapat fokus dan dinaikkan ke atas.
+
Klik untuk fokus
Mengklik jendela hanya memberikannya fokus, tetapi tidak akan menaikkannya secara otomatis. Untuk melakukan itu, Anda harus mengklik tab judul atau pembatas atau mengklik di mana saja sambil memegang kunci manajemen jendela tombol window manajemenCTRLALT.
+
Fokus mengikuti mouse
Jendela di bawah penunjuk tetikus secara otomatis mendapatkan fokus. Sebenarnya menaikkannya, dilakukan seperti dijelaskan dalam mode Klik untuk fokus.
+
+
Mengaktifkan Terima klik pertama melegakan Anda karena harus terlebih dahulu meletakkan fokus pada jendela tidak aktif untuk memicu widget seperti tombol atau menu. Ini berisiko berisiko secara tidak sengaja menutup jendela, misalnya, dengan secara tidak sengaja menekan tombol tutup saat membidik tab jendela, di sisi lain itu sangat mempercepat alur kerja Anda.
+
Semua pengaturan segera diterapkan.
+
+
Bawaan
mengatur ulang semuanya ke nilai bawaan.
+
Pulihkan
Pulihkan mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai
Dengan menyeret garis merah vertikal atau horizontal pada representasi panel sentuh, Anda mengatur area gulir (sedikit kemerahan terhadap area sentuh umum abu-abu) .Menggerakkan jari Anda pada bagian pad tersebut akan memindahkan bilah-bilah gulir dari sebuah jendela yang sesuai.
+
Di sebelah kanan adalah penggeser untuk mengatur akselerasi gulir umum dan kecepatan gulir vertikal dan horizontal.
+Pengaturan akselerasi menentukan seberapa cepat daftar akan bergulir jika Anda menekan cepat area gulir. Kecepatan gulir mengontrol kecepatan umum ketika menggunakan area gulir dengan cara "normal".
+
Di bawah grafik touchpad terdapat kotak centang untuk mengaktifkan "Pengguliran dua jari" untuk pengguliran vertikal dan horizontal. Gerakkan dua jari secara paralel atau horizontal untuk memindahkan bilah gulir di jendela. Setidaknya bagi saya, ini berfungsi dengan baik dengan satu jari dari kiri dan satu dari tangan kanan.
+Jika Anda merasa nyaman menggunakan fitur ini, Anda dapat membuang pengaturan area gulir dan sebagai gantinya menggunakan seluruh pad untuk navigasi normal.
+
Di bagian bawah adalah penggeser lain untuk mengatur sensitivitas klik ketuk. Jika ketukan Anda terus diabaikan, tingkatkan kepekaan. Jika sistem selalu mencatat klik, sementara yang Anda inginkan adalah menggerakkan penunjuk tetikus, coba kurangi.
+
+
Bawaan
mengatur ulang semuanya ke nilai bawaan.
+
Pulihkan
mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai preferensi Touchpad.
+
+
Berikut ini tip yang tidak terkait dengan preferensi Touchpad, tetapi cocok dengan topik umum:
+Tahukah Anda bahwa Anda dapat melakukan drag and drop hanya dengan menggunakan touchpad, yaitu tidak menggunakan tombol? Cukup lakukan klik dua kali tanpa mengangkat jari setelah klik kedua. Ikon yang diambil akan menempel pada penunjuk mouse dan Anda dapat menyeretnya dengan menggerakkan jari Anda. Mengangkat jari Anda akan menjatuhkan ikon.
+
Jika jari Anda mencapai batas panel sentuh sambil menyeret ikon, tetapi penunjuk tetikus belum mencapai tepi layar, bagaimana Anda bisa terus menyeret ikon Anda? Segera setelah Anda mengangkat jari Anda, ikon itu akan jatuh.
+Tergantung pada perangkat keras Anda, ada fitur bagus: biarkan saja jari Anda tanpa mengangkat di tepi touchpad. Penunjuk mouse akan terus bergerak dengan pilot otomatis.
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
-
Keymap
+
Pemetaan kunci (Keymap)
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/Keymap
-
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Location of user modified keymaps.
+
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Keymap/* - Lokasi keymaps yang dimodifikasi pengguna. ~/config/settings/Key_map
-
To the right, the Keymap window shows a representation of your keyboard. When you press a key, the corresponding key is darkened and the assigned symbol is entered into the Sample and Clipboard text field at the bottom. From there you can also copy and paste it into a document.
-Thus, the Keymap preferences are not only for configuring your local keymap, but are also useful when looking for a special symbol used in other languages. For example, you can switch the keymap to "French", find the "ç" and copy it into your mail to François. (Though you'll find the "cedil" also in other keymaps...)
-
Pressing modifier keys like SHIFT, CONTROL or OPTION changes the displayed keyboard accordingly.
-
Then there are the keys that are marked with a blue background. These keys are called Dead Keys that can change the key you press after that. If you click on such a blue key with your mouse, those changeable keys light up yellow. Click again and everything's back to normal. Examples are é, ñ, ó or ë.
-
Below the keyboard representation are two more options:
+
Di sebelah kanan, jendela Keymap menampilkan representasi papan ketik Anda. Saat Anda menekan tombol, tombol yang sesuai menjadi gelap dan simbol yang ditetapkan dimasukkan ke dalam bidang teks Contoh dan Papan Klip di bagian bawah. Dari sana Anda juga dapat menyalin dan menempel itu menjadi dokumen.
+Dengan demikian, preferensi Keymap tidak hanya untuk mengkonfigurasi keymap lokal Anda, tetapi juga berguna ketika mencari simbol khusus yang digunakan dalam bahasa lain. Misalnya, Anda dapat mengganti keymap ke "Prancis", cari "ç" dan salin ke surat Anda ke François. (Meskipun Anda akan menemukan "cedil" juga di tombol lain ...)
+
Menekan tombol pengubah seperti SHIFT, CONTROL atau OPTION akan mengubah keyboard yang ditampilkan.
+
Lalu ada tombol yang ditandai dengan latar belakang biru. Tombol-tombol ini disebut Tombol Mati yang dapat mengubah tombol yang Anda tekan setelah itu. Jika Anda mengklik tombol biru dengan mouse Anda, tombol yang dapat diubah menyala kuning. Klik lagi dan semuanya kembali normal. Contohnya adalah é, ñ, ó atau ë.
+
+
Di bawah representasi keyboard ada dua opsi lagi:
-
Select dead keys
for setting the above mentioned blue keys.
-
Switch shortcut key...
for using the shortcut key in Windows/Linux mode, i.e. CONTROL (normally CTRL) or Haiku mode, i.e. COMMAND (normally ALT).
+
Pilih tombol mati
mengatur tombol biru yang disebutkan di atas.
+
Mengalihkan kunci pemintas..
untuk menggunakan tombol pintas dalam mode Windows / Linux, mis. CONTROL (normalnyaCTRL) atau mode Haiku, mis COMMAND (normalnya ALT).
-
The lists on the left offer the available pre-configured keymaps of the system, and below that, if available, user-defined maps. You can change a keymap in the keyboard representation: drag & drop one key on another and they switch places.
-
You can also create an individual mapping by drag & dropping a character from another app onto the key. For example, you could extend your regular keymap with often used currency symbols. Just click on the CONTROL key and drag & drop the pound symbol from CharacterMap onto the 'P' key to get a ₤ when you press CTRLP.
+
Daftar di sebelah kiri menawarkan peta tombol yang tersedia yang sudah dikonfigurasikan sebelumnya dari sistem, dan di bawahnya, jika tersedia, peta yang ditentukan pengguna. Anda dapat mengubah keymap di representasi papan ketik: seret & lepas satu tombol pada yang lain dan mereka berpindah tempat.
+
Anda juga dapat membuat pemetaan individual dengan seret & lepas karakter dari aplikasi lain ke tombol. Misalnya, Anda dapat memperpanjang keymap reguler Anda dengan simbol mata uang yang sering digunakan. Cukup klik tombol CONTROLdan seret & lepas simbol pound dari CharacterMap ke tombol 'P' untuk mendapatkan ₤ saat Anda menekan CTRLP.
-By right-clicking a normal key, the context menu offers to Remove its mapping. Modifier keys can have alternative mappings, like using CAPS LOCK as CTRL key:
+Dengan mengeklik kanan tombol normal, menu konteks menawarkan Hapus pemetaannya. Kunci pengubah dapat memiliki pemetaan alternatif, seperti menggunakan CAPS LOCK sebagai kunci CTRL :
-
Alternatively to this or drag & dropping of keys, there's the menu File | Set modifier keys... that opens this window:
+
Sebagai alternatif dari ini atau seret & lepas tombol , Ada menu Berkas | Atur tombol pengubah... yang akan memulai jendela ini:
-
Here, you can assign keys to their respective roles or even completely disable the role of a key. You can even assign the same key to different roles, though that's not a good idea most of the time and you'll be warned by a small exclamation mark beside the pop-up menus if you do that.
-Pressing Set modifier keys applies your changes and closes the window.
-
When you're done you can save the result from the menu File | Save.... Your modified map will only appear in the user-defined list if it's stored in ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Otherwise you'll have to manually load it via File | Open....
-
To better match the Keymap panel to your physical keyboard, there are several different settings available from the Layout menu.
-
The font used in the keyboard representation is set from the Font menu. Note, that it may or may not contain all symbols for a specific keymap.
-
Finally, there's a Revert button to bring back the settings that were active when you started the Keymap preferences.
+
Di sini, Anda dapat menetapkan kunci untuk peran mereka masing-masing atau bahkan sepenuhnya menonaktifkan peran kunci. Anda bahkan dapat menetapkan kunci yang sama untuk peran yang berbeda, meskipun itu bukan ide yang baik sebagian besar waktu dan Anda akan diperingatkan oleh kecil tanda seru di sebelah menu pop-up jika Anda melakukannya.
+Menekan tombol Atur tombol pengubah menerapkan perubahan Anda dan menutup jendela.
+
Setelah selesai, Anda dapat menyimpan hasilnya dari menu Berkas | Simpan.... Pemetaan Anda yang dimodifikasi hanya akan muncul dalam daftar ditentukan-pengguna jika disimpan dalam ~/config/settings/Keymap/. Jika tidak, Anda akan memiliki untuk memuatnya secara manual melalui File | Open....
+
Untuk lebih mencocokkan panel Keymap dengan keyboard fisik Anda, ada beberapa pengaturan berbeda yang tersedia dari menu Layout.
+
Font yang digunakan dalam representasi keyboard diatur dari menu Font. Perhatikan, font tersebut mungkin atau mungkin tidak mengandung semua simbol untuk keymap tertentu.
+
Terakhir, ada tombol Kembalikan untuk mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai preferensi Keymap.
There's another method to customize your keymap besides the Keymap preference panel. It involves editing a text file containing loads of hex values, which may appear daunting on first sight, but isn't really that impossible to grasp.
-
You can dump the current keymap with a command in Terminal:
Ada metode lain untuk menyesuaikan keymap Anda selain panel preferensi Keymap.Ini melibatkan pengeditan file teks yang berisi banyak nilai hex, yang mungkin tampak menakutkan pada pandangan pertama, tetapi tidak benar-benar tidak mungkin untuk dipahami.
+
Anda dapat mengekspor keymap saat ini dengan perintah di Terminal:
keymap -d > MyKeymap
-
The generated text file can then be opened in a text editor. Make sure to use a fixed font in that editor or you'll never grok that file...
-At the beginning of that file, you'll find a legend of a stylized keyboard with the hex value corresponding to each key. Below that are the actual assignments of every value. You can do all the customizing that's also available from the Keymap preference panel, and then some. If you happen to have some special keys on your keyboard, you may be able to activate them. That is, use them as ordinary keys or like an option or control key. You won't be able to, for example, have your multimedia keys de/increase the volume or start some application. For this you can use the Shortcuts preferences.
-
When you're finished, you'll save the file and have your system load the modified keymap with this command:
+
File teks yang dihasilkan kemudian dapat dibuka di editor teks. Pastikan untuk menggunakan font tetap di editor itu atau Anda tidak akan pernah...
+Di awal file itu, Anda akan menemukan legenda keyboard bergaya dengan nilai hex yang sesuai dengan masing-masing tombol. Di bawah ini adalah tugas sebenarnya dari setiap nilai. Anda dapat melakukan semua penyesuaian yang juga tersedia dari panel preferensi Keymap , dan kemudian beberapa. Jika Anda memiliki beberapa tombol khusus pada keyboard Anda, Anda mungkin dapat mengaktifkannya. Yaitu, gunakan sebagai tombol biasa atau seperti opsi atau tombol kontrol. Anda tidak akan bisa, karena misalnya, minta kunci multimedia Anda kurang/tambah volume atau mulai beberapa aplikasi. Untuk ini, Anda dapat menggunakan preferensi Pintasan.
+
Setelah selesai, Anda akan menyimpan file dan sistem Anda memuat keymap yang dimodifikasi dengan perintah ini:
keymap -s < MyKeymap
-
If you'd like to import this keymap into the Keymap panel, you have to compile it first to a binary format:
+
Jika Anda ingin mengimpor keymap ini ke panel Keymap, Anda harus mengompilasinya terlebih dahulu ke format biner:
keymap -c < MyKeymap
-
This will produce a file keymap.out which you can load into Keymap via its Open... menu. By the way, the keymap command is able to load this binary format as well: keymap -l < keymap.out
-
This is the dumped file (the rightmost keys of the stylized keyboard are cut-off for a nicer display on this page):
+
Ini akan menghasilkan file keymap.out yang dapat Anda muat ke Keymap melalui menu Buka....... Omong-omong, perintah keymap dapat memuat format biner ini juga: keymap -l < keymap.out
+
Ini adalah file yang di-dump(ekspor) (tombol paling kanan dari papan ketik bergaya terpotong untuk tampilan yang lebih bagus pada halaman ini):
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Locale (Pelokalan)
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/Locale
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Locale settings
@@ -77,23 +76,24 @@
Bahasa
Haiku telah diterjemahkan ke banyak bahasa, sayangnya beberapa terjemahan belum lengkap. Karena alasan itu, Anda dapat memilih lebih dari satu bahasa sebagai “Bahasa pilihan”. Jika beberapa teks tidak ada dalam terjemahan, itu diganti dengan kata-kata dari bahasa pilihan berikutnya. Bahasa Inggris adalah fallback default (juga saat tidak terdaftar).
-
In this example, the preferred language is set to Spanish. The first fallback is Italian, and if the text is missing there too, it's back to default English.
-As you can see, expanding a language entry on the left side reveals sub-entries for specific variations or dialects of a language (if available).
+
Dalam contoh ini, bahasa yang disukai diatur ke Spanyol. Fallback pertama adalah bahasa Italia, dan jika teks juga hilang di sana, itu kembali ke bahasa Inggris default.
+Seperti yang Anda lihat, memperluas entri bahasa di sisi kiri mengungkapkan sub-entri untuk variasi atau dialek tertentu dari suatu bahasa (jika tersedia).
-Formatting
-
On the Formatting tab you can set up the formatting of date, time, number and currency formats independently from the settings of your preferred language.
+Pemformatan
+
Pada tab Format Anda dapat mengatur format tanggal, waktu, angka dan format mata uang secara mandiri dari pengaturan bahasa pilihan Anda.
-
You may be a Spanish fellow located in the Italian speaking part of Switzerland. So, you'd prefer your system in Spanish, but numbers and currency formatted like at work: Swiss/Italian.
-If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of the modified dates of files, for example), you can override this time-specific formatting with the checkbox at the top to Use month/day-names from preferred language.
-
Granted, the above example is maybe not the most common scenario, but it demonstrates the flexibility of the system.
+
Anda mungkin orang Spanyol yang berlokasi di bagian berbahasa Italia Swiss. Jadi, Anda lebih suka sistem Anda dalam bahasa Spanyol, tetapi angka dan mata uang diformat seperti di tempat kerja: Swiss / Italia.
+Jika Anda lebih nyaman dengan nama Spanyol selama berhari-hari dan berbulan-bulan (pikirkan tanggal file yang dimodifikasi, misalnya), Anda dapat mengganti pemformatan khusus waktu ini dengan kotak centang di bagian atas untuk Menggunakan nama bulan / hari dari bahasa yang disukai.
+
+
Memang, contoh di atas mungkin bukan skenario yang paling umum, tetapi ini menunjukkan fleksibilitas sistem.
-Options
-
The last tab provides an option that will Translate application and folder names in Deskbar and Tracker. Disable the checkbox if you prefer the graphical interface localized, while retaining the original English names for preference panels, applications and standard folder names.
+Opsi
+
Tab terakhir menyediakan opsi yang akan Tmenerjemahkan nama aplikasi dan folder di Deskbar dan Tracker. Nonaktifkan kotak centang jika Anda lebih suka antarmuka grafis dilokalkan, sambil mempertahankan nama bahasa Inggris asli untuk panel preferensi, aplikasi dan nama folder standar.
-
Changes are applied immediately, though currently running applications may require to be closed and restarted before showing the new setting.
+
Perubahan diterapkan segera, meskipun aplikasi yang sedang berjalan mungkin perlu ditutup dan dimulai ulang sebelum menunjukkan pengaturan baru.
-
Defaults
resets everything to default values.
-
Revert
brings back the settings that were active when you started the Locale preferences.
+
Bawaan
mengatur ulang semuanya ke nilai bawaan.
+
Pulihkan
Pulihkan mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai preferensi Lokal.
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ If you're more comfortable with your Spanish names for days and months (think of
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
+
The translation of this page isn't yet complete. Until it is, unfinished parts use the English original.
-
Network
+
Jaringan (Network)
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/Network
Pengaturan:
/boot/system/settings/network/
-
The Network preference is the one-stop panel to configure all available network devices and services. To the left is a collapsible list of your devices and services, the right has information or settings for the selected entry.
-At the bottom you find a checkbox to Show Network status in Deskbar. Revert brings back the settings that were active when you've started the panel.
+
Preferensi Jaringan adalah panel satu atap untuk mengonfigurasi semua perangkat dan layanan jaringan yang tersedia. Di sebelah kiri adalah daftar perangkat dan layanan Anda yang dapat dilipat, sebelah kanan memiliki informasi atau pengaturan untuk entri yang dipilih.
+Di bagian bawah Anda menemukan kotak centang untuk Tampilkan status Jaringan
+ di Deskbar. Pulihkan mengembalikan pengaturan yang aktif saat Anda memulai panel.
-
Devices
+
Perangkat
-
Here we see the wireless device, using the iprowifi4965 driver. From the pop-up menu you select the WLAN to connect to. After every WLAN name in the menu, you're shown a little icon representing the signal strength.
-Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every bootup. Select Choose automatically and it'll try to connect to the WLAN with the best signal around.
-
If you're connecting to a protected network, you'll be asked for the password and if to either allow that connection only once, or always, which will save the password so you won't be bothered to enter it in the future.
-
The buttons below let you Disable the device, or Renegotiate the connection.
+
Di sini kita melihat perangkat nirkabel, menggunakan driver iprowifi4965. Dari menu pop-up Anda memilih WLAN untuk terhubung. Setelah setiap nama WLAN di menu, Anda ditunjukkan ikon kecil yang mewakili kekuatan sinyal.
+Setelah WLAN dipilih, Haiku akan mencoba menyambungkannya secara otomatis pada setiap bootup. Pilih Pilih secara otomatis dan itu akan mencoba untuk terhubung ke WLAN dengan sinyal terbaik di sekitar.
+
Jika Anda terhubung ke jaringan yang dilindungi, Anda akan diminta kata sandi dan jika memperbolehkan koneksi itu hanya sekali, atau selalu, yang akan menyimpan kata sandi sehingga Anda tidak akan repot untuk memasukkannya di masa mendatang.
+
Tombol-tombol di bawah ini memungkinkan Anda Menonaktifkan perangkat, atau negosiasi ulang koneksi.
-
Beneath a device you find a list of the available protocols, IPv4 and IPv6:
+
Di bawah perangkat Anda menemukan daftar protokol yang tersedia, IPv4 dan IPv6:
-
From the pop-up menu you set the mode to assign the vital network parameters IP Address, Netmask and Gateway. You can choose DHCP to dynamically get the configuration from your network (router etc.), or specify them yourself by selecting Static and pressing Apply when finished.
+
Dari menu pop-up Anda mengatur mode untuk menetapkan parameter vital jaringan Alamat IP, Netmask dan Gateway. Anda dapat memilih DHCP untuk secara dinamis mendapatkan konfigurasi dari jaringan Anda (router dll.), Atau menentukannya sendiri dengan memilih Statis dan menekan Terapkan ketika selesai.
-
The settings for a tethered device are similar, without the WLAN connecting pop-up menu, obviously.
+
Pengaturan untuk perangkat yang ditambatkan serupa, tanpa WLAN menghubungkan menu pop-up, cukup jelas.
-
Services
-
DNS settings
+
Layanan
+
Pengaturan DNS
If you're using DHCP the IP address for a DNS server and the domain are provided by you network (router etc.). You can add and remove other DNS servers and adjust their priorities by moving them up and down in the list with the buttons to the right of it.
@@ -105,7 +108,7 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
127.0.0.1 localhost #loopback
192.168.178.3 NAS #Synology
192.168.178.102 XIOS #Mediaplayer
-
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember it's IP address, but can simply enter:
+
Besides the loopback to the localhost, I have the IP to my Synology storage under "NAS" and to my media player under "XIOS". To start an FTP session with my network storage, I don't have to remember its IP address, but can simply enter:
ftp NAS
@@ -113,9 +116,9 @@ Once a WLAN is selected, Haiku will try to connect to it automatically on every
Terjemahan halaman ini belum lengkap. Sampai saat itu, bagian yang belum selesai menggunakan aslinya bahasa Inggris.
Repositori
-
Deskbar:
Preferences
+
Deskbar:
Preferensi
Lokasi:
/boot/system/preferences/Repositories
Pengaturan:
~/config/settings/Repositories_settings
Repositori adalah kumpulan paket perangkat halus. Diatur secara default, ada repo Haiku dengan semua paket sistem operasi dan HaikuPorts, yang menyediakan sejumlah besar perangkat halus hasil port. Ada beberapa repositori tambahan, yang dibuat oleh anggota komunitas haiku. Silahkan cek di Situs perangkat halus di laman web.
Ini adalah panel preferensi untuk mengelola respositories Anda (Anda dapat membukanya juga dari HaikuDepot'sTools menu):
-
The first column in the list of known repositories shows if a repo is currently enabled. If it isn't, it will not be queried by HaikuDepot or pkgman from the command line. Use the buttons to Enable or Disable the selected repositories, or double-click a repo to toggle the status.
+
Kolom pertama dalam daftar repositori yang diketahui menunjukkan apakah repo saat ini diaktifkan. Jika tidak memiliki tanda centang, itu tidak akan diminta oleh HaikuDepot atau pkgman dari perintah baris. Gunakan tombol Enable or Disable pada repositori terpilih,atau klik-dobel sebuah repo untuk membalik status.
Bergantung pada ukuran repositori dan kecepatan koneksi internet, mengaktifkan repositori mungkin memakan waktu beberapa detik. Jika itu membutuhkan waktu lebih lama, Anda diberitahu tentang tugas yang tertunda di kotak teks kecil di atas tombol +/-. Jika terlalu lama, Anda akan diminta untuk membatalkan atau mencoba lagi.
Agar dapat menghapus repositori sepenuhnya dengan tombol "-" itu harus dinonaktifkan.
Anda menambahkan repositori baru dengan tombol "" yang akan membuka panel ini:
@@ -84,7 +83,7 @@ Anda menambahkan repositori baru dengan tombol "" y
Monitor d'Activitat
Haiku-specific commandline applications
DiskProbe
DriveSetup
-
@@ -103,14 +103,13 @@
Input
+
+
+
Keymap
Locale
Media
Xarxa
Repositories
Screen
Tracker
MemòriaVirtual
-
Icon-O-Matic
-
-
-
-
Magnify
-
Mail
-
-
@@ -141,7 +143,7 @@
Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct the word or to 
@@ -154,16 +156,16 @@ Right-clicking such a word opens a context menu offering suggestions to correct
MediaPlayer
-
-
-
-
LegacyPackageInstaller
-
-
People
-
-
PoorMan
Screenshot
ShowImage
-
-
-
-
-
SoftwareUpdater
-
StyledEdit
-
Terminal
TextSearch
-
Vision
WebPositive
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LaunchBox
-
NetworkStatus
PowerStatus
-
ProcessController
The primary task of the ProcessController applet is to show the activity of your CPU(s) and the amount of used memory. It allows monitoring of individual teams, change their priority, and kill them if the program freezes. In multiprocessor environments it allows you to disable individual processors/cores. When Tracker or Deskbar crash you can restart them from ProcessController's menu.
-
-
-
-
-
DataTranslations
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ScreenSaver
Sounds
-
Time
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BePDF
BootManager
-
-
-
-
-
CharacterMap
-
CodyCam
-
Debugger
-
-
DeskCalc
DiskUsage
-
-
HaikuDepot
-
-
Installer
-
MidiPlayer
-
Pe
SoundRecorder
TV
WonderBrush
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Appearance
-
-
-
Backgrounds (latar)
-
Deskbar
E-mail
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
FileTypes
Printers